Today's Hours: 8:00am - 6:00pm

Books

  • Digital
    by American Academy of Pediatrics
    Summary: Pediatric Telehealth Best Practices goes beyond AAP policy to offer straightforward strategies for establishing and sustaining a successful telehealth program. Its contents are curated from AAP published content, including guidance from the Section on Telehealth Care as well as journals and books

    Contents:
    Front Matter
    Section 1
    Section 2 Guidance for Parents and Caregivers
    Section 3 American Academy of Pediatrics Publications
    Antibiotic Prescribing During Pediatric Direct-to-Consumer Telemedicine Visits
    The Current Pediatric Telehealth Landscape
    Electronic Communication of the Health Record and Information With Pediatric Patients and Their Guardians
    Guiding Principles for Team-Based Pediatric Care
    How to provide good care using telehealth and reduce medical liability risks
    Pediatric mental health experts share tips to make the most of telehealth visits Pediatric Telehealth in the COVID-19 Pandemic Era and Beyond
    Rapid Implementation of Telehealth Services in a Pediatric Pulmonary Clinic During COVID-19
    Strategies for Evaluating Telehealth
    Technology improves pediatric patient engagement, outcomes
    Telehealth and Autism: Treating Challenging Behavior at Lower Cost
    Telehealth Home Monitoring and Postcardiac Surgery for Congenital Heart Disease
    Telehealth: Improving Access to and Quality of Pediatric Health Care
    Telehealth: Opportunities to Improve Access, Quality, and Cost in Pediatric Care Telemedicine for Evaluation of Retinopathy of Prematurity
    Section 4 Forms and Tools
    Section 5 Appendixes
    Index
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2022
  • Print
    Barton D. Schmitt.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RJ48 .S453 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Girolamo Mattioli, Paolo Petralia, Michele Torre, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses all thoracic diseases of surgical interest, from thorax malformations to airways disorders. It is divided into six main sections; the first two analyze general aspects, while the following three focus on malformations of the thorax, airways, esophagus and diaphragm. The final section describes the main pediatric tumors involving the chest and internal thoracic organs. Each chapter starts with a classification of the main pathologies related to the anatomical region considered. For each pathology, the various aspects of the diagnostic-therapeutic procedure are described in details - from the clinical presentation and diagnosis to the pre-operative preparation, the surgical aspects, and the post-operative course. Possible future developments are also evaluated. The volume will be a useful tool for specialists in pediatric and thoracic surgery, but will also represent an educational resource for medical and nursing students. .

    Contents:
    Part 1. Introductory aspects
    Chapter 1. Thoracic surgery in pediatric patients
    Chapter 2. Managment aspects: ethics and economic sustainability
    Part 2. General aspects
    Chapter 3. Prenatal diagnosis and fetal surgery
    Chapter 4. Imaging of thorax
    Chapter 5. Anesthesia in thoracic surgery
    Chapter 6. Extracorporeal membrane oxygenation
    Chapter 7. Pulmonary function tests
    Part 3. Chest wall
    Chapter 8. Pectus Excavatum
    Chapter 9. Pectus Carinatum
    Chapter 10. Poland Syndrome
    Chapter 11. Jeune Syndrome
    Part 4. Airways
    Chapter 12. Pathologies of the larynx
    Chapter 13. Anomalies of the trachea
    Chapter 14. Tracheostomy
    Chapter 15. Mediastinal cysts: managment and surgical treatment
    Chapter 16. Congenital Lung Malformations
    Part 5. Oesphagus and diaphragm
    Chapter 17. Oesophageal Atresia and Oesophageal Duplications
    Chapter 18. Diaphragmatic Hernia
    Chapter 19. Diaphragmatic Eventrations
    Chapter 20. Sternal clefts and Cantrell syndrome
    Part 6. Oncology
    Chapter 21. Main Thoracic Tumors in Pediatric Age and Surgical Approaches. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [editors] William J. Steinbach, Michael D. Green, Marian G. Michaels, Lara A. Danziger-Isakov, Brian T. Fisher.
    Summary: As the number and types of pediatric transplants increase and the complexity of chemotherapy regimens continues to evolve, there is a greater need for authoritative guidance, clinically actionable strategies, and easy-to-find information in the challenging area of immunocompromised pediatric patients. Pediatric Transplant and Oncology Infectious Diseases offers up-to-date, targeted coverage of this complex field, compiled by world-renowned editors and authors into one convenient volume. Covers the must-know principles for diagnosing and managing opportunistic infections in immunocompromised populations and detailed aspects of their care - information not specifically covered in pediatric infectious disease textbooks or pediatric oncology books. Features algorithms in every chapter that provide visual, accessible overviews of treatment protocols. Discusses key topics such as microbiome implications in transplantation and oncology, antimicrobial resistant Gram-negative bacteria, EBV-associated post-transplant lymphoproliferative disorders, and many others. Offers well-referenced, evidence-based content throughout, with targeted suggested readings provided. Enhanced eBook version included with purchase. Your enhanced eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references from the book on a variety of devices.

    Contents:
    The surgical and immunosuppressive basis for infections in the pediatric solid organ transplant recipient
    Immunology recovery and basis for infections in the pediatric hematopoietic stem cell transplant recipient
    Cancer and antineoplastic therapies and the risk of infection in the pediatric cancer patient
    Infectious disease evaluation of infants and children awaiting solid organ or hematopoietic stem cell transplant
    Donor screening and donor-derived infections
    Prevention of infections in the hematopoietic stem cell transplant recipient
    Prevention of infections in the solid organ transplantation recipient
    Management principles for patients with neutropenia
    Vaccination issues for transplantation and chemotherapy
    Microbiome implications in transplantation and oncology
    Antimicrobial stewardship in immunocompromised hosts
    Hospital infection prevention for pediatric transplant recipients and oncology patients
    Safe living after transplantation or chemotherapy
    Multidrug-resistant gram-negative infections in transplant and oncology patients
    Bartonella, legionalla, mycoplasma, and ureaplasma
    Nontuberculous and tuberculous mycobacterium
    Cytomegalovirus
    Epstein-Barr virus and posttransplant lymphoproliferative disorder
    Herpes simplex and varicella-zoster viruses
    Human herpevirus 6, 7, and 8
    Respiratory viruses
    Adenoviruses
    BK and other polyomavirus associated diseases in children
    Aspergillosis
    Mucormycosis, fusariosis, scedosporiases, and other invasive mold diseases
    Candidiasis
    Cryptococcosis and other rare invasive yeast infections
    Histoplasmosis, blastomycosis, and coccidiodomycosis
    Toxoplasma gondii
    Nocardia and actinomyces
    Pneumocystis pneumonia
    Strongyloides, cryptosporidium, and other parasitic infections
    Gastrointestinal viruses
    Clostrdioides difficile infection.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    Alfred P. Kennedy Jr., Romeo C. Ignacio, Robert Ricca, editors.
    Summary: This book meets the need for a detailed resource that focuses on the unique challenges encountered in pediatric trauma and its clinical management. Short practically oriented chapters describe how to successfully treat a range of injuries across a variety of anatomical areas. Emphasis is placed on accounting for the injury mechanism providing recommendations on rapid assessment, initial stabilization and management strategies. Pediatric Trauma Care - A Practical Guide, comprehensively covers how to approach treating pediatric trauma patients suffering with a variety of injuries. Therefore, it is an ideal resource for all medical professionals who encounter these patients in their day-to-day practice.

    Contents:
    1 Introduction - (Unique Factors to Pediatric Trauma).-2 Injury Prevention
    3 Trauma Systems and Pedaitric Trauma Centers
    4 Rural Pediatric Trauma Surgery
    5 Disaster Management
    6 Pediatric Trauma in Humanitarian and Deployed Settings
    7 Initial Trauma Resuscitation
    8 Airway Management
    9 Management of Shock
    10 Blood Tranfusions in Trauma
    11 VTE Prophylaxis and Treatment
    12 Surgical Nutrition
    13 Thromboelastogram
    14 Traumatic Brain Injury
    15 Facial Injury
    16 Neck Injuries
    17 Spinal Injury
    18 Thoracic Injury (Lung and Chest Wall)
    19 Penetrating Abdominal Injury
    20 Liver Injury
    21 Pancreas, Gallbladder and Duodenum
    22 Splenic Injury
    23 Gastric Injury
    24 Small Bowel/Colon Injury
    25 Rectal Injury
    26 Perineal (saddle) injury
    27 Upper Tract Genitourinary Trauma
    28 Lower Tract Genitourinary Trauma
    29 Pelvic injury
    30 Extremity Orthopedic Injury
    31 Injuries to the Hand
    32 Vascular Injuries to the Heart and Great Thoracic Vessels
    33 Vascular injuries of the Abdominal Vessels
    34 Vascular Injuries of the Extremity
    35 Envenomation, bites and stings
    36 Child Abuse
    37 Hypothermia and Near-drowning
    38 Burns
    39 New Technologies in Pediatric Trauma.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Christine M. Houser.
    Summary: With hundreds of question and answer items and bite-sized chunks of information that can be read and processed easily, reviewing for the pediatric board exams - or just brushing up in your spare time - has never been easier. Pediatric Tricky Topics, Volume 1: A Practically Painless Review includes review items in pediatric orthopedics, trauma, environmental medicine, toxicology, rheumatology, and neurology topics, among others. The Q&A format allows for self-testing or study with a partner or a group and is practical and accessible enough to dip into during a few minutes of downtime at the hospital or office, and as such it is suitable for those studying for the pediatric board exam, practicing physicians brushing up their skills, and any busy clinician who wants to learn more about these topics while on the go.

    Contents:
    General Orthopedic Question and Answer Items
    General Trauma Question and Answer Items
    General Environmental Medicine Question and Answer Items
    General Toxicology Question and Answer Items
    General Prevention Question and Answer Items
    General Research and Statistics Question and Answer Items
    General Rheumatology Question and Answer Items
    Selected Neurology Topics
    General Neurology Question and Answer Items.-.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Springer
  • Digital
    Harriet J. Paltiel, Edward Y. Lee, editors.
    Summary: This book is a unique, authoritative and clinically oriented text on pediatric ultrasound. It is your one-step, comprehensive reference for up-to-date information on pediatric ultrasound, addressing all aspect of congenital and acquired disorders encountered in clinical practice. The easy-to-navigate text is divided into 20 chapters. Each chapter is organized to cover the latest ultrasound techniques, normal development and anatomy, anatomic variants, key clinical presentations, characteristic ultrasound imaging findings, differential diagnosis and pitfalls where relevant. With more than 2000 images, examples of new technological developments such as contrast-enhanced ultrasound and elastography are included. Written by internationally known pediatric radiology experts and editorial team lead by acclaimed authors, Harriet J. Paltiel, MDCM and Edward Y. Lee, MD, MPH, this book is a practical and ideal guide for practicing radiologists, radiology trainees, ultrasound technologists as well as clinicians in other specialties who are interested in pediatric ultrasound.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    About the Contributors and Editors
    Contributors
    About the Editors
    1: Ultrasound Imaging Techniques and Artifacts
    Introduction
    Acoustics
    Wavelength and Frequency
    Sound Propagation
    Acoustic Impedance
    Reflection
    Refraction
    Attenuation
    Distance Measurement
    Instrumentation
    Transmitter
    Transducer
    Receiver
    Image Display
    Image Storage
    Mechanical Transducer
    Array Transducer
    Transducer Selection
    Harmonic Imaging
    Spatial Compounding
    Three-Dimensional Ultrasound
    Doppler Ultrasound Continuous Wave Doppler
    Pulsed Wave Doppler
    Color Doppler
    Power Doppler
    B-Flow
    Elastography Imaging
    Quasi-Static Strain Elastography
    Dynamic Elastography
    Ultrasound Contrast Imaging
    Contrast Agents
    Pulse Inversion Imaging
    Ultrasound Artifacts
    Grayscale Artifacts
    Mirror Image: Multipath Reflection
    Refraction
    Reverberation, Comet-Tail, and Ring-Down Artifacts
    Side Lobe Artifact
    Enhancement and Shadowing Attenuation Artifacts
    Partial Volume Artifact
    Doppler Artifacts
    Technically Related Doppler Artifacts
    Inappropriate Doppler Settings Aliasing (Wraparound)
    Color Doppler Noise
    Flow Directional Abnormalities
    Anatomically Related Doppler Artifacts
    Spectral Mirror Image Artifact
    Tissue Vibration Artifact
    Twinkling Artifact
    Blooming Artifact
    Three-Dimensional Ultrasound Artifacts
    Ultrasound Contrast Agent Artifacts
    Blooming Artifact
    Systolic Peak Velocity Increase
    High-Intensity Transient Signals
    Ultrasound Safety
    Thermal Bioeffects
    Nonthermal Bioeffects
    Regulations and Policies
    References
    2: Brain
    Introduction
    Technique
    Patient Positioning Ultrasound Transducer Selection
    Imaging Approaches
    Normal Development and Anatomy
    Normal Development
    Normal Anatomy
    Cerebral Cortex
    Basal Ganglia and Thalami
    Ventricles
    Cisterna Magna
    Extra-Axial Fluid Spaces
    Congenital Brain Anomalies
    Dorsal Induction Disorders
    Chiari Malformations
    Anencephaly
    Hydranencephaly
    Ventral Induction Disorders
    Holoprosencephaly
    Septo-Optic (Pituitary) Dysplasia
    Anomalies of the Corpus Callosum
    Dandy-Walker Syndrome
    Neuronal Proliferation Disorders
    Hemimegalencephaly
    Neuronal Migration Disorders Lissencephaly
    Gray Matter Heterotopia
    Post-Migration Disorders
    Polymicrogyria
    Schizencephaly
    Intracranial Hemorrhage
    Preterm Infants
    Periventricular Hemorrhagic Infarction
    Cerebellar Hemorrhage
    Term Infants
    Epidural Hemorrhage
    Subdural Hemorrhage
    Subpial Hemorrhage
    Parenchymal Hemorrhage
    Choroid Plexus Hemorrhage
    Hypoxic-Ischemic Injury
    Global Hypoxic-Ischemic Injury
    Preterm Infants
    Term Infants
    Focal Hypoxic-Ischemic Injury
    Arterial Ischemic Stroke
    Venous Sinus Thrombosis
    Sickle Cell Disease
    Infectious Brain Disorders
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Michael Riccabona ; with contributions by Brian Coley, Andreas Gamillscheg, Bernd Heinzl, Gerolf Schweintzger.
    Summary: Ultrasound plays an important role in the diagnostic imaging of infants and children and has indeed become the workhorse for many conditions. This is attributable both to the avoidance of ionizing radiation and to the unique features displayed on ultrasound in children in almost all body areas. In the future the potential of ultrasound can be expected to increase further owing to new developments such as ultrasound contrast material, three- or four-dimensional ultrasound, and ultrasound elastography. This book systematically covers the use of ultrasound in all organ systems and throughout childhood. After discussion of the basics, including physics, artifacts, and procedural details, decision making regarding the use of ultrasound is elucidated by listing next imaging steps based on recommended imaging algorithms. The indications and prerequisites for a particular examination are documented, and practical tips and tricks are highlighted. The normal, age-dependent ultrasound findings and typical appearances in different pathologies are presented in detail and illustrated by numerous high-quality images. Particular emphasis is placed on those findings that differ from the adult sonographic appearances. In addition to the classic pediatric abdominal applications, detailed consideration is given to neurosonography, echocardiography, chest ultrasound, musculoskeletal and hip ultrasound, Doppler sonography, and interventional ultrasound. The potential role of the most modern techniques in various situations is explained. Pediatric Ultrasound will prove an invaluable source of information and an indispensable aid to decision making and diagnosis for radiology residents, experienced (pediatric) radiologists, sonographers, pediatricians, pediatric surgeons and urologists, and all other physicians who deal with children as a part of their daily practice.

    Contents:
    Basics: Physics of diagnostic ultrasound (US). US techniques. Artifacts. Biological effects of US. Practical US approach. Documentation and reporting. Future US methods. Basics of (Color) Doppler sonography
    Diagnostic flow charts, imaging algorithms, and graphs: Urinary tract diseases. Tumors and oncology. Abdomen. Systemic diseases. Graphs and illustrations for standardized measurements and volume calculations
    US investigations of various organs and systems: Pediatric cranial neurosonography. US of the neonatal spinal cord. Neck and facial/cervical glands. Chest US. Basics of pediatric and neonatal echocardiography. Abdominal US. Musculoskeletal and other small part US. US-guided interventions.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Michael Riccabona, editor.
    Summary: This book, now in a revised and updated second edition, systematically covers the use of ultrasound in all organ systems throughout childhood. After discussing the basics, including physics, ultrasound methods, and artifacts, it elucidates decision-making regarding the use of ultrasound by discussing diagnostic flow charts based on recommended imaging algorithms. The main part of the book addresses ultrasound investigations of the various organs. It documents the indications and prerequisites for specific examinations and offers practical tips and tricks. The normal, age-dependent ultrasound findings and typical appearances in different pathologies are presented in detail and illustrated by numerous high-quality images, with a particular emphasis on those findings that differ from the adult sonographic appearances. And finally, dedicated chapters explore point-of-care and emergency ultrasound, interventional ultrasound, and present orienting tables. This state-of-the-art book covers modern techniques and applications, like contrast-enhanced ultrasound, ultrasound elastography, and automated-image optimization, as well as all pediatric ultrasound applications from point-of-care ultrasound and orienting assessment also at the intensive care unit/emergency room to more detailed and advanced applications, e.g., in dedicated tertiary referral centers. Pediatric Ultrasound is an invaluable source of information and an indispensable aid to decision-making and diagnosis for radiology residents, (pediatric) radiologists, sonographers, pediatricians, (pediatric) surgeons, urologists, and all other physicians who deal with children as a part of their daily practice.

    Contents:
    PART I Basics / Theory / Methods: US Physics
    US Methods, artifacts, biologic effects and practice
    (Color) Doppler US: theory and artifacts, typical applications in childhood
    Contrast-enhanced US, and Ultrasound elastography in childhood
    Paediatric limited field of view US/point of care US (POCUS) and emergency US - when, how and for what
    Part II Diagnostic flow charts, imaging algorithms, and graphs: Imaging and imaging algorithms for common queries in childhood
    Measurements and volume calculations: basic considerations, graphs and illustrations for standardisation
    PART III US investigations of the various organs: Neurosonography in Neonates, Infants and Children
    US of the neonatal spinal canal and cord
    US of the neck in childhood
    Basics of pediatric echocardiography
    Ultrasound of the Chest
    Upper abdominal US in neonates, infants and children
    including novel applications
    US of the paediatric gastrointestinal tract
    Ultrasound of the urogenital tract in neonates, infants and children
    Neonatal and pediatric hip US
    Musculo-skeletal- & other small part US in childhood
    US of peripheral nerves in childhood
    PART IV Miscellaneous: US-guided interventions and invasive US procedures, and respective follow-up in childhood
    Normal values as relevant for paediatric US.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Melvin A. Shiffman, editor.
    Summary: The book starts with a short introduction to the topic, followed by a detailed description of the anatomical differences between exstrophy and gastroschisis. In the following chapters, the authors describe the surgical umbilicoplasty for congenital defects in children. Outcomes and complications will be discussed in the last chapter. Written by respected authors, this book will offer residents and fellows as well as practicing and highly experienced plastic surgeons essential guidance on treatment and decision-making concerning umbilical reconstruction. Its numerous illustrations and clearly structured content make the book a must-read.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Anatomical Differences
    History
    Pediatric Umbilicoplasty
    Exstrophy
    Gastroschisis
    Urachal Pathology
    Complications and Outcomes.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Joshua M. Abzug, Scott H. Kozin, Dan A. Zlotolow, editors.
    Summary: Sub-specialization within pediatric orthopedics is growing, in part due to the development of free-standing children's hospitals and the desire by patients and their parents to have "experts" care for them. We are at the forefront of a trend in physicians classifying themselves as pediatric upper extremity surgeons. Numerous pediatric hospitals now have or are recruiting physicians to focus their practice in this area. Historically, these issues were treated by general orthopedic surgeons, adult hand surgeons, pediatric orthopedic surgeons, or plastic surgeons. However, none of these professionals treat the entirety of pediatric upper extremity pathology, and no single reference has focused on the treatment of the pediatric upper extremity as a whole. For example, fractures have typically been written about in pediatric textbooks, while tendon and nerve injuries are covered in adult hand textbooks. This textbook is a comprehensive, illustrated reference that discusses all aspects of the pediatric upper extremity, from embryology and functional development to nerve injuries, trauma, tumors, burns, sports injuries and more.

    Contents:
    I: DEVELOPMENT
    Embryology
    Functional development
    II: PHYSICAL EXAMINATION
    Physical examination
    Outcome measures
    III: IMAGING
    IV: ANESTHESIA
    V: OCCUPATIONAL THERAPY
    Splinting and casting
    Occupational therapy evaluation and treatment
    VI: CONGENITAL DIFFERENCES
    Introduction to congenital differences and genetics
    Failure of formation
    Failure of differentiation
    Duplication
    Overgrowth
    Undergrowth
    Constriction band syndromes
    Metabolic and endocrine abnormalities
    Genetic syndromes
    Skeletal dysplasias
    VII: NERVE
    Nerve anatomy and diagnostic evaluation
    Ulnar nerve injury
    Median nerve injury
    Radial nerve injury
    VIII: BRACHIAL PLEXUS PALSY
    Obstetrical brachial plexus palsy
    Microsurgery for obstetrical brachial plexus birth palsy
    Glenohumeral joint secondary procedures
    Elbow flexion secondary procedures
    Traumatic brachial plexus injuries
    IX: TETRAPLEGIA
    Introduction to tetraplegia
    Treatment
    X: NEUROMUSCULAR: Cerebral palsy
    Arthrogryposis
    XI: TRAUMA
    Multiply injured child
    Non-accidental trauma
    Nail bed injuries
    Flexor tendon injuries
    Extensor tendon injuries
    Amputations/replantation
    Phalangeal fractures
    Metacarpal fractures
    Hand dislocations
    Carpal fractures
    Distal radius fractures
    Forearm fractures
    Monteggia fracture dislocations
    Galeazzi and Essex Lopresti injuries
    Pediatric elbow and supracondylar fractures
    Distal articular humerus fractures
    Medial epicondyle fractures, elbow dislocations, and transphyseal separations
    Radial head, neck and olecranon fractures
    Proximal humerus and humeral shaft fractures
    Clavicle fractures, AC dislocations, SC dislocations and scapula fractures
    XII: INFECTIONS
    Hand infections
    Cellulitis and necrotizing fasciitis
    Osteomyelitis and septic arthritis
    XIII: TUMORS
    Benign soft tissue lesions
    Benign bony lesions
    Malignant lesions
    XIV: COMPARTMENT SYNDROME
    XV: SKIN LESIONS
    Congenital lesions
    Acquired lesions
    XVI: BURNS
    XVII: VASCULAR DISORDERS
    XVIII: RHEUMATOLOGIC DISORDERS
    XIX: FACTITIOUS DISORDERS
    XX: SPORTS INJURIES
    Caring for the athlete
    The throwing athlete
    The gymnast
    XXI: ARTHROSCOPY
    Wrist
    Elbow
    Shoulder
    XXII: OTHER TOPICS
    Trigger digits
    Kienbock's disease
    Madelung's deformity
    Torticollis and Sprengel's deformity
    Multi-ligamentous laxity
    Thoracic outlet syndrome
    Prostheses.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Mario Lima, Gianantonio Manzoni, editors ; foreword by Göran Läckgren.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Saul P. Greenfield, Christopher S. Cooper.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital
    Ronald Rabinowitz, William C. Hulbert, Robert A. Mevorach, editors.
    Summary: While there are Pediatric Urology texts for pediatric urologists and for general urologists, there are none for primary care physicians. This book is written specifically for the primary care physician, the initial contact for the many children with urologic conditions. The text will assist the primary care physician in the recognition of and participation in the care of children with these common problems including both congenital and acquired conditions. Specific chapters are also dedicated to the management of cases that may include medical and/or surgical intervention. The contributing authors of this text were selected for their internationally recognized expertise and straight forward educational styles in the field of Pediatric Urology. Pediatric Urology for the Primary Care Physician will significantly help our primary care colleagues in the evaluation and management of children with genito-urinary problems.

    Contents:
    Fetal Hydronephrosis
    Multicystic Dysplastic Kindney
    Renal Agenesis and Associated Anomalies
    Renal Duplication Anomalies
    Ureteropelvic Junction Obstruction in the Pediatric Population
    Pediatric Renal Trauma
    Renal Stones
    Rediatric Renal Tumors
    Ureteroceles
    Megaureter
    Ectopic Ureter
    Cystitis
    Vesicoureteral Reflux
    Posterior Urethral Valves
    Bladder Exstrophy for the Primary Care Provider
    Daytime Wetting
    Tumors of the Lower Genitourinary Tract in Children and Adolescents
    Pediatric Hernias and Hydroceles
    Retractile Testes
    Undescended Tests
    Testicular Torsion
    Testis Tumor
    Adolescent Varicocele
    Phimosis
    Paraphimosis
    Meatal Stenosis
    Balanitis
    Urethrorrhagia
    Urethral Stricture
    Hypospadias
    Chordee
    Epispadias
    Female External Genitalia for Primary Care Providers
    Ambiguous Genitalia
    Myelodysplasia: From Birth to Adulthood
    Continent Urinary Diversion
    Managing Pediatric Lower Urinary Tract Dysfunction and Associated Constipation in the Primary Care Setting
    Pyelonephritis
    Nephrologic Aspects of Urologic Disease
    Pediatric Primary Nocturnal Enuresis (Bedwetting).
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Summary: "This handy visual aid guides clinicians in discussions with patients and parents about the importance of vaccines, the diseases they help prevent and the various vaccines recommended. The chart includes infographics and clinical images to help illustrate why vaccines remain important in preventing diseases. Vaccines covered include influenza, varicella (chickenpox), human papillomavirus, polio, meningitis, and much more. The chart also includes information for health care professionals about the origin and nature of the diseases and current recommendations for vaccine schedules. In addition, it provides steps to take when a child or community is exposed to a potential infection, including prophylaxis and reporting to local health departments"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    DTaP, Tdap, Td
    Haemophilus influenzae type B (HIB)
    Hepatitis A and B
    Human papillomavirus (HPV)
    Influenza (“flu”)
    Measles-mumps-rubella (MMR)
    Meningococcal infections
    Pneumococcal infections
    Polio
    Rotavirus
    Varicella (chickenpox).
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2021
  • Digital
    Abhishek Agrawal, Gavin Britz, editors.
    Summary: This book is a detailed resource on the technical aspects of pediatric neurosurgery that relate to vascular malformations of the brain and spinal cord. It introduces concepts relevant to cerebrovascular system development and the classification of vascular malformations. Information on a range of disorders is then provided with an emphasis placed on answering frequently asked questions in relation to a particular condition. Therefore, enabling the reader to systematically improve their understanding of how approach treating patients utilizing techniques such as ultrasound and spinal angiography. The chapters, authored by experts in their respective field, provide a standard of care based on current diagnostic and management guidelines for pediatric neurosurgical diseases. Pediatric Vascular Neurosurgery: Technical Nuances in Contemporary Pediatric Neurosurgery (Part 2) is a comprehensive overview of how to approach diagnosing and treating a range of vascular malformations encountered in pediatric patients. The problem-solving approach of this work makes it a valuable addition to the literature and suitable for use by residents, fellows and consultants within pediatrics and allied specialities, including Neurosurgery, Neurology, Neuro-anesthesia, Neuro-critical care and advanced health care providers amongst others.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editors, Leonard G. Feld, John D. Mahan.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital
    Christina A. Di Bartolo, Maureen K. Braun.
    Summary: With the proliferation of research studies posted online, media outlets scrambling to pick up stories, and individuals posting unverified information via social media, the landscape for parents trying to understand the latest science as it pertains to their children has never been more challenging to navigate. This book is intended to assist pediatricians when discussing research findings with parents. It provides an overview of research practices and terminology, clarifies misconceptions about studies and findings, and explains the limitations of research when applied to medical decision making. Through this framework, physicians can explain their reasoning behind specific clinical recommendations. In addition to examining the broad concepts comprising research literacy, this book reviews the current findings in topics that pediatricians report discussing most often with parents, such as vaccines, diet, medications, and sleep. Pediatrician's Guide to Discussing Research with Patients is a unique resource for pediatricians in encouraging the development of research literacy in their patients.

    Contents:
    1 Introduction
    2 Funding and Bias
    3 Study Design and Related Considerations
    4 Significance: Statistical versus Clinical
    5 Incorporating Research into Health Care Decisions
    6 Vaccines
    7 Diet
    8 Food Allergies
    9 Discipline Techniques
    10 Medications
    11 Sleep
    12 Screen Time
    13 School Refusal
    14 Infectious Diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Parisa M. Garrett, Kahyun Yoon-Flannery, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive review of what comes after the completion of a pediatrics residency. Chapters review several areas of fellowships and how to navigate through the application process, provide a guide for finding a job and negotiating through your first position, and also discuss other difficult topics such as how to deal with malpractice lawsuits. The book is comprised of six parts. Part 1 explains pediatric fellowships, including how to apply, prepare, and choose your ideal fellowship. Part 2 describes what to expect on your first job search and what to consider when choosing a career path. Part 3 and Part 4 aim to prepare readers for what happens after finding and starting a job in pediatrics, such as moving, setting up an office, supervising residents, and how to deal with difficult patients. Part 5 discusses long term goals and planning, which helps prepare readers for the long road ahead. This includes pursuing partnerships, additional degrees, and training. It also shares knowledge on how to manage medical school debt, retirement planning, switching jobs, and much more. Finally, Part 6 aims to help readers maintain their personal health and family life by setting boundaries, managing stress, and discussing ways to avoid burnout. Written by experts in the field, A Pediatrician's Path: What to Expect After a Pediatrics Residency is a valuable resource for pediatricians, residents and medical students interested in a career in pediatrics.

    Contents:
    Applying for Fellowship
    Adolescent Medicine
    Pediatric Critical Care
    Pediatric Emergency Medicine
    Pediatric Endocrinology
    Pediatric Gastroenterology
    Pediatric Infectious Diseases
    Neonatal-Perinatal Medicine
    Pediatric Palliative Care
    Post Pediatric Portal Program Fellowship
    Completion of Multiple Fellowships: finding a Job
    Your First Job: Where to Look
    Applications and Interviews
    Contract Considerations: Preparation
    Contract Considerations: Understanding the Contract
    Choosing a Career in Academic Medicine
    Choosing a Career as a Pediatric Hospitalist
    Choosing a Career in Private Practice
    Choosing a Career in Public Health
    Choosing a Career in Pediatric Urgent Care
    Choosing a Career in Direct Primary Care
    Non-clinical Roles
    Moving
    Licenses, Credentials, and Privileges
    Setting Up Your Office
    Risk Management and Patient Safety
    Mentorship
    Patient Experience
    Preparing for Your First Day
    Daily Considerations
    Electronic Health Records
    Asking for Help
    Impostor Syndrome
    Supervising Residents
    Balancing Resident Autonomy and Patient Safety
    Working with Advanced Practice Providers
    Research
    Staff Considerations
    Billing and Insurances
    Pediatric Boards, Continuing Medical Education, and Maintenance of Certification
    How to Deal with a Difficult Patient
    Keeping up to Date is more than UpToDate
    Pursuing Partnership in a Private Practice
    Pursuing Additional Degrees and Training
    Your 5 and 10 Year Plan
    Disability Insurance 101
    Life Insurance 101
    Managing Your Medical School Debt
    Retirement Planning
    Switching Jobs
    Your Side Hustle
    Your Online Presence
    Personal Health and Family Life
    Setting Boundaries
    Stress Management
    Developing Interests Outside of Medicine and Avoiding Burnout.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] David L. Skaggs, MD, MMM, Chief of Orthopedic Surgery, Children's Hospital Los Angeles, Endowed Chair of Pediatric Spinal Disorders, Professor of Orthopaedic Surgery, University of Southern California, Los Angeles, California, Mininder S. Kocher, MD, MPH, Professor of Orthopaedic Surgery, Harvard Medical School, Associate Director, Division of Sports Medicine, Boston Children's Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Lloyd J. Brown, Ryan J. Coller, Lee Todd Miller.
    Summary: "BRS Pediatrics is a comprehensive review of general and subspecialty pediatrics aimed for medical students on their core clerkship in pediatrics. Written in the popular Board Review Series outline format, this text presents the essentials of pediatrics through concise descriptions, clinical correlations, numerous figures and nearly 100 tables. This revision will include over 500 board-style questions with complete answers and explanations, with exams at the end of each chapter and an end-of-book Comprehensive Examination"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Pediatric health supervision
    Behavioral and developmental pediatrics
    Adolescent medicine
    Neonatology
    Genetic disorders and inborn errors of metabolism
    Endocrinology
    Infectious diseases
    Cardiology
    Pulmonology
    Gastroenterology
    Nephrology and urology
    Neurology
    Hematology
    Oncology
    Allergy and immunology
    Rheumatology
    Orthopedics
    Ophthalmology
    Dermatology
    Emergency medicine.
  • Digital/Print
    [edited by] Robert J. Yetman, Mark D. Hormann.
    Contents:
    General pediatrics
    The newborn infant
    The cardiovascular system
    The respiratory system
    The gastrointestinal tract
    The urinary tract
    The neuromuscular system
    Infectious diseases and immunology
    Hematologic and neoplastic diseases
    The adolescent.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2016
    Users must create a username and password
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RJ48.2 .P42 2016
    2
  • Digital/Print
    [edited by] Robert J. Yetman, Mark D. Hormann.
    Summary: "The PreTest Clinical Science Series prepares medical students for the USMLE Step 2 CK, which assesses students' medical knowledge of core clinical topics with USMLE style review questions. Useful as reviews for clerkship exams following core clinical rotations, each PreTest book contains 500 questions with comprehensive, targeted answers and rationale. Discussions review correct and incorrect answer options to reinforce learning. The 15th edition of Pediatrics: PreTest simulates the USMLE Step 2 CK test-taking experience by including vignette-style questions and updates on the latest treatments and therapies for infants, children and adolescents. To ensure that questions are representative of the style and level of difficulty of the exam, each PreTest book is reviewed by students who either recently passed Step 2CK or completed their Pediatrics rotation"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2020
    Users must create a username and password
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RJ48.2 .P42 2020
    2
  • Digital
    edited by Andrew R. Peterson, MD, MSPH, Clinical Associate Professor, Stead Family Department of Pediatrics, Carver College of Medicine, University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa, Kelly E. Wood, MD, Clinical Assistant Professor, Stead Family Department of Pediatrics, Carver College of Medicine, University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa.
    Contents:
    Adolescent medicine and gynecology / Gayathri Chelvakumar and Paula Cody
    Allergic and immunologic disorders / Amy O. Thomas and Alex Thomas
    Behavioral and mental health issues / Linda J. Cooper-Brown and Jennifer McWilliams
    Blood and neoplastic disorders / Adam D. Wolfe
    Cardiology / Benton Ng
    Cognition, language, and learning disabilities / Amy L. Conrad, Todd Kopelman, and Tammy L. Wilgenbusch
    Collagen vascular and other multisystem disorders / Sandy Hong and Kelly E. Wood
    Critical care / Ashley Loomis and Niyati Patel
    Ear, nose and throat disorders / Derek Zhorne
    Emergency care / Sarah L. Miller
    Endocrine disorders / Vanessa Curtis
    Ethics / Becky Benson
    Eye disorders / Melanie Schmitt
    Fetus and newborn / Erin Osterholm
    Fluids and electrolyte metabolism / Jeff Van Blarcom
    Pediatric gastroenterology / Dina Al-Zubeidi
    Genetics and dysmorphology / Greg Rice
    Genital system disorders / Kathleen Kieran
    Growth and development / Erin Howe
    Infectious disease / Nathan Price
    Metabolic disorders / Eric T. Rush
    Musculoskeletal disorders / Natalie Stork and Blaise Nemeth
    Neurologic disorders / Satsuki Matsumoto and Leah Zhorne
    Nutrition / Kelly E. Wood
    Patient safety and quality improvement / Elizabeth H. Mack
    Pharmacology. Part I, Pharmacology and pain management / Susan S. Vos, Gary Milavetz, Jeff Van Blarcom, and Laura Steinauer
    Pharmacology, Part II, Sedation / Jeff Van Blarcom
    Poisoning and environmental exposure to hazardous substances / Christopher Hogrefe
    Preventative pediatrics / Ashley Miller and Rebecca Lozman-Oxman
    Psychosocial issues & child abuse. Part 1, Psychosocial issues / Cassandra Collins, James Burkhalter, and Kelly E. Wood
    Psychosocial issues & child abuse. Part 2, Child abuse / Cassandra Collins, James Burkhalter, and Kelly E. Wood
    Research and statistics / Andrew R. Peterson
    Renal and urologic disorders / Jen Jetton and Kathy Lee-Son
    Respiratory disorders / Anthony Fischer
    Skin disorders / Will Aughenbaugh and Lisa Muchard
    Sports medicine and physical fitness / Andrew R. Peterson
    Substance abuse / LaTisha L. Bader and Ross Mathiasen.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPediatrics
    AccessPediatrics
    Review Questions Users must create a username and password
  • Digital
    edited by Klaus M. Beier.
    Summary: This book provides extensive information on pedophilia (sexual interest in the prepubescent body age), hebephilia (sexual interest in the early-pubescent body age) and sexual offenses against children, i.e., the various forms of child sexual abuse, including the use of child sexual abuse images, along with the current state of knowledge concerning offender groups. The book makes it clear that pedophilia or hebephilia do not inevitably lead to offenses against children - that there are those who keep their desires in their fantasies and do not act them out on the behavioral level. The World Health Organization classifies pedophilia as a mental disorder. It can be safely assumed that many pedophile men in a given community live their lives, unrecognized and adamant about hiding their sexual drives from society and from themselves, and who are genuinely motivated not to act upon their sexual fantasies. The numbers of exactly this particular group of pedophilically inclined non-offenders can be increased by preventive therapeutic measures. For this purpose, two treatment programs have been developed at the Institute of Sexology and Sexual Medicine at the Charité-Universitätsmedizin Berlin (University Clinic) since the initiation of the Prevention Project Dunkelfeld in 2005 - First, the project involving adult participants (Berlin Dissexuality Therapy: BEDIT) and later, another for adolescents (BEDIT-A), who find themselves attracted to children. Both program manuals are completely integrated into this work, which reflects 15 years of assessment and treatment experience.

    Contents:
    1. Pedophilia and Hebephilia
    2. Child Sexual Abuse and the Use of Child Sexual Abuse Images
    3. Therapeutic Options
    4. The Berlin Prevention Project Dunkelfeld
    5. BEDIT-Manual for Adults
    6. Modules for Adults
    7. BEDIT-A Manual for Adolescents
    8. Modules for Adolescents
    9. Worksheets BEDIT
    10. Worksheets BEDIT-A.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jonathan D. Avery, editor.
    Summary: The book serves as a guide for all clinicians seeking to improve healthcare outcomes by implementing peer support in the treatment and management of medical and mental health conditions. The book begins with a chapter that describes the importance of peers and how peers are increasingly being utilized to improve medical outcomes. Each chapter opens with an introductory section, include tables and figures, and ends with a summary section for quick reference. Written by experts in the field, this resource covers the clinical implications for peer support in substance misuse, chronic medical conditions, in special populations, and mental illness generally. Each chapter is designed specifically to be accessible for a broad clinical audience of experts and non-experts across medical specialties. Peer Support in Medicine is an excellent resource for all clinicians seeking to improve healthcare outcomes using the gains made by the peer support model, including psychiatrists, psychologists, healthcare researchers, and medical students across specialties, nurses, social workers, and all others.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Peer Support for Substance Use Disorders
    Peer Support for Mental Illness
    Peer Support for Chronic Medical Conditions
    Peer Support for Bereavement
    Peer Support for Adolescents
    Peer Support for Elderly
    Peer Support for Families
    Peer Support for the Medical Community.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    H.R. Patel ... [and others].
    Summary: The fully comprehensive book brings together the three main pelvic specialties (Urology, Gynecological Oncology and Colorectal Surgery) into one volume. Patients have been shown to benefit from a multidisciplinary approach since it allows surgeons of different specialties to learn from one another therefore enhancing the treatment for the patient. Pelvic cancer outcomes are poor in low volume centres. These centres account for 80% of the global centres dealing with these cancers. Pelvic Cancer Surgery: Modern Breakthroughs and Future Advances is a much needed book that can focus training and assist health professionals in their care of patients with pelvic dysfunction. Pelvic Cancer Surgery: Modern Breakthroughs and Future Advances is complete with full color illustrations and schematic diagrams and makes use of key points and stepwise figures for an enhanced learning experience.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Giulio A. Santoro, Andrzej P. Wieczorek, Abdul H. Sultan.
    Summary: This excellent textbook provides up-to-date information on all aspects of pelvic floor disorders. After an opening section on anatomy and physiology, it explains the methodology, role and application of the integrated imaging approach in detail, including the most advanced 3D, 4D, and dynamic ultrasound techniques, illustrated with hundreds of images. It then discusses in depth the epidemiology, etiology, assessment, and management of the full range of pelvic floor disorders from multidisciplinary and practical perspectives. The book also provides information on the various forms of obstetric perineal trauma, urinary incontinence and voiding dysfunction, anal incontinence, pelvic organ prolapse, constipation and obstructed defecation, pelvic pain and sexual dysfunction, and fistulas, and includes treatment algorithms as well as helpful guidance on what to do when surgical treatment goes wrong. The authors are leading experts in the field from around the globe. Since the first edition from 2010 (more than 200,000 chapter downloads), the book has been extensively rewritten and features numerous additional topics. The result is a comprehensive textbook that is invaluable for gynecologists, colorectal surgeons, urologists, radiologists, and gastroenterologists, beginners and veterans alike.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Achille Lucio Gaspari, Pierpaolo Sileri, editors ; foreword by Giorgio De Toma.
    Summary: During recent decades, more than 100 surgical procedures have been proposed to treat pelvic organ prolapse, and surgeons are still searching for the ideal approach. Although generally accepted guidelines and algorithms are still lacking, careful preoperative work-up and patient selection can serve as a sound basis for tailored surgery. In this comprehensive book, leading experts from around the world provide a detailed, up-to-date overview of the diagnostic and surgical approaches employed in patients with prolapse of the middle or posterior pelvic floor compartment. Each surgical technique is explained step by step with the aid of instructive figures. Guidance is also included on the management of surgical complications and of recurrent disease aspects that are too frequently overlooked in the scientific literature. This book will prove essential reading for all who are interested in functional colorectal disorders of the pelvic floor and will represent a unique and invaluable source of knowledge for general surgeons, colorectal surgeons, and urogynecologists, whether in training or practice.

    Contents:
    The Multidisciplinary View of a Pelvic Floor Unit
    Epidemiology and Prevalence of Pelvic Floor Disorders
    Pelvic Floor Anatomy
    Imaging of Pelvic Floor Disorders
    Anorectal Physiology
    Pelvic Floor Ultrasonography
    Pelvic Floor Ultrasonography
    Fecal Incontinence
    Obstructed Defecation Syndrome
    Solitary Rectal Ulcer Syndrome and Obstructed Defecation: Common Pathology
    Chronic Anorectal Pain: Pathophysiological Aspects, Diagnosis, and Treatment
    Biofeedback and Pelvic Floor Disorders
    Biofeedback Training and Physiokinetic Therapy
    STARR and TRANSTARR Procedures
    Delorme's Procedure
    The Altemeier's Procedure for External Rectal Prolapse
    The Express Procedure for Internal Rectal Prolapse
    Transperineal Rectocele Correction
    Mesh Rectopexy (Ripstein, Orr-Loygue, Wells, and Frykman-Goldberg)
    Rectopexy without Mesh
    Laparoscopic Ventral Rectocolpopexy for Rectal Prolapse Syndromes: Restoration of Anatomy and Improvement of Function
    Pelvic Organ Prolapse Suspension.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    David A. Gordon, Mark R. Katlin, editors.
    Summary: This text provides a comprehensive, state of the art review of this field and will serve as a resource for urologists, colorectal surgeons, geriatricians, and gynecologists as well as researchers interested in neuromuscular phenomena in the pelvis. The book also reviews new data regarding risk factors for pelvic floor muscle dysfunction and profiles new minimally invasive surgical strategies for well known pelvic disease processes. Each chapter is chock full of data from landmark trials which have been published over the past few years and placed in context with respect to current management techniques for pelvic floor disorders. Written by experts in their field, Pelvic Floor Dysfunction and Pelvic Surgery in the Elderly: An Integrated Approachprovides a concise yet comprehensive summary to help guide patient management.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Lewis Chan, Vincent Tse, Stephanie The, Peter Stewart, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Principles of Ultrasound and Instrumentation
    2. Functional Anatomy and Approaches to Imaging of the Pelvic Floor
    3. Essentials for Setting Up Practice in Clinician Performed Ultrasound
    4. Ultrasound Imaging in Assessment of the Male Patient with Voiding Dysfunction
    5. The Female Patient 1- Assessment of Female Voiding Dysfunction
    6. The Female Patient 2- Pelvic Organ Prolapse
    7. Imaging of Gynaecologic Organs
    8. Ultrasound Assessment of the Patient with Fecal Incontinence
    9. 3D Ultrasound Imaging of the Pelvis.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Peter A. Philip.
    Summary: “Pelvic Pain and Dysfunction: A Differential Diagnosis Manual is a comprehensive guide on the management of patients suffering from pelvic pain as well as dysfunction of the bowel and bladder systems. It integrates differential diagnosis concepts of orthopaedic medicine to the urogynecological patient. Using the concepts described, clinicians will have the opportunity to readily determine the underlying cause of their patients? suffering, and a means to ameliorate their pain and dysfunction. Regardless of chronicity, the strategies outlined have proven effective in restoration of function and comfort.” - Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Introduction to pelvic pain
    General concepts
    Evaluation
    Interpretation
    Management.
    Digital Access Thieme-Connect 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Assia T. Valovska.
    Contents:
    Pelvic pain management : an introduction / Louis Saddick, Richard D. Urman, and Assia T. Valovska
    Anatomy of the abdomen and pelvis / Mona Patel and Assia T. Valovska
    Pain mechanisms in chronic pelvic pain / Juan Diego Villegas-Echeverri, J.D. López-Jaramillo, A.L. Herrera-Betancourt, J.D. López-Isanoa, and M.P. Pardo-Bustamante
    Multidisciplinary approaches to pelvic pain treatment : a physical therapist's perspective / Stephanie Prendergast
    Pharmacologic management of pelvic pain / Michelle L. Matthews and Vesela Kovacheva
    Dyspareunia and vulvodynia / Adeoti Oshinowo, Alin Ionescu, Tanya Anim, and Georgine Lamvu
    Endometriosis : treatment and pain management / Karina Gritsenko
    Painful bladder syndrome and interstitial cystitis in women / Sybil Dessie and Eman Elkadry
    Functional abdominal pain syndrome / Karina Gritsenko
    Pudendal neuralgia / Michael Hibner and Mario Castellanos
    Incapacitating pelvic congestion syndrome / Neeraj Rastogi, Nii-Kabu Kabutey, Gillian Lieberman, and Ducksoo Kim
    Male pelvic pain / Michel A. Pontari and Emmanuel A. Ghormoz
    Musculoskeletal causes of pelvic pain / Chris R. Abrecht, Lesley E. Bobb, and Assia T. Valovska
    Pelvic cancer pain / Karina Gritsenko
    Surgical treatment of pelvic pain / Adam Duke, Elmira Manoucheri, and Karen Wang
    Chronic pelvic pain and psychological disorders / Mohammed Issa and Raheel Bengali
    The physical therapy approach to pelvic pain : evaluation
    / Lila Bartkowski-Abbate and Amy Stein
    The physical therapy approach to pelvic pain : treatment / Amy Stein
    Implantable devices for the treatment of pelvic pain / Chris R. Abrecht, Alison M. Weisheipl, and Assia T. Valovska
    Sample clinical cases / Sawsan (Suzie) As-Sanie, Nichole Mahnert, and Beth Skinner.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Axel Gänsslen, Jan Lindahl, Stephan Grechenig, Bernd Füchtmeier, editors.
    Summary: This book provides in-depth coverage of all aspects of pelvic ring fractures and their management. The opening chapters supply essential information on surgical anatomy, biomechanics, classification, clinical evaluation, radiological diagnostics, and emergency and acute management. The various operative techniques, including navigation techniques, that have been established and standardized over the past two decades are then presented in a step-by-step approach. Readers will find guidance on surgical indications, choice of approaches, reduction and fixation strategies, complication management, and optimization of long-term results. Specific treatment concepts are described for age-specific fractures, including pediatric and geriatric injuries, and secondary reconstructions. Pelvic ring fractures represent challenging injuries, especially when they present with concomitant hemodynamic instability. This book will help trauma and orthopaedic surgeons at all levels of experience to achieve the primary treatment aim of anatomic restoration of the bony pelvis to preserve biomechanical stability and avoid malunion with resulting clinical impairments.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 The History of Pelvic Fracture Treatment
    Chapter 2 Surgical Anatomy of the Pelvis
    Chapter 3 Biomechanics of the Pelvis
    Chapter 4 Classification of Pelvic Ring Injuries
    Chapter 5 Prehospital Treatment of Suspected Pelvic Injuries
    Chapter 6 Inhospital Clinical Examination
    Chapter 7 Radiological Diagnostics
    Chapter 8 Introduction
    Emergency Management
    Chapter 9 Emergency Stabilization
    Pelvic Binder
    Chapter 10 Emergency Management
    Pelvic C-Clamp
    Chapter 11 Mechanical Stabilization: DC-Osteosynthesis
    Chapter 12 Pelvic Packing
    Chapter 13 Direct Hemorrhage Control: Vascular DC-Treatment
    Chapter 14 Emergency Management
    Resuscitative Endovascular Balloon Occlusion of the Aorta (REBOA)
    Chapter 15 Indirect Hemorrhage Control: Angiography/Embolization (AE)
    Chapter 16 Coagulation Management
    Chapter 17 Open Pelvic Fractures
    Chapter 18 Morel-Levallee Lesions
    Chapter 19 Pelvic Compartment Syndrome
    Chapter 20 Traumatic Hemipelvectomy
    Chapter 21 Urological Trauma
    Chapter 22 Principles of Treatment of Pelvic Ring Injuries
    Chapter 23 Symphyseal Disruption
    Chapter 24 Retrograde Pubic Rami Screw
    Chapter 25 External Fixation
    Chapter 26 Subcutaneous Anterior Pelvic Fixation
    Chapter 27 Ilium Fractures
    Chapter 28 Anterior Plating SI-joint
    Chapter 29 SI-joint
    Posterior Reduction and Stabilization
    Chapter 30 Fracture Dislocations of the SI-joint
    Chapter 31 Iliosacral Screw Fixation
    Chapter 32 Local Sacral Plating
    Chapter 33 Lower Transverse Sacral Fractures
    Chapter 34 Ilio-iliacal Osteosynthesis
    Chapter 35 Lumbopelvic Fixation
    Chapter 36 Pediatric Pelvic Ring Injuries
    Chapter 37 Avulsion Injuries
    Chapter 38 Fragility Fractures
    Chapter 39 Intraoperative 3D Imaging of the Pelvic Ring
    Chapter 40 Implant Removal
    Chapter 41 Infectious Complications After Pelvic Ring Surgery
    Chapter 42 Pelvic Malunion and Non-Union
    Chapter 43 Outcome After Pelvic Ring Injuries.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Nam Cheol Park, Sae Woong Kim, Du Geon Moon, editors.
    Contents:
    I. Introduction
    II. Historical & cultural perspective
    III. Penis anatomy
    IV. Patient selection and counselling
    V. Psychologic perspective
    VI. Preoperative preparation and postoperative care
    VII. Girth Enhancement
    Dermal, dermofat graft
    Fat graft
    Penile disassembly & Glans detachment
    Glans augmentation
    Injectable Filler
    Allograft and synthetic injectables
    Silicon
    Paraffin injection
    Tissue Engineering
    Stem Cell.- VIII. Penile Lengthening
    VY plasty
    Z-plasty.- Double-Z plasty
    Suspensory ligament release/division/ligamentolysis
    Penile lengthening device.
    IX. Pediatric perspective
    micropenis, concealed penis, webbed penis, penoscrotal transposition
    Correction of webbed penis
    Correction of concealed penis
    Correction of penoscrotal transposition
    X. Penile reconstruction of amputated penis
    forearm cutaneous fascial graft.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Philippe E. Spiess, editor.
    Summary: This fully updated and revised second edition address specifically some of the significant advances made in our understanding of the pathophysiology of penile cancer including discussion of the suspected role of the human papilloma virus in penile carcinogenesis. Similarly, the molecular pathways implicated in precancerous and penile cancer will be discussed as these are the present targets of novel therapeutic approaches to this disease. The text details the recent national and international diagnostic and treatment guidelines that have been developed by both the National Comprehensive Cancer Network© and the European Urological Association establishing evidence based standards upon which the care of penile cancer should be based. The text also covers significant advances made in the diagnostic and therapeutic approach to both primary tumors and inguinal nodal metastases resulting from penile cancer such as penile sparing surgery and minimally invasive inguinal lymph node surgery. The text will similarly highlights the improvement in cancer specific outcome in the management of loco-regionally advanced (N2/3) penile cancer managed by upfront systemic chemotherapy followed by consolidative surgery in appropriately selected patients based on recent prospective phase II data. It also covers the role of radiotherapy in the management of penile cancer for both primary tumors and/or at sites of regional or distant metastases. Finally, some of the novel systemic approaches being devised in the management of advanced penile cancer along with some upcoming international trials soon to be opened which likely will re-define the present therapeutic approaches to penile cancer are discussed. The Second Edition of Penile Cancer: Diagnosis and Treatment will constitute a comprehensive review of the above mentioned subjects in addition to a few select topics of high clinical relevance, with the readership predominantly consisting of urologists, medical and surgical oncologists, and other healthcare professionals.

    Contents:
    Understanding the Pathophysiology of Penile Cancer and Its Preneoplastic Lesions
    Diagnostic Tools in the Evaluation and Management of Penile Cancer
    Penile-Sparing Surgical Approaches in the Management of Primary Penile Tumours
    Dynamic Sentinel Node Biopsy and FDG-PET/CT for Lymph Node Staging in Penile Cancer
    Surgical Decision Making, Technical Considerations and Clinical Pearls in Therapeutic Inguinal Node Dissection Surgery for Penile Cancer
    Minimally Invasive Surgical Approaches to Inguinal Nodes in the Absence of Palpable Adenopathy
    Pelvic Lymph Node Dissection for Penile Cancer: Answering the Conundrum of When and How It Should Be Conducted
    Multmodal Approach to Locally Advanced and Metastatic Penile Cancer
    The Role of Radiotherapy in the Management of Penile Cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Philippe E. Spiess, Andrea Necchi, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive and state-of the-art approach to caring for penile carcinoma patients and provides foundational information related to the molecular pathways implicated in penile carcinogenesis and progression. Penile carcinoma remains one of the most debilitating and life-altering malignancies to affect men, with significant impacts on quality of life, erectile function/sexual activity, and length of life. This book illuminates recent advances in penile cancer sparing treatment approaches and oncologically appropriate therapeutic options that help to maintain quality of life, sexual function, and intimacy for patients. It also elucidates recent understandings of human papilloma virus (HPV) and non-HPV driven pathways, which are suspected to have distinct treatment responses and prognoses. The book explores the management of inguinal lymph nodes in the setting of penile cancer, which can now be managed with the integration of key surgical principles/techniques including the adoption of minimally invasive surgery. Considering a multidisciplinary treatment approach for patients exhibiting either locally advanced or more widespread metastatic disease, the book introduces novel systemic therapies currently in development. Further, this book raises clinician awareness of the significant psychosocial impact of penile carcinoma on patients and their families. Penile Carcinoma: Therapeutic Principles and Advances provides readers with the necessary knowledge and insight to care for penile cancer patients with the use of truly state-of-the-art diagnostic and therapeutic approaches. Cancer patients and their families will greatly benefit from adoption of these principles and the accessibility of such advances to their personalized care.

    Contents:
    Mechanism of Carcinogenesis and Progression
    Pathologic Features of Invasive Penile Carcinomas and Precursor Lesions
    Characterization of Penile Cancers with Comprehensive Genomic Profiling
    Functional and Psychosocial Impact of Penile Cancer Treatments
    Penile Sparing Surgical and Non-Surgical Approaches
    Management of Primary Penile Tumors - Partial and Total Penectomy
    In the Clinical Setting of Non-Palpable/Non-Bulky Inguinal Nodes
    Management of Bulky Inguinal/Pelvic Metastases in Squamous Penile Cancer
    Neoadjuvant and Adjuvant Multimodality Treatments for Patients with Lymph Node Involvement
    Management of Locally Recurrent Penile Cancer
    Management of Metastatic Penile Cancer
    Overview of Insightful Systemic Approaches
    Clinical Trials Corner.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Eduardo P. Miranda, John P. Mulhall, editors.
    Summary: Penile implants have been an effective treatment for erectile dysfunction (ED) for more than 40 years. However, there is now a growing interest in this treatment option, as the number of procedures is expected to increase in the future. This book offers a reference guide for all those practitioners interested in understanding and/or performing this procedure. It will also benefit those in medical education who want to obtain specialized and high-quality knowledge regarding the complexities involved in penile implant surgery. Although the basic description of penile implant surgery is well documented in the literature, a detailed and comprehensive guide with a special focus on the most challenging and controversial aspects is lacking. The few books available on the topic provide a broad overview of prosthetic surgery in general, mainly discuss basic principles, and fail to provide a more detailed perspective. This comprehensive book discusses various aspects of penile implant surgery, ranging from indications to long-term complications. It addresses the most common and serious challenges regarding penile implants, which are rarely discussed elsewhere. The respective chapters were written by internationally respected experts on the controversies of penile prosthetic surgery. The book is intended for all those who plan to specialize in penile implant surgery, which include, but are not limited to, residents and fully trained urologists, as well as fellows and practitioners in sexual medicine and reconstructive urology.

    Contents:
    Patient and Device Selection
    Critical Analysis of Maneuvers to Reduce Infection in Penile Implant Surgery
    Strategies for Optimal Pain Control in the Penile Implant Patient
    Implant Surgery in the Anticoagulated Patient
    Management of Residual Curvature in the Patient with Peyronie's Disease Undergoing Penile Implant Surgery
    Considerations in Reservoir Placement
    The Hostile Penis: Managing the Patient with Penile Fibrosis
    The Role of Penile Lengthening Procedures at the Time of Penile Implant Surgery
    Considerations in the Management of Visceral Perforation During Penile Implant Surgery
    Implant Surgery in the Patient with Neophallus
    Approach to Managing the Patient with Impending Erosion
    Management of Long-term Complications of Penile Implant Surgery
    Medicolegal Aspects of Penile Implant Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Thomas J. Guzzo, Robert C. Kovell, Justin B. Ziemba, Dana A. Weiss, Alan J. Wein.
    Summary: Brief, well-illustrated chapters, an easy-to-read format, and a convenient, portable size make Penn Clinical Manual of Urology, 3rd Edition, your go-to resource for fast reference on the effective diagnosis and treatment of urologic disorders. Concise and practical, this manual is indispensable for both residents and practitioners as a daily clinical guide as well as an outstanding review tool for board exam preparation.

    Contents:
    Signs and symptoms: The initial examination
    Diagnostic and interventional uroradiology
    Lower urinary tract infections in women and pyelonephritis
    Lower urinary tract infection in males
    Specific infections of the genitourinary tract
    Sexually transmitted infections
    Interstitial cystitis/bladder pain syndrome
    Urolithiasis in the adult
    Penn clinical manual chapter on urologic emergencies
    Urinary and genital trauma
    Urethral stricture and lower urinary tract reconstruction
    Urinary fistula
    Nocturia
    Lower urinary tract function and dysfunction; urinary incontinence
    Benign prostatic hyperplasia and related entities
    Adult genitourinary cancer: Prostate and bladder
    Adult genitourinary cancer: Renal and testicular
    Adult genitourinary cancer: Urethral and penile
    Radiation therapy
    Laparoscopic surgical anatomy, laparoscopy, and robotic-assisted laparoscopic surgery
    Male sexual dysfunction
    Male fertility and sterility
    Disorders of the adrenal gland
    Retroperitoneal tumors and retroperitoneal fibrosis
    Embryology and differences of sex development
    Congenital anomalies
    Pediatric oncology
    Pediatric urolithiasis
    Pediatric voiding function and dysfunction
    Transitional urology
    Geriatric urology
    Quality and safety considerations in urology
    Clinical research design and statistics.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Print
    Mary Lynne Knighten, DNP, RN, NEA-BC, KT Waxman, DNP, MBA, RN, CNL, CENP, CHSE, FSSH, FAONL, FAAN.
    Summary: "The original textbook by Dr. Susan Penner was written 20 years ago as the Introduction to Health Care Economics and Financial Management: Fundamental Concepts with Practical Application. It has helped nurses, nurse leaders, students, and faculty to understand, develop knowledge, and gain competency in the often complex world of finance and economics. It has been a very thorough and practical book for both the classroom and practice environments. We want to thank Dr. Penner for her vision and the execution of a resource that has stood the test of time and changing healthcare and reimbursement environments. Furthermore, we are humbled and grateful that Dr. Penner would entrust her life's work to us in revising the fourth edition of Economics and Financial Management for Nurses and Nurse Leaders, so many more generations of nurses may benefit from her wisdom. To honor Dr. Penner, it is with these sentiments in mind that we've renamed the book Penner's Economics and Financial Management for Nurses and Nurse Leaders, Fourth Edition"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Economics of health care
    Chapter 2. Healthcare reimbursement and insurance
    Chapter 3. Quantifying nursing care, staffing, and productivity
    Chapter 4. Budget planning
    Chapter 5. Reporting and managing budgets
    Chpater 6. Special purpose, capital, and other budgets
    Chapter 7. Cost-benefit analysis
    Chapter 8. Assessing financial health
    Chapter 9. Building a business case
    Chapter 10. Entrepreneurship, contract negotiation, and practice management
    Chapter 11. Grant writing for helathcare programs
    Chater 12. Ethical issues and financial issues in international healthcare systems
    Chapter 13. Health policy and future trends.
    Digital Access R2Library [2024], ©2024
  • Digital
    edited by David Tuckett and Nadine A. Levinson.
    Summary: "Compilation of terms, definitions, and discussion from major published psychoanalytic glossaries. In addition to the Language of Psychoanalysis (Laplanche and Pontalis), PEP has integrated three additional glossaries: the Edinburgh International Encyclopaedia of Psychoanalysis (Skelton), Glossary of Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts (Moore and Fine), and the Dictionary of Kleinian Thought (Hinshelwood). PEP has also integrated the EPF Glossary of Psychoanalysis in Europe (Junkers), which provides a mapping of each psychoanalytic term across several languages."
  • Digital
    edited by Vincent L. Pecoraro.
    Contents:
    Chapter One. Chemical posttranslational modification with designed rhodium(II) catalysts
    Chapter Two. Cell-binding assays for determining the affinity of protein-protein interactions: technologies and considerations
    Chapter Three. Protein and antibody engineering by phage display
    Chapter Four. Incorporation of unnatural amino acids into proteins expressed in mammalian cells
    Chapter Five. Method for enzyme design with genetically encoded unnatural amino acids
    Chapter Six. Methods for solving highly symmetric de novo designed metalloproteins: crystallographic examination of a novel three-stranded coiled-coil structure containing D-amino acids
    Chapter Seven. SpyRings declassified: a blueprint for using isopeptide-mediated cyclization to enhance enzyme thermal resilience
    Chapter Eight. Engineering and application of LOV2-based photoswitches
    Chapter Nine. Minimalist design of allosterically regulated protein catalysts
    Chapter Ten. Combining design and selection to create novel protein-peptide interactions
    Chapter Eleven. Metal-directed design of supramolecular protein assemblies
    Chapter Twelve. Designing fluorinated proteins
    Chapter Thirteen. Solid phase synthesis of helically folded aromatic oligoamides
    Chapter Fourteen. Conformational restriction of peptides using dithiol bis-alkylation
    Chapter Fifteen. Engineering short preorganized peptide sequences for metal ion coordination: copper(II) a case study
    Chapter Sixteen. De Novo construction of redox active proteins
    Chapter Seventeen. Design strategies for redox active metalloenzymes: applications in hydrogen production
    Chapter Eighteen. Equilibrium studies of designed metalloproteins
    Chapter Nineteen. Reconstitution of heme enzymes with artificial metalloporphyrinoids
    Chapter Twenty. Creation of a thermally tolerant peroxidase
    Chapter Twenty-One. Designing covalently linked heterodimeric four-helix bundles
    Chapter Twenty-Two. Design of heteronuclear metalloenzymes
    Chapter Twenty-Three. Periplasmic screening for artifical metalloenzymes
    Chapter Twenty-Four. De Novo designed imaging agents based on lanthanide peptides complexes
    Chapter Twenty-Five. Peptide binding for bio-based nanomaterials
    Author Index
    Subject Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Gunnar Houen.
    Contents:
    Peptide Antibodies: Past, Present, and Future / Gunnar Houen
    Structure of natural and recombinant antibodies / Hui Ma and Richard O'Kennedy
    Prediction of antigenic B and T cell epitopes via energy decomposition analysis : description of the web-based prediction tool BEPPE / Claudio Peri ... [et al.]
    Prediction of antibody epitopes / Morten Nielsen and Paolo Marcatili
    Fmoc solid-phase peptide synthesis / Paul R. Hansen and Alberto Oddo
    Peptide-carrier conjugation / Paul R. Hansen
    Solid-phase peptide-carrier conjugation / Gunnar Houen and Dorthe T. Olsen
    Analysis of peptides and conjugates by amino acid analysis / Peter Højrup
    Characterization of synthetic peptides by mass spectrometry / Bala K. Prabhala ... [et al.]
    Interpretation of tandem mass spectrometry (MSMS) spectra for peptide analysis / Karin Hjernø and Peter Højrup
    Polyclonal Peptide Antisera / Tina H. Pihl, Kristin E. Illigen, and Gunnar Houen
    Production and screening of monoclonal peptide antibodies / Nicole Hartwig Trier ... [et al.]
    Production of epitope-specific antibodies by immunization with synthetic epitope peptide formulated with CpG-DNA- liposome complex without carriers / Dongbum Kim, Younghee Lee, and Hyung-Joo Kwon
    Thioredoxin-displayed multipeptide immunogens / Angelo Bolchi ... [et al.]
    Purification of natural and recombinant peptide antibodies by affinity chromatographic strategies / Hui Ma and Richard O'Kennedy
    Isolation of camelid single-domain antibodies against native proteins using recombinant multivalent peptide ligands / Norah A. Alturki ... [et al.]
    Generation of TCR-Like antibodies using phage display / Brian H. Santich ... [et al.]
    Structural characterization of peptide antibodies/ Anna Chailyan and Paolo Marcatili
    Automated high-throughput mapping of linear B-cell epitopes using a statistical analysis of high-density peptide microarray data / Thomas Østerbye and Søren Buus
    Characterization of peptide antibodies by epitope mapping using resin-bound and soluble peptides / Nicole Hartwig Trier
    Screening and characterization of linear B-cell epitopes by biotinylated peptide libraries / Ida Rosenkrands and Anja Olsen
    Bead-based peptide arrays for profiling the specificity of modification state-specific antibodies / Angela Filomena ... [et al.]
    Surface plasmon resonance method to evaluate anti-citrullinated protein/peptide antibody affinity to citrullinated peptides / Feliciana Real-Fernández ... [et al.]
    Specificity analysis of histone modification-specific antibodies or reading domains on histone peptide arrays / Goran Kungulovski ... [et al.]
    Prion-specific antibodies produced in wild-type mice / Peter M. H. Heegaard ... [et al.]
    Immunoblotting with peptide antibodies : differential immunoreactivities caused by certain amino acid substitutions in a short peptide and possible effects of differential refolding of the peptide on a nitrocellulose or PVDF membrane / Takenori Yamamoto ... [et al.]
    Immunocytochemical and immunohistochemical staining with peptide antibodies / Tina Friis ... [et al.]
    Designing B-cell epitopes for immunotherapy and subunit vaccines / Harinder Singh ... [et al.]
    Enterovirus-specific anti-peptide antibodies / Chit Laa Poh ... [et al.]
    Therapeutic HIV peptide vaccine / Anders Fomsgaard.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Ben M. Dunn.
    Contents:
    Peptide therapeutics
    Methods for the peptide synthesis and analysis
    Peptide design strategies for g-protein coupled receptors (GPCRs)
    Peptide-based inhibitors of enzymes
    Discovery of peptide drugs as enzyme inhibitors and activators
    Discovery of peptide drugs from natural sources
    Modification of peptides to limit metabolism
    Delivery of peptide drugs.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Ratmir Derda.
    Contents:
    Design, synthesis, and application of OB2c combinatorial peptide and peptidomimetic libraries
    Synthesis of macrocyclic organo-peptide hybrids from ribosomal polypeptide precursors via cuAAC-/hydrazide-mediated cyclization
    Synthesis and screening of one-bead-one-compound cyclic peptide libraries
    Creating site-specific isopeptide linkages between proteins with the traceless staudinger ligation
    Macrocyclic templates for library synthesis of peptido-conjugates
    Synthesis and alkylation of aza-gly-pro building blocks of peptidomimetic libraries for developing prostaglandin f2alpha receptor modulators as therapeutics to inhibit preterm labor
    A fragment-based selection approach for the discovery of peptide macrocycles targeting protein kinases
    Peptide and peptide library cyclization via bromomethylbenzene derivatives
    Phage selection of bicyclic peptides based on two disulfide bridges
    De novo discovery of bioactive cyclic peptides using bacterial display and flow cytometry
    Chemical posttranslational modification of phage-displayed peptides
    Mapping protein-protein interactions with phage-displayed combinatorial peptide libraries and alanine scanning
    Identifying reactive peptides from phage-displayed libraries
    The best and the brightest: Exploiting tryptophan-sensitized tb(3+) luminescence to engineer lanthanide-binding tags
    Synthesis and cell-based screening of one-bead-one-compound peptide libraries
    Screening peptide array library for the identification of cancer cell-binding peptides
    Next-generation sequencing of phage-displayed peptide libraries
    Maleimide-based method for elaboration of cysteine-containing peptide phage libraries.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors Marina Cretich, Marcella Chiari.
    Contents:
    Peptide arrays on planar supports / Víctor Tapia Mancilla and Rudolf Volkmer
    High-throughput microarray incubations using multi-well chambers / Johannes Zerweck ... [et al.]
    Analysis of protein tyrosine kinase specificity using positional scanning peptide microarrays / Yang Deng and Benjamin E. Turk
    Secondary structure determination of peptides and proteins after immobilization / Stella H. North and Chris R. Taitt
    Peptides and anti-peptide antibodies for small and medium scale peptide and anti-peptide affinity microarrays : antigenic peptide selection, immobilization, and processing / Fan Zhang, Andrea Briones, and Mikhail Soloviev
    Low-cost peptide microarrays for mapping continuous antibody epitopes / Ryan McBride ... [et al.]
    Peptide microarray-based resonance light scattering assay for sensitively detecting intracellular kinase activity / Tao Li ... [et al.]
    Anomalous reflection of gold : a novel platform for biochips / Amir Syahir ... [et al.]
    High-throughput peptide screening on a bimodal imprinting chip through MS-SPRi integration / Weizhi Wang, Qiaojun Fang, and Zhiyuan Hu
    Analyzing peptide microarray data with the R pepStat package / Gregory Imholte, Renan Sauteraud, and Raphael Gottardo
    Chemoselective strategies to peptide and protein bioprobes immobilization on microarray surfaces / Alessandro Gori and Renato Longhi
    Manufacturing of peptide microarrays based on catalyst- free click chemistry / Denis Prim and Marc E. Pfeifer
    Clickable polymeric coating for oriented peptide immobilization / Laura Sola ... [et al.]
    Oriented peptide immobilization on microspheres / Lisa C. Shriver-Lake, George P. Anderson, and Chris R. Taitt
    Cell microarray format : a peptide release system using a photo-cleavable linker for cell toxicity and cell Uptake Analysis / Kenji Usui, Kin-ya Tomizaki, and Hisakazu Mihara
    Peptide microarrays for medical applications in autoimmunity, infection, and cancer / Carsten Grötzinger
    Synthetic peptide-based ELISA and ELISpot assay for identifying autoantibody epitopes / Judit Pozsgay ... [et al.]
    IgE and IgG4 epitope mapping of food allergens with a peptide microarray immunoassay / Javier Martínez-Botas and Belén de la Hoz
    IgE epitope mapping using peptide microarray immunoassay / Gustavo Gimenez, Sara Benedé, and Jing Lin
    Spot synthesis : an optimized microarray to detect IgE epitopes / Salvatore G. De-Simone, Paloma Napoleão-Pêgo, and Thatiane S. De-Simone
    Mapping of epitopes occurring in bovine αs1-casein variants by peptide microarray immunoassay / Maria Lisson and Georg Erhardt.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Peter E. Nielsen, Daniel H. Appella.
    Summary: Exemplifying and illustrating recent exciting advances in PNA chemistry, the second edition of Peptide Nucleic Acids: Methods and Protocols serves as a vital complement to the first edition of the book. Since the discovery of peptide nucleic acids, many interesting new derivatives and analogues in terms of nucleic acid recognition specificity and affinity have emerged. Also, as this detailed volume presents, great ingenuity in exploiting the unique properties of PNAs for a wide variety of applications within drug discovery, medical diagnostics, chemical biology and nanotechnology has unfolded. Written in the highly successful Methods in Molecular Biology series format, chapters include introductions to their respective topics, lists of the necessary materials and reagents, step-by-step, readily reproducible laboratory protocols, and key tips on troubleshooting and avoiding known pitfalls. Peptide Nucleic Acids: Methods and Protocols, Second Editionserves as a source of useful specific methods and protocols as well as a source of inspiration for future developments.

    Contents:
    MiniPEG-PNA / Arunava Manna [and others]
    Cyclopentane peptide nucleic acids / Ethan A. Englund, Ning Zhang, and Daniel H. Appella
    Chiral PNAs with constrained open-chain backbones / Roberto Corradini [and others]
    Synthesis, characterization, and evaluation of radiometal-containing peptide nucleic acids / Holger Stephan, Christian Foerster, and Gilles Gasser
    Preparation of metal-containing peptide nucleic acid bioconjugates on the solid phase / Gilles Gasser
    Formation and characterization of PNA-containing heteroquadruplexes / Bruce A. Armitage
    Sequence selective recognition of double-stranded RNA using triple helix-forming peptide nucleic acids / Thomas Zengeya, Pankaj Gupta, and Eriks Rozners
    Assembly of PNA-tagged small molecules, peptides, and carbohydrates onto DNA templates : programming the combinatorial pairing and inter-ligand distance / Nicolas Winssinger [and others]
    Site-selective scission of human genome using PNA-based artificial restriction DNA cutter / Kenichiro Ito and Makoto Komiyama
    PNA openers and their applications for bacterial DNA diagnostics / Irina V. Smolina and Maxim D. Frank-Kamenetskii
    DNA-Templated Native chemical ligation of functionalized peptide nucleic acids : a versatile tool for single base-specific detection of nucleic acids / Alexander Roloff [and others]
    Use of peptide nucleic acids (PNAs) for genotyping by solution and surface methods / Stefano Sforza [and others]
    Analysis of PNA Hybridization by surface plasmon resonance / Bruce A. Armitage
    PNA fluorescent in situ hybridization (FISH) for rapid microbiology and cytogenetic analysis / Henrik Stender, Brett Williams, and James Coull
    Rapid miRNA imaging in cells using fluorogenic templated staudinger reaction between PNA-based probes / Katarzyna Gorska and Nicolas Winssinger
    Cellular delivery of peptide nucleic acids (PNAs) / Takehiko Shiraishi and Peter E. Nielsen
    Peptide nucleic acid-mediated recombination for targeted genomic repair and modification / Erica B. Schleifman and Peter M. Glazer
    Antisense effects of PNAs in bacteria / Shan Goh, Jem Stach, and Liam Good.
    Digital Access Springer 2013
  • Digital
    Anwar Sunna, Andrew Care, Peter L. Bergquist, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Programmable bio-surfaces for biomedical applications
    2. Solid-binding peptides in biomedicine
    3. Molecular modelling of peptide-based materials for biomedical applications
    4. Design principles of peptide based self-assembled nanomaterials
    5. Bioprinting and biofabrication with peptide and protein biomaterials
    6. Peptides as bio-inspired molecular electronic materials
    7. Peptide-based materials for cartilage tissue regeneration
    8. Peptides and drug delivery
    9. Peptide lipidation-- a synthetic strategy to afford peptide based therapeutics
    10. Molecular engineering of Conus peptides as therapeutic leads
    11. Uptake mechanism of cell-penetrating peptides
    12. Empowering the potential of cell-penetrating peptides for targeted intracellular delivery via molecular self-assembly
    13. The current role of cell-penetrating peptides in cancer therapy
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Kevin M. Reavis, editor ; introduction by Haruhiro Inoue.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    by Xiangbin Pan, Ziyad M. Hijazi, Horst Sievert.
    Summary: This book provides an extensive discussion of echocardiography-guided percutaneous interventional techniques for clinical practitioners, including cardiologists, interventional physicians, surgeons and specialist training candidates. It allows readers to gain a thorough understanding of interpreting echocardiography-guided procedures, which not only protect patients from pain and other complications associated with conventional surgery, but also obviate the use of fluoroscopy or contrast agents and so avoid radiation damage and the risks of allergy or renal function impairment. Further, these procedures could help to save patients in areas lacking medical resources. The book first demonstrates the substitution of transesophageal for transthoracic echocardiography to avoid intubation under general anesthesia, and then presents key technical and practical aspects of echo-guided percutaneous interventions for structural heart diseases, such as ASD, VSD, PDA, PS, MS, AS and CoA. Lastly, it explores the lessons learned in echocardiography, anesthesia and postprocedural management of echo-guided percutaneous interventions.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Anesthesia Management in Echocardiography-guided Percutaneous Interventions for Structural Heart Disease
    Use of Echocardiography in Percutaneous Interventions for Structural Heart Disease
    Echocardiography-guided Interventional Atrial Septal Defect Closure
    Echocardiography-guided Interventional for Pulmonary Stenosis
    Echocardiography-guided Interventional Patent Ductus Arteriosus Closure
    Echocardiography-guided Interventional Closure of Perimembranous Ventricular Septal Defect
    Echocardiography-guided Interventional Left Atrial Appendage Closure
    Echocardiography-guided Percutaneous Interventional for Mitral Valve Stenosis
    Echocardiography-guided Percutaneous Interventional for Aortic Valve Stenosis
    Echocardiography-guided Percutaneous Interventional for Coarctation of Aorta
    Post-procedural Management of Echocardiography-guided Percutaneous Interventions.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Emerson Lima, Mariana Lima.
    Summary: Percutaneous Collagen Induction with Microneedling is a minimally invasive technique widely used to treat numerous dermatologic conditions such as facial and body scars, melasma, wrinkles, skin laxity, stretch marks, alopecies, vitiligo and scleroderma. Microneedling can also be used to optimize transdermal drug delivery for many substances. This technique uses modern microneedling devices containing multiple fine needles, typically 0.5 to 2.5 mm in length, which are mounted on a barrel and rolled onto the skin to create numerous perforations into the stratum corneum and the papillary dermis. These micro-wounds initiate the release of growth factors, triggering collagen and elastin formation, which results in dermal remodeling and skin resurfacing. This book provides a step-by-step approach to microneedling, based on the authors' more than ten years of experience with the technique, during which they have treated more than 3,000 patients in Brazil for numerous dermatologic conditions. Richly illustrated throughout, it includes over 400 illustrations.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Presentation
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    About the Authors
    Chapter 1: Fundamentals of Percutaneous Collagen Induction (PCI) with Needles
    1.1 Percutaneous Needle Collagen Induction (PCI) Versus Ablative Procedures
    1.2 Principles of the PCI Technique
    1.3 Characteristics of the PCI Technique
    1.4 PCI Advantages
    1.5 Disadvantages of PCI
    Sources
    Chapter 2: Classification and Characteristics of the Injury Provoked by PCI
    2.1 Level of the Injury and Its Relationship to the Length of the Needle
    2.2 Classification of Injury Level
    2.3 Final Considerations 4.2.10 Peripheral Nerve Blocks
    4.2.11 Blocking the Supraorbital and Supratrochlear Nerves
    4.2.12 Infraorbital Nerve Block
    4.2.13 Nasociliary Nerve Block
    4.2.14 Lacrimal Nerve Block
    4.2.15 Zygomatic Nerve Block
    4.2.16 Mental Nerve Block
    4.3 Local Anesthetic Intoxication
    4.3.1 Special Features of Anesthesia for PCI
    Sources
    Chapter 5: Preparing the Skin for PCI and Postoperative Management
    5.1 Skin Care That Favors Treatment
    5.2 Detailing the Guidelines for Moderate Injury
    5.3 Detail of the Guidelines for Deep Lesion
    5.4 Biocellulose in Post-procedure 5.5 Closing Considerations
    Sources
    Chapter 6: Histopathological Evidences of the Percutaneous Collagen Induction with Microneedling
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Photoaging and Melasma
    6.3 Acne and Stretch Mark Scars
    Sources
    Chapter 7: Managing Complications in PCI
    7.1 PCI Versus Ablative Interventions
    7.2 Expected Reactions and Adverse Effects
    7.2.1 Edema
    7.2.2 Erythema
    7.2.3 Hematoma, Petechiae, and Purple
    7.2.4 Crusts
    7.2.5 Post-inflammatory Hyperpigmentation
    7.2.6 Desquamation
    7.2.7 Burning and Awareness
    7.2.8 Infections
    7.2.9 Pain 7.2.10 Depressed or Elevated Scars
    Sources
    Chapter 8: PCI in Aging Skin
    8.1 PCI Fundamentals in Skin Aging
    8.2 Applicability of PCI to Skin Aging
    8.3 Thickness of Skin
    8.4 Wrinkle Depth
    8.5 Flaccidity
    8.6 Step-by-Step
    8.6.1 Deep Injury
    8.7 Methodological Sequence for Deep Injury
    8.7.1 Moderate Injury
    8.8 Final Considerations
    Sources
    Chapter 9: PCI in the Treatment of Melasma
    9.1 Lima Protocol
    9.2 Mechanism of Action
    9.2.1 Proposed Methodological Sequence
    9.3 Final Considerations
    Sources
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Stéphane Rinfret, editor.
    Summary: The second edition of this essential text provides readers with a detailed guide to performing various percutaneous coronary intervention (PCI) techniques for treating coronary chronic total occlusion (CTO). PCI continues to be an effective procedure to help patients with this pathology, with high success and low complications rates. Chapters feature a step-by-step approach to relevant techniques and describe their potential pitfalls, enabling the reader to develop a thorough understanding of how to perform those procedures successfully. Details of the latest methods for angiography analysis and the management of ostial CTOs, plus heavily revised chapters on topics such as contemporary device-based antegrade dissection and the retrograde approach through septal and non-septal collateral channels ensure that this Work remains the most up-to-date reference on the subject. Percutaneous Intervention for Coronary Chronic Total Occlusion: The Hybrid Approach represents a vital reference to assist practicing and trainee interventional cardiologist in learning these techniques. Various examples are provided, with a vast selection of still images and angiographic video loops to enable the reader become confident in applying these methodologies into their day-to day clinical practice.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface of the First edition
    Preface of the Second edition
    Contents
    About the Editor
    1: What Is What: Important Definitions in Chronic Total Occlusion Percutaneous Coronary Intervention
    Introduction
    Anatomical and Procedural Definitions
    Efficacy and Safety Endpoints
    Conclusion
    References
    2: The Histopathophysiology of Chronic Total Occlusion and Its Impact on Mode of Treatment
    Introduction
    Mechanisms of Lesion Progression and Histologic Studies of CTO
    Characteristics of the Arterial Wall
    The Lesion Characteristics of CTO With or Without Prior CABG
    Clinical Translation from a Pathological Point of View
    Conclusions
    References
    3: Who Are Best Candidates for Chronic Total Occlusion Revascularization
    Introduction
    Prior Evidence
    EXPLORE Trial
    REVASC Trial
    EUROCTO Trial
    DECISION-CTO Trial
    Conclusions from Trials
    Which Patients Are Best Candidates?
    Final Remarks
    Conclusions
    References
    4: Why, When and How to Assess Ischemia and Viability in Patients with Chronic Total Occlusions
    Introduction
    Ischemia, Hibernation, and Viability
    Why to Assess Ischemia and Viability?
    Ischemia
    Ischemia and Collaterals, and After Opening the CTO
    Ischemia and Prognosis
    Ischemia and Symptoms
    Viability
    When to Assess Ischemia and Viability?
    Guideline Recommendations
    STEMI Patients with a CTO
    Stable Patients with a CTO
    Case Examples
    How to Assess Ischemia and Viability?
    Ischemia
    Nuclear Myocardial Perfusion Imaging
    Stress Echocardiography
    Stress Cardiac Magnetic Resonance Imaging
    Viability
    Stress Echocardiography
    Cardiac Magnetic Resonance Imaging
    Nuclear Imaging
    Conclusion
    References
    5: How to Set Up a Chronic Total Occlusion Angioplasty Program
    Introduction
    Developing CTO Skills. Operator Selection
    Operator Training
    CTO Program Built Around Two Operators
    Infrastructure
    Cardiac Catheterization Laboratory Volume
    Cardiac Catheterization Laboratory
    Cardiac Surgery Program/Extracorporeal Membrane Oxygenation (ECMO)
    Nonmedical Staff
    Administrative Support
    Quality Control
    Pre-procedure: CTO Clinic
    Pre-PCI Explanation of the Plan
    Post Procedure: CTO Rounds
    Getting Started, the Practicalities
    References
    6: Equipment Requirement for Chronic Total Occlusion Percutaneous Coronary Intervention
    Sheaths
    Guide Catheters
    Microcatheters
    Finecross
    Corsair Series
    Turnpike Series
    Mamba Series
    Guidewires
    Dissection/Reentry Equipment
    Guide Catheter Extensions
    Snares
    Equipment for "Uncrossable-Undilatable" Lesions
    Intravascular Ultrasound (IVUS)
    Complication Management Equipment
    References
    7: The Hybrid Approach and Its Variations for Chronic Total Occlusion Percutaneous Coronary Intervention
    Introduction and Historical Perspective
    Simplifying the Complex
    The Algorithms.... Combined
    Who Should Do the Procedure?
    Pre-procedure Coronary CT Angiography
    Choosing the Initial Strategy
    Antegrade Wiring
    Secondary and Bailout Strategies with Primary AW Approach
    Antegrade Dissection and Reentry (ADR)
    The Retrograde Approach
    In-Stent Chronic Total Occlusion
    Switching Strategies
    Ending the Procedure
    Conclusions
    References
    8: When, Why, and How to Perform Good Angiographic Analysis Before CTO PCI
    Introduction
    When and Why
    How
    CTO Angiography
    CTO Angiographic Analysis
    Target Vessel
    CTO Characteristics
    Donor Vessels
    Collateral Circulation
    Collateral Pathways
    Interventional Collaterals
    Conclusion
    References
    9: Specific Basic Techniques to Master in CTO PCI
    Approaching the CTO Segment. Wire Manipulation Techniques in CTO
    Trapping Balloon Technique
    References
    10: When, Why and How to Perform an Antegrade Approach Using a Wiring Technique
    Introduction
    Anatomical Subsets That Favor Antegrade Wiring
    Lesion Length
    Proximal Cap Anatomy
    In-CTO Tortuosity (&gt
    45°)
    Presence of Intra-CTO Calcium
    Previous Procedural Failure
    Other Factors
    Degree of Disease in the "Distal Landing Zone"
    Presence of "Interventional Collaterals"
    Basic Principles of CTO PCI
    Planning
    Visibility
    Backup Support
    Use of "Over-the-Wire" Equipment
    Wire Selection
    Tapered Polymer-Coated Wires
    Medium Weight Wires
    High Gram Weight Wires
    The Proximal Cap and How to Assess It
    Wire Selection: Principles and Rationale
    Polymer-Coated Wires
    Penetration Force
    Tactile Feel
    Torque Transmission
    Wire Selection
    Wire Shaping
    Confirming Progress and Ensuring Safety
    Confirming True Lumen Entry
    Angiographically
    Wire Feel
    Intravascular Ultrasound (IVUS)
    Advancing Equipment
    Anchor Balloon
    Guide Extension
    Higher Support Microcatheter
    Laser Atherectomy
    Rotational Atherectomy
    Indications and Use of Adjunctive Imaging Strategies
    CTA
    IVUS
    When to Switch Strategy
    References
    11: When, Why, and How to Perform Wire-Based Antegrade Dissection and Reentry Technique
    References
    12: When and How to Perform Contemporary Device-Based Antegrade Dissection and Re-entry Technique
    Introduction
    Evolution of Strategies for ADR
    Primary ADR: A Step-by-Step Approach
    Troubleshooting ADR Procedures and Bailout Manoeuvres
    Outcomes with ADR in Contemporary Practice
    Conclusions
    References
    13: How to Deal with Difficult Antegrade Issues
    Difficult Antegrade Issues That Apply to Both AW and ADR
    Ambiguous Proximal Cap
    Impenetrable Cap. Uncrossable Lesion
    Difficult Antegrade Issues That Are Unique to Antegrade Dissection Reentry
    Crossboss Challenges
    Reentry Challenges
    References
    14: Intra-occlusion Microinjection of Contrast: When, Why, and How
    References
    15: When, Why, and How to Perform the Antegrade Fenestration and Reentry Technique
    Introduction
    Pathophysiological Bases and Development of Antegrade Fenestration and Reentry (AFR)
    Procedural Description of Antegrade Fenestration and Reentry (AFR)
    Real-Life Experience with Antegrade Fenestration and Reentry (AFR)
    Role of Antegrade Fenestration and Reentry (AFR) in the Hybrid Algorithm
    Further Developments in Antegrade Fenestration and Reentry (AFR)
    Conclusions
    References
    16: When, Why, and How to Perform the Retrograde Approach Through Septal Collateral Channels
    When to Select the Retrograde Approach: How to Analyze the Coronary Angiography
    How to Set Up the Procedure
    Pathways to the Distal Cap (Table 16.1)
    Collateral Channels
    Step-by-Step Approach
    Selecting the Microcatheter, Crossing the Collateral Channel with a Wire, and the Microcatheter
    Selecting the Microcatheter
    Crossing a Septal CC with the Wire
    Surfing from PDA to LAD: A More Difficult Task
    Advancing the Microcatheter to the Distal Cap Through the Septal CC
    Special Situations and Considerations
    Using an Internal Mammary Artery as a Donor Artery to Septal CCs
    LAD or LCX CTOs in a Dominant Left System
    References
    17: When, Why, and How to Perform the Retrograde Approach Through Epicardial and Non-septal Collateral Channels
    When to Perform Retrograde CTO PCI Via Non-septal Connections? Anatomic Evaluation
    Algorithms for Performing Retrograde Approach
    Collateral Channel Scores
    Why Performing Retrograde CTO PCI Via Non-septal CCs? Clinical Evaluation. Indication and Timing of Using Non-septal Collateral CCs
    Risk-Benefit Assessment of Selecting Non-septal CCs
    How to Perform Retrograde CTO PCI Via Non-septal Connections: Practical Considerations
    Arterial Access
    Non-septal Collateral Channel Crossing
    Crossing the CTO
    Externalization
    Complications Related to Retrograde CTO PCI Via Non-septal Connections
    Perforation of the CC When the CTO Is Crossed
    Perforation of the CC When the CTO Remains Uncrossed
    References
    18: When, Why, and How to Perform the Retrograde Approach Through Patent or Occluded SVGs
    Introduction
    CTO PCI in Post-CABG Patients
    Retrograde Approach Through an SVG
    Retrograde Via Diseased But Patent SVGs
    Retrograde Via Occluded SVGs
    Guide Extensions in SVGs
    Specific Situations
    Stumpless SVG Use
    Retrograde Access Via Acutely or Recently Thrombosed SVG in ACS Patients
    How to Deal with Acute Angle of Distal Anastomosis
    Distal Anastomosis Ambiguity
    Stenting Coronary Across Distal SVG Anastomosis After CTO PCI
    Dealing with Anastomotic Stents in SVGs
    Protecting the Graft
    What To Do with the SVG Once the Native Artery CTO is Open?
    Potential Complications When Using SVGs as Retrograde Conduits
    Distal Embolization
    SVG Perforation
    Aortic Dissection
    Mediastinal Bleeding/Haematoma
    References
    19: How to Cross the Occlusion Using a Retrograde Approach, How to Externalize, and How to Snare Long Wires
    Introduction
    Retrograde Wiring
    Wire Choice
    Confirming Wire Position
    Note on Safety in RW
    Retrograde Dissection and Re-entry
    Creating an Antegrade Dissection
    Use of Guide Catheter Extension
    Creating a Retrograde Dissection
    Joining the Spaces
    Externalization
    Use of Snare for Externalization
    Principles of Snaring
    How to Snare.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Kamran Ahrar, Sanjay Gupta, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive source for all aspects of percutaneous image-guided biopsy. A synthesis of rationale, technique and evidence-based medicine, it offers a clear approach to imaging, devices, procedures and patient care.

    Contents:
    Biopsy devices and techniques
    CT-guided biopsy
    Radiation protection during CT-guided interventions
    Ultrasound-guided biopsy
    MRI-guided biopsy
    Fluoroscopy-guided biopsy
    Advanced tools and devices: navigation technologies, automation, and robotics in percutaneous interventions
    Pathologic evalution of tissues obtained by interventional radiology techniques
    Biopsy of head and neck lesions
    Biopsy of mediastinal lesions
    Percutaneous transthoracic lung biopsy
    Pleural biopsy
    Liver biopsy
    Percutaneous biopsy of the pancreas
    Spleen biopsy
    Adrenal gland biopsy
    Renal mass biopsy
    Percutaneous and transjugular kidney biopsy
    Nodes and soft tissue masses involving the retroperitoneum, mesentery, omentum and peritoneal ligaments
    Biopsy of pelvic lesions
    MRI-guided prostate biopsy
    Biopsy of the spine
    Anatomic guidelines and approaches for biopsy of the long bones
    Musculoskeletal biopsies: extremities.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Stéphane Rinfret, editor.
    Contents:
    1. How to justify CTO revascularization
    2. How to set up a chronic total occlusion angioplasty program
    3. What equipment should be available?
    4. Specific basic techniques to master in CTO PCI
    5. When and how to perform an antegrade approach using a wire escalation technique
    6. When and how to perform an antegrade dissection/re-entry approach using the CrossBoss and Singray Catheters
    7. How to deal with difficult antegrade issues
    8. Intra-occlusion microinjectin of contrast: when, why and how
    9. How and when to perform the retrograde approach
    10. How to recanalize in-stent chronic total occlusion
    11. How to fix common problems encountered in CTO PCI: the expanded hybrid approach
    12. How to improve catheter support during CTO PCI
    13. When and how to perform a transradial appraoch for CTO PCI
    14. How to manage radiation and contrast during chronic total occlusion percutaneous coronary intervention
    15. Complications of chronic total occlusion percutaneous coronary intervention
    16. How to prevent perforation during CTO PCI
    17. How to prevent and manage ischemic complications during CTO PCI
    18. Managing entrapped gear during chronic total occlusion interventions
    19. How to start and build your CTO practice and maintain referrals in a competitive environment
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Guohua Zeng, Kemal Sarica, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Nina Dragicevic, Howard I. Maibach, editors.
    Contents:
    NANOCARRIERS IN PENETRATION ENHANCEMENT
    Role Of Nanotechnology In Skin Delivery Of Drugs
    LIPID-BASED VESICLES
    Liposomes As Drug Delivery Systems In Dermal/Transdermal Drug Delivery (From The Beginning)
    Transfersomes For Enhanced Skin Permeation Of Drugs
    Mechanism Of Penetration Enhancement Of Ultra deformable Vesicles
    Enhanced Skin Permeation Using Ethosomes
    Invasomes-Vesicles For Enhanced Skin Delivery Of Drugs
    Penetration-Enhancer-Containing Vesicles For Cutaneous Drug Delivery
    Stratum Corneum Lipid Liposomes
    Vesosomes
    Surface-Charged Vesicles For Penetration Enhancement
    SURFACTANT-BASED VESICLES
    Niosomes And Pro-Niosomes For Enhanced Skin Delivery
    Novasomes For Enhanced Skin Delivery
    LIPID-BASED ICULATE CARRIERS (OR ICLES)
    Solid Lipid Nanoicles, Nano structured Lipid Carriers And Lipid Nano capsules For Topical Delivery
    POLYMER-BASED NANOCARRIERS (ICULATE CARRIERS) IN PENETRATION ENHANCEMENT
    Polymeric Nano (And Micro-) Particles As Carriers For Enhanced Skin Penetration (General)
    Polymeric Nanocapsules For Cutaneous Application
    Polymeric Micelles In Dermal/Transdermal Drug Delivery
    Dendrimers In Enhancing Skin Penetration
    Dendritic Core-Multishell (CMS) Nanotransporters For Skin Delivery
    NANOCRYSTALS IN PENETRATION ENHANCEMENT
    Nanocrystals For Enhanced Skin Delivery Of Drugs.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Nina Dragicevic, Howard I. Maibach, editors.
    Summary: Percutaneous Penetration Enhancers in a mini-series format comprising five volumes, represents the most comprehensive reference on enhancement methods - both well established and recently introduced - in the field of dermal/transdermal drug delivery. In detail the broad range of both chemical and physical methods used to enhance the skin delivery of drugs is described. All aspects of drug delivery and measurement of penetration are covered, and the latest findings are provided on skin structure and function, mathematics in skin permeation, and modern analytical techniques adapted to assess and measure penetration. In offering a detailed description of the methods currently in use for penetration enhancement, this book will be of value for researchers, pharmaceutical scientists, practitioners, and also students.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Manoj Monga, Abhay Rane.
    Contents:
    Section 1. Introduction
    section 2. Percutaneous management of large renal calculi (Percutaneous Nephrolithotomy)
    section 3. Percutaneous management of transitional cell cancer (Percutaneous resection of tumor)
    section 4. Percutaneous ablation of renal cell cancer (Thermal and nonthermal).
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    David R Webb.
    Contents:
    Foreword
    Anatomy
    Equipment, Instruments, and Personnel
    Indications for PCNL-Patient Selection and Evaluation
    Percutaneous Nephrostomy
    Routine Percutaneous Nephrolithotomy and Pyeloplasty
    Complex Punctures
    Complications of PCNL and their Management
    Critical Pathways, Theatre Equipment Lists and Setups
    PCNL Workshop.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Giuseppe Servillo, Paolo Pelosi, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Tracheostomy: from surgical to percutaneous techniques
    2. Anatomiical and sonographic landmark
    3. Indication and timing
    4. Surgical tracheostomy
    5. Percutaneous tracheostomy: the ciaglia techniques
    6. Balloon dilation tracheostomy
    7. Percutaneous tracheostomy: the guide wire dilating forceps technique
    8. Frova's rotational technique and Fantoni's translaryngeal tracheostomy
    9. Choice of the appropriate tracheostomy technique
    10. Complications of percutaneous and surgical tracheostomy in critically ill patients
    11. Emergency percutaneous tracheotomy
    12. Tracheostomy tube types and criteria of choice
    13. Airway managment during tracheostomy: conventional device, laryngeal mask airway, double lumen endotracheal tube
    14. Medical and nursing management of tracheostomy
    15 .Quality of life and complications after percutaneous tracheostomy
    16. Clinical practice of informed consent for percutaneous tracheostomy
    17. Tracheostomy in intensive care unit: the need of European guidelines.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Patrizia Presbitero, Julinda Mehilli, Anna Sonia Petronio, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Women and invasive diagnostic procedures
    2. Intracoronary imaging and intracoronary functional tests
    3. Interventional treatment of stable coronary artery disease in women
    4. Interventional treatment of Acute Coronary Syndrome (ACS): non-ST-elevation ACS (NSTE-ACS)
    5. Interventional treatment of acute coronary syndrome: ST-segment elevation myocardial infarction
    6. Peri- and Post-procedural Antithrombotic Therapy in Women
    7. Aortic valve valvuloplasty
    8. Transcatheter aortic valve implantation
    9. Mitral valvuloplasty for mitral stenosis
    10. Treatment of mitral regurgitation
    11. Surgical and percutaneous treatment of tricuspid valve
    12. Left atrial appendage closure
    13. Closure of atrial septal defect and patent foramen ovale
    14. Ablation of atrial fibrillation in women
    15. Biventricular pacing in women for heart failure
    16. Thoracic and abdominal aorta percutaneous treatment
    17. Treatment of peripheral arteriopathy in women
    18. Gender Differences in Carotid Artery Stenting
    19. Percutaneous treatment during pregnancy
    20. Left ventricular assist devices.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Edward C. Halperin, David E. Wazer, Carlos A. Perez, Luther W. Brady.
    Summary: For more than 30 years, Perez and Brady's Principles and Practice of Radiation Oncology has been a reference for radiation oncologists and radiation oncology residents who need a comprehensive text covering both the biological and physical science aspects of this complex field as well as disease site-specific information on the integrated, multidisciplinary management of patients with cancer. The book has established itself as the discipline's "text-of-record," belonging on the shelf of all of those working in the field. The Seventh Edition continues this tradition of excellence with extensive updates throughout, many new chapters, and more than 1,400 full-color illustrations that highlight key concepts in tumor pathogenesis, diagnosis, and targeted radiation therapy.

    Contents:
    Sect. I: Overview and basic science of radiation oncology
    Pt. A: Cancer biology
    Pt. B: Medical radiation physics
    Sect. II: Techniques, modalities, and modifiers in radiation oncology
    Sect. III: Clinical radiation oncology Pt. A: Skin
    Pt. B: Central nervous system
    Pt. C: Head and neck
    Pt. D: Thorax
    Pt. E: Breast
    Pt. F: Gastrointestinal
    Pt. G: Urinary tract
    Pt. H: Male genitourinary
    Pt. I: Gynecologic
    Pt. J: Adrenal and retroperitoneal tumors
    Pt. K: Lymphoma and hematologic tumors
    Pt. L: Bone and soft tissue
    Pt. M: Pediatric
    Pt. N: Benign diseases
    Sect. IV: Palliative and supportive care
    Sect. V: Economics, education, ethics, and technology assessment.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Michel Gagner, Almino Ramos Cardoso, Mariano Palermo, Patrick Noel, David Nocca, editors.
    Summary: Sleeve gastrectomy (SG) is the most common bariatric procedure, accounting for more than 55% of all such surgeries performed worldwide. Obesity has become a major global problem that continues to spread in both developed and developing countries. While prevention of obesity is the best approach for the future, the current challenge is managing those who are already obese or morbidly obese, who constitute close to two thirds of the population in many countries, such as the US. Today, bariatric surgery is the only evidence-based treatment for morbid obesity with a low complication rate and acceptable results in the long-term for both weight loss and resolution of comorbidities. This book details all the approaches used in sleeve gastrectomy (SG), offering readers the tools needed to perform the perfect SG. Each chapter focuses on the clinical problems and the indications for the sleeve, and describes the technique step-by-step (including videos), the staplers, the different sizes of bougies, reinforcement of the sutures after the sleeve and the metabolic effects of surgery. The book also presents nontraditional SG techniques, such as the endoscopic approach, stapled sleeve and robotic technologies, discussing how to immediately identify complications and their treatment using endoscopy, laparoscopy and percutaneous image guided surgery. Further, it includes a chapter on revision surgery and revision procedures, not only from sleeve to other procedures, but also from other procedures to SG. The last section offers an overview of what the authors imagine the future holds for this bariatric procedure. The Perfect Sleeve Gastrectomy - A Clinical Guide to Evaluation, Treatment, and Techniques is an ideal reference resource for general surgeons, bariatric surgeons, endoscopists and gastroenterologists as well as researchers with an interest in obesity and its management. It also appeals to residents and fellows, dietitians, diabetes specialist, psychotherapists and hospital administrators and quality officers.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Operative preparation and background
    Part 2: Technical aspects
    Part 3: Sleeve gastrectomy GERD and hiatal hernia
    Part 4: Nontraditional sleeve gastrectomy
    Part 5: Treatment of complications
    Part 6: Revisional Surgery
    Part 7: Education and future. .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    edited by Phillip N. Blondeel, Steven F. Morris, Geoffrey G. Hallock, Peter C. Neligan; with illustrations by Jennifer C. Darcy.
    Summary: Nearly two decades ago, the first edition of Perforator Flaps: Anatomy, Technique, & Clinical Applications was published, thereby filling a gap in the literature, and providing invaluable clinical pearls on the use of soft tissue flaps for reconstructive surgery. Since the publication of the second edition, technological advances including MRI angiography, standard color duplex ultrasound, ultra-high frequency ultrasound, and indocyanine green enabled better understanding of select pertinent physiology and delineation of perforators anywhere in the body. Greater anatomical knowledge and the ability to map the course of individual perforators is reflected in the updated third edition by renowned global experts and editors of the prior editions, Phillip N. Blondeel, Steven F. Morris, Geoffrey G. Hallock, and Peter C. Neligan. The primary goal of the third edition is to discuss evidenced-based perforator concepts and techniques that have been incorporated into global practice worldwide. Although condensed into a single volume, the new edition follows a similar format as prior editions, with chapters divided into four sections. The first section provides a solid foundation of knowledge with discussion of rudimentary fundamentals. The second section illustrates the use of basic types of local perforator flaps; introduces the vascularized dermal graft; describes routine suprafascial flap dissections with perforators themselves as recipient and donor vessels; lymphatics reconstituted in concert with perforator flaps; and how to minimize donor site morbidity with "kiss" flaps. The third section outlines basic anatomy and techniques for common perforator flaps, while the fourth section provides a brief overview of suggested preferences for clinical applications, with both sections organized by body region.-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    [edited by] Joshua L. Levine, Julie Vasile, Constance M. Chen, Robert J. Allen, Sr.
    Contents:
    The history of the use of perforator flaps for microsurgical breast reconstruction / Sarah E. Appleton and Steven F. Morris
    Starting a perforator flap breast program / Christina R. Vargas and Bernard T. Lee
    Essential equipment needed for perforator flap breast reconstruction and
    Operating room setup / David Greenspun
    Deep inferior epigastric perforator flap for breast reconstruction / Robert J. Allen, Sr., Constance M. Chen, and Maria M. Lotempio
    Superficial inferior epigastric artery flap for breast reconstruction / Aldona J. Spiegel
    Gluteal artery perforator flap for breast reconstruction / Richard Mahlon Kline, Jr., and James Ernest Craigie
    Profunda artery perforator flap for breast reconstruction / Robert J. Allen, Sr., Maria M. Lotempio, and Constance M. Chen
    Free lumbar artery perforator flap for autologous breast reconstruction / Koen Van Landuyt and Steven F. Morris
    Pedicled lateral thoracic flap for breast reconstruction / Moustapha Hamdi and Assaf Zeltzer
    Bipedicled (double or stacked) abdominal perforator flap in unilateral breast
    Reconstruction / Julie V. Vasile and Joshua L. Levine
    Venus salvage procedures in the deep inferior epigastric perforator flap for
    Breast reconstruction / Thomas Constantinescu and Ming-Huei Cheng
    Imaging for perforator flap breast reconstruction / Julie V. Vasile
    Lateral thigh perforator flap (septocutaneous tensor fasciae latae flap) / Stephania Tuinder, Arno Lataster, and Rene Remmelt Willie Johan van der Hulst
    Stacked diep/pap flap breast reconstruction / James L. Mayo and Robert J. Allen, Sr
    Deep circumflex iliac artery perforator flap for breast reconstruction / Edward Buchel
    Indocyanine green/spy imaging in perforator flap breast reconstruction / Michael R. Zenn.
  • Print
    National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC78.5 P47 2019
    1
  • Print
    National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC78.7.T62 P47 2018
    1
  • Digital
    Howard A. Bird.
    Contents:
    1. Expert Care of the Performing Artist
    2. Musical Instruments and their Demands on the Body
    3. Styles of Dance and Their Demands on the Body
    4. The Voice and the Musculoskeletal System
    5. Principles of Management
    6. Illustrative Musical Case Studies
    7. Illustrative Dance Case Studies
    8. Overuse Syndromes
    9. Hypermobility in Dance; Asset not Liability
    10. Scoliosis in Musicians and Dancers
    11. Drugs and Therapeutics
    12. The Disabled Performer
    13. The Multi-Talented Performer
    14. Future Trends.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Massimo Morbidelli, Moritz Wolf, Jean-Marc Bielser.
    Summary: This book is a monography about perfusion cell cultures for the production of biopharmaceuticals, such as therapeutic proteins (i.e. biomolecules like monoclonal antibodies), and describes the fundamentals, design and operation of these processes. Context is given in the first chapters to understand the state-of-the-art of the technology. We then give an overview of the challenges and objectives in operating mammalian cell perfusion cultures and provide guidelines for the design and setup of lab-scale bioreactor systems, and the required control structure to achieve stable operation. Scale-down devices and PAT tools are described in the context of continuous manufacturing and guidelines for process optimization are given using a variety of case studies to illustrate different approaches. Scale-up is also adressed with a strong focus on bioreactor aeration and mixing, shear stress and cell retention device. Finally, a general introduction for the application of mechanistic and statistic models in bioreactor process development and optimization is given in the last chapter. Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Perfusion mammalian cell culture for recombinant protein manufacturing
    Perfusion bioreactors : the set up and process characterization
    Scale-down models and sensors for process development
    Design and optimization of mammalian cell perfusion cultures
    Clinical and commercial scale reactors
    Mechanistic and statistical modeling of bioprocesses.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Gregory S. Matte.
    Contents:
    Equipment for bypass
    Priming the bypass circuit
    The bypass plan
    Typical phases of cardiopulmonary bypass
    Additional notes based on bypass tasks
    Bypass considerations based on diagnosis
    Notes on select issues during bypass
    Notes on select emergency procedures during bypass
    Brief overview of named procedures and terms
    Abbreviations for congenital heart surgery.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    Anastasia Kelekis-Cholakis, Reem Atout, Nader Hamdan, Ioannis Tsourounakis.
    Summary: This book is an up-to-date reference that provides detailed guidance on how to diagnose and manage the soft and hard tissue complications that may be associated with a functioning dental implant placement, such as peri-implant mucositis, soft tissue loss, and peri-implantitis. Treatment options for each complication are described and illustrated step by step and carefully selected cases are presented to further explain the individual stages in management and to highlight key learning points. Practical advice is offered on all aspects of diagnosis, and information is also presented on the definition and etiology of the various complications. The book is in an easy-to-read format and includes a review of the latest literature on the topic.

    Contents:
    An introduction to understanding the basics of teeth vs. dental implants : similarities and differences
    Peri-implant soft tissue deficiencies
    Peri-implant mucositis
    Hard tissue complications/peri-implantitis.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Vijay Vohra, Nikunj Gupta, Annu Sarin Jolly, Seema Bhalotra, editors.
    Summary: The book covers all aspects of peri-operative anesthetic management of liver transplant patients. It provides a comprehensive coverage of the relevant history, surgeons, hepatologists, intensivists and pediatricians perspective of the disease, its pathogenesis, clinical presentation and indication for transplant. It discusses the practical aspects like fluid management and use of vasopressors. The book is divided into sections for a better and comprehensive delivery of information. Individual sections provide up to date information on the pre-operative issues and optimisation, intra-operative care and management and post-operative critical care issues and management of all transplant patients with special emphasis on recent advances. Separate sections cover ICU care of these patients in great detail and anesthetic management of pediatric liver transplant. The book includes anesthetic techniques involved in conducting multiorgan transplant. It discusses clinical approach to a patient with acute liver failure, brain death criteria and laws and organ donor management. It also presents newer techniques and methodologies adopted in the field of liver transplant. It includes ample illustrations, flowcharts, key points in each chapter, figures and photographs. The book contains chapters focusing on post-transplant patients presenting for non-transplant surgery. The book fills the gap in the literature for a comprehensive guide for the anesthetist performing or pursuing liver transplant, students/trainees/examinees who have a keen interest in this field and doctors dealing with such patients in critical care, donor management, pursuing general anesthesia. It is also helpful for hepatologists, intensivists and surgeons associated with liver transplant.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    1: The History of Liver Transplantation in India
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Background
    1.3 Step I: Public Education
    1.4 Step 2: Changing the Law
    1.5 Step 3: The Initial Procedures
    1.6 Step 4: Sustainable Programmes
    1.6.1 Numbers
    1.6.2 Statewise Distribution
    1.6.3 The Situation in 2020
    1.7 India Vs the World
    1.8 Concerns
    1.9 Recommendations
    1.10 Conclusions
    Part I: Basics Anatomy and Pathophysiology of Liver Disease
    2: Physiological Role of Liver and Interpreting Liver Function Tests 2.1 Gross Anatomy of the Liver
    2.1.1 Hepatic Blood Flow Regulation
    2.2 Cellular Anatomy of the Liver
    2.2.1 Models of Liver Microanatomy
    2.3 Liver, the Immunological Gateway
    2.3.1 Innate and Adaptive Immunity
    2.3.2 Immune Tolerance
    2.4 Hepatic Drug Metabolism
    2.4.1 First Pass Effect
    2.4.2 Phases of Drug Metabolism
    2.4.3 Drug Extraction Ratio
    2.5 Energy Metabolism
    2.5.1 Glucose Homeostasis
    2.5.2 Nitrogen Metabolism
    2.5.3 Fatty Acid Metabolism
    2.6 Role of the Liver in Coagulation
    2.7 Hepatic Endocrine Function 2.8 Chronic Liver Disease
    2.9 Interpreting Liver Function Tests
    2.10 Tests Detecting Hepatocyte Injury
    2.10.1 Serum Aminotransferases
    2.10.2 AST to ALT Ratio
    2.10.3 Lactate Dehydrogenase
    2.11 Tests Detecting Injury to Bile Ducts
    2.11.1 Alkaline Phosphatase
    2.12 5′-Nucleotidase
    2.13 Gamma-Glutamyl Transferase
    2.14 Tests Assessing Biliary Organic Anion Transport
    2.14.1 Serum Bilirubin
    2.15 Tests Measure Hepatic Synthetic Capacity
    2.15.1 Serum Proteins
    2.16 Prothrombin Time and International Normalized Ratio 2.17 Tests Measuring Blood Flow and Metabolic Capacity of Liver
    2.18 Pattern of Liver Test Abnormalities
    2.19 Monitoring Liver Transplant
    References
    3: Surgical Anatomy of the Liver
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Ligaments of the Liver (Fig. 3.1)
    3.2.1 Ligamentum Venosum (Arantius Ligament)
    3.3 Lobar and Segmental Anatomy of the Liver
    3.3.1 Functional Surgical Anatomy of the Liver
    3.3.2 Bismuth's Liver Segmentation
    3.4 Caudate Lobe
    3.4.1 Hepatocaval Ligament (Makuuchi Ligament)
    3.4.2 Riedel Lobe (Fig. 3.8)
    3.5 Hepatic Veins (Venous Outflow) 3.5.1 Right Inferior Hepatic Veins: RIHV (Fig. 3.11)
    3.5.2 Inferior Phrenic Veins
    3.6 Anatomical Relations Around the Hilum
    3.6.1 Extrahepatic and Intrahepatic Vasculature
    3.7 Portal Vein
    3.8 Hepatic Artery
    3.9 Biliary Anatomy
    3.9.1 Intrahepatic Bile Duct Anatomy
    3.9.2 The Right Hepatic Duct
    3.9.3 The Left Hepatic Duct
    3.9.4 Extrahepatic Biliary Anatomy
    3.9.5 Biliary Ductal Anomalies
    3.9.6 Bile Duct Blood Supply
    3.10 Gallbladder and Cystic Duct
    3.10.1 The Calot's Triangle (Fig. 3.19)
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    edited by Daphne Stannard, Dina A. Krenzischek.
    Summary: PeriAnesthesia Nursing Care: A Bedside Guide for Safe Recovery is a key reference for clinicians practicing in preoperative areas, phase I and phase II PACU nursing areas, and nurses working in critical care, OB, and other specialty recovery units. Ideal for perianesthesia nursing orientation and perioperative cross-training programs, this text is beneficial for all those caring for pre- and postanesthesia patients. Additionally, it is a valuable tool for nursing students specializing in critical care and perianesthesia nurses preparing to sit for the certified post anesthesia nurse (CPAN) and certified ambulatory perianesthesia nurse (CAPA) certification examinations. Divided into three sections that cover the lifespan, PeriAnesthesia Nursing Care: A Bedside Guide for Safe Recovery is specifically designed to be functional for the clinician and grounding for the student nurse. The first section focuses on core concepts applicable to all perianesthesia patients and families, while the second is population specific, and the third concentrates on particular surgeries and procedures that follow body systems. --Book Jacket.
    Digital Access R2Library 2018
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    ASPAN, American Society of PeriAnesthesia Nurses ; [edited by] Lois Schick, Pamela E. Windle.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2021
  • Digital
    Alireza Fazeli, William V. Holt, editors.
    Summary: "This book presents a timely collection of reviews by experts in periconception and fertilization. The book provides a good introduction for those new to the field as well as those who have worked in this field for some time, but not have been able to keep up-to-date with recent advances on the topic. The book reviews the current knowledge in this field, then focuses its attention on short-term and long-term effects of the periconception period, both from a physiological and medical perspective. Finally the volume covers the examination of the potential mechanisms involved in controlling periconception period. From the early days of discovery about the basics of the fertilization process, scientist shave known that early events happening during conception play a major part in the creation of new offspring. However, until nearly a decade ago we thought these events were just concerned with the conception and nothing to do with lifelong health and welfare, or wellbeing of the offspring. Early indications from IVF in sheep and cattle suggested that the embryo culture conditions employed in the laboratory could result in unusually large and unhealthy offspring. These observations sounded alarm bells and stimulated research into the impacts of in vivo and in vitro conditions on the health of embryos and offspring. This book provides a summary of the state-of-the-art research being done to more fully understand the importance of the periconception environment"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction: a brief guide to the periconception environment / Alireza Fazeli, William V. Holt
    Epigenetic influences during the periconception period and assisted reproduction / Akwasi A. Amoako, Tamer M. Nafee [and others]
    The importance of the periconception period: immediate effects in cattle breeding and in assisted reproduction such as artificial insemination and embryo transfer / Mieke Van Eetvelde, Sonia Heras, J. L. M. R. Leroy, Ann Van Soom, Geert Opsomer
    The consequences of maternal-embryonic cross talk during the periconception period on subsequent embryonic development / Dimitrios Rizos, Veronica Maillo, Maria-Jesús Sá́nchez-Calabuig [and others]
    The role of maternal nutrition during the periconceptional period and its effect on offspring phenotype / Tom P. Fleming, Judith J. Eckert, Oleg Denisenko
    The long-term effect of the periconception period on the embryo's epigenetic profile and phenotype: the role of maternal disease such as diabetes and how the effect is mediated (example from a rabbit model) / Bernd Fischer, Maria Schindler, S. Mareike Pendzialek, Jacqueline Gürke, Elisa Haucke [and others]
    Long-term effects of the periconception period on embryo epigenetic profile and phenotype: the role of stress and how this effect is mediated / James Ord, Alireza Fazeli, Penelope J. Watt
    The long-term effects of the periconceptional period on embryo epigenetic profile and phenotype; the paternal role and his contribution, and how males can affect offspring's phenotype/epigenetic profile / Emma S. Lucas, Adam J. Watkins
    Exploitation of non-mammalian model organisms in epigenetic research / William V. Holt.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Alexander Birbrair, editor.
    Summary: This volume explores novel concepts of pericyte biology. The present book is an attempt to describe the most recent developments in the area of pericyte biology which is one of the emergent hot topics in the field of molecular and cellular biology today. Here, we present a selected collection of detailed chapters on what we know so far about the pericytes. Together with its companion volumes Pericyte Biology in Different Organs and Pericyte Biology in Disease, Pericyte Biology - Novel Concepts presents a comprehensive update on the latest information and most novel functions attributed to pericytes. To those researchers newer to this area, it will be useful to have the background information on these cells' unique history. It will be invaluable for both advanced cell biology students as well as researchers in cell biology, stem cells and researchers or clinicians involved with specific diseases. .

    Contents:
    Pericyte biology: development, homeostasis, and disease / Alexander Birbrair
    The NG2 proteoglycan in pericyte biology / William B. Stallcup
    Pericytes for therapeutic bone repair / Carolyn A. Meyers, Joan Casamitjana, Leslie Chang, Lei Zhang, Aaron W. James, Bruno Péault
    Pericyte biology in zebrafish / Nabila Bahrami, Sarah J. Childs
    The microvascular pericyte: approaches to isolation, characterization, and cultivation / Paula Dore-Duffy, Nilufer Esen
    Pericytes in veterinary species: prospective isolation, characterization and tissue regeneration potential / Cristina L. Esteves, F. Xavier Donadeu
    Pericytes in the human vocal fold mucosa / Kiminori Sato
    Ca2+ signalling in pericytes / Theodor Burdyga, Lyudmyla Borysova
    Pericytes derived from human pluripotent stem cells / John Jamieson, Bria Macklin, Sharon Gerecht
    Pericytes in tissue engineering / Betül Çelebi-Saltik
    Pericyte Secretome / Abderahim Gaceb, Gesine Paul
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Alexander Birbrair, editor.
    Summary: The present book is an attempt to describe the most recent developments in the area of pericyte biology which is one of the emergent hot topics in the field of molecular and cellular biology today. Here, we present a selected collection of thirteen detailed chapters on what we know so far about pericytes in distinct organs in physiological and pathological conditions. Further, it provides an update on the most novel functions attributed to these cells and will introduce a newer generation of researchers and scientists to the importance of these cells, ranging from their discovery in different organs through current state-of-the-science. It will be invaluable for both advanced cell biology students as well as researchers in cell biology, stem cells and vascular research. This volume explores pericytes' physiologic roles in different tissues, ranging from the pancreas, lungs and liver through skeletal muscle, gut, retina and more. Together with its companion volumes Pericyte Biology in Disease and Pericyte Biology - Novel Concepts, Pericyte Biology in Different Organs presents a comprehensive update on the latest information and most novel functions attributed to pericytes. To those researchers newer to this area, it will be useful to have the background information on these cells' unique history. It will be invaluable for both advanced cell biology students as well as researchers in cell biology, stem cells and researchers or clinicians involved with specific organs. .

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    Pericytes in the Retina
    Pancreatic Pericytes in Glucose Homeostasis and Diabetes
    Pericytes in the Lung
    Pericytes in Skeletal Muscle
    Pericytes in the Gut
    Pericytes in Bone Marrow
    Cochlear Capillary Pericytes
    Pericytes in the Placenta: Role in Placental Development and Homeostasis
    Pericytes in the Liver
    Pericytes in the Periodontal Ligament
    Pericytes in the Heart
    Pericytes in the Umbilical Cord
    The Pluripotent Microvascular Pericytes Are the Adult Stem Cells Even in the Testis
    Index
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editor, Alexander Birbrair.
    Summary: This volume explores pericytes' roles under distinct pathological conditions, ranging from tumors, ALS, Alzheimers disease, Multiple Sclerosis, stroke, diabetes, atherosclerosis, muscular dystrophies and more. Together with its companion volumes Pericyte Biology in Different Organs and Pericyte Biology – Novel Concepts, Pericyte Biology in Disease presents a comprehensive update on the latest information and most novel functions attributed to pericytes. To those researchers newer to this area, it will be useful to have the background information on these cells' unique history. It will be invaluable for both advanced cell biology students as well as researchers in cell biology, stem cell biology and clinicians involved with these specific diseases.

    Contents:
    Pericytes in cutaneous wound healing
    Pericytes in glioblastomas: multifaceted role within tumor microenvironments and potential for therapeutic interventions
    Pericytes in breast cancer
    Pericytes in sarcomas and other mesenchymal tumors
    Pericytes in metastasis
    The role of pericytes in Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis
    Pericytes in Alzheimers Disease: novel clues to cerebral amyloid angiopathy pathogenesis
    Pericytes in Multiple Sclerosis
    Pericytes in ischemic stroke
    Pericytes in Hereditary Hemorrhagic Telangiectasia
    Pericytes in primary familial brain calcification
    Pericytes in type 2 diabetes
    Pericytes in atherosclerosis
    Pericytes in chronic lung disease
    Pericytes in muscular dystrophies
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Sandraluz Lara-Cinisomo, Katherine Leah Wisner, editors.
    Summary: Perinatal Depression among Spanish-Speaking and Latin American Women:A Global Perspective on Detection and Treatment. As more is known about postpartum depression, the more it is recognized as a global phenomenon. Yet despite the large numbers, information about this condition as experienced by Spanish speaking women and Latinas has not always been easy to come by. Perinatal Depression among Spanish-Speaking and Latin American Women focuses on four diverse Latina populations (Mexico, Chile, Spain, and U.S.) to analyze key similarities and differences within this large and wide-ranging group. This first-of-its-kind reference reviews current research on the topic, including prevalence, screening methods, interventions, and--of particular salience for this population--barriers to care. Findings on psychoeducation, assessment tools, and cognitive-behavioral and other forms of therapy provide important insights into best practices, and continuity of care. And psychosocial, cultural, and linguistic considerations in working with Latinas are described in depth for added clinical usefulness. This landmark volume: Outlines characteristics of Spanish-speaking women and Latinas screened for postpartum depression Introduces the Edinburgh Postnatal Depression Scale, English and Spanish versions, and reviews their use with Latina women Compares postpartum depression and health behaviors in Spanish and Latina immigrant mothers Offers streamlined assessment-to-intervention models Provides two in-depth case studies illustrating cultural factors influencing the treatment of Latinas with perinatal depression Presents an instructive firsthand account of postpartum depression. Between its thorough coverage of the issues and its innovative clinical ideas, Perinatal Depression among Spanish-Speaking and Latin American Women has a wealth of information of interest to researchers and practitioners in maternal and child health, obstetrics/gynecology, mental health, and women's health.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. A global perspective on postpartum depression: An overview of the current research with Spanish-speaking women in the U.S. and abroad
    Chapter 2. Characteristics of Hispanic Women Screened for Postpartum Depression
    Chapter 3. Maternity, migration and mental health: Comparison between Spanish and Latina immigrant mothers in postpartum depression and health behaviors
    Chapter 4. Assessment, Engagement and Treatment Entry for Latina Women with Perinatal Depression
    Chapter 5. Screening for postpartum depression in Chilean women with the Postpartum Depression Screening Scale, Spanish version
    Chapter 6. Perinatal Depression Treatments for U.S. Latinas: A Review of Research Findings
    Chapter 7. Psychosocial and cultural considerations in detecting and treating depression in Latina perinatal women in the United States
    Chapter 8. Perinatal depression in Mexican women: Prevalence, risk factors, and prevention of postpartum depression
    Chapter 9. Treating Latinas with postpartum depression: Two case reports
    Chapter 10. Maternidad Tab , the Silent Epidemic: An autobiographical story of postpartum depression in Mexico.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    [editors], Mary E. Norton, Jeffrey A. Kuller and Lorraine Dugoff.
    Summary: "Get a quick, expert overview of the fast-changing field of perinatal genetics with this concise, practical resource. Drs. Mary Norton, Jeffrey A. Kuller, and Lorraine Dugoff fully cover the clinically relevant topics that are key to providers who care for pregnant women and couples contemplating pregnancy. It's an ideal resource for Ob/Gyn physicians, maternal-fetal medicine specialists, and clinical geneticists, as well as midwives, nurse practitioners, and other obstetric providers"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Principles of medical genetics and genomics
    Non-Mendelian genetics
    Principles of genetic counseling
    Cytogenetics: part 1, general concepts and aneuploid conditions
    Cytogenetics: part 2, structural rearrangements and reproductive impact
    Molecular genetics
    Carrier screening
    Serum and ultrasound based screening tests for aneuploidy
    Cell free DNA screening
    Ultrasound markers for aneuploidy
    Genetic evaluation of fetal sonographic abnormalities
    Chromosomal microarray analysis
    Exome and genome sequencing
    Prenatal diagnostic testing
    Preimplantation genetic screening and diagnosis
    Fetal treatment of genetic disorders.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Antonio L. Teixeira, Danielle Macedo, Bernhard T. Baune, editors
    Summary: Perinatal psychiatry is an emerging field that investigates the role of perinatal events - for example pregnancy complications and infections - in the development of neuropsychiatric conditions, such as schizophrenia and mood disorders. Among the implicated pathological mechanisms, perinatal-induced inflammation seems to play a major role and is being considered as a potential target for therapeutic intervention. Bringing together various approaches in the field (preclinical and clinical, epidemiological, immunological and genetic methods), the book discusses the available evidence, the putative mechanisms and the challenges ahead. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Perinatal psychiatry : ready for prime time? / Sudhakar Selvaraj, Haitham Salem, Cristian P. Zeni, Antonio L. Teixeira
    Developmental programming during psychological stress in pregnancy : a neurobiological perspective / Natalie Aboustate, Bernhard T. Baune
    Epigenetic modifications of early-life stress and adult life psychopathology / Chris Murgatroyd
    Hypothalamus-pituitary-adrenal axis programming by early-life stress : a role played by inflammatory and epigenetic mechanisms / Gabriel R. Fries
    Intergenerational aspects of immune and endocrine function in perinatal depression / Andrew J. Perrin, Carmine M. Pariante, Patricia A. Zunszain
    Neonatal meningitis mechanisms and implications in adult life / Vijayasree V. Giridharan, Lutiana R. Simoes, Pavani Sayana, Fabricia Petronilho, Rodrigo Hasbun, Tatiana Barichello
    Toxoplasma gondii infection as a risk factor for major psychiatric disorders : pre-clinical and clinical evidence / João Luís Vieira Monteiro de Barros, Aline Silva de Miranda, Antonio Lucio Teixeira
    A critical appraisal on the epidemiological evidence linking perinatal inflammation and risk of psychosis / Lia Snaders, Felicia Gabler, David De Lucena
    Maternal immune activation as a risk factor for schizophrenia : evidence from preclinical and clinical studies / Camila Nayane de Carvalho Lima, Tejaswini Doifode, Allan Colodel, Pavani Sayana, Vijayasree V. Giridharan, Danielle S. Macedo et al.
    Sex and age influence in the effects of perinatal immune activation in animals / Danielle S. Macedo, Manuel Alves Santos Júnior, Aline Santos Monte, Germana Silva Vasconcelos, Tatiane da Silva Araújo, Silvânia Maria Mendes Vasconcelos
    Maternal immune activation and neuropsychiatric disorders : the intricate puzzle of autism specturm disorder / Mellanie Fontes-Dutra, Bruna Rabelo, Júlio Santos-Terra, Iohanna
    Zika virus infection and potential mechanisms implicated in neuropsychiatric complications / Fernanda Martins Marim, Vidyleison Neves Camargos, Celso Martins Queiroz-Junior, Vivian Vasconcelos Costa
    The immune responses at the fetomaternal interface / Moisés Evandro Bauer, Priscila Vianna
    Placenta and cord blood as source of immune markers of offspring neurodevelopment and psychopathology / Ana Cristina Simões e Siva, Janaina Matos Moreira, Rafael Coelho Magalhães
    Cytokine model of cognition in relation to mental disorders during neurodevelopment / Célia Fourrier, Bernhard T. Baune.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC454 .P47 2020
    1
  • Print
    edited by Frederick C. Battaglia, Giacomo Meschia, E. J. Quilligan.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RG600 .P416
    2
  • Digital
    Fabio Triulzi, Cristina Baldoli, Cecilia Parazzini and Andrea Righini.
    Contents:
    Normal development.- Normal and abnormal commissures development, midline anomalies
    Posterior fossa malformations
    Malformations of cortical development
    Malformations of eye and orbit
    Vascular malformations
    Ventriculomegaly
    Infections
    Ischemic and hemorrhagic lesions
    Twin to twin transfusion syndrome. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    Glenda Fregia Butnarescu.
    Contents:
    v.1 Reproductive health; v.2 Reproductive risk.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RG951 .B88
    2
  • Digital
    [clinical] editors, Kathleen Rice Simpson, Patricia A. Creehan, Nancy O'Brien-Abel, Cheryl K. Roth, Annie J. Rohan.
    Summary: "The goal of the book is to provide useful clinical information to practicing perinatal nurses. A perinatal nurse assist women during their pregnancy educating about childbirth techniques, prenatal health, and what to expect throughout their pregnancy as well as how to bond and care for their baby after birth. Perinatal Nursing provides up-to-date information on best practices, standards, guidelines, etc. It is a comprehensive text for the standard of care"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Erin M. Denney-Koelsch, Denise Côté-Arsenault.
    Summary: This unique book is a first-of-its-kind resource that comprehensively covers each facet and challenge of providing optimal perinatal palliative care. Designed for a wide and multi-disciplinary audience, the subjects covered range from theoretical to the clinical and the practically relevant, and all chapters include case studies that provide real-world scenarios as additional teaching tools for the reader. Perinatal Palliative Care: A Clinical Guide is divided into four sections. Part One provides the foundation, covering an overview of the field, key theories that guide the practice of perinatal palliative care, and includes a discussion of perinatal ethics and parental experiences and needs upon receiving a life-limiting fetal diagnosis. Part Two delves further into practical clinical care, guiding readers through issues of obstetrical management, genetic counseling, neonatal pain management, non-pain symptom management, spiritual care, and perinatal bereavement care. Part Three discusses models of perinatal palliative care, closely examining evidence for different types of PPC programs: from hospital-based programs, to community-based care, and examines issues of interdisciplinary PPC care coordination, birth planning, and team support. Finally, Part Four concludes the book with a close look at special considerations in the field. In this section, racial, ethnic, and cultural perspectives and implications for PPC are discussed, along with lessons in how to provide PPC for a wide-range of clinical and other healthcare workers. The book closes with a look to the future of the field of perinatal palliative care. Thorough and practical, Perinatal Palliative Care: A Clinical Guide is an ideal resource for any healthcare practitioner working with these vulnerable patient populations, from palliative care specialists, to obstetricians, midwifes, neonatologists, hospice providers, nurses, doulas, social workers, chaplains, therapists, ethicists, and child life specialist s.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Foundations of Perinatal Palliative Care
    1. Introduction to Perinatal Palliative Care
    2. Theoretical Perspectives to Guide the Practice of Perinatal Palliative Care
    3. Perinatal Ethics
    4. Parental Experiences and Needs After Life-Limiting Fetal Diagnosis.-Part 2 Clinical Care for Families Facing Life-Limiting Fetal Conditions
    5. Obstetrical Management in Life-Limiting Fetal Conditions
    6.Genetics and Genetic Counseling in Perinatal Palliative Care.-7. The Neonatologists Role in Prenatal Counseling
    8. Neonatal Pain Management
    9. Non-Pain Symptom Management
    10. The Role of the Palliative Care Specialist in Perinatal Care
    11. Spiritual Care in the Perinatal Period
    12. Perinatal Bereavement Care
    Part 3 Models of Perinatal Palliative Care
    13. Structure and Development of Hospital-Based Perinatal Palliative Care Programs
    14. Community-Based Perinatal Palliative Care
    15. Interdisciplinary Perinatal Palliative Care Coordination, Birth Planning, and Support of the Team
    Part 4 Special Considerations for the Field of Perinatal Palliative Care
    16. Considerations in Unique Populations in Perinatal Palliative Care: From Culture, Race, Infertility, and Beyond
    17. Education in Perinatal Palliative Care for Nurses, Physicians, and Other Health Professionals
    18. Advancing the Field of Perinatal Palliative Care: Needs and Strategies.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Marta C. Antonelli, editor.
    Contents:
    Changes Induced by Prenatal Stress in Behavior and Brain Morphology. Can they be Prevented or Reversed?
    Sleep in Prenatally Restraint Stressed Rats, a Model of Anxious Depression
    Hormonal Modulation of Catecholaminergic Neurotransmission in a Prenatal Stress Model
    Involvement of Nitric Oxide, Neurotrophins and HPA Axis in Neurobehavioral Alterations Induced by Prenatal Stress
    Prenatal Stress and Adult Drug-seeking Behavior: Interactions with Genes and Relation to Non-drug Related Behavior
    A Self-medication Hypothesis for Increased Vulnerability to Drug Abuse in Prenatally Restraint Stressed Rats
    How Postnatal Insults May Program Development
    Studies in Animal Models
    Perinatal Positive and Negative Influences on the Early Neurobehavioral Reflex and Motor Development
    Short and Long-term Consequences of Perinatal Asphyxia: Looking for Neuroprotective Strategies
    Affective, Cognitive and Motivational Processes of Maternal Care
    Role of Sensory, Social and Hormonal Signals from the Mother on the Development of Offspring
    Retrospective Studies
    Prenatal Stress and its Effects on the Fetus and the Child; Possible Underlying Biological Mechanisms
    Using Natural Disasters to Study Prenatal Maternal Stress in Humans
    Early Life Influences on Cognition, Behavior and Emotion in Humans: From Birth to Age 20
    Perinatal Programming of Neurodevelopment. Epigenetic Mechanisms and the Prenatal Shaping of the Brain
    Epigenetic Mechanisms of Perinatal Programming: Translational Approaches from Rodent to Human and Back
    Perinatal Administration of Aromatase Inhibitors in Rodents as Animal Models of Human Male Homosexuality: Similarities and Differences
    Impact of the Perinatal Environment on Child Development: Implications for Prevention Policies
    Perinatal Programming Prevention Measures
    Pregnancy Outcomes after a Maternity Intervention for Stressful EmotionS (PROMISES): A Randomised Controlled Trial.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Faruk Uguz, Laura Orsolini, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on recent advances in research and practical recommendations regarding the use of psychotropic drugs during pregnancy and lactation, two important social and psychological life events for women. In addition to the social context, including the addition of a new family member, many women experience the occurrence or recurrence of psychiatric disorders during the perinatal period. Psychiatric disorders during this period can have negative effects on the fetus, infant and other children in the family, and can result in functional impairment among mothers. The book offers a comprehensive overview of psychopharmacological treatments for nearly all specific psychiatric conditions (e.g. bipolar disorder, panic disorder, obsessive-compulsive disorder) and includes chapters on clinical approaches to treating these disorders. As such, it will appeal to a wide readership, including psychiatrists, obstetricians, gynecologists and pediatricians.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Zhong Chao Han, Tsuneo A. Takahashi, Zhibo Han, Zongjin Li, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive introduction to various types of perinatal stem cells. Given their unique regenerative abilities, stem cells offer a promising avenue in the treatment of degenerative diseases or injury. Currently, the limitations of postnatal cell sources and expanding efficiency may limit autologous stem cell therapies. Although embryonic stem cells (ESCs) and induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs) can be cultured indefinitely ex vivo, and can differentiate into three germ layers, ethical issues, the teratoma formation of ESCs and oncogenic risk of iPSCs are major obstacles to their clinical application. More recently, perinatal stem cells have been isolated from the umbilical cord, Wharton's Jelly, placenta, amniotic membrane and amniotic fluid, which are normally discarded as medical waste. This book, after describing perinatal stem cells in detail, introduces readers to the various types of perinatal stem cells, addressing their characterization, banking, quality control and stability. Importantly, it also reviews the clinical applications of perinatal stem cells to therapy of diseases. Accordingly, it offers a valuable resource for clinicians, researchers and graduate students alike.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Anthony Atala, Kyle J. Cetrulo, Rouzbeh R. Taghizadeh, Sean V. Murphy, Curtis L. Cetrulo, Jr.
    Summary: Perinatal Stem Cells provides researchers and clinicians with a comprehensive description of the current clinical and pre-clinical applications of stem cells derived from perinatal sources, such as amniotic fluid, placenta and placental membranes, the umbilical cord and Wharton's jelly. It's compiled by leading experts in the field, offering readers detailed insights into sources of perinatal stem cells and their potential for disease treatment. Therapeutic applications of perinatal stem cells include the treatment of in utero and pregnancy related diseases, cardiac disease, liver disease, pulmonary disease, inflammatory diseases, for hematopoietic regeneration, and for neural protection after stroke or traumatic brain injury. In addition, the rapid advance in clinical translation and commercialization of perinatal stem cell therapies is highlighted in a section on Clinical and Industry Perspective which provides insight into the new opportunities and challenges involved in this novel and exciting industry.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Renato Augusto Moreira de Sá, Eduardo Borges da Fonseca, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the latest evidence-based guidelines for perinatal management and is designed to help obstetricians and neonatologists minimize complications and offer patients the best possible care. Since 1960, there has been a significant increase in basic and clinical investigations on normal and pathological pregnancy in the developed world. This has provided insights into the physiopathology of pregnant women, fetuses and newborns and led to the development of new technologies, bringing about a new medical subspecialty: perinatal medicine. The book is divided into eight main sections: The first examines basic periconceptional care and discusses the ethical aspects of perinatology. The next section focuses on prenatal considerations, such as the nutritional aspects of gestation and puerperium, physical exercise during pregnancy, routine laboratory tests, prenatal care of multiple gestations and the role of the neonatologist in prenatal care. The third and fourth sections then explore fetal evaluation, and clinical intercurrences in pregnancy, respectively. The next section addresses pregnancy complications: prevention, diagnosis and management. The sixth section covers the basic aspects of congenital infections and the seventh examines labor and delivery aspects. Lastly, the final section includes chapters on neonatal assistance. Written by leading experts in obstetrics, neonatology, and perinatology, this thoroughly updated, comprehensive resource reflects the latest information in all areas, including genetics and imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Rolando Cimaz, editor.
    Summary: This book, written by very well-known opinion leaders in the field, covers all aspects of periodic and non -periodic fevers, and related disorders. The expression refers to several different auto-inflammatory diseases, showing similar symptoms-the primary symptom being a recurrent fever for an infectious cause cannot be found. The opening chapters give some historical hints, explain the genetic basis of the disease and provide insights into the pathogenesis derived from recent experimental studies and guides the reader through classification and nomenclature. A large part of the book is then devoted to a detailed description of the specific related diseases and their clinical presentations, the disease course, and potential complications in both pediatric and adult patients. The advice regarding treatment is based on the best currently available evidence in this constantly evolving area. The book is part of Springers series Rare Diseases of the Immune System, which presents recently acquired knowledge on pathogenesis, diagnosis, and therapy with the aim of promoting a more holistic approach to these conditions. Autoinflammatory diseases are hereditary disorders that are caused by single-gene defects in innate immune regulatory pathways and are characterized by a clinical and biological inflammatory syndrome in which there is limited, if any, evidence of autoimmunity. Periodic and Non-Periodic Fevers will be an invaluable source of up-to-date information for all practitioners involved in the care of patients with these disease.

    Contents:
    Preface
    I From Pathogenesis to Classification
    1 Historical notes on Autoinflammatory disorders
    2 Pathogenesis:Genetic basis, Innate Immunity, Inflammosomes, Cytokines
    3 Classification and nomenclature of Periodic and Non Periodic fevers
    II Specific diseases
    4 Mevalonate Kinase Deficiency (MKD)
    5 Tumor necrosis factor receptors associated syndrome (TRAPS)
    6 Cryopyrin-Associated Periodic Syndromes (CAPS)
    7 Pyogenic Arthritis, Pyoderma gangrenosum and Acne Syndrome (PAPA)
    8 Adenosine deaminase syndrome 2 (ADA2)
    9 Interferonopathies
    10 Inflammatory bone disease
    11 Amyloidosis
    12 Dermatologic autoinflammatory diseases
    13 Autoinflammatory diseases with immunodeficiency
    14 Periodic Fever, Aphthous Stomatitis, Pharyngitis, Adenitis Syndrome (PFAPA)
    15 Proteasome. related disorders
    16 Chronic Non-bacterial osteomyelitis
    17 Systemic JIA and adult onset Still disease
    18 Behcet disease
    19 Recurrent idiopathic pericarditis
    20 Schnitzler syndrome
    Subject Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Khadija Amine, Wafa El Kholti, Jamila Kissa.
    Summary: This book is an evidence-based guide to periodontal root coverage that provides up-to-date information on the etiology of gingival recession defects, prognostic factors relating to the defect, patient, or operator, and surgical techniques. Attention is drawn to critical elements in the execution of surgical procedures that can impact on outcomes. In order to ensure that the guidance reflects the highest level of evidence, the authors have undertaken an exhaustive literature search of the four main electronic databases (MEDLINE/PubMed, Cochrane Library, ScienceDirect, and EBSCOhost) for studies on root coverage, including randomized clinical trials, systematic reviews, meta-analyses, and network meta-analyses. The aim is to supply readers with a truly reliable source of knowledge that will help them to navigate this complex field, in which numerous surgical procedures have been described, with great variability in clinical and statistical outcomes. The book will be of value to all who wish to improve their understanding of gingival recession defects and the techniques to achieve root coverage that offer the best long-term results.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Contents; About the Authors; Part I;
    1: Gingival Recessions: Definition and Classification; 1.1 Definition; 1.2 Classifications; 1.2.1 Classification of Sullivan and Atkins [9]; 1.2.2 Classification of Miller [10]; 1.2.3 Classification of Cairo [11]; References;
    2: Etiology of Gingival Recessions; 2.1 Anatomical Factors; 2.1.1 Thin Gingival Biotype; 2.1.2 Abnormal Tooth Position; 2.1.3 High Frenum Attachment; 2.2 Pathological Factors; 2.2.1 Periodontal Disease; 2.2.2 Bacterial Plaque; 2.2.3 Dental Calculus; 2.3 Traumatic Factors; 2.3.1 Toothbrushing; 2.3.2 Flossing Trauma; 2.4 Iatrogenic Factors; 2.4.1 Orthodontic Movement; 2.4.2 Prosthetic and Restorative Treatment; References;
    3: Summary; Part II;
    4: Prognostic Factors: Defect Related Factors; 4.1 Recession Classification; 4.2 Recession Size; 4.3 Adjacent Papilla Dimension; 4.4 Keratinized Tissue; 4.5 Noncarious Cervical Lesions (NCCLs); 4.6 Tooth Malposition and Tooth Location; References;
    5: Prognostic Factors: Patient Related Factors; 5.1 Plaque Control; 5.2 Toothbrushing; 5.3 Tobacco Smoking; References;
    6: Prognostic Factors: Operator-Related Factors; References;
    7: SummaryPart III;
    8: Surgical Procedures; 8.1 Free Gingival Graft (FGG); 8.2 Coronally Advanced Flap (CAF); 8.2.1 Coronally Advanced Flap (CAF) for the Management of Isolated Gingival Recession Defects; 8.2.2 Coronally Advanced Flap (CAF) for the Management of Multiple Gingival Recession Defects; 8.3 Laterally Positioned Flap (LPF); 8.4 Double Papilla Flap (DPF); 8.5 Tunnel Technique; 8.6 Summary; References;
    9: Critical Factors in Execution; 9.1 Root Conditioning; 9.2 Flap Tension/Stability; 9.3 Microsurgical Approach; 9.4 Summary; References.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Julien Santi-Rocca, editor.
    Summary: Periodontitis is a disease that affects more than half the adult population in the world. Treatment is often based on ancient recommendations consisting in mechanically removing material from damaged zones. However, novel therapeutic management strategies exist, from prevention to efficient treatment, and regeneration. The need of integrative approaches to circumvent this worldwide pledge can be achieved through: A better understanding of this complex disease by promoting scientific research and a comprehensive multidisciplinary approach, including epidemiology, microbiology, immunology, physiology, therapeutics, psychology, etc. A better outreach by promoting vulgarization and recommendations for health professionals. A better information of the empowered patients, leading them to consider prevention and to take part in their therapeutic course. The book "Periodontitis: Advances in Experimental Research" includes a timely collection of chapters covering all the fields of research about periodontitis, consisting in concise reviews by the best specialists themselves and with clinical perspectives for periodontitis. Recent technological advances have allowed to explore shadowed areas of periodontology. The book "Periodontitis: Advances in Experimental Research" is a unique occasion to set a milestone for a more integrated field of periodontitis, with a broad scientific, medical, and public audience thanks to dedicated sections in each chapter: Abstract and main body (scientific audience and expert clinicians) Highlights (scientific audience and clinicians) Impact for Practice (clinicians and economical/political decision makers) Summary for Patients (patients and economical/political decision makers).

    Contents:
    Preface
    Chapter1. Advances in experimental research about periodontitis: lessons from the past, ideas for the future (Julien Santi-Rocca)
    Part I: Periodontal microbiota
    Chapter 2. Microbiota in Periodontitis: advances in the omic era (Shao Bing Fong, Emile Boyer, Martine Bonnaure-Mallet, Vincent Meuric)
    Chapter 3. Aggregatibacter actinomycetemcomitans: from basic to advanced research (Abdelhadi Hbibi, Amal Bouziane, Badiaa Lyoussi, Mimoun Zouhdi, Driss Benazza)
    Chapter 4. Meta-analyses on the Periodontal Archaeome (Jéssica Alves de Cena, Yuri Silvestre-Barbosa, Aline Belmok, Cristine Miron Stefani, Cynthia Maria Kyaw, Nailê Damé-Teixeira)
    Chapter 5. Parasites in periodontal health and disease: a systematic review and meta-analysis (David Felipe Martin-Garcia, Malik Sallam, Gabriela Garcia, Julien Santi-Rocca)
    Chapter 6. Fungi - a component of the oral microbiome involved in periodontal diseases (Justyna Karkowska-Kuleta, Dorota Satala, Magdalena Smolarz, Marcin Zawrotniak, Maria Rapala-Kozik)
    Chapter 7. Herpesviruses in periodontitis: An umbrella review (Aleksandar Jakovljevic, Miroslav Andric, Jelena Jacimovic, Jelena Milasin, Javier Enrique Botero)
    Part II: Periodontitis pathophysiology
    Chapter 8. Recent updates on microbial biofilms in periodontitis: an analysis of in vitro biofilm models (Maick Meneguzzo Prado, Nathalia Figueiredo, Andréa Pimenta, Tamires Szeremeske Miranda, Magda Feres, Luciene Cristina Figueiredo, Josiane de Almeida, Bruno Bueno-Silva)
    Chapter 9. Update on B cell response in periodontitis (Julien Demoersman, Jacques Olivier Pers)
    Chapter 10. Polarization profiles of T lymphocytes and macrophages responses in periodontitis (Franco Cavalla, Marcela Hernández)
    Chapter 11. Complementary experimental methods in genetics open up new avenues of research to elucidate the pathogenesis of periodontitis (Arne S. Schaefer)
    Part III: Periodontitis-associated conditions
    Chapter 12. Update on the bidirectional link between diabetes and periodontitis (Leila Salhi, Michèle Reners)
    Chapter 13. Periodontitis as a risk factor for Alzheimer's disease: the experimental journey so far, with hope of therapy (Alice Harding, Shalini Kanagasingam, Richard Welbury, Sim K. Singhrao)
    Chapter 14. Cardiovascular diseases and periodontitis (Peter Riis Hansen, Palle Holmstrup)
    Part IV: Therapeutic management of periodontitis
    Chapter 15. Update on the role of cytokines as oral biomarkers in the diagnosis of periodontitis (Triana Blanco-Pintos, Alba Regueira-Iglesias, Carlos Balsa-Castro, Inmaculada Tomás)
    Chapter 16. Non-surgical periodontal treatment: SRP and innovative therapeutic approaches (Alexia Vinel, Antoine Al Halabi, Sébastien Roumi, Hélène Le Neindre, Pierre Millavet, Marion Simon, Constance Cuny, Jean-Sébastien Barthet, Pierre Barthet, Sara Laurencin-Dalicieux)
    Chapter 17. Update on the roles of oral hygiene and plaque control on periodontal disease (Leila Salhi, Bruno De Carvalho, Michèle Reners)
    Chapter 18. Multi-photonic adjunctive therapy for the management of periodontitis: recent advances and new treatment approach (Marco Giannelli, Daniele Bani)
    Chapter 19. Probiotics during the therapeutic management of periodontitis (Flavia Furlaneto, Karin Hitomi Ishikawa, Michel Reis Messora, Marcia P A Mayer)
    Chapter 20. Periodontal cell therapy: a systematic review and meta-analysis (Antoine Dubuc, Valérie Planat-Bénard, Mathieu Marty, Paul Monsarrat, Philippe Kémoun)
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Richard Palmer, Peter Floyd, editors.
    Summary: This book guides through all essentials in the field of periodontology including the pathology, diagnosis, and treatment of the most common periodontal conditions. Now in its 4th edition, this fully updated version marks the 25th anniversary of the first edition. It discusses the developments in classification while maintaining a no-nonsense logical approach to what many people find a complex subject. The book will help clinicians acquire and maintain the knowledge and skill to treat the many patients encountered in day-to-day practice. It covers the scientific background of periodontal-systemic disease interactions, the clinical application of periodontal surgery and the management of multi-rooted teeth. With newly incorporated supplementary information, the book will be a helpful source for general dentist, dental students, dental hygienists and even for postgraduate students.

    Contents:
    1. Periodontal examination and screening
    2. Pathology of periodontal disease
    3. Periodontal disease and systemic health
    4. Diagnosis, prognosis and treatment planning
    5. Effective communication with patients to improve motivation
    6. Non-surgical treatment and supportive periodontal care
    7. Periodontal surgery
    8. Treatment of multi-rooted teeth
    9. Reconstructive periodontal treatment
    10. Multidisciplinary integrated treatment
    11. Diagnosis and management of acute conditions
    12. Patient presentations.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Carin A. Hagberg, Vijaya N. R. Gottumukkala, Bernhard J. Riedel, Joseph L. Nates, Donal J. Buggy.
    Summary: More than 80% of patients with cancer will need the services of anesthesiology and perioperative medicine, intensive care medicine, and pain management specialists during their cancer journey for diagnostic, therapeutic, and symptom management needs, as well as for the management of recurrent disease, secondary cancers, and ongoing non-oncologic surgical needs during survivorship. Perioperative Care of the Cancer Patient is today's most up-to-date, authoritative, comprehensive reference on the acute care of surgical patients with cancer, from a team of international experts in this emerging and dynamic specialty-- publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    edited by Sheila Ryan Barnett, Sara E. Neves.
    Summary: "Older patients carry some of the highest risks of suffering an adverse event or death following anesthesia and surgery. They are inherently vulnerable, presenting with numerous comorbidities and reduced physiological reserve, requiring 'gero-centric' perioperative care for everything from routine eye surgery to major cardiac surgeries. Dementia, frailty, and the need for palliative care and pain management for the orthopedic patient are important areas requiring special consideration in this group. This book provides a general overview of these topics for those healthcare providers who may not have extensive knowledge of this patient population, while at the same time offering practical tips for the more experienced clinician. Chapters cover the spectrum of perioperative care including preoperative management of comorbid conditions, intraoperative anesthetic management, postoperative pain control, and a primer on advanced directive discussions. This book is appropriate not only for anesthesiologists but for any perioperative physician caring for the older patient"--Publisher's description.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    C. Ronald MacKenzie, Charles N. Cornell, Stavros G. Memtsoudis, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I: Preoperative Conditions
    General Principles and Practices of Perioperative Medicine
    The Prevalence of Disabling Musculoskeletal Conditions and the Demand for Orthopedic Surgery in the 21st Century
    The Connective Diseases: The Rheumatologist's Perspective
    The Pathophysiologic Events of Total Joint Replacement Surgery
    Part II: Anesthesiological Management
    Anesthesiology in the Orthopedic Patient
    Pediatric Anesthesia for Orthopedic Surgery
    Anesthetic Techniques and Their Clinical Application for Specific Orthopedic Procedures
    The Role of the Post-Anesthesia Care Unit in the Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient
    Postoperative Pain Management in the Orthopedic Setting
    Part III: Medical Management in Specific Clinical Settings
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Connective Tissue Disease
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Cardiac Disease
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Chronic Pulmonary Disease
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Renal Disease
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Diabetes Mellitus
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Gastrointestinal and Liver Issues
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Neurological Disease
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Psychiatric Disease
    Part IV: Specific Perioperative Problems in Orthopedic Surgery
    Perioperative Care of the Elderly Orthopedic Patient
    Venous Thromboembolism and Orthopedic Surgery
    Coagulation Disorders and Orthopedic Surgery
    Perioperative Nutrition in the Orthopedic Surgical Patient
    Infection and Perioperative Orthopedic Care
    Risk and Benefits of Bilateral Total Knee Replacement Surgery
    Compartment Syndrome and Orthopedic Surgery: Diagnosis and Management
    Bone Health and Orthopedic Surgery
    Perioperative Care of theComplex Spine and Scoliosis SurgeryPatient
    Management of Blood Products in Orthopedic Surgery
    Part V: Role of Allied Services
    Professional Nursing Practice in the Orthopedic Care Setting
    The Approach to Physical Therapy Following Orthopedic Reconstructive Surgery
    Quality Improvement in the Perioperative Orthopedic Setting
    Introduction of Clinical Pathways in Orthopedic Surgical Care: The Experience of the Hospital for Special Surgery
    Ethical Considerations in Perioperative Orthopedic Medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    C. Ronald MacKenzie, Charles N. Cornell, Stavros G. Memtsoudis, editors.
    Summary: References -- 2: Perioperative Risk Models -- Introduction -- General Risk Assessment Models -- Cardiac Risk Assessment Tools -- Pulmonary Risk Assessment Tools -- Hepatic Risk Assessment Tools -- Venous Thromboembolism Risk Assessment Tools -- Renal/Genitourinary Risk Assessment Tools -- Additional Models -- Discussion and Summary -- Case Study -- How Does One Approach the Perioperative Risk Assessment of Such a Patient? -- References -- 3: The Prevalence of Disabling Musculoskeletal Conditions and the Demand for Orthopedic Surgery in the Twenty-First Century -- Introduction This is a comprehensive, multidisciplinary manual providing preoperative considerations, postoperative complications, and guidelines for the anesthetic and medical management of patients undergoing orthopedic surgery. The editors are leaders in their field.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword to the Second Edition
    Preface to the Second Edition
    Preface to the First Edition
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: Preoperative Considerations
    1: General Principles and Practices of Perioperative Medicine
    Introduction
    Preoperative Consultation
    Goals of the Preoperative Medical Consultation
    Identification of Conditions that Affect Postoperative Outcome
    Optimization of Conditions that May Affect Postoperative Outcome
    The Assessment of Perioperative Risk
    Patient Education and Preventive Practices
    Efficacy of Preoperative Consultation Incidence of Degenerative Disorders of the Spine
    Incidence of Spine Procedures
    Incidence of Complications After Spine Surgery
    Definition and Classification of Complications
    Study Methodology
    Surgeon-Related Factors
    Procedure-Related Factors
    Patient-Related Factors
    Prevalence of Osteoarthritis and Related Reconstructive Surgeries of the Hip and Knee
    The Incidence of Complications After Total Knee and Total Hip Arthroplasty
    General Trends
    Specific Complications: Medical
    Infection
    Dislocation
    Venous Thromboembolism
    Periprosthetic Fractures
    Summary Effects in Other Organ Systems
    The Role of Embolic Load
    The Role of Cement
    The Role of Fat Embolization: The Fat Embolism Syndrome
    The Pathophysiology of Spine Fusion Surgery
    Timing of Complications
    Interventions
    Summary
    Case Study
    References
    Part II: Anesthesiologic Management
    6: Anesthesia in the Orthopedic Patient
    Introduction
    The Orthopedic Population
    Advanced Age
    Rheumatoid Arthritis
    Osteoarthritis
    Positioning
    Regional Anesthesia
    Mortality
    Postoperative Analgesia and Rehabilitation
    Respiratory Complications
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Ehab Farag, Andrea Kurz, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the most recent evidence-based facts on perioperative fluid management and discusses fluid management from basic sciences to clinical applications and the patientsℓ́ℓ outcomes. Recent advances in understanding the Revised Starling principle with new concepts in tissue perfusion and the most recent techniques of perioperative goal directed fluid management are described. The endothelial glycocalyx functions and the influence of fluid management on its integrity are covered in detail; moreover, the techniques for its protection are also discussed. The dilemma of perioperative use of hydroxyethyl starch solutions and the resurgence of interest in using human albumin as an alternative colloid is explored. The problems of using unbuffered solutions during the perioperative period and comparison between restrictive versus liberal fluid management are discussed in full. Perioperative Fluid Management will be of interest to anesthesiologists and also intensivists.

    Contents:
    PART I. FUNDAMENTALS OF FLUID MANAGEMENT
    1. A History of Fluid Management / Elizabeth A. M. Frost
    2. The Revised Starling Principle and Its Relevance to Perioperative Fluid Management / C. Charles Michel , Kenton P. Arkill , and FitzRoy E. Curry
    3. The Functions of Endothelial Glycocalyx and Their Effects on Patient Outcomes During the Perioperative Period. A Review of Current Methods to Evaluate Structure-Function Relations in the Glycocalyx in Both Basic Research and Clinical Settings / FitzRoy E. Curry , Kenton P. Arkill , and C. Charles Michel
    4. Techniques for Goal-Directed Fluid Management / Paul E. Marik
    5. The Perioperative Use of Echocardiography for Fluid Management / Maged Argalious
    6. Microcirculatory Blood Flow as a New Tool for Perioperative Fluid Management / Daniel De Backer
    7. Mean Systemic Filling Pressure Is an Old Concept but a New Tool for Fluid Management / Hollmann D. Aya and Maurizio Cecconi
    8. Restricted or Liberal Fluid Therapy / Thomas E. Woodcock
    9. The Perioperative Use of Albumin / Ehab Farag and Zeyd Y. Ebrahim
    10. The Dilemma for Using Hydroxyethyl Starch Solutions for Perioperative Fluid Management / Christiane S. Hartog and Konrad Reinhart
    11. Balanced Versus Unbalanced Salt Solutions in the Perioperative Period / Sheldon Magder
    12.Positive Fluid Balance and Patients' Outcomes / John Danziger
    13. Fluid Management and Its Role in Enhanced Recovery / Andrew F. Cumpstey , Michael P. W. Grocott , and Michael (Monty) G. Mythen
    PART II. CASE SCENARIOS MANAGEMENT DURING COLORECTAL, ORTHOPEDIC, AND SPINE CASES
    14. Case Scenario for Perioperative Fluid Management in Major Orthopedic Surgery / Wael Ali Sakr Esa
    15. Case Scenario for Perioperative Fluid Management for Major Colorectal Surgery / Kamal Maheshwari
    16. Case Scenario for Fluid Therapy in Septic Shock / William Phillips
    17. Case Scenario for Fluid Management in Liver Resection / Maged Argalious and Harendra Arora
    18. Case Scenario for Fluid Management During Major Spine Surgery / Verna L. Baughman
    19. Case Scenario for Fluid Management After Subarachnoid Hemorrhage in the Neuro- intensive Care Unit / Jamil R. Dibu and Edward M. Manno.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Ehab Farag, Andrea Kurz, Christopher Troianos, editors.
    Summary: This revised and expanded second edition presents the most recent evidence-based facts on perioperative fluid management and discusses fluid management from basic sciences to clinical applications and the patients' outcomes. Recent advances in understanding the Revised Starling principle with new concepts in tissue perfusion and the most recent techniques of perioperative goal directed fluid management are described. The endothelial glycocalyx functions and the influence of fluid management on its integrity are covered in detail; moreover, the techniques for its protection are also discussed. The dilemma of perioperative use of hydroxyethyl starch solutions and the resurgence of interest in using human albumin as an alternative colloid is explored. The problems of using unbuffered solutions during the perioperative period and comparison between restrictive versus liberal fluid management are discussed in full. Lastly, case scenarios for every possible clinical situation describe in full the most up-to-date fluid management for the corresponding clinical problem. Perioperative Fluid Management, Second Edition is of interest to anesthesiologists and also intensivists.

    Contents:
    Part I Fundamentals of Fluid Management
    A History of Fluid Management
    The Revised Starling Principle and Its Relevance to Perioperative Fluid Management
    The Functions of Endothelial Glycocalyx and Their Effects on Patient Outcomes During the Perioperative Period. A Review of Current Methods to Evaluate Structure-Function Relations in the Glycocalyx in Both Basic Research and Clinical Settings
    Techniques for Goal-Directed Fluid Management
    The Perioperative Use of Echocardiography for Fluid Management
    Microcirculatory Blood Flow as a New Tool for Perioperative Fluid Management
    Mean Systemic Filling Pressure Is an Old Concept but a New Tool for Fluid Management
    Restricted or Liberal Fluid Therapy
    The Perioperative Use of Albumin
    The Use of Albumin in Intensive Care Unit
    The Dilemma for Using Hydroxyethyl Starch Solutions for Perioperative Fluid Management
    Balanced Versus Unbalanced Salt Solutions in the Perioperative Period
    Positive Fluid Balance and Patients' Outcomes
    Fluid Management and Its Role in Enhanced Recovery
    Venous Circulation: a New Concept in Fluid Management
    Pathophysiology of Fluid Management in Neonate and Pediatric Patient
    Zero Fluid Balance versus Liberal Fluid Management. pro and Con
    Pathophysiology of perioperative Fluid Management from Surgeon Point of View
    Part II FluidManagement Case Scenarios
    Case Scenario for Perioperative Fluid Management in Major Orthopedic Surgery
    Case Scenario for Perioperative Fluid Management for Major Colorectal Surgery
    Case Scenario for Fluid Therapy in Septic Shock
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management in Liver Resection
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management During Major Spine Surgery
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management After Subarachnoid Hemorrhage in the Neuro- intensive Care Unit
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management during Open Heart Surgery
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management during Thoracic Surgery
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management during Major Vascular Surgery
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management for Patients in Cardiothoracic Intensive Care.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Carlo Enrique Marcucci, Patrick Schoettker, editors.
    Summary: All anesthesiologists are confronted with patients who show bleeding disorders, whether congenital, acquired, or pharmacologically induced. Although many studies, meta-analyses, guidelines, and textbooks have been published on the subject, they mostly cover specific aspects or require a thorough knowledge of hemostasis. The goal of this book is to provide the anesthetist with an overview of hemostasis and the mechanisms underlying bleeding and coagulation in general and to assist in the understanding of specific coagulation disorders as they may occur in the various anesthetic subspecialties. It is hoped that, through the provision of practical information and tools, the book will help residents and trained anesthetists to manage one of the most frustrating challenges that they face: the bleeding patient. A full understanding of coagulation requires a lifelong career, and this book is not intended to replace the consulting hematologist, whose expert opinion should always be sought. The available procoagulant blood products and drugs all have potentially dangerous side-effects; furthermore, in bleeding disorders pitfalls are frequent and a misdiagnosis can have potentially catastrophic consequences. The aim of the editors is thus instead to enhance the collaboration between the disciplines of Anesthesiology and Hematology.

    Contents:
    Part I: Pre-operative haemostasis: Cell based coagulation model
    Laboratory testing of hemostasis
    Viscoelastic tests of hemostasis
    Point of care platelet function tests
    Hemostasis assessment and evaluation
    Hereditary coagulopathies
    Acquired coagulopathies
    Drug induced
    Antiplatelet drugs
    Intravenous fluids and coagulation
    Split blood products
    Isolated coagulation products
    Pro-coagulant drugs
    Patient blood management. Part II: Per-operative haemostasis: In cardiac surgery
    In Hepatic Surgery
    In Pediatric Surgery
    In Obstetrics Surgery
    In Trauma
    In Neurosurgery
    In Orthopedic Surgery
    In Neuraxial and Peripheral Nerve blocks. Part III: Post-Operative: Intensive Care
    Anti-Coagulation. Part IV: Economic aspects and organization.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Charuhas V. Thakar, Chirag R. Parikh, editors.
    Summary: The kidneys participate in all vital processes of the body to maintain overall homeostasis and health. When kidneys are injured during surgical interventions, metabolic and hemodynamic control is disrupted, leading to dysfunction associated with greater mortality, length of hospital stay, and cost. Peri-operative Kidney Injury presents the epidemiology, risk factors, diagnosis, treatment, and outcomes associated with kidney injury during the peri-operative period. Concepts and principles of care to prevent kidney complications during surgical procedures are provided to equip health care professionals along with strategies to manage acute kidney injury and associated challenges when they occur. Chapters detail diverse surgical settings, ranging from the more common, such as abdominal, cardiac, and vascular surgeries, to the intricately complex, including the use of the left ventricular assist device and organ transplants. This practical and comprehensive text blends the evidence-based standards of care with cutting edge advances in the field, while also providing the reader with a peek into innovations on the horizon.

    Contents:
    Part I Peri-operative AKI: Overview and Approach
    1 Incidence, Trends and Diagnosis of Peri-operative AKI
    2 Serious peri-operative complications: Hospital Medicine Perspectives
    3 Role of Novel Kidney Injury Biomarkers in Perioperative AKI
    4 Clinical Pearls: Renal Replacement Therapy for AKI in the Post-operative Period.- 5 Clinical Pearls: Non-dialytic Management of Kidney Complications in the Post-operative Period
    6 Intra-Operative Considerations to Prevent Post-Operative AKI
    Part II Cardiac and Vascular Surgery
    7 AKI after Cardiac Surgery in Adults.- 8 AKI after Cardiovascular Surgery in Children
    9 AKI in the Era of Ventricular Assist Devices.- 10 Kidney Injury after Vascular Surgery.- Part III Abdominal and Urologic Surgery.- 11 AKI after Major Abdominal Surgery.- 12 Kidney Injury in Abdominal Compartment Syndrome.- 13 Kidney Function and Injury after Nephrectomy for Kidney Cancer
    Part IV Transplant Surgery
    14 The Kidney in Non-Renal Solid Organ Transplantation
    15 Acute Allograft Injury After Kidney Transplantation
    Part V Special Topics in Peri-operative AKI.- 16 Trauma and Acute Kidney Injury
    17 Fluid-Electrolyte Imbalances and Extra-Corporeal Therapy in the Neurosurgical Setting
    18 Nutrition in Peri-operative Patients with Kidney Failure.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Karen Stuart-Smith, editor.
    Contents:
    Perioperative medicine: defining the anaesthesiologist's role in shaping perioperative outcomes
    Prehabilitation
    Impact of co-morbidities, physiological status and age on survival
    Transthoracic echocardiography in the preoperative clinic
    Defining postoperative quality of recovery
    Enhanced recovery for colorectal surgery
    Perioperative beta-blockade: the pros and cons. The story of beta-blockade and cardiac protection
    Perioperative management of the diabetic patient
    Perioperative management of non-diabetic patients with hyperglycaemia (stress-induced hyperglycaemia)
    Postoperative Pulmonary Complications
    Haemostatic resuscitation for perioperative bleeding
    Fluid therapy in trauma
    Role of multimodal monitoring in the perioperative period: improving outcomes in high-risk surgical patients
    Can perioperative interventions during cancer surgery affect recurrence or metastasis?
    Transverse abdominis plane block: evolution and current understanding
    Future ultrasound technologies for the perioperative physician
    Lung ultrasound in anaesthesia and critical care medicine
    The acute pain team
    The transition of acute post-operative pain to acute persistent pain to chronic pain: assessing and managing the risks.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Mark F. Newman, Lee A. Fleisher, Clifford Ko, Michael (Monty) Mythen.
    Summary: Based on the most current evidence and best practices, Perioperative Medicine: Managing for Outcome, 2nd Edition, is an easy-to-follow, authoritative guide to achieving optimal outcomes in perioperative care. Written and edited by recognized authorities in anesthesiology and surgical critical care, this fully updated edition helps you think critically about complex, long-term issues surrounding the care of the surgical patient, providing decision trees that define strategies to enhance the medical outcome of care. Focuses on what anesthesiologists, surgeons, and intensivists need to know in order to improve outcomes through evidence- and outcome-based approaches. Provides practical guidance on potential risks to all major organ systems, the etiology of particular organ dysfunctions, preoperative and intraoperative risk factors, and perioperative protection strategies to minimize potential complications. Features a consistent chapter format - with even more color-coded algorithms, summary tables, and boxes - that enables you to quickly explore and determine the best management approaches. Includes six all-new chapters: Perioperative Fluid Management; Delirium and POCD; Role of Palliative Care/ICU; Value-Based Care: The UK Model; CFO Perspective on Value; Hospital to Home (Perioperative Transitions of Care) Discusses timely topics such as quality improvement, pay-for-performance, preexisting disease and comorbid conditions in anesthesiology, and the team-based model of care. Features two new editors, surgeon Clifford Ko, MD, and Perioperative Summit leader, Michael (Monty) Mythen, MD. Enhanced eBook version included with purchase. Your enhanced eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references from the book on a variety of devices.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2022
  • Print
    [editors] Molly Blackley Jackson, Somnath Mookherjee, Nason P. Hamlin.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Molly Blackley Jackson, Ronald Huang, Elizabeth Kaplan, Somnath Mookherjee, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive third edition provides robust support to clinicians providing perioperative care for patients. Patients with a range of medical conditions undergo surgeries of varying levels of risk, and the evolving field of consult medicine aims to address their needs, whether pre- or post-surgery. This book offers evidence and experience-based information, advice, and guidelines on all aspects of perioperative medicine. Care around surgeries in many major clinical areas are included, including cardiology, pulmonology, gastroenterology, rheumatology, endocrinology and so on. This new edition has been updated throughout with the latest literature, more visual content (tables and algorithms), and eleven new chapters on topics such as: chronic pain, congestive heart failure, hormone therapy and transgender patients, and postoperative hypoxemia. This new edition focuses on high value care in order to improve outcomes, including minimizing complications and readmissions. It also provides streamlined key points for caring for patients with medical diagnoses that may be especially complicated around surgery. This resource is invaluable for practicing physicians (including medical consultants, surgeons, and anesthesiologists) and other professionals who aim to optimize care of surgical patients.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    The Preoperative Evaluation
    Perioperative Medication Management
    Anesthesia Fundamentals
    Cardiovascular Risk Stratification
    Ischemic Heart Disease
    Congestive Heart Failure
    Atrial Fibrillation
    Hypertension
    Valvular Heart Disease
    Implantable Cardiac Devices
    Diabetes
    Stress Dose Steroids
    Thyroid Disease
    Hormone Therapy and Transgender Patients
    Liver Disease
    Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Chronic Anticoagulation
    Disorders of Hemostasis
    Thrombophilias
    Thrombocytopenia
    Anemia
    Sickle Cell Disease
    Venous Thromboembolic Disease
    Cerebrovascular Disease
    Epilepsy and Seizure Disorders
    Parkinsons Disease
    Spinal Cord Injury
    Chronic Pain
    Pulmonary Risk Assessment and Management
    Asthma and COPD
    Obstructive Sleep Apnea / Obesity Hypoventilation Syndrome
    Pulmonary Hypertension
    Special Topics in Lung Disease: Restrictive, Myesthenia Gravis
    Chronic Kidney Disease
    Acute Kidney Injury
    Rheumatoid Arthritis
    Systemic Lupus Erythematosus
    Gout and Pseudogout
    Decision-Making Capacity
    Elderly Patients and Frailty
    Nutrition
    Patients with Solid Organ Transplant
    Substance Use and Dependence
    Postoperative Evaluation and Care
    Postoperative Fever
    Postoperative Delirium
    Postoperative Ileus
    Postoperative Hypoxemia
    Postoperative Tachycardia
    Postoperative Emergencies
    Postoperative Electrolyte Abnormalities
    Acute Pain Management Pearls
    Surgical Procedures Overview.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Marinella Astuto, Pablo M. Ingelmo, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Perioperative medicine and anesthesia
    PART I Perioperative care before surgery
    Preoperative evaluation
    Preoperative preparation
    Prehospital care and transport
    PART II Perioperative care during surgery
    Perioperative care in day hospital surgery
    Perioperative care in remote locations
    Perioperative care in orthopedic surgery
    Perioperative care of the neurosurgical patient
    Perioperative care in thoracic surgery
    Perioperative care in abdominal and urological surgery
    PART III Perioperative care in special situations and conditions
    Perioperative care of children with difficult airway
    Perioperative care of children with neuromuscular disease
    Perioperative care of children with metabolic disease
    Perioperative care in children with congenital heart disease
    Perioperative care of children with OSA
    Perioperative care of children with trauma
    Perioperative care of children with cancer
    Perioperative care of children with cerebral palsy and behavioural problems
    PART IV Important techniques for perioperative care
    Vascular and nonvascular access in the perioperative period
    US-guided nerve targets
    Noninvasive hemodynamic and respiratory monitoring during the perioperative period
    PART V. Early and long term consequences of anesthesia and surgery
    Negative behavior after surgery
    Acute pain prevention and control
    How to protect the infant brain during surgery
    Can anesthesia induce apoptosis in children?- Long-term consequences of anesthesia and surgery on the infant brain
    Prevention of chronic postsurgical pain.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Roderic G. Eckenhoff, Niccolò Terrando.
    Summary: "The occurrence of personality, sensory and cognitive disturbances after anesthesia and surgery has been recognized for many decades, although the magnitude, duration and causes have remained a matter of debate. Certainly the transient occurrence of delirium after surgery is well known, and the various forms are reviewed here by Drs. Proekt, Gabbard, Sieber and Oh. The more durable forms of cognitive impairment after surgery have been more enigmatic. In the past two decades, the application of strict neurocognitive testing by research groups have definitively documented impairments lasting from weeks to months, and thus a term was coined; post-operative cognitive dysfunction" or POCD, a "syndrome" reviewed in depth here by Drs. Nelli, Culley and Crosby. Complicating the analysis of POCD has been the fact that a large number of patients may actually have cognitive improvement as a result of enhanced mobility after orthopedic surgery or reduced pain perhaps following cancer resection. Thus, post-operative cognitive improvement (POCI) is reviewed here by Drs. Arias, Sibille and Price Completing the first section of this book is the more contentious, but critically important topic of whether anesthesia and surgery result in a persistent cognitive disorder, such as mild cognitive impairment or dementia, an area discussed in detail by Drs. Schenning and Hogan"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    Peter F. Svider, Anna A. Pashkova, Andrew P. Johnson, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive text is an easy-to-access reference that provides a foundation for understanding contemporary evidence-based practices relating to pain management in the perioperative setting. Chapters review the exponential increase in prescription drug abuse associated with the "opioid epidemic"; surgeons' important role in managing perioperative and chronic pain in a variety of practice settings; the role of quality improvement in patient safety initiatives; inadequate opioid prescribing education (OPE) in surgical training programs; and literature demonstrating the existence of evidence-based alternatives to opioids. Written and edited by experts in the field of anesthesiology and pain medicine, Perioperative Pain Control: Tools for Surgeons is a practical resource for surgical trainees and surgeons of all specialties including general surgery, thoracic surgery, otolaryngology, plastic surgery, urology, gynecology, vascular surgery, neurosurgery, and orthopedic surgery.

    Contents:
    Perioperative Pain Control: Practical Tools for Surgeons
    The Surgeon's Role in the Opioid Epidemic
    Pain Prescription Legislation: What You Need to Know as the Surgeon
    Opioid Prescribing Education in Surgical Training (Follow COP)
    Pre-operative Optimization
    Non-Opioid Adjuncts and Alternatives
    Post-Operative Analgesia for the Chronic Pain Patient
    Non-Enteral Pain Management
    Perioperative Annalgesia in General Abdominal, Vascular, and Thoracic Surgery
    Perioperative Analgesia for Thyroid and Parathyroid Surgery
    Evidence-Based Perioperative Analgesia for Otolaryngology-Head and Neck Surgery
    Perioperative Analgesia in Cranial and Skull Base Surgery
    Perioperative Analgesia for Orthopedic and Spine Surgery
    Evidence-Based Perioperative Analgesia for Urologic Surgery
    Obstetrics and Gynecology
    Perioperative Analgesia and Pain Management in Pediatric Patients
    Approaches to Perioperative Pain Management in the Plastic Surgical Patient. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Carol J. Peden, Lee A. Fleisher, Michael Englesbe.
    Summary: "Quality improvement (QI) principles are increasingly important in every area of today's healthcare, encompassing efforts to make healthcare delivery safer, more effective, patient-centered, timely, equitable, and efficient. Perioperative Quality Improvement provides up-to-date, easy-to-read guidance for perioperative clinicians on this critical topic. Each chapter covers a pertinent area of QI in the perioperative setting, focusing on both concepts and implementation. Written and edited by key international opinion leaders in the field, this text is a relevant, concise resource for anesthesiologists, surgeons, nurse anesthetists, and hospitalists--anyone involved in perioperative medicine regardless of specialty area"-- publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    [edited by] David L. Reich, Gregory W. Fischer.
    Contents:
    Principles and the normal heart
    Getting started with echocardiography: the twenty standard views
    Principles and physics: principles of ultrasound
    Principles and physics: principles of Doppler ultrasound
    Principles and physics: equations to remember (the Bernoulli equation, velocity-time integrals, and the continuity equation)
    Principles and physics: transducer characteristics
    Principles and physics: imaging artifacts and pitfalls
    Normal anatomy and flow during the complete examination: components of the complete examination
    Normal anatomy and flow during the complete examination: epiaortic imaging
    Normal anatomy and flow during the complete examination: three-dimensional views: replicating the surgeon's view
    Normal anatomy and flow during the complete examination: extracardiac anatomy
    Quantitative and semiquantitative echocardiography: dimensions and flows
    Quantitative and semiquantitative echocardiography: ventricular and valvular physiology
    Understanding how transesophageal echocardiography demonstrates cardiovascular pathology
    Myocardial ischemia and aortic atherosclerosis
    Aortic valve anatomy and embryology
    Mitral valvular disease
    Tricuspid valvular disease
    Pulmonic valvular disease
    Cardiomyopathies
    Aneurysms and dissections
    Endocarditis
    Imaging of cardiac tumors and solid and gaseous materials
    Intracardiac devices, catheters, and cannulas
    Echocardiographic evaluation of pericardial disease
    Adult congenital heart disease
    Pulmonary hypertension
    Recent advances
    Maintaining quality of perioperative echocardiography
    Indications for transesophageal echocardiography
    Complications of transesophageal echocardiography
    Equipment, infection control, and safety
    Oversight and administration
    Training and certification for transesophageal echocardiography
    Medical insurance claims, compliance, and reimbursement for anesthesiology
    Regulatory, legal, and liability issues pertaining to transesophageal echocardiography.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Ashraf Badawi, editor.
    Summary: This title represents a comprehensive manual of periorbital rejuvenation and includes an in-depth review of the anatomy of the orbit and periorbital region. Physiological changes associated with the aging of the periorbital region and potential rejuvenation options are also covered, while readers are given a series of step-by-step illustrative guides to procedural techniques. The book provides a valuable selection of clinical pearls on how to avoid potential pitfalls using a number of cases in which a range of potential invasive and non-invasive treatment options, including neuromodulators and cosmeceuticals, are used. Periorbital Rejuvenation: A Practical Manual provides a comprehensive and concise overview of periorbital anatomy and the potential effects of aging. Cutting-edge laser treatment options including laser assisted and neuromodulator techniques are ideal for the trainee to develop their knowledge and as a reference guide for the experienced practitioner.

    Contents:
    1. Anatomy of the Orbit and periorbital region
    2. Aging of the orbit and rejuvenation options
    3. Eye Medications and its effect on orbital fat and cosmesis
    4. Soft tissue fillers for the periorbital region
    5. Neuromodulators in Periorbital Rejuvenation
    6. CHEMICAL PEELINGS IN THE PERIORBITAL REGION
    7. Periorbital rejuvenation by lasers and energy-based devices
    8. Oculoplastic surgery for periorbital rejuvenation
    9. Cosmeceuticals for the periorbital region
    10. Editor's Tips.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Akira Kudo, editor.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Brendon J. Coventry, editor.
    Contents:
    Diagnostic Biopsy Procedures
    Cutaneous Surgery
    Hand Surgery
    Foot Surgery
    Hernia Surgery
    Head and Neck Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Nicolas W. Shammas, editor.
    Summary: This book examines new technologies (device and pharmacologic) that have evolved over the past few years in treating peripheral arterial disease. Chapters offer optimal strategies to treat PAD, supported by peer-reviewed data. The pillars of this strategy will focus on (a) changing vessel compliance to allow better lumen expansion, (b) less recoil and dissections, and (c) less bailout stenting. Chapters also review embolic protection devices and apply the adjunctive use of anti-proliferative therapy to maintain good long term outcomes. In addition, the book reviews drug coated balloons and drug eluting stent technologies and other means of drug delivery into the vessel wall. The goal of this book is to discuss all these emerging technologies under the strategy of treating patients with the focus on both acute and long term outcomes. Featuring world renown experts, this book offers a critical and comprehensive overview of the current data and future directions that would pave the way for optimal PAD management. Peripheral Arterial Interventions is an essential resource for physicians, residents, fellows, and medical students in cardiology, radiology, vascular surgery, primary care, and health promotion and disease prevention as well as internal and vascular medicine specialists.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Atherosclerosis and inflammation in Peripheral Arterial Disease
    Chapter 2. Epidemiology and Public Health Implications of Peripheral Arterial Disease
    Chapter 3. Risk factors and Outcomes of Patients with Peripheral Arterial Disease
    Chapter 4. Pharmacologic Interventions in Patients with Peripheral Arterial Disease
    Chapter 5. The Role of Exercise in Managing the PAD patient
    Chapter 6. Vessel Compliance, Barotrauma and Dissections with Endovascular Therapy of the PAD patient
    Chapter 7. Femoropopliteal Dissections and Their Impact on Procedural and Long Term Outcomes
    Chapter 8. The Role of Atherectomy in Vessel Prepping Prior to Definitive Endovascular Treatment of the PAD patient
    Chapter 9. Lithoplasty of severe calcified disease
    Chapter 10. Specialty balloons and Vessel Prepping
    Chapter 11. The FLEX atherotome role in reducing dissections and stenting
    Chapter 12. Distal embolization in treating PAD
    Chapter 13. Drug coated balloons in infrainguinal arterial interventions
    Chapter 14. Iliac artery Disease Management
    Chapter 15. Drug Eluting Stents in PAD management
    Chapter 16. Infrapopliteal Artery Interventions in Critical Limb Ischemia Patients
    Chapter 17. Reducing the Metal Burden in the infrainguinal arteries: Tack Endovascular System and Spot Stenting
    Chapter 18. Approach to Chronic Total Occlusions
    Chapter 19. Thrombotic Infrainguinal Arterial Disease: Mechanical and Pharmacological Approaches to Therapy
    Chapter 20. Endovascular Management of Aortic Aneurysms
    Chapter 21. Putting it All Together: An algorithm based approach to managing the PAD patient.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Emile R. Mohler, Michael R. Jaff.
    Contents:
    Epidemiology of PAD
    Office evaluation of peripheral artery disease : history and physical examination strategies
    Vascular laboratory evaluation of peripheral artery disease
    Magnetic resonance, computed tomographic, and angiographic imaging of peripheral arterial disease
    Non-atherosclerotic peripheral artery disease
    Medical therapy of peripheral artery disease
    Endovascular treatment of peripheral artery disease
    When to refer patients with claudication.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Aynur Özge, Derya Uludüz, Ömer Karadaş, Hayrunnisa Bolay, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses interventional treatment options on intractable (drug resistant) headache patients and extended headache attacks and extensively reviews the reasons behind treatment failure in intractable headaches, offering potential solutions based on clinical black holes of headache outpatient practice. The most appropriate interventions for certain types of headache such as chronic migraine and medication-overuse headaches, are discussed among others. The book provides practical advice on properly administering the interventional treatments either as a bridge treatments or prophylaxis options. The expected complications of the treatments, and strategies to minimize them are also discussed. Approaches in special patient populations such as pediatric or pregnancy cases and other non-standard cases are also extensively discussed.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Contents; Contributors; List of Videos;
    Chapter 1: Introduction to Interventional Procedures; Timing and Patient Selection; 1.1 About Headache; 1.2 Management; 1.3 Interventional Techniques; References;
    Chapter 2: Headache Anatomy and Mechanisms of Peripheral Nerve Interventions; 2.1 Transmission of Nociception from Peripheral Structures; 2.2 Convergence of Peripheral Inputs on Second-Order Neurons; 2.3 Projections to the Thalamus; 2.4 Projections to the Brainstem and Hypothalamus; 2.5 Sphenopalatine Ganglion; 2.6 The Vagus Nerve and Parasympathetic Efferents 2.7 Antinociceptive ProjectionsReferences;
    Chapter 3: Pharmacology of Interventional Headache Management; 3.1 Local Anesthetics; 3.1.1 Mechanism of Action; 3.1.2 Recommended Doses; 3.1.3 Side Effects; 3.2 Corticosteroids; 3.2.1 Mechanism of Action; 3.2.2 Recommended Doses; 3.2.3 Side Effects; 3.3 Botulinum Toxin; 3.3.1 Mechanism of Action; 3.3.2 BoNT Preparations; 3.3.3 Efficacy; 3.3.4 Immunogenicity; 3.3.5 Side Effects; 3.3.6 Contraindications; 3.3.7 Recommended Doses; References;
    Chapter 4: Greater Occipital Nerve and Lesser Occipital Nerve Blocks 4.1 GON and LON Blocks for the Treatment of Various Headache Types4.1.1 Cluster Headache; 4.1.2 Migraine; 4.1.3 Occipital Neuralgia; 4.1.4 Postdural Puncture Headache; 4.2 Treatment Intervals and the Drugs; 4.3 Outcome; 4.4 Side Effects; 4.5 Contraindications; 4.6 Personal Comments; References;
    Chapter 5: The Role of Other Peripheral Nerve Blocks; 5.1 Nerve Blocks; 5.1.1 Auriculotemporal Nerve Block; 5.1.2 Supratrochlear Nerve Block; 5.1.3 Supraorbital Nerve Block; 5.1.4 Infraorbital Nerve Block; 5.1.5 Mental Nerve Block; 5.1.6 Sphenopalatine Ganglion Block; 5.1.7 Cervical Root Block
    Chapter 7: The Role of Interventional Procedures in Childhood and Adolescent Headaches-Peripheral Neuromodulation7.1 Greater Occipital Nerve Block; 7.1.1 Selection of Patients; 7.1.2 Contraindications for GON Block; 7.1.3 GON Block Procedure; 7.1.4 Response to Treatment; 7.2 Greater Occipital Nerve Stimulation; 7.3 Trigeminal Nerve Stimulation: Supraorbital Branch; 7.4 Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation; References;
    Chapter 8: Interventional Headache Management in The Elderly; 8.1 Botulinum Toxin (BonT) Treatment; 8.2 Peripheral Nerve Blocks; References
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Ningfei Liu, editor.
    Summary: This book provides extensive knowledge of peripheral lymphedema, including the etiology and pathophysiology of the disease, as well as the anatomy and physiology of the lymphatic system and guide for the treatment of lymphedema to clinicians. The ultimate goal of lymphedema therapy is the targeted and individualized treatment. New technology of multimodality lymphatic imaging emerged in the recent years largely improves the diagnosis of lymphatic circulation disorders. The treatment of peripheral lymphedema is expected to have new achievement. This book illustrates the latest achievements in clinical and basic research of lymphedema to the clinical investigators as well as basic researchers. Pathogenesis of lymphatic system, diagnosis of lymphedema, treatment and further complication management are demonstrated in this book. Some special lymphedema related syndromes, issues on prevention and prognosis are also included.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Overview of lymphatic system
    1 Physiology of lymphatic system (physiology of capillary filtrate flow to lymphatics)
    2 Anatomy of lymphatic system
    3 Formation and transport of lymph
    4 Function of the lymphatic system
    Part 2 Lymphedema
    5 Introduction
    6 Etiology of primary lymphedema
    7 Secondary lymphedema of different types
    8 Stage of lymphedema
    Part 3 Pathogenesis of lymphatic system in lymphedema
    9 Changes in lymphatic vessels in primary lymphedema
    10 Changes in lymph node in primary lymphedema
    11 Pathology of collecting lymph vessels in secondary lymphedema
    12 Pathology of the initial lymph vessels in lymphedematous skin
    13 Co-malformations of venous and lymphatic vessels in primary lymphedema
    Part 4 Pathology of lymphedematous tissue
    14 Lymphedema fluid
    15 Inflammation
    16 Tissue overgrowth in lymphedema
    Part 5 Diagnosis of lymphedema - Assistant in diagnosis
    17 Clinical diagnosis and differential diagnosis
    18 MR lymphangiography (MRL)
    19 Nuclear Medicine imaging in the diagnosis of Peripheral lymphedema : Lymphoscintigraphy
    20 Indocyanine green lymphography
    21 Nuclear Medicine imaging in the diagnosis of Peripheral lymphedema : Single-Photon Emission Computed Tomography/Computed Tomography(SPECT/CT)
    22 Comparison of current imaging methods in diagnosis of peripheral lymphedema
    Part 6 Treatment of lymphedema - conservative treatment
    23 Compression Therapy
    24 Complex Physical Decongestive Therapy for Lymphedema (CDT)
    25 Far infrared radiation thermotherapy
    Part 7 Treatment of lymphedema - Surgical treatment
    26 Suction Assisted Lipectomy with simultaneous skin excision for lymphedema
    27 Microsurgery - Vascularized Lymph Vessel Transfer
    28 Microsurgery - Lymphaticovenular anastomosis for the treatment of lymphedema
    29 Microsurgery - Lymph node/flap transplantation
    30 Microsurgery - Lymphatic Tissue Transfer for the Treatment of Axillary Dissection Related Lymphedema
    31 Silicone tube implantation
    32 Liposuction
    Part 8 Curative effect assessment
    33 Circumference measurement
    34 Bioelectrical impedance analysis
    35 Skin fibrometer and Lymph Scanner
    Part 9 Lymphedema in children
    36 Lymphedema in childhood
    Part 10 Prevention of tumor treatment related lymphedema
    37 Prevention of lymphedema after breast cancer surgery
    38 Prevention of pelvic malignancies and related lymphedema.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jeffrey A. Cohen, Justin J. Mowchun, Victoria H. Lawson, Nathaniel M. Robbins.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Jean-Michel Vallat, Joachim Weis.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Andrea M Trescot, editor.
    Contents:
    Part I. Peripheral nerve entrapments: general principles
    Part II. Headache
    Part III. Facial and cervical nerve entrapments
    Part IV. Chest wall peripheral nerve entrapment syndromes
    Part V. Upper extremity peripheral nerve entrapments
    Part VI. Abdominal wall pain
    Part VII. Pelvic pain
    Part VIII. Low back pain
    Part IX. Lower extremity
    Index
    Index of symptoms.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Christopher J. Dy " David M. Brogan, Eric R. Wagner, editors.
    Summary: Peripheral nerve issues are potential sequalae of orthopedic surgery, even after cases in which technically excellent surgery was performed. These injuries can impede the expected recovery of function after the primary surgery. Given the manifold challenges associated with recovery of peripheral nerve injuries, this book is designed as a multidisciplinary guide to the diagnosis, prognostication and treatment of peripheral nerve issues after common orthopedic surgeries. Beginning with an overview of nerve compression, injury and regeneration, as well as a presentation of the current diagnostic and imaging modalities for peripheral nerve injuries, this unique text is organized by anatomic region and by type of procedure performed. Topics covered include shoulder and elbow arthroplasty and arthroscopy, fractures of the hand and wrist, hip preservation surgery, total knee replacement, open surgery of the foot and ankle, lumbosacral myeloradiculopathy, and more. Each chapter is authored by both a subspecialty surgeon who routinely performs the surgeries described and a subspecialized hand/peripheral nerve surgeon with experience in evaluating and treating nerve issues after that particular injury. Emphasis is placed on multidisciplinary team approaches, patient counseling, and technical aspects of surgical treatment. Generously illustrated and written by experts in the field, Peripheral Nerve Issues after Orthopedic Surgery is a truly interdisciplinary resource for orthopedic, plastic, hand and trauma surgeons, physiatrists, and all professionals managing postoperative peripheral nerve pain.

    Contents:
    Nerve Compression, Nerve Injury, and Nerve Regeneration: An Overview
    Evaluation of the Patient with Postoperative Peripheral Nerve Issues
    Nerve Injury after Shoulder Arthroscopy, Stabilization, and Rotator Cuff Repair (axillary, musculocutaneous, suprascapular nerves)
    Nerve Injury after Shoulder Arthroplasty
    Nerve Injury after Humerus, Elbow, and Forearm Fractures (radial, posterior interosseous, and ulnar nerves)
    Nerve Injury Associated with Elbow Procedures
    Nerve Injury after Distal Radius, Metacarpal and Finger Fractures
    Median and Ulnar Nerve Injury at the Elbow and Wrist
    Pelvic, Acetabular, Hip, and Proximal Femur Fractures: Intra-pelvic and Extra-pelvic Neuroanatomy
    Pelvic, Acetabular, Hip, and Proximal Femur Fractures: Surgical Exposures and Treatment of Nerve Injury
    Nerve Injury after Total Hip Arthroplasty
    Nerve Injury after Hip Arthroscopy, Hip Preservation Surgery, and Proximal Hamstring Repair
    Nerve Injury after Distal Femur, Tibial Plateau, and Tibial Shaft Fractures
    Nerve Injury after Total Knee Arthroplasty
    Nerve Injury after Knee Arthroscopy, ACL Reconstruction, Multiligament Knee, and Open Knee Surgery
    Nerve Injury after Distal Tibia, Pilon, and Ankle Fractures
    Nerve Injury after Fractures of the Hindfoot, Midfoot, and Forefoot
    Nerve Injury after Open and Arthroscopic Surgery of the Ankle and Foot, Including Morton Neuroma
    Lumbosacral Double Crush Syndrome.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Alaa Abd-Elsayed, Andrea M. Trescot.
    Summary: At last—a single, convenient reference on this interventional pain management technique, covering all recent advances in this fast-changing field. Peripheral Nerve Stimulation: A Comprehensive Guide is a one-stop resource offering practical guidance on performing a wide array of pain-relieving procedures using office-based ultrasound-guided techniques, fluoroscopy, and more. Concise and user-friendly, this easy-to-use guide helps physicians deliver safe, accurate, and cost-effective care by demonstrating how to evaluate the causes of pain, identify the most promising stimulation technique, locate the site with precision, and provide effective pain relief.

    Contents:
    History of Peripheral Nerve Stimulation for Pain
    Peripheral Nerve Entrapments
    Mechanism of Action of Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    Ultrasound Versus Fluoroscopy
    Surgical Tools For Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    Surgical Techniques For Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    Peripheral Nerve Stimulation Education and Psychological Evaluation
    Occipital Nerve Stimulation
    Trigeminal Nerve Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    The Sphenopalatine Ganglion: Associated Illnesses and Therapeutic Modalities
    Axillary and Suprascapular Nerves
    Brachial Plexus
    Ulnar Nerve
    Median Nerve
    Radial Nerve
    Intercostal Nerves
    Ilioinguinal and Iliohypogastric Nerve
    Genitofemoral Nerve
    Superior Cluneal Nerves
    Middle Cluneal Nerves
    Inferior Cluneal Nerve
    Pudendal Peripheral Nerve Stimulation For Chronic Pelvic Pain
    Lateral Femoral Cutaneous Nerve
    Femoral Nerve
    Sciatic Nerve
    Genicular Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    Peroneal Nerves (Fibular Nerves)
    Saphenous Nerve
    Posterior Tibial Nerve
    Sural Nerve
    Superior Gluteal Nerve
    Craniofacial Stimulation and Headache
    Peripheral Nerve Stimulation for Complex Regional Pain Syndrome
    Postherpetic Neuralgia
    Approach to Low Back Pain and Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    Peripheral Nerve Stimulation for Chronic Pelvic Pain
    Postamputation Pain
    Peripheral Neuropathy
    Overactive Bladder
    Gastric Stimulation For Gastroparesis
    Motor Stimulation
    Vagal Nerve Stimulation.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    Mark Bromberg.
    Summary: Do you find the evaluation of a patient presenting clinical symptoms of distal extremity numbness and weakness daunting and complex? Are you unsure of the diagnostic processes and best-practices in the treatment of peripheral neuropathy? This invaluable guide presents a practical approach to the diagnosis and successful management of patients with peripheral neuropathies. Starting with a structured series of patient queries for symptoms and examination signs, the diagnostic process emphasizes the role of electrodiagnostic tests in defining the neuropathy. Specific neuropathies are presented with their epidemiology, causative pathology, diagnostic and laboratory factors, alongside advised treatments and overall management strategies. This leading resource will assist non-neuromuscular neurologists, physiatrists, neurology and physiatry residents, and will also be useful to electromyographers, proving an ideal aid for busy clinic schedules.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    Venera A. Shaimova, editor ; English text edited by Yana Gorodechnaya.
    Summary: This book provides an illustrated guide to peripheral retinal degenerations and the role of spectral domain coherence tomography (SD-OCT) in diagnosis and treatment. The book discusses 73 clinical cases and gives detailed information on the principles of SD-OCT and its application in the imaging of peripheral retina. Peripheral Retinal Degenerations: Optical Coherence Tomography and Retinal Laser Coagulation, 2nd edition, discusses a broad range of retinal pathologies such as chorioretinal degenerations, posterior vitreous detachment, vitreoretinal adhesions and tractions and includes a plethora of high-quality clinical images throughout. Ophthalmologists and retinal specialists will find this updated edition to be the perfect didactic resource for furthering skills and knowledge in this clinical area.

    Contents:
    Principles and methods of peripheral retina OCT scanning
    Optical coherence tomography of the peripheral retina and the vitreoretinal interface
    Peripheral retinal degenerations as a risk factor for rhegmatogenous retinal detachment
    Intraretinal degenerations
    Vitreoretinal degenerations
    Chorioretinal degenerations
    Retinal laser photocoagulation in peripheral degenerations.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Owen A. O'Connor, Won Seog Kim, Pier Luigi Zinzani.
    Summary: "The immune system can be classified into 2 basic component: (1) the innate immune system, and (2) the acquired immune system. The innate immune system is considered to be relatively agnostic to any specific antigen, and is often described as invariant. The innate immune response is the first line of defense, and typically exhibits limited specificity. Examples of innate immune response may include phagocytosis by macrophases, barriers to infect provided by the skin and tears, NK- and mast cells, and complement mediated cytolysis. In contrast, the adaptive (or sometimes called acquired) immune response develops in response to specific antigen, being 'custom' designed for the antigen in question, usually occurs later in the immune response, and has the ability to recall the response to past infections. Components of a functioning acquired immune response might involve antigen presenting cells presenting antigen ot T-cells, the activation of specific T-cells which would signal to B-cells enlisting their engagement in the response and the production of highly specific antibody capable of binding specific antigen. T- and B- lymphocytes are the major types of lymphocytes found in the human body, where they can constitute 20-40% of all white blood cells, with only about 2-3% of these being found in the peripheral circulation, the remainder being localized to various lymphoid organ is (lymph nodes, spleen, submucosal tissue). Remarkably, the total mass of lymphocytes in the body can approximate the mass of the brain and liver"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Fundamentals T-Cell Lymphocyte Biology / Claudio Tripodo, Stefano Pilleri
    Mechanisms of T-Cell Lymphomagenesis / François Lemonnier, Philippe Gaulard, Laurence de Leval
    Epigenetics of T-Cell Lymphoma / H. Miles Prince, Jasmine Zain, Anas Younes, Sean Whittaker, Owen O'Connor, Sean Harrop
    Animal Models of T-Cell Lymphoma / Keiichiro Hattori, Raksha Shrestha, Tatsuhiro Sakamoto, Manabu Kusakabe, Mamiko Sakata-Yanagimoto
    The Geographic Distribution of the PTCL : Global Epidemiology / Amulya Yellala, Avyakta Kallam, James Armitage
    Classification of the Peripheral T-Cell Lymphomas / Neval Ozkaya, Elaine Jaffee
    Molecular Classification of the PTCLs / Tyler A. Herek, Javed Iqbal
    Peripheral T-Cell Lymphoma
    Not Otherwise Specified / Nora Bennani, Stephen Ansell
    Angioimmunoblastic T-Cell Lymphoma (AITL) / Jehan Dupuis, Franck Morschhauser
    The Spectrum of Anaplastic Large Cell Lymphoma / Jianping Kong, Andrew Feldman
    HTLV-1-Positive Adult T-Cell Leukemia-Lymphoma (ATL) / Wataru Munakata, Kensei Tobinai
    Natural Killer/T Cell Lymphomas / S.J. Kim, R. Suzuki, A. Jaccard, S.T. Lim, Won Seog Kim
    T-Prolymphocytic Leukemia (T-PLL) / Dima El-Sharkawi, Claire Deardon
    Large Granular Lymphocytes Leukemia (LGL) / Karolina H. Dziewulska, Katharine B. Moosic, HeeJin Cheon, Kristine C. Olson, David J. Feith, Thomas P. Loughran, Jr. Gamma Delta T-Cell Lymphomas / Francine Foss, Aadil Ahmed, Mina Xu
    Enteropathy Associated T-Cell Lymphoma and Monomorphic Epitheliotropic Intestinal T-Cell Lymphoma / Craig R. Soderquist, Jennifer Shingleton, Sandeep Dave, Govind Bhagat
    Hepatosplenic T-Cell Lymphomas / Robert N. Stuver, Mwanasha Merrill, Salvia Jain
    Cutaneous T-Cell Lymphoma / Alejandro Ariel Gru, Bethanie Rooke, Kevin Molloy, Julia Scarsbrick
    Other Rare Subtypes of PTCL / Pier Paolo Picaluga
    Standard Front-line Therapies / Raphael Koch, Lorenz Truemper
    Approved Agents in the Relapsed or Refractory Setting, Excluding Brentuximab Vedotin / Helen Ma, Owen A. O'Connor
    The Role for Autologous Stem Cell Transplantation (ASCT) in Peripheral T Cell Lymphomas (PTCL) / Juan Alejandro Ospina, H. Martinez-Cordero, J. Enciso, H. Idrobo
    Allogeneic Stem Cell Transplantion / Anna Dodero, Paolo Corradini
    Emerging Immunotherapy Approaches in Peripheral T-Cell Lymphomas / Barbara Pro, Andrei Shustov
    Emerging New Small Molecules in Peripheral T-Cell Lymphomas / Alessandro Broccoli, Pier Luigi Zinzani
    The Value and Relevance of T-Cell Lymphoma Registries / Tetiana Skrypets, Martina Manni, Monica Civallero, Iryna Kriachok, Massimo Federico
    Innovative Chemotherapy-Free Approaches for the Treatment of PTCL / Enrica Marchi, Ahmed Sawas, Helen Ma, Luigi Scotto, Francesca Montanari
    Global Collaborations / Dejan Radjeski, Eliza Hawke, Owen A. O'Connor, Pier Luigi Zinzani, WonSeog Kim, Enrica Marchi.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    Radhika Tandon, Anat Galor, Virender Singh Sangwan, Manotosh Ray, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Sergio Sandrucci, Baudolino Mussa, editors.
    Summary: Indications for central venous cannulation in critically ill patients have increased dramatically in recent years owing to the use of more complex therapies unsuitable for delivery via peripheral veins. The main drawbacks of central venous access are morbidity and the growing scarcity of experienced operators. Ultrasound-guided peripheral venous access offers a solution, in that it reduces morbidity and can be performed by a dedicated nursing team. The aim of this book is to teach the fundamentals of this emerging technique. Advice is provided on the choice of materials and on vein selection. The advantages and disadvantages of peripherally inserted central venous catheters (PICC) in relation to other types of central venous catheter are discussed, and the principles of use and practical applications of ultrasound for venipuncture are explained. Maneuvers for PICC positioning, techniques for the evaluation of PICC tip placement, and the prevention, diagnosis, and management of complications are all described in detail. Advice is also provided on the organization of a dedicated PICC team within a hospital or a supportive care program, and psychological, legal, and economic issues are considered. Peripherally Inserted Central Venous Catheters will be of interest to a wide range of professionals, including nutritionists, oncologists, anesthesiologists, surgeons, registered nurses, nurse practitioners, physicians, physician assistants, and radiologists.

    Contents:
    Introduction and Overview of PICC History
    Which Material and Device? The Choice of PICC
    Vessel Health and Preservation: The Proactive Approach
    The Choice of a Vein in Critically Ill Patients: Cost-Effectiveness
    Advantages, Disadvantages, and Indications of PICCs in Inpatients and Outpatients
    Ultrasound Anatomy of Peripheral Veins and Ultrasound-Guided Venipuncture
    Evaluation Techniques of the PICC Tip Placement
    Frequency, Diagnosis, and Management of Occlusive and Mechanical PICC Complications
    Clinical Problems Associated with the Use of Peripheral Venous Approaches: Infections
    Clinical Problems Associated with the Use of Peripheral Venous Approaches in Clinical Practice: Thrombosis
    Maneuvers, Precautions, and Tricks for PICC Positioning Procedure
    The "Off-Label" Use of PICCs
    Venous Access Devices and Emotional Response in Oncologic Patients: Diagnostic and Management Aspects
    Peripheral Inserted Central Catheters: Medicolegal Aspects
    The PICC Team.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Bryan D. Springer, Javad Parvizi, editors.
    Summary: Periprosthetic Joint Infection of the Hip and Knee is a practical reference for the diagnosis and treatment of total joint infections following hip and knee arthroplasty. In addition to useful chapters presenting common tests and algorithms used for diagnosis, the book gives background on the epidemiology, risk factors, and prevention strategies of periprosthetic joint infection. Additionally, practical clinical information is given, including antibiotic treatment strategies and delivery methods and medical optimization techniques for physicians to follow for patient care and follow-up. Covering a topic that is currently underrepresented in the medical literature, Periprosthetic Joint Infection of the Hip and Knee will be useful to orthopedic surgeons, rheumatologists, and other physicians involved in the care of patients with hip and knee prosthetic implants.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology of Total Hip and Knee Arthroplasty Infection
    Risk Factors for Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Prevention of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Medical Optimalization of Patients Prior to Surgery
    Diagnosis of Periprosthetic Joint Infection: An Algorithmic Approach to Patients
    Intraoperative Tests to Aid in Diagnosis of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Biofilm-Related Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Microbiology of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Antibiotics in Treatment of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    PMMA and Antimicrobial Delivery
    Prosthetic Retention: Treatment Options
    Single-Stage Exchange for Treatment of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Two-Stage Exchange Hip Arthroplasty: Static Spacers
    Two-Stage Exchange Hip Arthroplasty: Articulating Spacers
    Two-Stage Exchange Knee Arthroplasty: Static Spacers
    Two-Stage Exchange Knee Arthroplasty: Articulating Spacers
    Knee Arthrodesis
    Resection Arthroplasty and Hip Joint Fusion
    Above-Knee Amputation
    Post-Operative Management of Periprosthetic Joint Infection.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Daniel Kendoff, Rhidian Morgan-Jones, Fares S. Haddad, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I. Incidence and Socioeconomic Impact
    Part II. Prevention of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Part III. Diagnosis of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Part IV. Local Antibiotic Therapy
    Part V. The Hip Joint
    Part VI. The Knee Joint
    Part VII. Perioperative Optimization
    Part VIII. Long-term Perspectives
    Part IX. Future Approaches.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Raymond T. Krediet, Dirk G. Struijk, Sadie van Esch ; foreword by Norbert Lameire.
    Contents:
    Anatomy and physiology of the peritoneum / Krediet, R.T.
    Treatment modalities / Struijk, D.G.
    Access- and catheter-related complications / Struijk, D.G.
    Measurement of peritoneal transport / Krediet, R.T.
    Assessment of the peritoneum by biomarkers in peritoneal effluent / Krediet, R.T.
    Peritonitis and other catheter-related infections / Esch, S. van
    Information technology in peritoneal dialysis / Struijk, D.G.
    Residual renal function and peritoneal dialysis dose in adequacy of peritoneal dialysis / Krediet, R.T.
    Peritoneal dialysis solutions / Krediet, R.T.
    Long-term peritoneal dialysis and encapsulating peritoneal sclerosis / Krediet, R.T.
    Digital Access Karger 2018
  • Digital
    Emel Canbay, Yutaka Yonemura.
    Contents:
    1. Anatomy of Peritoneum and Preoperative Assessment of Patients with Peritoneal Surface Malignancies
    2. Surgical Technique for Cytoreductive Surgery
    3. Intraperitoneal Chemotherapy Applications
    4. Management of Special Issues
    5. Molecular Mechanism of Peritoneal Metastases.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Beate Rau, Alfred Königsrainer, Faheez Mohamed, Paul H. Sugarbaker, editors.
    Summary: This book provides surgeons and oncologists with a well-founded and detailed overview of the available treatment options for peritoneal malignancy and differential selection of the appropriate forms of therapy. Systemic chemotherapy options are also considered, as are surgical cytoreduction (CRS) and all forms of intraperitoneal chemotherapy (IPC) especially hyperthermic IPC (HIPEC), and immunotherapy, including specific procedures such as PIPAC. Subsequent chapters address perioperative care, complications and recurrences, as well as psycho-oncological, palliative medical and nursing care. The process of parietal and visceral peritonectomy in the large and small intestine is additionally illustrated by three video clips accessible online. Covering a broad range of aspects, including peritoneal metastasis and intraperitoneal chemotherapy, the book offers a valuable tool for surgeons, oncologists and anesthesiologists alike.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ariane J. Marelli, Jamil A. Aboulhosn.
    Summary: Covering the full spectrum of CHD from infants through adults, Perloff's Clinical Recognition of Congenital Heart Disease, 7th Edition, provides unparalleled guidance on the diagnosis and treatment of common and uncommon CHD in one definitive resource. The editors of this new edition, Drs. Ariane J. Marelli and Jamil A. Aboulhosn, have maintained Dr. Joseph Perloff's richly nuanced approach while bringing this classic text completely up to date with all the latest evidence and technologic advances in the field. With its comprehensive, step-by-step approach, you'll acquire a structured understanding of CHD across age ranges, allowing you to effectively detect these conditions as early as possible. NEW in the 7th Edition: Updated images throughout, as well as phonocardiograms, electrocardiograms, flow charts, and anatomic drawings Specific, integrated findings for individual patients with Dr Perloff's classic approach to diagnosis and treatment Streamlined review of sequelae and complications Historical Notes at the beginning of each chapter Tips on selecting among the increasing array of currently available procedures, helping foster and develop clinical judgment skills Update on genetic contributions to clinical recognition for a more complete presentation of patient diagnosis. Enhanced eBook version included with purchase. Your enhanced eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references from the book on a variety of devices.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    Mark Sobel, editor.
    Summary: This unique book is a practical, "go to" source of comprehensive information on the care of peroneal tendon injuries, accurately illustrating this hot topic with many anatomical drawings of how the anatomy influences the diseases we see clinically. This presentation opens with a review of the normal anatomy, biomechanics and examination of the peroneal tendons, followed by a discussion of congenital variations and imaging strategies used in diagnosis and evaluation. Both conservative and surgical management techniques are then elucidated in injury-specific chapters, from peroneus brevis splits and stenosing tenosynovitis to painful os peroneum syndrome (POPS) and acute dislocation. Chapters on rehabilitation and comorbid pathologies round out the presentation. The diagnosis of peroneal tendon injury is much more common today than it was 20 years ago. Utilizing the latest evidence and presenting the most cutting-edge management techniques, The Peroneal Tendons will be useful for orthopedic and podiatric surgeons, sports medicine specialists, and students and residents in these areas.

    Contents:
    Normal Anatomy and Physical Examination of the Peroneal Tendons
    Biomechanics of the Peroneal Tendons
    Congenital Variations of the Peroneal Tendons
    Imaging of the Peroneal Tendons
    Conservative Treatment of the Peroneal Tendons
    Peroneal Brevis Splits
    Peroneal Brevis Splits Associated with Chronic Lateral Ankle Instability
    Stenosing Tenosynovitis along the Lateral Wall of the Calcaneus
    Painful Os Peroneum Syndrome (POPS)
    Attritional Rupture of the Peroneal Tendons
    Acute Subluxation/Dislocation of the Peroneal Tendons
    Immobilization and Rehabilitation of the Peroneal Tendons
    Peroneal Tendon Pathology Associated with the Cavovarus Foot
    Peroneal Tendon Pathology Associated with Calcaneous Fractures.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Gérard Lizard, editor.
    Summary: This book provides an overview of the biology and biochemistry of peroxisomes, and discusses the contribution of these organelles to peroxisomal and neurodegenerative diseases. It begins with a detailed introduction to the biogenesis and metabolic functions of peroxisomes, and highlights their role in oxidative stress and in lipid metabolism such as fatty acid oxidation. The following chapters focus on the molecular and clinical aspects of peroxisomal disorders caused by defects in peroxisomal function. In particular, the biological aspects of peroxisomal biogenesis disorders such as Zellweger syndrome and Heimler syndrome are discussed. This includes their underlying genetic causes as well as the biochemical and metabolic defects associated with the disorders. In addition, several chapters cover recent observations suggesting an association between peroxisomal dysfunction and neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer's, Multiple Sclerosis and other degenerative cerebellar pathologies. The final section of the book discusses important cell and animal models for studying the role of peroxisomes in human diseases and presents current therapeutic strategies for their treatment. This book deals with a highly topical subject that is at the heart of current research, and represents a valuable contribution for all students and researchers who want to understand the complex biology of peroxisomes and their role in human diseases.

    Contents:
    [II]. Peroxisomal diseases : biological characteristics and diagnosis: Peroxisome biogenesis disorders / Masanori Honsho, Kanji Okumoto, Shigehiko Tamura, Yukio Fujiki
    Fatty acid oxidation in peroxisomes : enzymology, metabolic crosstalk with other organelles and peroxisomal disorders / Ronald J. A. Wanders, Frédéric M. Vaz, Hans R. Waterham, Sacha Ferdinandusse
    Zellweger syndrome disorders : from severe neonatal disease to atypical adult presentation / David Cheillan
    Heimler syndrome / S. Mechaussier, I. Perrault, H. Dollfus, A. Bloch-Zupan, N. Loundon, L. Jonard et al. [IV]. Cell and animal model systems: A mouse model system to study peroxisomal roles in neurodegeneration of peroxisome biogenesis disorders / Yuichi Abe, Shigehiko Tamura, Masanori Honsho, Yukio Fujiki
    The Drosophila melanogaster as genetic model system to dissect the mechanisms of disease that lead to neurodegeneration in adrenoleukodystrophy / Margret H. Bülow, Brendon D. Parsons, Francesca Di Cara
    Human peroxisomal 3-ketoacyl-CoA thiolase : tissue expression and metabolic regulation / Norbert Latruffe. [V]. Treatment of peroxisomal diseases: Biological functions of plasmalogens / Md Shamim Hossain, Shiro Mawatari, Takehiko Fujino
    Therapeutic efficacy of plasmalogens for Alzheimer's disease, mild cognitive impairment, and Parkinson's disease in conjunction with a new hypothesis for the etiology of Alzheimer's disease / Takehiko Fujino, Md Shamim Hossain, Shiro Mawatari.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Tsuneo Imanaka, Nobuyuki Shimozawa.
    Summary: This book provides readers with a comprehensive overview of peroxisomes and their role in human diseases. It starts by describing the history of peroxisome research and then examines in detail the current understanding of the biogenesis and function of peroxisomes. It then focuses on peroxisomal disorders and the involvement of peroxisomes in cancer and age-related diseases, discussing in detail the use of model organisms to elucidate the pathogenesis of peroxisomal disorders and the physiological importance of peroxisomal proteins. Further, the book examines diagnostic and therapeutic strategies in peroxisomal disorders as well as significant recent advances. Lastly, it addresses various topics in peroxisome research, including the isolation of peroxisomes from mammalian tissues and cells, the structural biology of peroxisomal proteins, the lipidomics of peroxisomal disorders, the value of exome sequencing, and neuropsychological testing in X-linked adrenoleukodystrophy. Given its scope, the book is a valuable resource for postgraduate students and researchers in the life sciences and clinicians in the fields of internal medicine, pediatrics, and neurology.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Biogenesis and Function of peroxisome
    1 The history of peroxisomal research
    2 Peroxisome Biogenesis
    3 Peroxisome Degradation and Its Molecular Machinery
    4 The function of the peroxisome
    Part 2 Dysfunction of Peroxisome and Human Disease
    5 Peroxisomal disorders
    6 Model organisms used to understand peroxisomal disorders
    7 Diagnosis of peroxisomal disorders
    8 Therapeutic strategies for X-linked adrenoleukodystrophy, a representative peroxisome disease
    Part 3 Topics in Peroxisome Research
    9 The isolation of peroxisomes
    10 Structure Biology of peroxisomal proteins, peroxins
    11 Lipidomics of peroxisomal disorders
    12 Neurophysiology and neuropsychology for X-ALD.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Lewis, Kim.
    Summary: This volume is a collection of chapters from the leading experts in the relatively new and burgeoning field of persister cell studies. Persisters play a leading role in the recalcitrance of chronic infections, and enable the development of classical antibiotic resistance. The focus of the book is on studies that provide an understanding of the mechanisms of persister formation, antibiotic tolerance and role in disease, at the molecular level.

    Contents:
    Intro; Introduction; Contents; Contributors;
    Chapter 1: Evolution Under Antibiotic Treatments: Interplay Between Antibiotic Persistence, Tolerance, and Resistance; 1.1 Distinguishing Between Resistance, Tolerance, and Antibiotic Persistence; 1.1.1 Antibiotic Resistance; 1.1.2 Antibiotic Tolerance; 1.1.3 Antibiotic Persistence; 1.1.4 Different Types of Persistent Bacteria; 1.1.4.1 Triggered Persistence [Previously Called Type I (Balaban et al. 2004)]; 1.1.4.2 Spontaneous Persistence [Previously Called Type II (Balaban et al. 2004)]; 1.2 Quantification of Antibiotic Tolerance and Persistence 1.3 Evolution of Antibiotic Tolerance Under Intermittent Antibiotic Treatments1.3.1 Tolerance and Persistence-by-Lag Evolve to Match the Duration of the Antibiotic Treatment; 1.3.2 Evolution of Stationary Phase Triggered Antibiotic Persistence; 1.3.3 Evolution of Drug-Induced Tolerance; 1.3.4 Antibiotic Tolerance in the Clinic; 1.3.4.1 Evolution of Tolerance in the Clinic; 1.3.4.2 Techniques to Detect Tolerance in the Clinic; 1.4 Antibiotic Tolerance and Persistence Promote the Evolution of Resistance; 1.5 Conclusion; References 2.3.2.1 The Mesenteric Lymph Nodes and Spleen Are Preferred Niches for Antibiotic-Tolerant S. Typhimurium During Infection2.3.2.2 The Subpopulation of S. Typhimurium Capable of Surviving Antibiotic Treatment During Infection Are Slow or Non-Growing ... ; 2.4 Molecular Mechanisms: How to Cope with Combined Host and Antibiotic Challenges?; 2.4.1 Formation of Salmonella Antibiotic Persisters During Infection; 2.4.2 Salmonella Antibiotic Persisters Must Survive the Immune Response During Infection; 2.5 Going Forward: Future Directions and Challenges; References
    Chapter 2: Antibiotic Persisters and Relapsing Salmonella enterica Infections2.1 Persistence of Infection, Antibiotic Persistence, and Antibiotic Persistence During Infection: What Is the Difference?; 2.2 A Brief Introduction to Salmonella enterica Infections; 2.3 Evidence for Role of Antibiotic Persistent Salmonella in Relapsing Infections; 2.3.1 Clinical Evidence for Antibiotic Persistence During Infection in Humans; 2.3.2 Experimental Evidence for Antibiotic Persistence During Infection in Mice
    Chapter 3: The Biology of Persister Cells in Escherichia coli3.1 Basic Concepts of Persister Cell Biology; 3.1.1 Persister Formation as a Phenotypic Switch into Dormancy; 3.1.2 Stochasticity and Heterogeneity of Persister Formation; 3.1.3 Biological Functions of Persister Cells; 3.2 Unraveling the Genetic Basis of Persister Formation; 3.2.1 Conceptual Overview; 3.2.2 Distinguishing Persister Formation/Survival from Phenotypic Resistance; 3.3 Non-Specific Mechanisms of Persister Cell Formation; 3.3.1 Energy Metabolism and Oxygen; 3.3.2 PASH: ``Persistence as Stuff Happenś́
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Nira Ramachandran.
    Summary: The book revisits the causes of persisting undernutrition in India, but moves away from the usual focus on women and children to a broader view of the entire population. It estimates the economic losses resulting from ignoring undernutrition in the adult working population, and questions the current narrow focus of nutrition interventions, suggesting that a family-based approach may provide quicker results and long-term sustainability. It compares the best and worst performing states in the country to glean learnings from both successes and failures and emphasizes the need to hand over the ownership of nutrition outcomes from the state to the community and family for more sustainable results. The book is organized in three sections: Part 1 details the nutrition status of the population, regional variations in nutrition outcomes, and government response in terms of interventions. Part 2 reviews issues and concerns like gender discrimination, poor child nutrition status, ineffective implementation of government programmes in the field, and the possible impacts of emerging issues like climate change. Part 3 seeks solutions from both international and country experiences.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Brendan McCormack, Sandra van Dulmen, Hilde Eide, Kirsti Skovdahl, Tom Eide.
    Contents:
    Person-centredness in healthcare policy, practice and research / Brendan McCormack, Sandra van Dulmen, Hilde Eide, Kirsti Skovdahl, and Tom Eide
    Philosophical perspectives on person-centredness for healthcare research / Jan Dewing, Tom Eide and Brendan McCormack
    The knowing and being of person-centred research practice across worldviews : an epistemological and ontological framework / Angie Titchen, Shaun Cardiff, and Stian Biong
    Being a person-centred researcher : principles and methods for doing research in a person-centred way / Gaby Jacobs, Famke van Lieshout, Marit Borg, and Ottar Ness
    Research into person-centred healthcare technology : a plea for considering humanisation dimensions / Gaby Jacobs, Teatske van der Zijpp, Famke van Lieshout, and Sandra van Dulmen
    A participatory approach to person-centred research : maximising opportunities for recovery / Larry Davidson, Chyrell Bellamy, Elizabeth Flanagan, Kimberly Guy, and Maria O'Connell
    Co-creating flourishing research practices through person-centred research : a focus on persons living with dementia / Kirsti Skovdahl and Jan Dewing
    Leadership research : a person-centred agenda / Tom Eide and Shaun Cardiff
    Staffing structures for effectiveness in person-centred care : the rafaela system / Lisbeth Fagerström
    Giving voice to 'hard to reach groups' in healthcare research : a narrative approach / Catherine Buckley
    Promoting health across the lifespan : a systems approach / Elisabeth Fosse, Steffen Torp, and Ingun Stang
    How knowledge developed through ethnography may inform person-centred healthcare practices / Kristin Briseid, Astrid Skatvedt and Brendan McCormack
    Person-centred technology-supported interventions / Sandra van Dulmen, Espen Brembo, Janne Dugstad, and Hilde Eide
    Learning to be an effective person-centred practitioner / Caroline Williams and Brendan McCormack
    Doing eye and vision research in a person-centred way / Rigmor C. Baraas, Lene A. Hagen, Hilde R. Pedersen, and Jon V. B. Gjelle
    Person-centred communication research : systematic observation of real life practice / Hilde Eide, Linda Hafskjold, Vibeke Sundling, and Sandra van Dulmen
    Introducing sex and gender-sensitive person-centred healthcare research / Stina Öresland and Sylvia Määttä
    Future directions for person-centred healthcare research / Sandra van Dulmen, Brendan McCormack, Hilde Eide, Kirsti Skovdal, and Tom Eide.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Jan Dewing, Brendan McCormack, Tanya McCance.
    Summary: This book is the first ever to offer a contemporary collection of different perspectives on person-centredness in international doctoral nursing research. The research in the book is based on the ideas and values of personhood and person-centeredness, which have been used and can be seen to guide research approaches, inform research designs and theorize research findings. Further, a specific framework for person-centred nursing is embedded throughout the research studies presented in the text. The Person-centred Nursing Framework (PCNF) developed by Brendan McCormack and Tanya McCance in 2010, is recognized as a nursing theory and this book further develops it as a basis for research and for advancing person-centredness in nursing. The framework informs all stages of the research process, from design through to dissemination. The book is structured into a number of highly engaging chapters written by doctoral candidates, and recently graduated candidates. The opening and closing chapters, written by the editors, place the subsequent chapters in a global context of person-centredness and nursing. The potential for person-centred nursing research to be a global movement is recognized and debated. The subsequent chapters lead readers through philosophical ideas, methodologies and methods whilst also offering reflective and honest insights into learning how to become a person-centred researcher. This field is growing and developing but yet there is no specific book available. As a result, researchers spend considerable time and effort translating existing research methodologies into person-centred perspectives. This book fills this gap and acts as a key resource for future nurse researchers. The text is intended for, and benefits nursing doctoral candidates, masters candidates and academic staff who teach and supervise research candidates; it may also appeal to other graduate learners. The book has international contributions which makes it appealing internationally.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Chapter 1. Person-centred Nursing Research Principles
    Chapter 2. The Person-centred Nursing Framework and Nursing Research
    Chapter 3. Coming to know Personhood: philosophical 'dates'
    Chapter 4. Overviews of person-centered research: selected specific research examples.
    Chapter 5. Developing theoretical frameworks: integrating specific values and principles into research
    Chapter 6. Methodologies for Person-centred Nursing Research
    Chapter 7. Knowing how to act
    person centred research methods
    Chapter 8. Knowing, Being and Becoming in person-centred research (action research chapter).
    Chapter 9. Phenomenological and hermeneutic approaches
    Chapter 10. Experimentation and Quasi- experimentation in person-centred research
    Chapter 11. Multiple and mixed methods approaches
    Chapter 12. Person-centredness in education research
    Chapter 13. Adopting a person-centred approach in doctoral supervision
    Chapter 14. Summary chapter: facing the future with confidence.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Pei-Yun Sabrina Hsueh, Thomas Wetter, Xinxin Zhu, editors.
    Summary: This book clarifies consumer and personal health informatics and their relevance to precision medicine and healthcare applications. Personal Health Informatics covers a broad definition of this emerging field, with individuals not simply consuming health but as active participants, researchers and designers in the healthcare ecosystem. The world of health informatics is constantly changing given the ever-increasing variety and volume of health data, care delivery models that shift from fee-for-service to value-based care, new entrants in the ecosystem and the evolving regulatory decision landscape. These changes have increased the importance of the role of patients in research studies for understanding work processes and activities, and the design and implementation of health information systems. Therefore, personal health informatics now provide research tools and protocols to engage within individual contexts when developing solutions, which can improve clinical practice, patient engagement and public health. Personal Health Informatics offers a snapshot of this emerging field, supported by the methodological, practical, legal and ethical perspectives of researchers and practitioners. In addition to being a research reader, this book provides pragmatic insights for practitioners in designing, implementing and evaluating personal health informatics in healthcare settings. It represents an excellent reader for students in all clinical disciplines and biomedical and health informatics to learn from the case studies provided in this emerging field.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Overview
    Section I: The State-of-the-Art Novel Care Delivery Models
    Section II: Methods for Translating Biomedical Research and Real-World Evidence into Patient-Centric Precision Health Application
    Section III: Methods for Patient-Centric Design
    Section IV: Ethics, Bias, Privacy, and Fairness
    Acknowledgment
    Contents
    About the Editors and Contributors
    About the Editors
    About the Contributors
    Part I: The State-of-the-Art Novel Care Delivery Models
    Chapter 1: E-enabled Patient-Provider Communication in Context
    Introduction Case Example #1: Development of the E-Health Care Model and Implementation in the PreClinic in Denmark
    Evaluation of ECM Accomplishments
    Case Example #2: Task-Sharing Mental Health Primary Care Delivery Model Via Smart Phones in Pacific Island Countries
    The Study
    Summary of Results
    Challenges and Opportunities
    Future Directions
    Case Example #3: Colombia: Prenatal Care and Early Risk Identification
    A Systems Model for E-Health Enabled Collaborative Care Delivery
    Collaborative Care Delivery in the Time of COVID-19
    Lessons on Collaborative Care Delivery from COVID-19 Discussion
    References
    Chapter 2: Direct Primary Care: A New Model for Patient-Centered Care
    Primary Care, the Patient-Centered Medical Home, and Direct Primary Care
    Primary Care
    Patient Centered Medical Home
    Direct Primary Care
    Accreditation Process
    Experience of the Patient and Provider
    The Patient-Provider-Payer Shift
    The Implications for DPC in Practice
    Mixed Methods Research Methodology
    Qualitative Methods
    Quantitative Methods
    Data Types
    Data Quality
    Results
    Timely Access
    Effectiveness
    Patient-Centered
    Efficiency/Affordability Conclusions, Implications, and Future Directions
    References
    Chapter 3: Smart Homes for Personal Health and Safety
    Introduction
    Sense4Safety: Using Smart Home Technology to Reduce Fall Risk
    Falls and MCI as Significant Public Health Problems
    Rationale for Passive In-Home Sensing
    Use of Passive Monitoring Technology for Early Detection of Functional Changes
    The Sense4Safety Intervention
    Ethical Implications
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 4: Health App by Prescription: The German Nation-Wide Model
    Introduction
    Overview
    German Healthcare System Licensing and Marketing Authorization
    Reimbursement by the Statutory Health Insurance (SHI)
    New Digital Services in the German Healthcare System
    Electronic Health Card and Personal Health Records (2000-2020)
    Digital Health Applications (Since 2020)
    First Experiences with DiGAs
    Acceptance and Knowledge About DiGA Among German Healthcare Professionals and Citizens
    DiGA as a New Business Model for Healthcare Start-ups and New Strategic Partnerships
    Conclusion
    Glossary
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Marie Benedict and Victoria Christopher Murray.
    Summary: "The remarkable, little-known story of Belle da Costa Greene, J. P. Morgan's personal librarian-who became one of the most powerful women in New York despite the dangerous secret she kept in order to make her dreams come true, from New York Times bestselling author Marie Benedict and acclaimed author Victoria Christopher Murray. In her twenties, Belle da Costa Greene is hired by J. Pierpont Morgan to curate a collection of rare manuscripts, books, and artwork for his newly built Morgan Library. Belle becomes a fixture on the New York society scene and one of the most powerful people in the art and book world, known for her impeccable taste and shrewd negotiating for critical works as she helps build a world-class collection. But Belle has a secret, one she must protect at all costs. She was born not Belle da Costa Greene but Belle Marion Greener. She is the daughter of Richard Greener, the first Black graduate of Harvard and well-known advocate for equality. Belle's complexion isn't dark because of her alleged Portuguese heritage that lets her pass as white-her complexion is dark because she is African American. The Personal Librarian tells the story of an extraordinary woman, famous for her intellect, style, and wit, and shares the lengths she must go-for the protection of her family and her legacy-to preserve her carefully crafted white identity in the racist world in which she lives"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access 2021
    SUNet ID login required
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    NCBI
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    T55.3.P75 W757 2016
    1
  • Print
    Stefania Boccia [and 5 others], editors.
    Summary: Practitioners are increasingly adopting a personalised medicine approach to individually tailored patient care, especially disease diagnosis and treatment with the use of biomarkers. However, development and implementation of such approaches to chronic disease prevention need further investigation and concerted efforts for proper use in healthcare systems. This book provides high-quality, multidisciplinary knowledge from research in personalised medicine, specifically personalised prevention of chronic disease. It addresses different perspectives of prevention in the field, and is the outcome of a four-year work of the Personalized prevention of Chronic Disease (PRECeDI) Consortium, a multi-disciplinary and multi-professional team of experts. The Consortium jointly agreed to document and address the five aspects or domains of personalised medicine and prevention as individual chapters: Identification of biomarkers for the prevention of chronic disease Evaluation of predictive genomic applications Ethico-legal and policy issues surrounding personalised medicine Roles and responsibilities of stakeholders in informing healthy individuals on their genome: a sociotechnical analysis Identification of organisational models for the provision of predictive genomic applications The book focuses on the Consortium's recommendations that are derived from each of these domains based on up-to-date evidence and research that the authors write, follow, and systematically organise and report. Personalisation of health care is, eventually, a driver of innovation in research and healthcare systems. With this SpringerBrief on Personalised Health Care: Fostering Precision Medicine Advancements for Gaining Population Health Impact, the Consortium provides further evidence of the clinical validity and utility of personalised medicine with special emphasis on the prevention of chronic diseases. The book is a useful resource for policy makers, industry and healthcare professionals, scientists, technology-sector professionals, investors, citizens, and private companies that need proper advice to realise the potential of personalised medicine.

    Contents:
    Introductions
    Identification of biomarkers for the prevention of chronic disease
    Evaluation of predictive genomic applications
    Ethico-legal and policy issues surrounding personalised medicine
    Roles and responsibilities of stakeholders in informing healthy individuals on their genome: a sociotechnical analysis
    Identification of organisational models for the provision of predictive genomic applications --
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Sherif El-Khamisy, editor.
    Summary: "The mammalian genome is constantly challenged by exogenous and endogenous threats. Although much is known about the mechanisms that maintain genome integrity, little is known about the applications of this knowledge to combat human disease. The past 20 years has witnessed extensive research and progress in this area and scientists started to design new therapies harnessing individual genetic differences among patients to combatdegenerative disorders and cancer. We summarize these advancements and discuss perspectives for the future of personalized medicine"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Approaches for identifying novel targets in precision medicine: lessons from DNA repair / Dean T. Williams, Christopher J. Staples
    Nucleotide excision repair: from neurodegeneration to cancer / Anastasios Liakos, Matthieu D. Lavigne, Maria Fousteri
    Role of protein linked DNA breaks in cancer / Walaa R. Allam, Mohamed E. Ashour, Amr A. Waly, Sherif El-Khamisy
    The emerging role of proteomics in precision medicine: applications in neurodegenerative diseases and neurotrauma / Rana Alaaeddine, Mira Fayad, Eliana Nehme, Hisham F. Bahmad, Firas Kobeissy
    The role of nitric oxide from neurological disease to cancer / Ahmed Maher, Mohamed F. Abdel Rahman, Mohamed Z. Gad
    RNA nuclear export: from neurological disorders to cancer / Guillaume M. Hautbergue
    Can astrocytes be a target for precision medicine? / Chloe F. Allen, Pamela J. Shaw, Laura Ferraiuolo
    Mitochondrial diseases as model of neurodegeneration / Laila A. Selim, Heba Hassaan
    Personalised medicine: genome maintenance lessons learned from studies in yeast as a model organism / Arwa A. Abugable, Dahlia A. Awwad, Dalia Fleifel, Mohamed M. Ali, Sherif El-Khamisy [and others]
    The power of zebrafish in personalised medicine / Sarah Baxendale, Freek van Eeden, Robert Wilkinson
    Personalized medicine and resurrected hopes for the management of Alzheimer's disease: a modular approach based on GSK-3[beta] inhibitors / Reem K. Arafa, Nehal H. Elghazawy
    Regenerative medicine: advances from developmental to degenerative diseases / Nicholas F. Blair, Thomas J. R. Frith, Ivana Barbaric
    Gene therapy in the nervous system: failures and successes / Jayanth S. Chandran, Joseph M. Scarrott, Pamela J. Shaw, Mimoun Azzouz.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Danilo Garcia, Trevor Archer, Richard M. Kostrzewa, editors.
    Summary: Brain disorders (neurodevelopmental, neurodegenerative, and affective disorders) can be investigated, treated, and prevented using person-centered methods. Because researchers have not reached a clear consensus on whether or not personality is stable or changeable, it has been difficult to outline how to use these methods in the care of people with brain disorders. Thus, the first part aims to identify the ways in which brain disorders and personality are linked. The second part explores different person-centered approaches that can be incorporated in a healthcare or education setting to help people with various brain disorders and to promote physical, mental and social health. The third part focuses on challenges and new venues.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Chapter 1
    Personality and the Brain
    Chapter 2
    Personality Stability and Change in Alzheimer's Disease and Major Depressive Disorder
    Chapter 3
    Affect, Stress, and Neurodegenerative Onslaughts
    Chapter 4
    Aspects of Personality Traits and Changes in Different Stages of Dementia Disorders
    Chapter 5
    The Study of Personality Traits in the Blekinge part of the Swedish National Study on Aging and Care (SNAC-B)
    Chapter 6
    Neurodevelopmental Disorders, Temperament, and Character
    Part 2 Chapter 7
    Person-Centered Approaches
    Chapter 8
    A Case Study in Sweden: The Need of Person-Centered Methods in the Care of Dementia Patients with Severe Aggressive Behavior
    Chapter 9
    Life Narratives and Elderly Care
    Chapter 10
    Acting as a Person-Centered Approach: Theater for the Elderly
    Chapter 11
    Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder: a personalized approach
    Chapter 12
    Person-Centered Schools
    Chapter 13
    Integrating healthy personality development and educational practices: The case of student engagement with school
    PART 3 Chapter 14
    Current Directions in Psychiatric Classification: From the DSM to RDoC
    Chapter 15
    The Future of Person-Centered Care Services: Scientific, Measurement, and Practical Advancements in Personality and Brain Disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Christoffer Johansen.
    Summary: A tremendous amount of research has been performed looking at the relationship between personality and disease. Research on this topic has been spread throughout scientific journals on psychology, behavioral health, psychoneuroimmunology, oncology, and epidemiology. Personality and Disease brings this research together in one place for the first time. With contributions from world experts, the book summarizes research findings on personality as it relates to cancer, heart disease, diabetes, asthma and allergies, dementia, and more. Is there such a thing as a cancer- prone personality? Do sadness, anger, stress, or shyness affect the likelihood that we will fall ill to specific diseases? Can we protect ourselves from disease through a positive outlook? This book will address both what we know, and what we persist in believing despite evidence to the contrary, and why such beliefs persist in the face of evidence.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Masaki Mandai, editor.
    Summary: This book thoroughly illustrates the designed and tailored medical approaches for tumors of the female reproductive organ. The chapters explore different cancer species such as ovarian cancer, endometrial cancer, cervical cancer, etc. Various treatment modalities such as immunotherapy and histotype-specific treatment are delivered, and it offers a chapter on how genome-wide analysis contributes to personalized treatment. It is essential to understand this concept because many molecular target drugs and the prevalence of genome-based analysis in clinical settings have enabled us to introduce valid precision medicine in the field of gynecologic oncology. Chapters explain the stream of transition from conventional standardized treatment to personalized treatment and address future perspectives. Personalization Gynecologic Oncology is a well-designed source for beginning to advanced oncologists, gynecologists, geneticists, genetic counselors, and nurses. Offering the latest treatment strategies, the Editor hopes the ideas presented here will be a foundation for further development in the field.

    Contents:
    1 Personalized treatment in ovarian cancer
    2 Carcinogenesis and personalization in hpv-associated precancer lesions of the cervix
    3 Personalized treatment for gestational trophoblastic tumor
    4 Personalized treatment in uterine sarcoma
    5 Clinical relevance of brca1/2 pathogenic variants and impaired dna repair pathways in ovarian carcinomas
    6 Personalized treatment in immunotherapy for gynecologic cancer
    7 Risk assessment and prevention strategies for hereditary gynecological cancers
    8 How genome-wide analysis contributes to personalized treatment in cancers including gynecologic cancers
    9 Personalized treatment of gynecological cancer according to age and symptom benefit.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Robert A. Norman, editor.
    Contents:
    Personalized Dermatology
    Genetic testing
    Evolutionary Dermatology
    Climate change and Skin Cancer
    Ecological Dermatology
    Human skin biodiversity and how it is changing
    The Future of Dermatology
    Combining diagnostic skills with genetic results.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Pedro Gambus, Jan Hendrickx.
    Summary: "Because there is no disease condition that can be treated with the administration of anaesthetic medications, the specialty of anaesthesiology does not possess a curative effect in itself. Nevertheless, achieving the state of anaesthesia or the anaesthetic state relies completely on the use of drugs. Drugs used in anaesthesia are very powerful and able to transiently break the most deeply rooted physiological defence mechanisms. Some of the effects induced are lack of consciousness, absence of response to pain, absence of muscle tone, immobility, lack of breathing, dysfunction of the autonomous nervous system, to name just a few. Some of these effects might be considered target or "therapeutic effects", such as unconsciousness, analgesia or immobility, but others are "side effects" that are induced because of the relative low specificity of currently used anaesthetic drugs"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    editor, Mark C. Houston.
    Summary: "Personalized and Precision Integrative Cardiovascular Medicine embraces a systems-oriented medical approach that works to identify and understand the underlying or root causes of disease. It takes into account the personalization of healthcare as each patient is unique. It employs in-depth health history taking, scientific testing and environmental and lifestyle review. It is used as disease prevention and for the treatment of chronic conditions (such as heart disease) through nutrition, supplementation, life-style changes, and stress management. Integrative Medicine is a model of healthcare in which conventional Western medicine is integrated with non-conventional or alternative modalities. And Metabolic Medicine/Cardiology is a newer field of medicine which concentrates on the prevention, management and treatment of cardiovascular disease at the cellular level through biochemical interventions. All three of these complementary approaches to Cardiovascular Medicine will be covered in this new title"-- Provided by publisher
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2020
  • Digital
    Terrence Adam, Constantin Aliferis, editors.
    Summary: This book adopts an integrated and workflow-based treatment of the field of personalized and precision medicine (PPM). Outlined within are established, proven and mature workflows as well as emerging and highly-promising opportunities for development. Each workflow is reviewed in terms of its operation and how they are enabled by a multitude of informatics methods and infrastructures. The book goes on to describe which parts are crucial to discovery and which are essential to delivery and how each of these interface and feed into one-another. Personalized and Precision Medicine Informatics provides a comprehensive review of the integrative as well as interpretive nature of the topic and brings together a large body of literature to define the topic and ensure that this is the key reference for the topic. It is an unique contribution that is positioned to be an essential guide for both PPM experts and non-experts, and for both informatics and non-informatics professionals.

    Contents:
    Intro; Acknowledgments; Contents; Contributors; Part I: Introduction;
    Chapter 1: Birth of a Discipline: Personalized and Precision Medicine (PPM) Informatics; Introduction to PPM and Its Relationship with Informatics; Purpose of the Present Book; Purpose of Present Volume; Contents and Structure of the Book; Classical Personalized and Precision Medicine; Newer and Emerging Forms of PPM; References; Part II: Classical PPM;
    Chapter 2: Clinical Risk Assessment and Prediction; Overview of Early PPM Modalities; Growth Curves; Risk Factors; Delivery of Classical PPM Tools at Point of Care Modeling Disease Severity and RiskDisease Staging; Prediction Models; Modeling Risk of Binary Events; Evaluating Prediction Models; Selection of New Risk Factors; Nomograms; Looking Forward; References;
    Chapter 3: Principles of Guideline-Driven PPM Informatics; Guidelines Driving Precision Care; Computable Guidelines and Informatics Considerations; References;
    Chapter 4: Genetic Counseling at the Intersection of Clinical Genetics and Informatics; Introduction; Genetic Counseling: Traditional Roles and Service Delivery Models; Genetic Testing; Genetic Testing Results; Carrier Screening Newborn ScreeningDiagnostic and Predictive Testing; Pharmacogenomics; Genetic Counseling Practice Guidelines; Genetic Counseling Educational Standards; Ethical and Legal Considerations; Autonomy, Beneficence, Non-maleficence, and Justice; The Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA); The Genetic Information Nondiscrimination Act of 2008; Duty to Warn; Expanding Roles and Service Delivery Models for Genetic Counseling; Genetic Counselors in Utilization Management; Genetic Counselors in the Public Health Setting; Conclusion; References
    Chapter 5: Fundamentals of Drug Metabolism and Pharmacogenomics Within a Learning Healthcare System Workflow PerspectiveIntroduction; Foundations of Pharmacogenomics for Precision Medicine Informatics; Origins of Pharmacogenetics; Modern Pharmacogenomics; Learning Healthcare System Workflow for Pharmacogenomics; Reverse Translation: Advancing Pharmacogenomics Knowledge with Real World Data; Sequencing Technologies and Data Pre-processing; Publicly Available Data Sources and Resources; Translational Informatics Study Design; Agnostic Signal Detection and Dimensionality Reduction Signal Tuning and ValidationSignal Augmentation and a Priori Knowledge; Forward Translation: Augmenting Clinical Practice with Actionable Pharmacogenomics Knowledge; "N of 1" and Comparable Populations; Signal Robustness and Sequencing Technology Considerations; Knowledge Management and Representation; Computational Tools to Navigate Signals; Appropriate Conveyance of Knowledge; Future Directions; Summary and Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 6: The Growing Medication Problem: Perspective from Industry; Introduction; RightMed® Comprehensive Solution; Precision Medicine Information Challenge
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    M. Mohamed Essa, M. Walid Qoronfleh, editors.
    Summary: The book focuses on implications of traditional and processed foods for autism spectrum disorder (ASD) intervention and management. Numerous phytonutrients and pharmacologically active compounds in edible natural products and diet could influence and offer protection to neuronal dysfunction that occurs due to ASD. The neuroprotective effects of various fruits, vegetables, nuts and seeds phytochemicals, and other natural bioactive ingredients against ASD and related conditions are discussed. Topics such as the possible neuroprotective mechanism of action of these foods and the therapeutic role of antioxidants in relation to ASD are addressed. This book also highlights the scope of using anti-inflammatory agents and antioxidants to promote neurogenesis and improve other symptoms in ASD. It emphasizes personalized nutritional approaches with dietary management of neurodevelopmental disorders/ASD cases. Information in this book is relevant to researchers in the field of complementary and alternative medicine, nutraceuticals, neuroscience, agriculture, nutrition, and food science. This volume is beneficial to students of varying levels, and across multiple disciplines.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction Food and Brain
    2. Food and Behavior
    3. Food and Psychological Wellbeing
    4. Food and Cognition
    5. Autism and Food
    6. Healthy Brains: Types of Food and their Active Pharmacological Ingredients
    5. Dieting: Importance of Diet and Diet Types
    6. Nutrigenomics
    7. Epigenetics
    8. Gut Microbiota (microbiome)
    9. Personalized Nutrition
    10. Vegetables
    11. Fruits
    12. Nuts, Seeds and Spices
    13. Grains [Oats, Barley & Quinoa]
    14. Seafood [fish like Salmon, Oyster, Sea vegetables (algae)]
    15. Other
    16. Autism Management through Food and Diet
    17. Personalized Nutrition Therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Travis L. Holloway, Ismail Jatoi.
    Contents:
    Personalized management of breast cancer / Travis L. Holloway & Ismail Jatoi
    Diagnosis and biomarkers / Aysegul Sahin & Alexandra Shaye Brown
    Molecular subtypes of breast cancer / Henry O. Ebili, A. Olayiwola Oluwasola & Olufunmilayo I. Olopade
    Surgery and radiotherapy : patient selection and clinical outcomes / Travis Holloway & Ismail Jatoi
    Hormone-blocking therapy : patient selection and clinical outcomes / Annie R. Su & Mothaffar F. Rimawi
    EGF receptor inhibitors : patient selection and clinical outcomes / Sean Warsch, Gabriel Tinoco, Stefan Glück, Kiran Avancha & Alberto J. Montero
    Antiangiogenic therapy : patient selection and clinical outcomes / Sheeba Irshad, Andrew Tutt & Paul Ellis
    Current guidelines of breast cancer management / Cristina Falci, Zora Baretta & Silvio Monfardini
    Management algorithms of breast cancer / Paolo Carli, Loredana Militello, Elena Torrisi, Alessando Tuzi & Andrea Veronesi
    Index.
    Digital Access Future Med 2014
  • Digital
    Jorge Hidalgo, Robert C Hyzy, Ahmed Mohamed Reda Taha, Yasser Younis A. Tolba, editors.
    Summary: In dealing with the unprecedented COVID-19 pandemic, there are an increased number of patients requiring personalized management as the disease pathology varies. With variable lung compliance and airway resistance as well as the severity of the disease, one size will not fit all patients. This book is problem-oriented with evidence-based discussions of the daily encountered scenarios in the ICU for mechanically ventilated patients, dealing with the pathology, monitoring and troubleshooting facing intensivists daily. These scenarios are managed utilizing a goal-directed approach and algorithms to achieve these goals. All chapters contain an explanation of a different solution illustrating the respiratory mechanics, physiology and pathology involved in such a scenario. Each chapter also closes with a take-home message to summarize the content. In addition to describing the ventilation of different patient categories, this text also features ventilation cases specific to COVID-19 including airway management in the enhanced air born isolated patient, pulmonary embolism, different states of shock and differential lung ventilation. There is also a specific chapter on monitoring mechanical ventilation with point of care ultrasound, which is an available modality in most ICUs. Another unique chapter describes how to connect more than one patient to one ventilator in case of a shortage of machines. Written by experts in the field, Personalized Mechanical Ventilation is a timely and valuable resource for critical care physicians, nurses and respiratory therapists on the front lines of both COVID-19 and day-to-day care of mechanically ventilated patients in the ICU.

    Contents:
    Respiratory Physiology and mechanics at the bedside
    Principals of Mechanical Ventilation
    Understanding Circuit, Filters and Humidification
    Airway management during Mechanical Ventilation COVID 19
    Non-invasive ventilation, AVAPS and high-flow nasal Cannula
    Modes of Mechanical Ventilation
    Acute respiratory failure
    Mechanical Ventilation in trauma patient
    Mechanical ventilation in Obese patient
    Postoperative Mechanical ventilation (fast track)
    Guidelines to set the ventilator for (COVID-19)
    Prone position during Mechanical Ventilation
    Using one ventilator for multiple patients
    Ventilator associated pneumonia
    Mechanical ventilation during pregnancy
    The Art of Weaning and Extubation
    Mechanical ventilation in shock state
    Respiratory monitoring Clinical and technical consideration
    Role of Point of Care Ultrasound during Mechanical Ventilation
    Acute respiratory distress and ARDS like syndromes
    Patient-ventilator dyssynchrony
    Unilateral lung disease and differential lung ventilation
    Obstructive airways disease
    Mechanical ventilation during ECMO (VV/VA)
    Mechanical ventilation in Neurocritical care patient
    Common Troubleshooting in daily practice.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Ali Dabbagh, editor.
    Summary: This book discusses the current and future impact of cellular and molecular medicine (CMM) on anesthesiology and perioperative medicine. It covers the topic from a translational perspective and describes the relevance of CMM to daily clinical practice. Taking a bench-to-bedside approach, chapters examine topics including perioperative acute and chronic management, perioperative organ protection, and novel pharmaceuticals. Personalized Medicine in Anesthesia, Pain and Perioperative Medicine is aimed at anesthesiologists and pain physicians, and will also be of interest to pharmacists and those working in cellular and molecular medicine.

    Contents:
    The role of personalized medicine in current and future clinical practice; the impact of cellular and molecular medicine in perioperative care.- Personalized anesthesia and genomics, transcriptomics, proteomics and metabolomics of anesthesia and pain management.- Personalized anesthesia in central and peripheral nervous system.- Personalized cardiac anesthesia.- Personalized anesthesia for lungs and respiratory tract.- Personalized medicine in pain management.- Personalized anesthesia for pediatrics and neonates.- Personalized anesthesia for musculoskeletal system.- Personalized anesthesia for renal and genitourinary system.- Personalized anesthesia for GI tract and hepatobiliary system.- Personalized critical care medicine.- Personalized anesthesia in hematologic and coagulation system.- Personalized medicine in anesthetic pharmacology.- Personalized medicine and perioperative stress response modification.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Peter J. Polverini, editor.
    Contents:
    Emerging Role of Personalized Medicine in Oral Health: Personalized Oral Health Care and the New Health Care Environment
    Omics Technology: Application to Oral Disease Prevention, Disease Prediction and Diagnosis
    Omics-Based Technology Development
    Personalized Medicine in Dental Practice: Personalized Oral Medicine and Transformation of Dental Practice
    Health Information Technology and Integrative Medicine
    Comprehensive Genetic Testing in Dental Practice
    Biomarkers for Individualized Oral Cancer Therapy
    Metabolomics and Oral Disease Diagnosis
    Companion Diagnostics in the Dental Office
    Genomics of Dental Caries and Caries Risk Assessment
    Genomics of Periodontal Risk Assessment and Disease Progression
    Personalized Oral Medicine and Public Health: Personalized Oral Medicine and Personalized Health Insurance
    The Economics of Personalized Oral Medicine
    Educating Dental Students and Dental Practitioners for the Practice of Personalized Oral Medicine
    Personalized Oral Health Care and the Future Oral Health Care Workforce
    Personalized Oral Medicine and the Global Diagnostic Market Place
    Opportunities and Challenges Shaping the Future of Personalized Oral Health Care.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Ives Cavalcante Passos, Benson Mwangi and Flávio Kapczinski.
    Summary: This book integrates the concepts of big data analytics into mental health practice and research. Mental disorders represent a public health challenge of staggering proportions. According to the most recent Global Burden of Disease study, psychiatric disorders constitute the leading cause of years lost to disability. The high morbidity and mortality related to these conditions are proportional to the potential for overall health gains if mental disorders can be more effectively diagnosed and treated. In order to fill these gaps, analysis in science, industry, and government seeks to use big data for a variety of problems, including clinical outcomes and diagnosis in psychiatry. Multiple mental healthcare providers and research laboratories are increasingly using large data sets to fulfill their mission. Briefly, big data is characterized by high volume, high velocity, variety and veracity of information, and to be useful it must be analyzed, interpreted, and acted upon. As such, focus has to shift to new analytical tools from the field of machine learning that will be critical for anyone practicing medicine, psychiatry and behavioral sciences in the 21st century. Big data analytics is gaining traction in psychiatric research, being used to provide predictive models for both clinical practice and public health systems. As compared with traditional statistical methods that provide primarily average group-level results, big data analytics allows predictions and stratification of clinical outcomes at an individual subject level. Personalized Psychiatry – Big Data Analytics in Mental Health provides a unique opportunity to showcase innovative solutions tackling complex problems in mental health using big data and machine learning. It represents an interesting platform to work with key opinion leaders to document current achievements, introduce new concepts as well as project the future role of big data and machine learning in mental health. .
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Nico van Weert, Jan Hazelzet, editors.
    Summary: This book highlights the work of pioneers in this field, in order to inspire their peers, healthcare leaders and an interested audience. Prior to the respective care practices, the authors describe the core of personalized care and illustrate its connections to value-driven care and evidence-based medicine. The last part of the book addresses organizational and other conditions under which personalized care can thrive. In the Netherlands, substantial work is being done on value-driven care and more is currently being discussed. This book focuses on the benefits of value-driven care for patients and healthcare providers alike. To do so, it explores a range of representative cases and scenarios, such as: Scenario 1: You are able to surgically remove the most difficult tumors and find out one day that you don't need to do so in all indicated patients. Later you can find out how to recognize when surgery isn't the best treatment for certain patients. And now your team has a fixed routine to find the optimal choice together with the patient. Scenario 2: You consider yourself to be a patient-centered doctor who is really in touch with their patients--until you ask them to report for themselves on how they are doing. In the "patient-reported outcomes" you see that you have completely missed an important aspect. Later, you can structurally integrate this into your outpatient clinic. Scenario 3: In line with the planning principles of your hospital, you see chronic patients once a year--and of course also 'as needed'--until your data shows you that you see patients too early or too late, but rarely when it would be most helpful. Later you can discover how to offer your consultation exactly on time--based on early signals and often even before the patient calls the clinic. This is what value-driven care is all about: care is of more significance to the patient when it is tailored to his or her unique situation. Recognizing the patient's needs, preferences and values, and structurally adapting care accordingly--that is the noble profession of value-driven care, which takes us an important step closer to the ideal of personalized care.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Personalized care as value-driven care
    Evidence Based Medicine and personalized care
    The IBD coach for person-oriented care
    Onco-geriatric MDO is based on treatment goals of older oncology patients
    I repair: EHealth application in the interest of the patient, healthcare professional and the BV. The Netherlands. a school example of value-driven care!
    Metabolic network for customized prevention and treatment
    Personal attention for the patient in Zorgpad Pituitary tumor
    Value-driven care for chronic kidney damage
    From process improvement aimed at quality and safety to a change process with care providers and patients to achieve personalized care: Radboudumc Basis op Orde
    Care monitor supports outcome-oriented care for patients with head and neck cancer
    Cleft lip and palate
    Turner
    Breast Cancer in the Region with Dashboard / The State of Patient-Centered Breast Cancer Care: an Academic Center's Experience and Perspective
    Pregnancy and childbirth care
    Better experiences of rheumatism patients through value-driven patient journey
    Organizational bed for person-centered care
    Interprofessional learning and working
    With regional funding towards transparent and personalized care. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Masakazu Toi, Eric Winer, John Benson, Suzanne Klimberg, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I Treatment for the Patients Having Breast Cancer High-Risk
    Chapter I Risk-Reducing Surgery for Breast Cancer Patients with BRCA Mutations
    Chapter 2 Prophylactic Risk Reducing Surgery for Breast Cancer
    Chapter 3 Merits and Demerits of Practice for Hereditary Breast and Ovarian Cancer Syndrome (Advices and Issues)
    Part II Axillary Treatment
    Chapter 4 Sentinel Lymph Node Biopsy and Neoadjuvant Chemotherapy in Breast Cancer Patients
    Chapter 5 Axillary Reverse Mapping (ARM) as a Means to Reduce Lymphedema During Sentinel Lymph Node or Axillary Node Dissection
    Chapter 6 Ultrasound for Axillary Staging
    Chapter 7 One Step Nucleic Acid Amplification(OSNA)Assay for Primary Breast Cancer
    Chapter 8 Management of the Clinically Node-Negative Axilla in Primary Breast Cancer
    Chapter 9 Lymphatic Mapping and Optimization of Sentinel Lymph Node Dissection
    Part III Radiation therapy
    Chapter 10 Personalization of Radiotherapy for Breast Cancer
    Chapter 11 New Technologies in Radiation Therapy
    Chapter 12 Radiotherapy Following Neoadjuvant Chemotherapy in Locally Advanced Breast Cancer
    Part IV Preoperative Hormone Therapy
    Chapter 13 Novel Translational Research of Neoadjuvant Endocrine Therapy
    Chapter 14 Alterations of Biomarkers by Neoadjuvant Endocrine Therapy
    Part V Preoperative chemotherapy
    Chapter 15 Essence of Neoadjuvant Therapy
    Chapter 16 The challenge to Overcome Triple Negative Breast Cancer Heterogeneity
    Chapter 17 Surgical Management of Breast Cancer after Preoperative Systemic Treatment
    Chapter 18 Imaging of Tumor Response by Preoperative Systemic Treatment
    Part VI Preoperative anti-HER2 therapy
    Chapter 19 Human Epidermal Growth Factor Receptor (HER) Family Molecular Structure
    Chapter 20 Locoregional Therapy Following Neoadjuvant Therapy for HER2-Positive Breast Cancer: Opportunities and Challenges
    Part VII Mathematical prediction/assessment model
    Chapter 21 Nomograms to predict positive resection margin and to predict 3 or more positive lymph nodes
    Chapter 22 Practical Use of Nomograms
    Chapter 23 Data Mining and Mathematical Model Development.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Thomas Bieber, Frank Nestle, editors.
    Summary: This book is a quick reference guide to the new, more personalized approaches to the management of skin disorders that have emerged as a result of progress in our understanding of the genetic background and pathophysiology of skin diseases and the diversity of mechanisms underlying their clinical heterogeneity. A wide range of personalized and targeted therapies are described, including those for different skin cancers, chronic inflammatory skin diseases, and autoimmune diseases. In addition, readers will find that the book documents how research results in personalized medicine can be effectively transferred to dermatological practice and looks forward to future treatments that might be developed on the basis of recent research findings. The authors are all recognized experts in the field, and the text is presented in a reader-friendly format and well illustrated.

    Contents:
    Definition and Scientific Background of Personalized Management
    Dermato-Oncology: Malignant Melanoma
    A Personalized Approach to the Treatment of Basal Cell Carcinoma
    From Single Actinic Keratosis to Field Cancerization
    Cutaneous T Cell Lymphoma
    Merkel-Cell Carcinoma and Sarcomas
    Chronic Inflammatory Skin Diseases: Personalized Management of Atopic Dermatitis
    Immunosuppressors or Biologicals for Distinct Forms of Psoriasis?
    Autoimmune Diseases: Acknowledging the Clinical Heterogeneity of Lupus Erythematosus
    Bullous Diseases
    Vasculitis.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Stanley J. Szefler, Fernando Holguin, Michael E. Wechsler.
    Summary: Personalized medicine is a rapidly emerging area in health care, and asthma management lends itself particularly well to this new development. This practical resource by Dr. Stanley J. Szefler helps you navigate the many asthma medication options available to your patients, as well as providing insights into those which may be introduced within the next several years.

    Contents:
    A population management model of asthma and allergy / Tari Haahtela, Olof Selroos
    Population health management / Monica J. Federico, Katherine Johnston
    Management of severe asthma in adults / Eileen Wang, Nicole Barberis, Rohit Katial
    Management and prevention of severe asthma in children / Anne M. Fitzpatrick
    Exhaled nitric oxide as a biomarker for asthma in children / Joseph D. Spahn, Jonathan Malka
    Blood and sputum eosinophils as a biomarker for selecting and adjusting asthma medication / Claudia L. Gaefke, Tara F. Carr
    Regulatory aspects of pediatric biomarkers for assessing medication response / Gilbert J. Burckart, Dionna J. Green
    Discovery and validation of new biomarkers fo personalizing asthma therapy / Kian Fan Chung
    Pharmacogenomics and applications to asthma management / Emily J. Pennington, Michael E. Wechsler, Victor E. Ortega
    Environmental assessment and control / Perdita Permaul, Wanda Phipatanakul
    Phenotype and genotype determinants of asthma treatments / Fernando Holguin
    Predicting and preventing asthma exacerbations / Dr. Heather Hoch, Dr. Andrew H. Lui
    School-centered asthma programs / Lisa Cicutto
    Systems biology approaches to asthma management / Yasmeen Nkrumah-Elie, Nichole Reisdorph
    The microbiome in asthma / Yvonne J. Huang
    Preventing the development of asthma / Jeffrey R. Stokes, Leonard B. Bacharier
    Identifying and preventing the progression of asthma to chronic obstructive pulmonary disease / Padmaja Subbarao, Malcolm R. Sears
    Imaging procedures and bronchial thermoplasty for asthma assessment and intervention / Shweta Sood, Mario Castro
    Future directions in asthma management / Stanley J. Szefler, Michael E. Wechsler.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    by Dennis L. Dresang.
    Contents:
    Part Part I: Introduction
    chapter 1 Introduction: Personnel Management in Government Agencies and Nonprofit Organizations
    part Part II: Public Policies for Personnel Management in Government Agencies and Nonprofit Organizations
    chapter 2 The Development of the Merit System
    chapter 3 Ethics, Rights, and Responsibilities
    chapter 4 Diversity
    chapter 5 Productivity
    chapter 6 Organization for Personnel Management
    part Part III: Organizational Needs
    chapter 7 Succession Planning
    chapter 8 Position Analysis and Job Evaluation
    chapter 9 Performance Evaluation
    chapter 10 Selecting Employees
    part Part IV: Employee Needs
    chapter 11 Employee Training and Development
    chapter 12 Health and Safety
    chapter 13 Discipline and Dismissal
    chapter 14 Compensation
    chapter 15 Collective Bargaining
    part Part V: Conclusion
    chapter 16 Summary and Conclusions.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Digital
    Mayuki Aibiki, Susumu Yamashita, editors.
    Summary: This book presents a valuable new perspective on Post-Cardiac Arrest Syndrome (PCAS), which was defined as system failure following whole-body ischemia-reperfusion injuries by the 2008 International Liaison Committee on Resuscitation. Recently, improving the survival rate of PCAS has become a major priority all over the world. A Perspective on Post-Cardiac Arrest Syndrome addresses various aspects, including: neurological outcomes in non-convulsive status epilepticus, target temperature management, interventions for PCAS after acute coronary syndrome, the significance of measuring lactate clearance, a specific scoring system in prognostication for PCAS, therapeutic indications for suicide hanging cases. This book will help a broad readership, including emergency physicians, intensivists, cardiologists and neurologists treating PCAS patients, to understand the history, current issues and future challenges in PCAS, presented by respected experts in this field.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Perumana R. Sudhakaran, editor ; co-edited by Oommen V. Oommen, M. Radhakrishna Pillai.
    Summary: Being a complex disease that affects millions of people world over, cancer research has assumed great significance. Translational cancer research transforms scientific discoveries in the laboratory or population studies into clinical application to reduce incidence of cancer, morbidity and mortality. It is becoming increasingly evident that cancer is a preventable disease. The IVth International Symposium on Translational Cancer Research held in Udaipur, India in December 2011, discussed various aspects of the biological processes in cancer cells and approaches to cancer prevention.

    Contents:
    1. Nutrition in Cancer: Evidence Based Nutrition Recommendations in Cancer Patients and Survivors
    2. Tumor Stem Cell Enrichment by Anticancer Drugs: A Potential Mechanism of Tumor Recurrence
    3. Curcumin: A potent candidate to be evaluated as a chemosensitizer in paclitaxel chemotherapy against cervical cancer
    4. Azadirachta indica (Neem) and Neem Limonoids as Anticancer Agents: Molecular Mechanisms and Targets
    5. In vitro studies on the antioxidant/antigenotoxic potential of aqueous fraction from Anthocephalus cadamba bark
    6. Possible involvement of Signal Transducer and Activator of Transcription-3 (STAT3) Signaling Pathway in the Initiation and Progression of Hepatocellular Carcinoma
    7. Simple Sequence Repeats In 5? and 3? flanking sequences of Cell Cycle Genes
    8. Mechanisms of Chemopreventive Activity of Sulforaphane
    9. Reciprocal relationship between VE-cadherin and Matrixmetalloproteinase expression in Endothelial cells and its Implications to Angiogenesis
    10. Androgen receptor expression in human thyroid cancer tissues: a potential mechanism underlying the gender bias in the incidence of thyroid cancers
    11. Novel co-ordination complexes of a few essential trace metals: Cytotoxic properties and lead identification for drug development for cancer
    12. Why Gallbladder Cancer is common in Gangetic Belt?
    13. Stress & Cancer Risk: The Possible Role of Work Stress.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Ena Ray Banerjee.
    Summary: "Perspectives in Inflammation Biology" outlines detailed studies using preclinical murine models in Inflammation. The book is meant for academicians, industry persons, research scholars and students alike. The detailed perspective for a beginner and the exhaustive methodologies and analyses outlined, for the veteran researcher, makes this book a unique link between someone who is thinking of embarking on a study of inflammation and one who is delving deep into this area of specialization. The book deals with asthma and allergy as specific disease areas of inflammation of the lung, aseptic peritonitis as a disease of systemic inflammation and details how each role player in its pathophysiology has a unique niche of activity. Data acquisition, sequentiality and analyses in context demonstrate how each role player is validated systematically to become a target for drug discovery. Methods and models used in the course of my work and their relevance will demonstrate to the researcher how a study can be developed from an idea. Further into a researcher's ongoing work, this book is meant to stimulate new questions and pave ways for better dissection of a phenomenon. The highlights of this book are the detailed tables tabulating sub species of immune cells, their inflammatory recruitment indices, their translation into tissue-to-tissue traffic of the inflammatory stimulus and the delicate interplay of resident structural cells, cells recruited from circulation, their feedback poiesis in bone marrow, their instruction in the lymphoid organs and tissues as well as the non-cellular mediators synthesized from corresponding genetic instruction. The book shall definitely help students and researchers how a disease can be simplified from its complex ramifications and network of implications and put back into perspective and the whole thing falls into place without an intimate understanding of the mechanism and the compelling circumstances that causes a disease, a drug hunter cannot hope to begin her quest. To find the Achilles heel and effectively neutralize the enemy!

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Pulmonary and Systemic inflammation
    Chapter 2. Preclinical models of acute and chronic models of lung inflammation
    Chapter 3. Studying the roles of some key molecules in acute allergic asthma
    Chapter 4. Role of integrins [alpha]4 and [alpha]2 onset and development of chronic allergic asthma in mice
    Chapter 5. Role of integrin [alpha]4 (VLA- Very Late Antigen 4) in lymphopoiesis by short and long term transplantation studies in genetic knockout model of mice
    Chapter 6. Studying the roles of some critical molecules in systemic inflammation.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Olav Giere.
    Summary: PRELIMINARY Although of high abundance, diversity and ecological importance, meiofauna is little covered by relevant scientific media. How can this negligence be overcome? The present treatise highlights promising meiofauna research fields, selected both from basic and applied science, as well as new methods that could strengthen the potential of meiobenthology. Selected recent meiofauna studies, often supported by rapidly advancing gene-based methods, underline the relevance and potential of meiobenthology revealing characteristics and harassments of ecosystems, not the least in extreme habitats. Also in the more classical domains such as taxonomy and phylogeny, progress in meiobenthos research defines a new and deeper scientific understanding.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface and Acknowledgements; Contents; List of Figures; 1 Introduction; References; 2 Fields of General Scientific Importance and Public Interest; 1 New Areas, Novel Communities, Exotic Biotopes; 2 The Deep-Sea-More Than an Interesting 'No Man's Land'; 3 Newly Accessible Polar Regions; References; 3 Pollution and Meiofauna-Old Topics, New Hazards; 1 Water Acidification by CO2 Increase; 2 Microplastics and Plastic Fibres; 3 Oil Spills at the Deep-Sea Floor; 4 Petroleum Hydrocarbons and Groundwater Aquifers; References; 4 Future Trend Lines in Ecological Meiobenthos Research 1 Aspects of Biodiversity 2 Reflections on Distribution, Dispersal and Colonization; 3 Organismic Interactions-Meiofauna Between Microbiota and Macrofauna; References; 5 Physiology, Biochemistry and Meiofauna-A Rarely Touched Terrain; 1 Hypoxia, Anoxia and Hydrogen Sulphide-Fields of Challenge; 2 Temperature-A Principal Physiological Driver; 3 Fatty Acids and Stable Isotopes as Biomarkers; 4 Physiological Pathways Revealed by the Genetic Background; References; 6 Towards an Integrated Triad: Taxonomy, Morphology and Phylogeny; 1 Advances at the Methodological Basis 2 New Trends Reviving 'Old Morphology'3 Phylogeny and Evolution-Meiofauna at the Deep Nodes; References; 7 Epilogue; References
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Sang-Hie Lee, Merry Lynn Morris, Santo V. Nicosia.
    Summary: Performing Arts Medicine (PAM) is a growing area of specialization within the performing arts field, which addresses the multi-faceted health and wellness of performing artists. This sub-discipline within performing arts is interdisciplinary in nature, involving the expertise of performing arts educators and researchers, physicians and other health professionals. This first of its kind text appeals to a very wide audience that includes performing arts clinical practitioners and health science researchers as well as performing arts pedagogues and performing arts students. The first part of the text gives the reader an overview of the field and discusses over-arching themes and issues in PAM. Part two presents an array of music and dance research involving primarily case studies that address significant issues of concern for performing artists and have implications for pedagogical practice. Part three provides research-based perspectives derived from professionals sharing their in-practice experiences. Finally, part four describes useful PAM models of implementation supporting the needs of performing artists in different settings. Written by experts in the field, Perspectives in Performing Arts Medicine Practice is a valuable resource for performing arts physicians, educators and researchers.

    Contents:
    Overview of Performing Arts Medicine
    This Wide and Universal Stage: How Empathy and Presence Inform the Contribution of Theatrical Practice to the Physician's Art
    Best of Both Worlds: An Odyssey of Medicine and Music
    Current Health Issues of Performing Artists: Implications for Health Promotion
    Exploring the Intersections of Arts and Medicine through the Painters' Lens
    Development of an Exercise Program for the Prevention of Playing Related Musculoskeletal Problems among Violinists
    Nikolai Bernstein's Theory of Movement Construction as a Foundation of Flow in Piano Technique
    Breathing Techniques in Collegiate Vocalists: The Effects of the Mind-Body Integrated Exercise Program on Singers' Posture, Tension, Efficacy and Respiratory Function
    Health Benefits of Culturally Oriented Dance
    Analyzing the Use of the Fifth Position in Dance Training
    A Case Report: Using Multimodalities to Examine a Professional Pianist with Focal Dystonia
    ^Discrepancies in Pianists Experiences in Playing Acoustic and Digital Pianos
    Musculoskeletal and Associated Conditions in the Instrumental Musician
    Experiences in Music Performance Anxiety: Exploration of Pedagogical Instruction among Professional Musicians
    Distilling Dart: Minding Bodily Approaches to Performance Through a Framework for Integration and the Alexander Technique
    Individualizing Training for Dancers
    Creating a Motor Learning Model for Dance Training
    Voice and Dance Technique Integration: Triple Threat or Double Trouble?
    The Role of Nutrition in Injury Prevention among Ballet Dancers
    When Prevention Makes Good Music
    Exploring Traditional Chinese Medicine in Musician Health
    Youth Dance Fundamental Movement Skills and Assessment
    Promoting Resilience and Fostering Mental Health Wellness Among University Dance Students
    ^Development of A Multidisciplinary Approach to Wellness and Injury Management at an Intensive Youth Orchestra Summer Festival
    Clinical Care of Performing Arts Students in the University Setting: A Successful Model with Wide Potential.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Varies.
    Call number varies. Search for Perspectives in psychiatry to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    edited by Arthur N. Popper and Richard R. Fay.
    Contents:
    A brief history of SHAR
    Structures, mechanisms, and energetics in temporal processing
    Human auditory cortex: in search of the flying Dutchman
    From cajal to the connectome: building a neuroanatomical framework for understanding the auditory system
    Recording from hair cells
    Three decades of tinnitus-related research
    The sense of hearing in fishes
    A quarter-century's perspective on a psychoacoustical approach to loudness
    Nonsyndromic deafness: it ain't necessarily so
    Evolving mechanosensory hair cells to hearing organs by altering genes and their expression: the molecular and cellular basis of inner ear and auditory organ evolution and development
    The implications of discharge regularity: my forty-year peek into the vestibular system
    Aging, hearing loss, and speech recognition: stop shouting, i can't understand you
    Cochlear mechanics, otoacoustic emissions, and medical olivocochlear efferents: twenty years of advances and controversies along the areas ripe for new work
    Examining fish in the sea: a European perspective
    The behavioral study of mammalian hearing
    Hearing in insects: the why, when, and how
    The cognitive auditory system: the role of learning in shaping the biology of the auditory system
    Fundamentals of hearing in amniote vertebrates
    Directional hearing in insects and other small animals: the physics of pressure-difference receiving ears
    Distributed cortical representation of sound locations
    Pitch: mechanisms underlying the pitch of pure and complex tones
    Unavoidably delayed: apersonal perspective of twenty years of research on a sound localization cue
    Size matters in hearing: how the auditory system normalizes the sounds of speech and music for source size
    A changing view of the auditory system obtained from the ears of bats
    From cave fish to pile driving: a tail of fish bioacoustics
    Current topics in the study of sound conduction to the inner ear
    From degenerative debris to neuronal tracing: an anterograde view of auditory circuits
    Adventures in bionic hearing
    My dull deaf ears: four millennia of acquired hearing loss
    What's the use of genetics?
    Advances in the understanding of binaural information processing: consideration of the stimulus as processed
    Temporal processing: observations on the psychophysics and modeling of temporal integration and temporal resolution
    Psychoacoustics and auditory perception
    Appendix. The first 49 volumes.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Rita Borg Xuereb, Julie Jomeen, editors.
    Summary: The book Perspectives on Midwifery and Parenthood explores contemporary issues relating to parenthood and midwifery. This book bridges a gap in the literature, where it highlights the close and unique relationships that midwives, nurses, doctors, other health care professionals and students enjoy with women and men during their transition to parenthood. Midwives work in close contact with and address the diverse needs of women and men during one of the most critical life's transitions, preconception, pregnancy, childbirth and early parenting and its long term implications on the psychosocial, emotional, physical and spiritual wellbeing of parents and infants. The chapters cover the transition and preparation for parenthood, midwives and parental-fetal-tie in pregnancy, perinatal mental health, maternal well-being, infertility, repeated loss and surrogacy, supporting early parenting following preterm birth, adolescent pregnancy and early parenthood, social challenges and parenthood including drug and alcohol use in pregnancy, intimate partners violence, migrants and transition to parenthood, fathers transition to parenthood, diversity of family formation - LGBTQ+ parents, breastfeeding, the role of spirituality during pregnancy, and midwifery and parenthood. Each person is unique and so is the response to parenthood, as the mother, father and family embark on this new lifeworld, a lifelong commitment. The book is a compendium of contemporary research depicting the strengths, opportunities, and recommendations how midwives and other health care professionals can nurture optimal, compassionate, respectful person- and family-centred care during pregnancy and early parenting, the transition to parenthood. .

    Contents:
    1. Midwifery and the Transition to Parenthood
    2. Preparation for Parenthood
    3. The Parental-Fetal Tie During Pregnancy
    4. Well-Being and Early Motherhood
    5. Midwifery and Perinatal Mental Health
    6. Infertility, Repeated Loss, and Surrogacy
    7. Supporting Early Parenting Following Preterm Birth
    8. Adolescent Pregnancy and Early Parenting
    9. Drug and Alcohol Use in Pregnancy and Early Parenthood
    10. Violence, Abuse and Coercive Control in Pregnancy and Early Parenting
    11. Migrants, Midwives, and the Transition to Parenthood
    12. Midwives and the Transition to Fatherhood
    13. Diversity of Family Formation: LGBTQ+ Parents
    14. Spirituality and Spiritual Care in the Transition to Motherhood
    15. Breastfeeding: Womens Experiences in the Transition to Motherhood
    16. Perspectives on Midwifery and Parenthood.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    volume editors, Hiroo Yokozeki, Hiroyuki Murota, Ichiro Katayama.
    Contents:
    New pathologies of skin disorders identified from the history of perspiration research / Yokozeki, H.
    Classification of systemic and localized sweating disorders / Ohshima, Y.; Tamada, Y.
    New findings on the mechanism of perspiration including aquaporin-5 water channel / Inoue, R.
    Old and new approaches for assessing sweating / Murota, H.
    Sweat as an efficient natural moisturizer / Shiohara, T.; Sato, Y.; Komatsu, Y.; Ushigome, Y.
    Genetic disorders with dyshidrosis : ectodermal dysplasia, incontinentia pigmenti, fabry disease, and congenital insensitivity to pain with anhidrosis / Wataya-Kaneda, M.
    Histamine modulates sweating and affects clinical manifestations of atopic dermatitis / Takahashi, A.; Tani, S.; Murota, H.; Katayama, I.
    Sweating in systemic abnormalities : uremia and diabetes mellitus / Murota, H.
    Abberant sudomotor functions in Sjögren's syndrome : comparable study with atopic dermatitis on dry skin manifestation / Katayama, I.
    Analysis and management of acquired idiopathic generalized anhidrosis / Satoh, T.
    Dyshidrotic eczema and its relationship to metal allergy / Nishizawa, A.
    Pathophysiology and treatment of hyperhidrosis / Fujimoto, T.
    New etiology of cholinergic urticaria / Tokura, Y.
    Sweat allergy / Hiragun, T.; Hide, M.
    Perspiration functions in different ethnic, age, and sex populations : modification of sudomotor function / Lee, J.-B.; Kim, J.-H.; Murota, H.
    Digital Access Karger 2016
  • Digital
    Sarah Klamroth ; with a preface by Prof. Dr. Klaus Pfeifer and Dr. Simon Steib.
    Summary: Sarah Klamroth describes a novel treadmill training device, which applies additional perturbations to the walking surface and thereby simulating an uneven surface. In a pilot study the author investigated the immediate effects on gait and postural control in patients with Parkinson's Disease after a single training session of perturbation treadmill training. The results show that perturbation treadmill training is feasible for mildly to moderately affected Parkinson patients, and that one training session led to improvements in overground walking speed and gait variability in these patients. Contents Devices for Perturbation Treadmill Training Motor Adaptations Gait and Postural Control in Parkinson's Disease Target Groups Scientists and students in the field of physical therapy, sport science, and neurology practitioners in the field of physical therapy, sport science, neurology, and rehabilitation. About the Author: Sarah Klamroth is Physical Therapist and Sport Scientist, and currently she does her PhD with a focus on Physical Activity and Quality of Life in Parkinson's Disease at the Department of Sport Science and Sport (Division of Exercise and Health, Prof. Dr. Klaus Pfeifer) of the Friedrich-Alexander-University Erlangen Nuremberg.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    Y96 .A84
    5
  • Digital
    edited by Omkar.
    Summary: This book comprehensively compiles information on some of the major pests that afflict agricultural, horticultural and medicinal crops in particular as well as many polyphagous pests. Not only does this book deal with the pests of common globally produced crops it also addresses those of rarely dealt with crops such as seed spices, medicinal and aromatic plants. While the perspective of insect pests is largely Indian and South East Asian in context, the book does deal with globally problematic pests, particularly polyphagous ones. Not only will the readers be acquainted with the pests, their damaging potential and their life cycle but also with the latest methods of managements including ecofriendly measures being employed to keep pest populations at manageable levels. The 27 chapters in the book, are grouped into four sections primarily based on crop types, viz. pest of agricultural, horticultural and medicinal crops, and polyphagous pests, making the book easy to navigate. Each of the chapters is comprehensive and well illustrated and written by academicians who have dedicated their entire lives to the study of a particular crop-pest complex. The final chapter of this book provides an overview on the principles and processes of pest management.

    Contents:
    Agricultural crops
    Horticultural crops
    Medicinal crops
    Polyphagous pests and management practices.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] Eugene C. Lin, MD, Clinical Assistant Professor of Radiology, Department of Radiology, Virginia Mason Medical Center, University of Washington, Seattle, Washington, USA, Abass Alavi, MD, MD(Hon), PhD(Hon), DSc(Hon), Professor of Radiology and Neurology, Director of Research Education, Department of Radiology, Hospital of the University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, USA.
    Summary: Top-selling, concise guide to PET and PET/CT imaging from distinguished radiologists, now in a new edition! PET and PET/CT have been increasingly used as effective imaging modalities in the management of patients with cancer, neurologic disease, musculoskeletal disease, and cardiac disease. PET and PET/CT: A Clinical Guide, Third Edition by world renowned molecular imaging pioneer Abass Alavi and esteemed diagnostic and nuclear radiologist Eugene Lin features the latest advances in PET technology in an easy-to-read format. The book lays a solid foundation with opening chapters on scanner physi.

    Contents:
    PET and PET/CT: A Clinical Guide; Title Page; Copyright; Dedication; Contents; Preface; Contributors; Part I Basic Science; 1 The Physics of PET/CT Scanners; 2 The Basics of 2-[F-18]Fluoro-2-deoxy-D-glucose Radiochemistry and Biology; 3 The Role of Glucose and FDG Metabolism in the Interpretation of PET Studies; Part II Clinical Basics; 4 Patient Preparation; 5 Standardized Uptake Value; 6 Quantitative Whole-Body PET/CT Imaging; 7 Normal Variants and Benign Findings; 8 Interpretation of FDG PET Studies; 9 PET/CT; 10 PET/MRI: Introduction to Clinical Applications Part III Oncologic Applications11 Oncological PET by Anatomic Region; 12 Therapy Response; 13 Brain Neoplasms; 14 Head and Neck Cancer; 15 Thyroid Cancer; 16 Thoracic Neoplasms; 17 Breast Cancer; 18 Gastric, Esophageal, and Gastrointestinal Stromal Tumors; 19 Lymphoma; 20 Melanoma; 21 Hepatobiliary Tumors; 22 Pancreatic Cancer; 23 Gynecological Tumors; 24 Urological Tumors; 25 Colorectal Cancer; 26 Musculoskeletal Tumors; 27 18F Sodium Fluoride PET/CT in Bone; 28 68Ga-Based Imaging Techniques; Part IV Nononcologic Applications; 29 Pediatric PET/CT; 30 PET/CT in Radiation Therapy Planning 31 FDG-PET/CT in the Evaluation of Infection and Inflammation32 Neurological Applications of Fluorodeoxyglucose PET; 33 Neurological Applications of Nonfluorodeoxyglucose Tracers; 34 Cardiac PET and PET/CT; Index
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Andreas Otte, Erik F.J. Vries, Aren Waarde, editors ; Klaus L. Leenders, guest editor.
    Summary: PET and SPECT in Neurology highlights the combined expertise of renowned authors whose dedication to the investigation of neurological disorders through nuclear medicine technology has achieved international recognition. Classical neurodegenerative disorders are discussed as well as cerebrovascular disorders, brain tumors, epilepsy, head trauma, coma, sleeping disorders, and inflammatory and infectious diseases of the CNS. The latest results in nuclear brain imaging are detailed. Most chapters are written jointly by a clinical neurologist and a nuclear medicine specialist to ensure a multidisciplinary approach. This state-of-the-art compendium will be valuable to anybody in the field of neuroscience, from the neurologist and the radiologist/nuclear medicine specialist to the interested general practitioner and geriatrician. It is the second volume of a trilogy on PET and SPECT imaging in the neurosciences, the other volumes covering PET and SPECT in psychiatry and in neurobiological systems.

    Contents:
    Nuclear Medicine Imaging Tracers for Neurology
    ¹⁸F-Fluorodeoxyglucose PET Procedures: Health Economic Aspects in Neurology
    Tracer Kinetic Modelling
    Quantification in Brain SPECT: Noninvasive Cerebral Blood Flow Measurements Using ⁹⁹mTc-Labeled Tracers
    MRI/PET Brain Imaging
    An Investigation of Statistical Power of [¹⁵O]-H₂O PET Perfusion Imaging: The Influence of Delay and Time Interval
    Molecular Imaging Using Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy in Neurology: The Past, the Present, and the Future
    The Default Network of the Brain
    Dementia Due to Neurodegenerative Disease: Molecular Imaging Findings
    Ass Imaging in Aging, Alzheimer's Disease and Other Neurodegenerative Conditions
    PET Imaging of the a4ss2* Nicotinic Acetylcholine Receptors in Alzheimer's Disease
    Neuroimaging Findings in Mild Cognitive Impairment
    Impact of the IWG/Dubois Criteria for Alzheimer's Disease in Imaging Studies
    Perfusion SPECT: Its Role in the Diagnosis and Differential Diagnosis of Alzheimer's Disease, with Particular Emphasis on Guidelines
    Nuclear Imaging in Frontotemporal Dementia
    Parkinson Dementia: PET Findings
    SPECT/PET Findings in Lewy Body Dementia
    Vascular Dementia
    Value of MIBG in the Differential Diagnosis of Neurodegenerative Disorders
    Linking Molecular Neurobiology to Therapeutic Approaches for Alzheimer's Disease with PET
    PET and SPECT Studies of Ageing and Cardiovascular Risk Factors for Alzheimer's Disease
    Carotid Plaque Imaging with SPECT/CT and PET/CT
    PET in Brain Arteriovenous Malformations and Cerebral Proliferative Angiopathy
    Transient Ischaemic Attack (Neuroimaging Findings)
    PET Reveals Pathophysiology in Ischemic Stroke
    Parkinson's Disease
    SPECT Imaging for Idiopatic M. Parkinson and Parkinsonian Syndromes: Guidelines and Comparison with PET and Recent Developments
    PET and SPECT Imaging in Parkinsonian Syndromes
    Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis
    PET in Huntington's Disease
    PET and SPECT Imaging in Dystonia
    PET and SPECT Imaging in Hyperkinetic Movement Disorders
    Clinical Applications of [¹²³I]FP-CIT SPECT Imaging
    PET Imaging of Microglia Activation in Neuropsychiatric Disorders with Potential Infectious Origin
    PET Imaging in Multiple Sclerosis: Focus on the Translocator Protein
    PET and SPECT Imaging of Neurotoxicity
    PET and SPECT in Hepatic and Uraemic Encephalopathy
    PET in Epilepsy
    SISCOM (Subtraction Ictal SPECT Coregistered to MRI)
    Nuclear Medicine Neuroimaging and Electromagnetic Source Localization in Nonlesional Drug-Resistant Focal Epilepsy
    Gliomas
    Single-Photon Emission Computed Tomography [Neuro-SPECT] Imaging of Brain Tumors
    The Value of ¹¹C-Methionine PET in the Differential Diagnosis Between Brain Tumor Recurrence and Radionecrosis
    Imaging Brain Metastases of Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Traumatic Brain Injury: Nuclear Medicine Neuroimaging
    Whiplash, Real or Not Real? A Review and New Concept
    PET Imaging in Altered States of Consciousness: Coma, Sleep, and Hypnosis
    Anaesthesia and PET of the Brain
    Modulation of Brain Functioning by Deep Brain Stimulation: Contributions from PET Functional Imaging
    Radionuclide Imaging Studies in Pediatric Neurology.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Andreas Otte, Erik F.J. de Vries, Aren van Waarde, editors ; Klaus L. Leenders, guest editor.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of the use of PET and SPECT in not only classic neurodegenerative disorders but also cerebrovascular disorders, brain tumors, epilepsy, head trauma, coma, sleeping disorders, and inflammatory and infectious diseases of the CNS. The new edition has been revised and updated to reflect recent advances and includes additional chapters, for example on the use of artificial intelligence and machine learning in imaging data analysis, the study of brain connectivity using PET and SPECT images, and the role of PET imaging in modulation of brain functioning by deep brain stimulation. The authors are renowned experts whose dedication to the investigation of neurological disorders through nuclear medicine technology has achieved international recognition. Most chapters are written jointly by a clinical neurologist and a nuclear medicine specialist to ensure a multidisciplinary approach. This state of the art compendium will be invaluable for neurologists and radiologists/nuclear medicine specialists and will also be informative for interested general practitioners and geriatricians. Companion volumes on PET and SPECT in psychiatry and in neurobiological systems complete a trilogy.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Contents
    Part I: Basics
    1: Nuclear Medicine Imaging Tracers for Neurology
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Glucose Consumption
    1.3 Translocator Protein TSPO
    1.4 GABA Receptor
    1.5 Dopaminergic System
    1.5.1 Dopamine Transporter (DAT)
    1.5.2 D1 Receptor
    1.5.3 D2 Receptor
    1.5.4 D2/D3 Agonists
    1.6 Beta-Amyloid Deposition
    1.7 NMDA Receptor, Glycine Transport
    1.8 P-Glycoprotein
    1.9 Cholinergic System
    1.10 Metabotropic Glutamate-5 Receptor
    1.11 Vesicular Monoamine Transporter
    1.12 Adenosine Receptors 1.13 Serotonergic System
    1.13.1 Serotonin Transporter
    1.13.2 5-HT Receptor Ligands
    1.14 Nonadrenergic System
    1.15 Opioid Receptors
    1.16 Monoamine Oxidase
    1.17 SV2A Receptors
    1.18 Sigma Receptors
    1.19 Tau Protein Deposition
    1.20 Phosphodiesterase
    1.21 P2X7 Receptor
    1.22 (Re)Myelination
    1.23 Cannabinoid Receptors
    1.24 Conclusions
    References
    2: Tracer Kinetic Modelling
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Principles of Modelling
    2.3 Single-Tissue Compartment Model
    2.4 Principles and Practice of Quantification 2.5 An Example: Measurement of CBF Using [15O]H2O
    2.6 Two-Tissue Compartment Model
    2.7 Reference Tissue Models
    2.8 Parametric Methods
    2.9 Conclusions
    References
    3: Quantification in Brain SPECT: Noninvasive Cerebral Blood Flow Measurements Using 99mTc-Labeled Tracers
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Method
    3.2.1 Theory of Graphical Analysis
    3.2.2 Brain Perfusion Index (BPI)
    3.2.3 Comparison of BPI and CBF Values Measured by Other Invasive Methods
    3.2.4 Alternative Approach to Estimation of BPI
    3.2.5 Calculation of Regional CBF from BPI 3.2.6 Consecutive rCBF Measurements at Baseline and Acetazolamide Challenge
    3.3 Clinical Application
    3.3.1 Cerebrovascular Diseases
    3.3.2 Heart Failure
    3.3.3 Idiopathic Normal Pressure Hydrocephalus
    3.3.4 Neurodegenerative Disorders
    3.3.5 Mood Disorders
    3.3.6 Other Neuropsychiatric Diseases
    3.4 Conclusion
    References
    4: From Positron to Pattern: A Conceptual and Practical Overview of 18F-FDG PET Imaging and Spatial Covariance Analysis
    4.1 18F-FDG PET Imaging
    4.1.1 Basic Concepts in PET
    4.1.2 18F-FDG PET Imaging 4.1.3 Studying Brain Function with 18F-FDG PET
    4.2 Analysis of Resting-State 18F-FDG PET Images
    4.2.1 Image Registration
    4.2.2 Normalization
    4.2.3 Analysis of Variance and Covariance
    4.2.4 Principal Component Analysis
    4.3 SSM PCA
    4.3.1 Defining the Data
    4.3.2 Normalization with the Scaled Subprofile Model (SSM)
    4.3.3 Calculating Eigenvectors from a Covariance Matrix
    4.3.4 Calculating Subject Scores and Selecting Disease-Related Components
    4.3.5 Prospective Application of the Pattern
    4.3.6 Validation
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Andreas Otte, Erik F.J. de Vries, Aren van Waarde, editors ; Johan A. den Boer, guest editor.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Andreas Otte, Erik F.J. de Vries, Aren van Waarde, Iris E. Sommer.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of the use of PET and SPECT in the classic psychiatric disorders such as depression, bipolar disorder, anxiety disorders, and schizophrenia. In addition, it discusses the application of these functional neuroimaging techniques in a variety of other conditions, including sleep disorders, eating disorders, autism, and chronic fatigue syndrome. The new edition has been extensively revised and updated to reflect the latest advances and results in nuclear imaging within the field. Most chapters are written jointly by a clinical psychiatrist and a nuclear medicine expert to ensure a multidisciplinary approach. This state of the art compendium will be of value for all who have an interest in the field of neuroscience, from psychiatrists and radiologists/nuclear medicine specialists to interested general practitioners and cognitive psychologists. Companion volumes on the use of PET and SPECT in neurology and for the imaging of neurobiological systems complete a trilogy.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Andreas Otte, Erik F.J. de Vries, Aren van Waarde, editors ; Paul G.M. Luiten, guest editor.
    Summary: PET and SPECT of Neurobiological Systems combines the expertise of renowned authors whose dedication to the development of novel probes and techniques for the investigation of neurobiological systems has achieved international recognition. Various aspects of neurotransmission in the brain are discussed, such as visualization and quantification of (more than 20 different) neuroreceptors, neuroinflammatory markers, transporters, and enzymes as well as neurotransmitter synthesis, -amyloid deposition, cerebral blood flow, and the metabolic rate of glucose. The latest results in probe development are also detailed. Most chapters are written jointly by radiochemists and nuclear medicine specialists to ensure a multidisciplinary approach. This state of the art compendium will be valuable to anyone in the field of clinical or preclinical neuroscience, from the radiochemist and radiologist/nuclear medicine specialist to the interested neurobiologist and general practitioner. It is the second volume of a trilogy on PET and SPECT imaging in the neurosciences. Other volumes focus on PET and SPECT in psychiatry and PET and SPECT in "neurology".

    Contents:
    BASICS: Animal Models for Brain Research
    Cerebral Glucose Metabolism
    Cerebral Blood Flow Measurements with Oxygen-15 Water PET
    Principles of Brain Perfusion SPECT
    The Impact of Genetic Polymorphisms on Neuroreceptor Imaging
    SYSTEMS: Imaging of Adenosine Receptors
    PET Tracers for Beta-Amyloid and Other Proteinopathies
    Imaging of Central Benzodiazepine Receptors in Chronic Cerebral Ischemia
    PET and SPECT Imaging of the Central Dopamine System in Humans
    PET Imaging of Endocannabinoid System
    Imaging Type 1 Glycine Transporters in the Central Nervous System Using PET
    Imaging Histamine Receptors Using PET and SPECT
    PET and SPECT Imaging of Brain Steroid Hormone Receptors
    Current Radioligands for the PET Imaging of Metabotropic Glutamate Receptors
    PET Imaging of Muscarinic Receptors
    Preclinical Aspects of Nicotinic Acetylcholine Receptor Imaging
    Development of Radioligands for In Vivo Imaging of NMDA Receptors
    Progress in PET Imaging of the Norepinephrine Transporter System
    PET Imaging of Opioid Receptors
    PET Imaging of ABC Transporters in the Blood-Brain Barrier
    PET Imaging of Translocator Protein Expression in Neurological Disorders
    Imaging of the Serotonin System: Radiotracers and Applications in Memory Disorders
    Serotonin Synthesis Studied with PET
    Monoamine Oxidase A and Serotonin Transporter Imaging with PET
    PET Imaging of Sigma-1 Receptors
    Radioligands for Imaging Vesicular Monoamine Transporters.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Andreas Otte, Erik F.J. de Vries, Aren van Waarde, editors ; Adriaan A. Lammertsma, guest editor.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Contents
    Part I: Basics
    1: Animal Models for Brain Research
    1.1 Introduction to Animal Modelling for Human Brain Disease
    1.1.1 Relevance of Animal Models
    1.1.2 Validity of Animal Models
    1.1.2.1 Face Validity
    1.1.2.2 Construct Validity
    1.1.2.3 Aetiological Validity
    1.1.2.4 Predictive Validity
    1.1.3 Homology, Analogy and Isomorphism
    1.1.4 Generalisation and Extrapolation
    1.2 Animal Models of Psychiatric Disorders
    1.2.1 The Endophenotype Concept in Psychiatry
    1.2.2 Approaches to Modelling Psychiatric Disease 1.2.2.1 Behavioural Approach
    1.2.2.2 Pharmacological Models
    1.2.2.3 Genetic Models
    1.2.3 Animal Models of Schizophrenia
    1.2.3.1 Aetiology and Symptomatology of Schizophrenia
    1.2.3.2 Validating Animal Models of Schizophrenia
    Electrophysiological Endophenotypes
    Cognitive Endophenotypes
    Locomotor Activity
    Sensory Discrimination
    Negative Symptoms
    1.2.3.3 Neurodevelopmental Schizophrenia Models
    1.2.3.4 Drug-Induced Schizophrenia Models
    Psychostimulant Models
    Hallucinogen Models
    1.2.3.5 Lesion-Induced Schizophrenia Models 1.2.3.6 Genetic Schizophrenia Models
    Inbred and Selectively Bred Rodent Strains
    Genetically Modified Models
    1.3 Animal Models of Neurological Disorders
    1.3.1 Approaches to Modelling Neurological Disorders
    1.3.2 Animal Models of Alzheimer's Disease
    1.3.2.1 Aetiology and Symptomatology of Alzheimer's Disease
    1.3.2.2 Validating Animal Models of Alzheimer's Disease
    Cognitive Symptoms
    BPSD-Related Symptoms
    Pathological Alterations
    Neurochemical Alterations
    1.3.2.3 Spontaneous and Selectively Bred Alzheimer's Disease Models 2.1.3.1 Volume of Distribution
    2.1.3.2 Input Function
    2.1.3.3 One-Tissue Compartment Model
    2.1.3.4 Two-Tissue Compartment Model
    2.1.3.5 Logan Plot
    2.1.4 Reference Tissue Models
    2.1.4.1 Binding Potential
    2.1.4.2 Simplified Reference Tissue Model
    2.1.5 Receptor Occupancy and Displacement
    2.1.6 Semiquantitative Approach
    2.1.7 Radioligands
    2.2 PET Motion Correction: State of the Art
    2.2.1 The Need for Awake PET: Anesthesia, Stress, and Its Impact on Small Animal PET
    2.2.2 Motion Correction in PET Reconstruction
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Peter S. Conti, Aarti Kaushik, editors.
    Contents:
    Normal Patterns and Variants
    Lung Neoplasms
    Breast Neoplasms
    Esophageal and Gastric Neoplasms
    Hepatobiliary, Pancreas, Adrenal, Melanoma, and GIST
    Colon Neoplasms
    Gynecologic Neoplasms: Cervical, Ovarian, Vulvar, Uterine, and Endometrial Cancer
    Urologic Neoplasms: Prostate, Bladder, and Renal Cell Carcinoma
    Lymphoma
    Musculoskeletal Neoplasms
    F-18 Fluoride Bone Scintigraphy
    Neuroradiology: Neoplasms and Epilepsy
    Dementia
    Pediatric Imaging
    Myocardial Viability
    Granulomatous Diseases
    Newer Tracers. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Amir H. Khandani, editor.
    Summary: This is a comprehensive guide for patient preparation, image acquisition, and image interpretation for PET/CT and PET/MR, specifically relevant to melanoma and sarcoma. Imaging specialists and referring physicians are often not as intimately aware of the particulars of PET imaging in management of patients with melanoma and sarcoma and how it could affect their treatment. This book fills that gap by presenting comprehensive information on melanoma, sarcoma, and the role of PET imaging in their diagnosis and management. The book begins by covering the basics of imaging for practicing physicians and trainees. Expert authors then further cover the biological concepts of melanoma and sarcoma and how they relate to imaging, particularly PET, the oncologist's perspective, and the surgeon's perspective on imaging for both the imaging specialist and the referring physician. Chapters review topics such as: PET/CT and PET/MR images in melanoma and sarcoma from a systemic approach, false-positives, false-negatives, pitfalls, and molecular imaging beyond PET. Images are used extensively throughout to enhance understanding for the reader. This is an ideal guide for radiologists, nuclear medicine physicians, oncologists, surgeons, trainees and technologists.

    Contents:
    What is Positron Emission Tomography?
    Patient Preparation for FDG PET with an Emphasis on Soft Tissue Sarcoma and Melanoma: What Matters (and What Doesn't)
    PET/CT and PET/MR in Soft Tissue Sarcoma and Melanoma Patients: What to Image and How to Image It
    Systematic Approach to Evaluation of Melanoma and Sarcoma with PET
    Review of PET/CT Images in Melanoma and Sarcoma: False-Positives, False-Negatives and Pitfalls
    PET beyond pictures
    The Role of PET/CT in Melanoma Patients: A Surgeon's Perspective
    PET in Sarcoma - Surgeons Point of View
    FDG PET in the Diagnosis and Management of Pediatric and Adolescent Sarcomas
    Beyond FDG: Novel Radiotracers for PET Imaging of Melanoma and Sarcoma
    Future Directions of PET and Molecular Imaging and Therapy with an Emphasis on Melanoma and Sarcoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Andrea Ciarmiello, Luigi Mansi, editors.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Foreword
    Part 1-Basics
    Physics Of Hybrid Imaging
    Instrumentation
    Quantitation And Data Analysis In Hybrid PET/MRI Systems
    Radiopharmaceuticals
    Contrast Media
    Part 2-Most Frequent Clinical Applications
    FDG-PET in Dementia
    Amyloid imaging in dementia and related disorders
    Movement disorders: focus on Parkinsońs disease and related disorders
    Psychiatric disorders
    PET/CT and PET/MRI in Neurology: Infection/Inflammation
    Brain Tumors
    Hybrid Imaging in Pediatric Central Nervous System Disorders
    Part 3-Most Frequent Clinical Applications
    Multimodality Imaging of Huntington's Disease
    Neuroimaging in Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis
    Hybrid imaging in vegetative state
    Hybrid imaging in cerebrovascular disease
    Hybrid imaging in Emergency Room
    Part 4-SWOT analysis
    SWOT Analysis and Stakeholder Engagement for Comparative Evaluation of Hybrid Molecular Imaging Modalities
    Worldwide Challenges and Opportunities of Hybrid Imaging: Perspective from the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA)
    PET/CT vs PET/MRI.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Hiroshi Toyama, Yaming Li, Jun Hatazawa, Guang Huang, Kazuo Kubota, editors.
    Contents:
    1.2.3 Foam Cell Formation and FDG Uptake
    1.2.4 Polarization of Macrophages and Uptake of FDG
    1.2.5 Monitoring of the Therapeutic Effect
    1.2.6 Comparison with Other PET Tracers
    1.3 PET Imaging in Animal Model of Neuroinflammation 1
    1.3.1 Introduction
    1.3.2 Current Standard of Neuroinflammation Imaging
    1.3.3 Alternative Molecular Targets for Microglia Imaging
    1.4 PET Imaging in Animal Models of Neuroinflammation 2
    1.4.1 Introduction
    1.4.2 Brain Ischemia Model
    1.4.3 Traumatic Brain Injury Model
    1.4.4 Alzheimer's Disease Model 1.4.5 Other Models of Neuroinflammation
    1.4.6 New PET Tracer for Neuroinflammation
    1.4.7 Conclusion
    1.5 PET Imaging of Inflammation in the Peripheral System with [18F]FEDAC, a Radioligand for Translocator Protein (18 kDa)
    1.5.1 Introduction
    1.5.2 PET Imaging and Quantitative Analysis of TSPO in Rat Peripheral Tissues
    1.5.3 TSPO in Lung Inflammation
    1.5.4 TSPO in Nonalcoholic Fatty Liver Disease
    1.5.5 TSPO in Liver Damage
    1.5.6 TSPO in Liver Fibrosis
    1.5.7 TSPO in Multiple Sclerosis
    1.5.8 TSPO in Rheumatic Arthritis
    1.5.9 Conclusion 1.6 Role of Microglia in Neuroinflammation
    1.6.1 Introduction
    1.6.2 Microglia Diversity
    1.6.3 Microglia and Neuroinflammation
    1.6.4 Existence of Nontoxic Activated Form of Microglia in the Brain
    1.6.5 Direct Evidence of Neuroprotection by Microglia in the Brain
    1.6.6 Toxic Transformation of Microglia by Nef Protein Introduction
    1.6.7 CNS Cytokine Network
    1.7 Application of Preclinical PET Imaging for Infectious Diseases
    1.7.1 Introduction
    1.7.2 Imaging Laboratory for Infectious Diseases
    1.7.3 PET Imaging with Infectious Small Animals
    References 2: FDG-PET/CT in Patients with Inflammation or Fever of Unknown Origin (IUO and FUO)
    2.1 Role of FDG-PET/CT in the Diagnosis of Fever or Inflammation of Unknown Origin (FUO/IUO)
    2.1.1 What Is FUO?
    2.1.2 What Is IUO?
    2.1.3 Why FDG-PET/CT for FUO/IUO?
    2.1.4 Results of FDG-PET/CT for FUO/IUO
    2.1.5 Factors Affecting the Results
    2.1.5.1 Disease Prevalence and Positivity
    2.1.5.2 Markers of Inflammation
    2.1.5.3 Structured Evaluation FUO/IUO
    2.1.6 Conclusion
    2.2 Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis in FDG-PET/CT for Inflammatory Diseases
    2.2.1 Introduction
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Kanhaiyalal Agrawal, Annah Skillen, Abdulredha Esmail, Sharjeel Usmani, editors.
    Summary: The aim of this book is to provide concise information and quick reference on the basics and practice of PET/CT for beginners. The chapters are written by Nuclear Medicine experts from different countries with enormous experience in PET/CT practice. Starting with the basics of PET/CT describing physics and the use of radiopharmaceuticals in PET/CT, the book explores the principle of PET/CT in radiotherapy planning. The last five chapters explore normal variation, pitfalls and artefacts commonly seen with various routinely used PET radiotracers. The text is enriched by tables and highlighted clinical cases for better understanding. This book will be of interest mostly to nuclear medicine physicians and radiologists, but it may be appealing also to a wider medical community including oncologists and radiotherapists.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Basic Principles of PET-CT imaging
    Chapter 2: Physics of PET and Respiratory Gating
    Chapter 3. The Physics of PET/CT for Radiotherapy Planning
    Chapter 4. 18F-FDG and Non-FDG PET Radiopharmaceuticals
    Chapter 5. PET/CT imaging: Patient instructions and preparation
    Chapter 6.18F-FDG PET/CT Imaging: Normal variants, pitfalls and artefacts.-Chapter 7: 68Ga-DOTA-peptides PET-CT: Physiological biodistribution, variants and pitfalls
    Chapter 8. 18F-methylcholine (FCH) PET-CT imaging: Physiological distribution, pitfalls and imaging pearls
    Chapter 9: 68Ga-PSMA PET/CT: Normal Variants, Pitfalls and Artefacts
    Chapter 10: 18F-NaF PET-CT Imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Francesco Fraioli, editors.
    Summary: This well-illustrated pocket book offers up-to-date guidance on the clinical and research applications of PET/CT in the most common neurological and neuro-oncological disorders. The opening chapters cover the pros and cons of widely used radiological imaging techniques, scanners, and radiopharmaceuticals, with emphasis on the state of the art hybrid modalities, primarily PET/CT but also PET/MRI. Helpful information is provided on the clinical and research tracers used in neurodegenerative diseases, movement disorders, epilepsy and brain tumours. These four killers are then discussed in detail, highlighting the role of PET/CT and targeted tracers in their assessment and in radiotherapy planning. In addition, the clinical applications of PET/MRI are considered. Throughout, many images are included to better explain the diseases and the role of hybrid imaging, and the final chapter presents a large sample of teaching cases and files that will assist in daily clinical practice. The book has been compiled under the auspices of the British Nuclear Medicine Society. It will be an excellent asset for nuclear medicine physicians, radiologists, radiographers, neurologists and neurosurgeons.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Acknowledgements; Contents; Contributors;
    1: Introduction to Brain Disorders; References;
    2: Radiological Imaging in Brain Disorders: An Overview; 2.1 Neuroimaging Modalities and Techniques; 2.1.1 Computed Tomography (CT); 2.1.2 Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI); 2.1.2.1 Perfusion MRI; 2.1.2.2 MR Spectroscopy; 2.1.2.3 Diffusion Tensor Imaging; 2.1.2.4 Functional MRI (f-MRI); 2.2 Radiological Imaging in Neurodegenerative Diseases; 2.3 Radiological Imaging in Movement Disorders; 2.4 Radiological Imaging in Epilepsy; 2.5 Radiological Imaging in Neuro-Oncology 5.3 Frontotemporal Degeneration (FTD)5.4 Dementia of Lewy Body (DLB); 5.5 Other Neurodegenerative Diseases; 5.6 Advantages and Limitations; References;
    6: [18F]FDG-PET/CT in Movement Disorders; 6.1 Introduction; 6.2 Parkinson's Disease; 6.2.1 Clinical Phenotypes; 6.2.2 Neuropathology Findings; 6.2.3 [18F]FDG-PET Typical Patterns; 6.3 Multiple System Atrophy; 6.3.1 Clinical Phenotypes; 6.3.2 Neuropathology Findings; 6.3.3 [18F]FDG-PET Typical Patterns; 6.4 The Spectrum of Progressive Supranuclear Palsy and Corticobasal Degeneration; 6.4.1 Clinical Phenotypes 6.4.2 Neuropathology Findings6.4.3 [18F]FDG-PET Typical Patterns; 6.5 Huntington's Disease; 6.5.1 Clinical Phenotypes; 6.5.2 Neuropathology Findings; 6.5.3 [18F]FDG-PET Typical Patterns; 6.6 Advantages and Limitations; 6.6.1 General Advantages; 6.6.2 General Limitations; References;
    7: 18F-FDG PET in Epilepsy; 7.1 Introduction; 7.2 Clinical Indications; 7.3 Classical Patterns; 7.3.1 Temporal; 7.3.2 Extratemporal; 7.3.3 Syndromes; 7.4 Advantages and Limitations; 7.5 Conclusion; References;
    8: PET in Neuro-Oncology; 8.1 Introduction 8.2 PET in Primary Glioma Diagnosis and Differential Diagnosis8.2.1 18F-FDG; 8.2.2 11C-MET; 8.2.3 18F-FET; 8.2.4 18F-FDOPA; 8.2.5 18F-CHO; 8.2.6 18F-FLT; 8.3 Amino Acid Tracers PET in Glioma Histological Subtyping; 8.4 PET in Glioma Grading; 8.4.1 18F-FET; 8.4.2 11C-MET; 8.4.3 18F-FDOPA; 8.4.4 18F-FLT; 8.5 Glioma Treatment Effect and Recurrence; 8.6 PET Tracers in Differentiating Recurrence from Treatment Effects; 8.7 Conclusion; References;
    9: 18F-FDG PET/CT Indications, Pitfalls and Limitations in Brain Imaging; 9.1 Introduction; 9.2 Indications
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Mohsen Beheshti, Werner Langsteger, Alireza Rezaee.
    Contents:
    Head and neck cancers / Moshen Beheshti, Rathan M. Subramaniam, Alireza Rezaee, Martin Burian, and Werner Langsteger
    Lung cancer / Alireza Rezaee, Ken Hermann, Markus Raderer, Werner Langsteger, and Michael Beheshti
    Breast cancer / Alireza Rezaee, Andreas Buck, Markus Raderer, Werner Langsteger, and Moshen Beheshti
    Gastroesophogeal cancer / Alireza Rezaee, Andreas Buck, Markus Raderer, Werner Langsteger, and Moshen Beheshti
    Gastoenteropancreatic neuroendocrine neoplasms / Moshen Beheshti, Alireza Rezaee, Markus Raderer, and Werner Langsteger
    Colorectal cancer / Moshen Beheshti, Alireza Rezaee, Ken Hermann, Markus Raderer, and Werner Langsteger
    Hepatobiliary cancer / Alireza Rezaee, Rathan M. Subramaniam, Markus Raderer, Werner Langsteger, and Mohsen Beheshti
    Lymphoma / Alireza Rezaee, Heiko Schöder, Markus Raderer, Werner Langsteger, and Mohsen Beheshti
    Gynecological cancers / Alireza Rezaee, Niklaus Schäfer, Norbert Avril, Lukas Hefler, Werner Langsteger, and Mohsen Beheshti
    Prostate cancer / Mohsen Beheshti, Heiko Schöder, Jochen Walz, Alireza Rezaee, and Werner Langsteger
    Melanoma / Alireza Rezaee, Andreas Buck, Niklaus Schäfer, Werner Langsteger, and Mohsen Beheshti
    Brain tumors / Karl-Josef Langen, Alexander Drzezga, and Norbert Galldiks.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Nagabhushan Seshadri, Chinnamani Eswar, editors.
    Summary: This pocket book offers a rapid and concise overview of the utility of PET/CT in the management of patients with cancer of unknown primary (CUP). Readers will gain an appreciation of the unique information provided by PET/CT on the molecular and metabolic changes associated with CUP, which can occur in the absence of corresponding anatomical alterations. Characteristic imaging appearances are documented with the aid of a series of teaching cases that serve to illustrate the potential improvements in patient management that may be achieved through early use of PET/CT in the diagnostic pathway. In addition, the relation of the clinical and pathological background to imaging is explained. The book is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging (compiled under the auspices of the British Nuclear Medicine Society) and will be an excellent asset for all clinicians, nuclear medicine physicians, radiologists, radiographers, and nurses who routinely work in multidisciplinary teams involved in the management of these patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Yong, Du, editor.
    Summary: This book is a pocket guide to the science and practice of PET/CT imaging of colorectal malignancies. The role of PET/CT in these patients, the characteristic PET/CT findings, and the advantages and limitations of this hybrid modality are all clearly described. In addition, information is provided on clinical presentation, diagnosis, staging, pathology, management, and radiological imaging. The book is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, which is aimed at nuclear medicine/radiology residents and physicians, referring clinicians, radiographers/technologists, and nurses who routinely work in nuclear medicine and participate in multidisciplinary meetings. Compiled under the auspices of the British Nuclear Medicine Society, the series is the joint work of many colleagues and professionals worldwide who share a common vision and purpose in promoting and supporting nuclear medicine as an important imaging specialty for the diagnosis and management of oncological and non-oncological conditions.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Tara Barwick, Andrea Rockall, editors.
    Contents:
    Causes
    Pathology
    Management
    Radiological Imaging
    Basic Principles of PET/CT Imaging
    Radiopharmaceuticals
    PET/CT in Gynecological Malignancies.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Nilendu Purandare, Sneha Shah, editors.
    Summary: This book is a pocket guide to the role of PET/CT in malignancies of the hepatobiliary system and pancreas. Imaging findings characteristic of malignancies are described and illustrated, and attention drawn to normal variants and artifacts. In addition, information is presented on epidemiology, clinical presentation, pathology, staging, and management in order to provide the clinical insight required by the imaging specialist. The book will be of immense value to practicing nuclear physicians as well as hybrid imaging specialists, particularly during reading sessions and multidisciplinary team meetings. It will also serve as a quick reference for residents and fellows in the PET/CT department. The book is published within the series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, which is compiled under the auspices of the British Nuclear Medicine Society. The series is the joint work of professionals worldwide who share a common vision in promoting nuclear medicine as an important imaging specialty for the diagnosis and management of oncological and non-oncological conditions.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Irfan Kayani, editor.
    Summary: This book is a pocket guide to the practice of PET/CT imaging of Hodgkin's lymphoma. The role of PET/CT in Hodgkin's lymphoma, the characteristic findings and patterns, and the advantages and limitations of this hybrid modality are all clearly described. In addition, information is provided on clinical presentation, diagnosis, staging, pathology, management, and conventional radiological imaging. A useful pictorial atlas is included at the end of the book. PET/CT in Hodgkin's Lymphoma is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, which is aimed at referring clinicians, nuclear medicine/radiology physicians, radiographers/technologists, and nurses who routinely work in nuclear medicine and participate in multidisciplinary meetings. Compiled under the auspices of the British Nuclear Medicine Society, the series is the joint work of many colleagues and professionals worldwide who share a common vision and purpose in promoting and supporting nuclear medicine as an important imaging specialty for the diagnosis and management of oncological and non-oncological conditions.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Thomas Wagner, Sandip Basu, editors.
    Summary: This pocket book provides clinicians with the necessary information to understand the role of FDG PET/CT in infection and inflammation. It will help both in making appropriate imaging requests with adequate clinical information and in interpreting the report. The coverage encompasses a wide range of topics, including the role of PET/CT in pyrexia of unknown origin, vasculitis, autoimmune diseases, prosthetic joint infections, osteomyelitis and diabetic foot, immunodeficiency disease, and vascular graft surgery. The book will be a very useful guide to a great test that can provide significant assistance in patient management. It is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, in which leading professionals succinctly explain the importance of nuclear medicine in the diagnosis and management of oncological and non-oncological conditions.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Sikandar Shaikh.
    Summary: This book covers all aspects of PET-CT including newer applications involving infection and inflammation and basic information on PET-CT new tracers. It explains the approach, protocols and miscellaneous applications about various infections and inflammation that helps in its early and better diagnosis in multiorgan and multisystem involvements in routine clinical practice. Chapters provide systematic approach to the diagnosis of various infections such as bacterial, viral, tuberculosis, inflammatory pathologies and overlap in coexisting tumors and superadded/associated infections. This book offers assistance to medical practitioners in understanding various advantages of PET-CT in single scan as compared to different modalities for diagnosis as well as oncologists dealing with concurrent malignant and non-malignant conditions, students, and interns.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    PET-CT Physics, Instrumentation and Techniques
    Physiological Variants in PET-CT
    Dual Time Point PET-CT Imaging
    PET-CT IN Fever of Unknown Origin
    PET-CT in Chest Infective Inflammatory Pathologies
    PET-CT in Myocardium, Epicardium and Pericardium Infective Inflammatory Pathologies
    PET-CT in Cardiovascular Pathologies
    PET-CT in Peripheral Vascular Pathologies
    PET-CT in Vasculitis
    PET-CT in Tuberculosis
    PET-CT IN Immunocompromised Status
    PET-CT in Polymyalgia Rheumatica
    PET-CT in Paediatric Infection and Inflammation
    PET-CT in Musculoskeletal Infections and Inflammations
    PET-CT in Evaluation of Prosthetic Joint Infections
    PET-CT in Urological Infections and Inflammations
    PET-CT in Viral Infections
    PET-CT in the Organ Transplantation
    Molecular Imaging in Infection and Inflammation.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Archi Agrawal, Venkatesh Rangarajan, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Michael S. Hofman, Rodney J. Hicks, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Valentina Ambrosini, Stefano Fanti, editors.
    Contents:
    Neuroendocrine Tumours: Epidemiology
    Pathology
    Management
    Radiological Imaging
    Radionuclide Imaging. PET/ CT in Neuroendocrine Tumors: Basic Principles of PET/ CT imaging
    Radiopharmaceuticals
    PET/ CT in Neuroendocrine Tumours.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Archi Agrawal, Venkatesh Rangarajan, Ameya D. Puranik, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an up-to-date summary of the latest scientific developments on the use of PET-CT imaging in Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma (NHL). It encompasses the entire spectrum of NHL from pathology to radiological and PET-CT imaging and to the management of NHL. The highlight of the book is the excellent pictorial depiction of normal variants, pitfalls and artifacts while exploring the different types of NHL and its manifestations. Each chapter, written by well-known and experienced oncologists and physicians, is enriched by a wide range of images to ensure a clear concept of PET-CT imaging in NHL and will definitely keep the readers interested. This book will be a useful tool for nuclear physicians, radiologists, referring clinicians and oncologists, as well as para-medical staff working in this field.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 - Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chapter 2 - Pathology of Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chapter 3 - Management of Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chapter 4 Radiological imaging in Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chapter 5 PET-CT in Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chapter 6 PET-CT: Normal variants, artefacts and pitfalls in Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chapter 7 PET-CT in Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma: Teaching cases. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Teresa Szyszko, editor.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction and epidemiology
    2. Pathology of oesophageal cancer and gastric cancer
    3. Management of oesophageal and gastric cancers
    4. Radiological imaging in oesophageal and gastric cancers
    5. Basic principles of PET/CT imaging
    6. ¹⁸F-FDG and non-FDG PET radiopharmaceuticals
    7. PET/CT imaging: patient instructions and preparation
    8. ¹⁸F-FDG PET/CT imaging: normal variants, pitfalls and artefacts
    9. FDG-PET/CT in oesophageal and gastric cancer
    10. Oesophageal and gastric malignancy: pictorial atlas
    Appendix 1. Regional lymph node stations for staging esophageal cancer
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Gary Cook, editor.
    Summary: This pocket book explains the significant and well-documented impact that PET/CT can have on the management of prostate cancer through the provision of high-quality evidence regarding function and structure. Up-to-date information is supplied on the relevance of PET/CT to diagnosis, treatment planning, and therapy, including the emerging role of PET/CT with PSMA. Readers will also find clear explanation of the relation of the clinical and pathological background to imaging and the value of PET/CT compared with conventional radiological imaging. The book will be an excellent asset for referring clinicians, nuclear medicine/radiology physicians, radiographers/technologists, and nurses who routinely work in nuclear medicine and participate in multidisciplinary meetings. It is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, which presents contributions from professionals worldwide who share a common purpose in promoting nuclear medicine as an important imaging specialty for the diagnosis and management of oncological and non-oncological conditions.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology and Clinical Features of Prostate cancer
    Pathology of prostate cancer
    Management of Prostate Cancer
    Prostate cancer: Radiological Imaging
    The Role of PET/CT in Prostate Cancer Management
    Role of radiolabelled small molecules binding to PSMA in diagnosis and therapy of prostate cancer
    PET/CT in radiotherapy planning: current evidence in prostate cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Sue Chua, editor.
    Summary: This pocket book offers a succinct but comprehensive overview of the role of PET/CT in radiotherapy planning. Individual chapters are devoted to specific application of the technique to particular tumor types, including non-small cell lung, gastrointestinal, head and neck squamous cell, prostate, gynecological, and pediatric tumors. Helpful information is also presented on the practical implementation of PET/CT in routine oncological practice. Technical and logistical issues are discussed, and guidance provided on potential problems and pitfalls and available solutions. The book will be invaluable in assisting readers to exploit PET/CT's ability to significantly improve delineation of tumor tissue through the addition of metabolic information to structural imaging data, thereby avoiding unnecessary radiation injury and associated complications while enhancing therapeutic effects and minimizing the risk of marginal recurrences. It is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, compiled under the auspices of the British Nuclear Medicine Society.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Sobhan Vinjamuri, editor.
    Summary: "This pocket book provides a comprehensive review of the current use of PET/CT in thyroid cancer, offering a multidisciplinary perspective and explaining the role of PET/CT in relation to other imaging modalities. A key aim is to help readers to choose the correct imaging modality to answer the clinical question at hand, thereby assisting in patient management. Highlights of the book include the exquisite depiction of normal variants, pitfalls, and artifacts and a pictorial atlas of the types of thyroid cancer and their imaging appearances. Readers will also find helpful information on the relation of the clinical and pathological background to imaging. The book will be an excellent asset for practitioners and trainees in Nuclear Medicine and members of endocrine and oncology teams. It is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, in which leading professionals succinctly explain the importance of nuclear medicine in the diagnosis and management of oncological and non-oncological conditions"--Back cover.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Dragana Sobic Saranovic, Mariza Vorster, Sanjay Gambhir, Thomas Neil Pascual, editors.
    Summary: This book covers both the science of PET/CT imaging in tuberculosis and the impact that this technique can have on disease management through the provision of high-quality evidence regarding function and structure. The scientific principles of PET/CT, the radiopharmaceuticals used in the context of tuberculosis (FDG and non-FDG tracers), patient preparation, and imaging protocols are fully explained. Imaging findings obtained in different settings, including pulmonary and extrapulmonary tuberculosis, tuberculosis and HIV co-infection, and evaluation of response to antituberculous therapy, are described with the aid of many high-quality illustrations. Attention is drawn to mimics of tuberculosis, pitfalls, and limitations. The book will be an excellent asset for referring clinicians, nuclear medicine/radiology physicians, radiographers/technologists, and nurses who routinely work in nuclear medicine and participate in multidisciplinary meetings.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Contents
    1: Tuberculosis: A General Overview
    1.1 Introduction
    1.1.1 Epidemiology
    1.1.2 Geographic Distribution
    1.2 Risk Factors for Active TB (Progression from Latent TB Infection)
    1.3 Clinical Presentation
    1.4 Physical Examination
    1.5 Diagnosis
    1.5.1 Other Investigations
    1.5.2 Diagnosis of Latent Tuberculosis Infection (LTBI)
    1.5.3 Challenges in TB Diagnosis
    1.6 Special Categories
    1.6.1 TB and HIV
    1.6.1.1 Immune Reconstitution TB
    1.6.1.2 Drug-Resistant TB
    1.6.1.3 TB in Children 1.7 Future Developments
    1.8 Conclusion
    References
    2: Diagnosis of Tuberculosis: Microbiological and Imaging Perspective
    2.1 Introduction
    2.1.1 Investigations-Microbiological Tests
    2.1.1.1 Mantoux Tuberculin Skin Test
    2.1.1.2 Interferon-Gamma Release Assays (IGRAs)
    2.1.1.3 Sputum Smear Microscopy
    2.1.1.4 Fluorescent Microscopy
    2.1.1.5 Mycobacterial Culture
    2.1.1.6 Molecular Test
    2.1.1.7 Drug Sensitivity Testing
    2.1.1.8 Biomarker Tests
    2.1.1.9 Challenges for Microbiological Diagnosis
    2.1.2 Imaging in TB
    2.1.2.1 Pulmonary Tuberculosis 2.1.2.2 Postprimary Tuberculosis
    2.1.2.3 Extrapulmonary Tuberculosis
    2.1.3 Tuberculous Lymphadenopathy
    2.1.3.1 Ultrasonography
    2.1.3.2 CT and MRI
    2.1.3.3 18F-FDG PET-CT
    2.1.4 Abdominal Tuberculosis
    2.1.4.1 Abdominal Lymphadenopathy
    2.1.4.2 Peritoneal Tuberculosis
    2.1.4.3 Gastrointestinal Tract Tuberculosis
    Barium Studies
    Computed Tomography
    2.1.4.4 Hepatosplenic Tuberculosis
    2.1.4.5 Adrenal Tuberculosis
    2.1.4.6 Genitourinary Tuberculosis
    2.1.4.7 Renal Tuberculosis
    2.1.5 Female Genital Organs
    2.1.6 Male Genital Organs 2.1.7 Musculoskeletal Tuberculosis
    2.1.7.1 Tubercular Spondylitis
    Bone Scintigraphy
    18F-FDG PET-CT
    2.1.8 CNS Tuberculosis
    2.1.8.1 Tubercular Leptomeningitis
    2.1.8.2 Tubercular Pachymeningitis
    2.1.8.3 Tuberculoma
    Computed Tomography
    MRI
    2.1.8.4 Tubercular Abscess
    2.1.8.5 Rhombencephalitis
    2.1.8.6 Encephalopathy
    2.1.8.7 Spinal and Meningeal Involvement
    2.1.9 Other Tuberculosis
    2.1.9.1 Emerging Role of PET-CT: Challenges and Limitations
    2.1.9.2 TB Associated with HIV Infection
    2.2 Conclusion
    References 3: Radiological Imaging in Tuberculosis
    3.1 Primary Pulmonary Tuberculosis
    3.2 Postprimary Pulmonary Tuberculosis
    3.3 Radiological Patterns Encountered in Both Primary and/or Postprimary TB
    3.3.1 Miliary Tuberculosis
    3.3.2 Pleural Tuberculosis
    3.3.3 Tracheobronchial TB
    3.4 Complications
    3.5 Extrapulmonary Tuberculosis
    3.5.1 Genitourinary Tuberculosis
    3.5.2 Musculoskeletal Tuberculosis
    3.5.3 Central Nervous System Tuberculosis
    3.5.4 Gastrointestinal Tuberculosis
    References
    4: Management of Tuberculosis
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Prevention
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Ignasi Carrio, Pablo Ros, editors.
    Summary: PET/MRI is an exciting novel diagnostic imaging modality that combines the precise anatomic and physiologic information provided by magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) with the molecular data obtained with positron emission tomography (PET). PET/MRI offers the promise of a simplified work flow, reduced radiation, whole-body imaging with superior soft tissue contrast, and time of flight physiologic information. It has been described as the pathway to molecular imaging in medicine. In compiling this textbook, the editors have brought together a truly international group of experts in MRI and PET. The book is divided into two parts. The first part covers methodology and equipment and comprises chapters on basic molecular medicine, development of specific contrast agents, MR attenuation and validation, quantitative MRI and PET motion correction, and technical implications for both MRI and PET. The second part of the book focuses on clinical applications in oncology, cardiology, and neurology. Imaging of major neoplasms, including lymphomas and tumors of the breast, prostate, and head and neck, is covered in individual chapters. Further chapters address functional and metabolic cardiovascular examinations and major central nervous system applications such as brain tumors and dementias. Risks, safety aspects, and healthcare costs and impacts are also discussed. This book will be of interest to all radiologists and nuclear medicine physicians who wish to learn more about the latest developments in this important emerging imaging modality and its applications.

    Contents:
    PET/MR system design
    Image distortions in clinical PET/MR imaging
    Workflow and Practical Logistics
    MR-PET in Breast Cancer
    PET/MRI in Evaluating Lymphomas
    PET-MRI of the Liver
    PET/MR IN COLORECTAL CANCER PET/MR in Brain Imaging
    MR-PET in Cardiology
    Risks and safety aspects of MR-PET
    Health care costs and impacts.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Andrei Iagaru, Thomas Hope, Patrick Veit-Haibach, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    James R. Ballinger.
    Summary: This book presents in a consistent format data on ~50 PET radiopharmaceuticals in clinical use. Parameters include basic chemical data, normal biodistribution and excretion, activity administered, radiation dosimetry, patient preparation, and clinical utility, together with a few key references. In some cases a representative image is presented. The organisation is first by clinical specialty (oncology, cardiology, neurology) and within each section by radionuclide (F-18, C-11, etc). This book will be of interest mostly to nuclear medicine physicians and trainees, but also to a wider medical community including radiologists, oncologists and radiotherapists.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Oncology 18F-labelled agents
    Chapter 2: Oncology 11C-labelled agents
    Chapter 3: Oncology 68Ga-labelled agents
    Chapter 4: Oncology other agents
    Chapter 5: Cardiology 18F-labelled agents
    Chapter 6: Cardiology other agents
    Chapter 7: Neurology 18F-labelled agents
    Chapter 8: Neurology 11C-labelled agents
    Chapter 9: Neurology 15O-labelled agents.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    Paul E. Christian, Nancy M. Swanston.
    Contents:
    PET radiopharmaceutical production
    PET radiopharmaceuticals
    Radiation principles and basic radiation detection devices
    PET instrumentation
    CT instrumentation
    Quality control and instrumentation artifacts
    Radiation safety in PET/CT
    Patient care and emergency procedures
    Oncology : patient preparation and imaging
    PET imaging in oncology
    Incorporation of CT and contrast media into PET practices
    Clinical artifacts
    PET imaging of the brain
    PET imaging of the heart.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC78.7.T62 C47 2015
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Vincenzo Savini.
    Summary: Pet-to-Man Travelling Staphylococci: A World in Progress explores Staphylococci, a dangerous pathogen that affects both humans and animals with a wide range of infection states. This bacteria can spread rapidly as a commensal organism in both humans and pets, and is an agent of disease. Staphylococci are potentially highly virulent pathogens which require urgent medical attention. In addition, Staphylococci remain a threat within hospital environments, where they can quickly spread across a patient population. This book explores the organisms' resistance to many compounds used to treat them, treatment failure and multidrug resistant staphylococci, amongst other related topics.

    Contents:
    1. Staphylococcal taxonomy
    2. Staphylococcal ecology and epidemiology
    3. Coagulase-positive and coagulase-negative staphylococci human diseases
    4. Coagulase-positive and coagulase-negative staphylococci animal diseases
    5. Transfer of staphylococci and related genetic elements
    6. Food-borne transmission of staphylococci
    7. The staphylococcal coagulases
    8. The stafphylococcal hemolysins
    9. The staphylococcal panton-valentine leukocidin (PVL)
    10. The staphylococcal exfoliative toxins
    11. Extracellular proteases of Staphylococcus spp.
    12. Staphylococcal lipases
    13. Staphylococcal bacteriocins
    14. Phage-associated virulence determinants of Staphylococcus aureus
    15. Diagnostics: routine identification on standard and chromogenic media, and advanced automated methods
    16. Molecular identification and genotyping of Staphylococci: genus, species, strains, clones, lineages, and interspecies exchanges
    17. Methicillin resistance in Staphylococcus aureus
    18. In vivo resistance mechanisms: Staphylococcal biofilms
    19. Autovaccines in individual therapy of Staphylococcal infections
    20. Experimental animal models in evaluation of Staphylococcal pathogenicity
    21. Application of staphylococci in the food industry and biotechnology
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Print
    Bohan, Peter T.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L39 .P47
    2
  • Digital
    Laura Nabarro, Stephen Morris-Jones, David A.J. Moore.
    Contents:
    Arthropod-borne diseases
    Infections acquired through the gastrointestinal tract
    Infections acquired by airborne transmission
    Ectoparasites
    Bites, stings, venoms, toxins
    Nutrition
    Non-communicable disease
    Disease of unusual or uncertian aetiology.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Michael Miloro, G.E. Ghali, Peter E. Larsen, Peter Waite, editors.
    Summary: The new edition of this outstanding reference textbook, in two volumes, offers comprehensive and authoritative coverage of the contemporary specialty of oral and maxillofacial surgery. The aim is to provide an all-encompassing, user-friendly source of information that will meet the needs of residents and experienced surgeons in clinical practice and will also serve as an ideal companion during preparation for board certification or recertification examinations. All of the authors, numbering some 100, are distinguished experts in the areas that they address. The new edition takes full account of the significant changes in clinical practice and guidelines that have occurred during recent years. Readers will find clear explanations of the practical application of surgical principles, with a wealth of supporting illustrative material, including atlas-type illustrations to complement the descriptions of specific procedures. The fourth edition of Petersons Principles of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery is a truly exceptional resource for clinicians and students alike. .

    Contents:
    Wound Healing
    Medical Management and Preoperative Patient Assessment
    Pharmacology of Outpatient Anesthesia Medications
    Outpatient Anesthesia
    Impacted Teeth
    Pre-Prosthetic Surgery
    Pediatric Dentoalveolar Surgery
    Utilization of Three-dimensional Imaging Technology to Enhance Maxillofacial Surgical Applications
    Dynamic Navigation for Dental Implants
    Implant Prosthodontics
    The Science of Osseointegrated Implant Reconstruction
    Comprehensive Implant Site Preparation: Mandible
    A Graft-less Approach for Treatment of the Edentulous Maxilla: Contemporary considerations for Treatment planning, Biomechanical principles and surgical protocol
    Soft Tissue Management in Implant Therapy
    Craniofacial Implant Surgery
    Initial Management of the Trauma Patient
    Soft Tissue Injuries
    Rigid versus Nonrigid Fixation
    Dentoalveolar and Intraoral Soft Tissue Trauma
    Contemporary Management of Mandibular Fractures
    Fractures of the Mandibular Condyle
    Management of Maxillary Fractures
    Management of Zygomatic Complex Fractures
    Orbital and Ocular Trauma
    Management of Frontal Sinus and Naso-orbitoethmoid Complex Fractures
    Nasal Fractures
    Maxillofacial Firearm Injuries
    Paediatric Facial Trauma
    Management of Panfacial Fractures
    Differential Diagnosis of Oral Disease
    Odontogenic Cysts and Tumors
    Benign Nonodontogenic Lesions of the Jaws
    Oral Cancer: Classification, Diagnosis, and Staging
    Oral Cancer Management
    Lip Cancer
    Head and Neck Skin Cancer
    Salivary Gland Disease
    Mucosal and Related Dermatologic Diseases
    Pediatric Maxillofacial Pathology
    Odontogenic Infections
    Osteomyelitis, Osteoradionecrosis(ORN) and Medication Related Osteonecrosis of the Jaws(MRONJ)
    Local and Regional Flaps
    Nonvascularized Reconstruction
    Vascularized Reconstruction
    Microneurosurgery
    Comprehensive Management of Facial Clefts
    Alveolar Cleft Reconstruction
    Nonsyndromic Craniosynostosis
    Craniofacial Dysostosis Syndromes: Evaluation and Treatment of the Skeletal Deformities
    Technology in Oral and Maxillofacial Reconstruction
    Anatomy and Pathophysiology of the Temporomandibular Joint
    Nonsurgical Management of Temporomandibular Disorders
    Arthroscopy and Arthrocentesis of the Temporomandibular Joint
    Internal Derangement of the Temporomandibular Joint
    Hypomobility and Hypermobility Disorders of the Temporomandibular Joint
    Pediatric temporomandibular disorders: Juvenile Idiopathic Arthritis
    Vascularized Reconstruction
    Craniofacial Growth and Development
    Digital Data Acquisition and Treatment Planning in Orthognathic Surgery
    Orthodontics for Orthognathic Surgery
    Model Surgery and Computer-aided Surgical Simulation for Orthognathic Surgery
    Mandibular Orthognathic Surgery
    Maxillary Orthognathic Surgery
    Sequencing in Orthognathic Surgery
    Concomitant Orthognathic and Temporomandibular Joint Surgery
    Facial Asymmetry
    Soft Tissue Changes and Prediction with Orthognathic Surgery
    Complications in Orthognathic Surgery
    Cleft Orthognathic Surgery
    Distraction Osteogenesis of the Craniomaxillofacial Skeleton
    Surgical and Non-surgical Management of Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Blepharoplasty
    Basic Principles of Rhinoplasty
    Rhytidectomy
    Forehead and Brow Procedures
    Otoplastic Surgery for the Protruding Ear
    Adjunctive Facial Cosmetic Procedures.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    Roux, Georges.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    M111 .R87 1938
    1
  • Digital
    Giorgio Cavallini, Gianni Paulis, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Anatomy of the penis, with special attention to the tunica albuginea and to the corpora cavernosa
    3. Epidemiology
    4. Aetiology and risk factors
    5. Nosology
    6. Natural history of Peyronie's disease
    7. Experimental models and laboratory research for Peyronie's disease
    8. Symptoms, their physiopathology, and outpatient clinical practice and diagnosis
    9. Congenital and acquired penile curvature: relationships and differences
    10. Psychological aspects of Peyronie's diseaese
    11. Imaging in Peyronie's disease
    12. Therapy: a general approach
    13. Medical therapy
    14. Combination therapy (in the treatment of Peyronie's disease)
    15. Surgical therapy for Peyronie's disease: why and when (an overview) --16. Advanced techniques of plication surgery with basal approach: when and why
    17. Corporoplasty: why and when
    18. Surgical treatment of Peyronie's disease of inflatable penile prosthesis
    19. Surgical techniques for difficult and complicated cases of Peyronie's disease
    20. Future perspectives in Peyronie's Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editor in chief: Grant C. Fowler ; section editors, Beth A. Choby [and six others].
    Contents:
    Anesthesia
    Dermatology
    Aesthetic medicine
    Eyes, ears, nose, and throat
    Cardiovascular and respiratory system procedures
    Gastrointestinal system procedures
    Urinary system procedures
    Male reproductive system
    Gynecology and female reproductive system
    Obstetrics
    Pediatrics
    Orthopedics and sports medicine
    Urgent care
    Hospitalist
    Appendices. Commonly used instruments/equipment
    Informed consent
    Latex allergy guidelines
    Supplier information
    Resources for learning and teaching procedures
    Universal precautions
    Neoplasms of the skin: ICD-9 codes
    Pearls of practice
    The Society of Teachers of Family Medicine Procedural Skills Task Force
    Outline of a comprehensive operative note
    Management guidelines for abnormal cervical cancer screening tests and histologic findings
    Buying major office equipment
    Special considerations in geriatric patients.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Christian Surber, Christoph Abels, Howard Maibach.
    Contents:
    The acid mantle : a myth or an essential part of skin health? / Surber, C., Humbert, P., Abels C. (Bielefeld), Maibach, H. (San Francisco, CA)
    Buffering capacity / Proksch, E. (Kiel)
    Measurement of skin surface pH / du Plessis, J.L. (Potchefstroom), Stefaniak, A.B. (Morgantown, WV), Wilhelm, K.-P. (Schenefeld)
    Skin surface pH in newborns : origin and consequences / Fluhr, J.W. (Berlin), Darlenski, R. (Stara Zagora/Sofia)
    Intrinsic and extrinsic factors affecting skin surface pH / Farage, W.A., Hood, W. (Cincinnati, OH), Berardesca, E. (San Francisco, CA), Maibach, H. (Rome)
    Gender, age, and ethnicity as factors that can influence skin pH / Choi, E.H. (Wonju)
    Endogenous factors that can influence skin pH / Bíró, T., Oláh, A., Tóth, B.I., Szollosi, A.G. (Debrecen)
    Lipids in the skin and pH / Wohlrab, J., Gebert, A., Neubert, R.H.H. (Halle (Saale))
    Influence of pH on skin stem cells and their differentiation / Charruyer, A., Ghadially, R. (San Francisco, CA)
    The influence of calcium on the skin pH and epidermal barrier during aging / Rinnerthaler, M., Richter, K. (Salzburg)
    pH and microbial infections / Rippke, F. (Hamburg), Berardesca, E. (Rome), Weber, T.M. (Wilton, CT)
    pH in atopic dermatitis / Danby, S.G., Cork, M.J. (Sheffield)
    Role of skin pH in psoriasis / Bigliardi, P.L. (Minneapolis, MN)
    pH and acne / Schürer, N. (Osnabrück)
    pH and buffer capacity of topical formulations / Wohlrab, J., Gebert, A. (Halle (Saale))
    The relation of pH and skin cleansing / Blaak, J., Staib, P. (Würzburg)
    pH and drug delivery / Ostergaard Knudsen, N., Pommergaard Pedersen, G. (Ballerup)
    Metamorphosis of vehicles : mechanisms and opportunities / Surber, C. (Basel/Zürich), Knie, U. (Bielefeld)
    Influence of topical formulations : lipid lamella organization and lipid composition of stratum corneum as a surrogate marker for barrier integrity / Dahnhardt, D. (Flintbek), Surber, C. (Basel/Zürich), Dahnhardt-Pfeiffer, S. (Flintbek)
    Skin care products : age-appropriate cosmetics / Abels, C. (Bielefeld), Angelova-Fischer, I. (Lübeck)
    Skin care products for healthy and diseased skin / Surber, C. (Basel/Zürich), Dragicevic, N. (Belgrade), Kottner, J. (Berlin).
    Digital Access Karger 2018
  • Digital
    Rajen Gupta ; with the editorial assistance of Dr. Martin Beed.
    Summary: This book provides ophthalmic surgeons with a concise, clinical guide to performing the fundamentals steps in phacoemulsification cataract surgery. Clear diagrams and images are used throughout and the information can be adapted to a particular consultant's own technique once the surgical principles are understood. The chapters serve as a modular framework that allows for safe, effective learning of skills and use as a clinical training resource. Phacoemulsification Cataract Surgery serves as a helpful teaching aid for consultants, especially newly appointed, who have little experience in teaching. Basic fundamental rules are provided as a guide for training others to improve surgical techniques in clinical practice. Recently qualified and experienced consultants will find this book to be an indispensable resource for learning and teaching in the area of phacoemulsification cataract surgery. -- Publisher

    Contents:
    Understanding the Phacoemulsification Surgical Learning Process
    Irrigation/Aspiration
    Intraocular Lens Insertion
    Soft Lens Material Removal
    Manual Capsulorhexis
    Hydrodissection
    How to Palm an Instrument
    Phacoemulsification: Small Fragments
    Debulking of Lens Fragments
    Make-a-Space Technique
    Phacoemulsification: Grooving and Cracking
    Phacoemulsification: An Easy Stop, Chop and Crack Technique
    The Paracentesis Incision
    The Main Corneal Incision
    Essential Preparation: Draping, Safety and Surgeon Comfort
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Andrzej Górski, Ryszard Miȩdzybrodzki, Jan Borysowski, editors.
    Summary: This book gives a detailed yet clear insight into the current state of the art of the therapeutic application of bacteriophages in different conditions. The authors bring in their practical expertise within their respective fields of expertise and provide an excellent overview of the potential and actual use of phage therapy. Topics like economic feasibility compared to traditional antibiotics and also regulatory issues are discussed in far detail. This new volume is therefore a valuable resource for individuals engaged in the medical application of novel phage therapies.

    Contents:
    Part I: Bacteriophages as antibacterialagents
    Chapter 1:Production of PhageTherapeutics and Formulations
    InnovativeApproaches
    Chapter 2:Phagepharmacokinetics: relationship with administrationroute
    Chapter 3:BacterialResistance to Phage and itsImpact on Clinical Therapy
    Part II: Bacteriophages and the immune system
    Chapter 4:Phageinteraction with the mammalianimmune system
    Chapter 5:Humoralimmuneresponse to phage-basedtherapeutics
    Part III:Use of bacteriophages to combat bacterial infections
    Chapter 6:How to achieve a goodphage therapy clinical trial?
    Chapter 7: Perspectives on the RenewedInterest in the United States
    Chapter 8:Phage Therapy in Orthopaedic Implant-associated Infections
    Chapter 9:The use of bacteriophages in animalhealth and food protection
    Chapter 10:Combiningbacteriophages with otherantibacterialagents to combatbacteria
    Chapter 11: Phage therapy of infectious biofilms: Challenges and strategies
    Part IV:Phage therapy
    regulatory and ethical aspects
    Chapter 12:Regulatory Considerations for Bacteriophage Therapy Products
    Chapter 13:Developing phagesintomedicines for Europe
    Chapter 14: Phagetherapy in Europe: Regulatory and intellectualpropertyprotectionissues
    Chapter 15:Ethics of phagetherapy
    Part V: Bacteriophage-derived antibacterial agents
    Chapter 16: NovelAlternative to Antibiotics.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Gert Folkerts, Johan Garssen, editors.
    Summary: This volume examines the effects of natural products and functional/medical foods (nutritional programming) on disease management. It specifically focuses on diseases related to inflammation and immunity, cancer and cachexia, allergies, and brain and neuro/immune. As both pharmacologists and nutritionists are recognizing that the one disease/one target/one drug (or nutrient) concept will be less successful than in the past, this book aims to stress the importance of a multi-target approach versus a single-target approach. It also presents aspects of molecular characteristics of food ingredients toward clinical effectiveness and relevance. The interest in food in health and disease has exploded in the past few years, and publications on the microbiome can be found in all major scientific journals and newspapers. A new concept uses functional foods hand in hand with standard pharmacological therapies, which can be conceptualized in the term 'pharma-nutrition.' With the complementary values of pharma and nutrition, scientists might be able to overcome the increased incidence worldwide of complex multi-factorial disorders, chronic and degenerative diseases in particular.

    Contents:
    1 Introductory Chapter
    2 New Developments in Food Safety Assessment: Innovations in Food Allergy and Toxicological Safety Assessment
    3 Bridging a Pharma-Like Innovation Gap in Medical Nutrition
    4 Modulation of the Gut Ecosystem in Irritable Bowel Syndrome
    5 The Role of Omega-6 and Omega-3 Fatty Acids in Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    6 N-3 Polyunsaturated Fatty Acid and Neuroinflammation in Aging: Role in Cognition
    7 Nutritional Programming of Immune Defense Against Infections in Early Life?
    8 Impact on Non-Digestible Oligosaccharides on Gut Associated Lymphoid Tissue and Oral Tolerance Induction
    9 The Endocannabinoid System: Molecular Connection between Nutrition and Pharmacology
    10 Effects of Natural products on Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics of Drugs
    11 Nutrition and Gastrointestinal Health as Modulators of Parkinson's Disease
    12 Eat to Heal: Natural Inducers of the Hem Oxygenase-1 System
    13 Recent Developments in the Treatment of Cachexia
    14 Individualized Tumor Therapy: Biomarkers and Possibilities for Targeted Therapy with Natural Products
    15 Nutrition in Oncology: from Treating Cachexia to Targeting the Tumor
    16 Nutraceuticals in Preventive Oncology: Chemical Biology and Translational Pharmaceutical Science
    17 The Onset Of Eczema: Underlying Mechanisms
    18 Cow's Milk Allergy: Protein Hydrolysates or Amino Acid Formula
    19 Allergen Avoidance Versus Tolerance Induction
    20 Nutrition and Cognitive Decline in Older Persons: Bridging the Gap between Epidemiology and Intervention Studies
    21 Nutraceutical Regulation of the Neuroimmunoendocrine Super System
    22 Targeting (Gut)-Immune-Brain Axis with Pharmaceutical and Nutritional Concepts: Relevance for Mental and Neurological Disorders
    23 Nutritional Approaches for Healthy Aging of the Brain and the Prevention of Neurodegenerative Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Kamal Biswas.
    Summary: The pharmaceutical industry needs a shot in the arm - and not a moment too soon. The executive suite is mired in a bygone era, a time when extensive, well-funded pharmaceutical R & D produced blockbuster drugs, kept everything in-house and reaped the financial rewards. But that way of working needs to change. Executives now need to know what the technologists in their companies are doing in order to survive the next decade. Written for those new to industry, as well as for experienced professionals or specialists looking to expand their knowledge, this book is a must-read for business executive.

    Contents:
    1.Pharma Health
    Critical Parts Need Redesigning
    2.The Pharmaceutical Value Chain
    An Introduction
    Drug Discovery
    Development
    Manufacturing
    Supply Chain Management
    Marketing
    Sales
    Regulatory Compliance
    Finance and Accounts
    Human Resources
    3.Technology Basics
    An Introduction
    Packaged and Custom Developed Technology Solutions
    Computer System Validation
    21 CFR Part 11 Compliance
    4.Courageous New World: Strategies to Improve Business Outcomes
    Staggering Genius in the Crowd: Nextgen R&D
    Feed Your Workhorse: Smarter Manufacturing
    Product Fast-Track: Remodel the Supply Chain
    In Digital We Trust: Industrialize Customer Centricity
    Scream With Mouth Shut: Global Compliance Strategy
    Why Patients Continue With Medicine: Patient Adherence
    The Perks in Emerging Markets: Go Global
    5.Measuring Business Values and Success
    The Pharma Value Cycle: How to Redefine Stakeholder Values
    The Unbearable Financials: Models to Realize Financial Value.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Daan J.A. Crommelin, Robert D. Sindelar, Bernd Meibohm, editors.
    Summary: This introductory text explains both the basic science and the applications of biotechnology derived pharmaceuticals, with special emphasis on their clinical use. It serves as a complete one-stop source for undergraduate/graduate pharmacists, pharmaceutical science students, and for those who did not receive formal training in this field. Pharmaceutical Biotechnology: Fundamentals and Applications, Fifth Edition completely updates the previous edition, and includes additional coverage on newer approaches such as oligonucleotides, mi/siRNA, gene therapy and advanced therapeutics.

    Contents:
    Molecular Biotechnology
    Biophysical and biochemical analysis of recombinant proteins
    Production and downstream processing of biotech products
    Formulation of biotech products, including biopharmaceutical considerations
    Pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of peptide and protein drugs
    Immunogenicity of pharmaceutical proteins
    General considerations of monoclonal antibodies from structure to therapeutic application
    Genomics, Other "Omics" Technologies, Personalized Medicine and Additional Biotechnology-Related Techniques
    Dispensing biotechnology products: handling, professional education and product information
    Economic considerations in medical biotechnology
    Regulatory framework for biosimilars
    Vaccines
    Oligonucleotides and siRNA
    Gene therapy
    Stem cell technology
    Therapeutic Applications.-Endocrinology
    Insulin
    Follicle-stimulating hormone
    Growth hormone
    Cardiovascular and Respiratory Applications
    Recombinant coagulation factors and thrombolytics
    Recombinant human deoxyribonuclease
    Oncology
    Monoclonal antibodies in oncology
    Hematopoetic growth factors
    Inflammation and Immunemodulation
    Monoclonal antibodies in transplantation
    Monoclonal antibodies and antibody-based therapeutics in anti-inflammatory therapy
    Interferons and interleukins
    Anti-infectious diseases
    Monoclonal antibodies
    Enzyme replacement therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Michalakis Savva.
    Summary: Pharmaceutical Calculations: A Conceptual Approach, is a book that combines conceptual and procedural understanding for students and will guide you to master prerequisite skills to carry out accurate compounding and dosage regimen calculations. It is a book that makes the connection between basic sciences and pharmacy. It describes the most important concepts in pharmaceutical sciences thoroughly, accurately and consistently through various commentaries and activities to make you a scientific thinker, and to help you succeed in college and licensure exams. Calculation of the error associated with a dose measurement can only be carried out after understanding the concept of accuracy versus precision in a measurement. Similarly, full appreciation of drug absorption and distribution to tissues can only come about after understanding the process of transmembrane passive diffusion. Early understanding of these concepts will allow reinforcement and deeper comprehension of other related concepts taught in other courses. More weight is placed on the qualitative understanding of fundamental concepts, like tonicity vs osmotic pressure, diffusion vs osmosis, crystalloids vs colloids, osmotic diuretics vs plasma expanders, rate of change vs rate constants, drug accumulation vs drug fluctuation, loading dose vs maintenance dose, body surface area (BSA) vs body weight (BW) as methods to adjust dosages, and much more, before considering other quantitative problems. In one more significant innovation, the origin and physical significance of all final forms of critical equations is always described in detail, thus, allowing recognition of the real application and limitations of an equation. Specific strategies are explained step-by-step in more than 100 practice examples taken from the fields of compounding pharmacy, pharmaceutics, pharmacokinetics, pharmacology and medicine.

    Contents:
    Measurement
    Error Assessment if the Drug Concentration In Pharmaceutical Mixtures
    Density And Specific Gravity
    Units Of Concentration And The Salt Factor
    Dilution And Concentration Of Pharmaceutical Solutions And Other Physical Mixtures
    Mixture Problems In Pharmaceutical Sciences.-Isotonicsolutions
    Diffusion.-Use Of Prefabricated Dosage Forms In Extemporaneous Compounding
    Fluids And Electrolytes
    Essential Mathematics For Pharmacokinetics
    Rates And Orders Of Reactions
    Fundamental Concepts of Dosage Calculation
    Dosage Calculations Based On Body Surface Area.-Intravenous Infusion And Flow Rate
    Appendix I- Interpretation Of Prescriptions And Medication Orders.-Appendix II-Miscellaneous Abbreviations Commonly Used in Pharmacy
    Appendix III- Units Of Measurement And Equivalent Conversions
    Appendix IV- Selected Roman Numerals
    Appendix V -Specific Gravity Of Miscellaneous Liquids
    Appendix IV- Table Of Atomic Masses.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    edited by Herbert A. Lieberman, Martin M. Rieger, Gilbert S. Banker.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RS200 .P42 1988
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Jean Cornier, Andrew Own, Arno Kwade, and Marcel Van de Voorde.
    Contents:
    Entry to the Nanopharmacy Revolution. History: Potential, Challenges, and Future Development in Nanopharmaceutical Research and Industry / Albertina Ariën, Paul Stoffels
    Nanoscale Drugs: A Key to Revolutionary Progress in Pharmacy and Healthcare / Simon Sebastian Raesch, Marina Poettler, Christoph Alexiou, Claus-Michael Lehr
    The Emergence of Nanopharmacy: From Biology to Nanotechnology and Drug Molecules to Nanodrugs / Marilena Hadjidemetriou, Zahraa Al-Ahmady, Mariarosa Mazza, Kostas Kostarelos
    Understanding and Characterizing Functional Properties of Nanoparticles / Ester Polo, Valentina Castagnola, Kenneth A Dawson
    Omics-Based Nanopharmacy: Powerful Tools Toward Precision Medicine / Daniel Rosenblum, Dan Peer
    Fundamentals of Nanotechnology in Pharmacy. Nanostructures in Drug Delivery / Salma Nabil Tammam, Alf Lamprecht
    Characterization Methods: Physical and Chemical Characterization Techniques / Sven Even F Borgos
    Nanoparticle Characterization Methods: Applications of Synchrotron and Neutron Radiation / Martha Brennich, Marité Cardenas, Hiram Castillo-Michel, Marine Cotte, V Trevor Forsyth, Michael Haertlein, Simon A J Kimber, Geraldine Le Duc, Edward P Mitchell, Adam Round, Murielle Salome, Michael Sztucki
    Overview of Techniques and Description of Established Processes / Jan Henrik Finke, Michael Juhnke, Arno Kwade, Heike Bunjes
    Nanopharmacy: Exploratory Methods for Polymeric Materials / Kuldeep Bansal, Luana Sasso, Hiteshri Makwana, Sahar Awwad, Steve Brocchini, Cameron Alexander
    Overview and Presentation of Exploratory Methods for Manufacturing Nanoparticles/"Inorganic Materials" / Xavier Le Guevel
    Scale-Up and cGMP Manufacturing of Nanodrug Delivery Systems for Clinical Investigations / Mostafa Nakach, Jean-René Authelin
    Occupational Safety and Health / Thomas H Brock
    Development of Nanopharmaceuticals. Micro- and Nano-Tools in Drug Discovery / Andreas Dietzel, Monika Leester-Schädel, Stephan Reichl
    Computational Predictive Models for Nanomedicine / Marco Siccardi, Alessandro Schipani, Andrew Owen
    Drug Targeting in Nanomedicine and Nanopharmacy: A Systems Approach / Jingwei Shao, Lisa McConnachie, Rodney JY Ho
    Nanoparticle Toxicity: General Overview and Insights Into Immunological Compatibility / Marina A Dobrovolskaia
    An Overview of Nanoparticle Biocompatibility for Their Use in Nanomedicine / Matthew SP Boyles, Leagh G Powell, Ali Kermanizadeh, Helinor J Johnston, Barbara Rothen-Rutishauser, Vicki Stone, Martin JD Clift
    Translation to the Clinic: Preclinical and Clinical Pharmacology Studies of Nanoparticles
    The Translational Challenge / Rachel Tyson, Leah Osae, Andrew J Madden, Andrew T Lucas, William C Zamboni
    Regulatory Issues in Nanomedicines / Marisa Papaluca, Falk Ehmann, Ruben Pita, Dolores Hernan
    Social Studies of Nanopharmaceutical Research / Michael Schillmeier
    Pharmaceutical Applications of Nanomaterials. Nanoparticles for Imaging and Imaging Nanoparticles: State of the Art and Current Prospects / Thomas Maldiney, Nathalie Mignet
    Nanoparticle-Based Physical Methods for Medical Treatments / Christine Ménager
    Nanodrugs in Medicine and Healthcare: Oral Delivery / Alejandro Sosnik
    Steroidal Nanodrugs Based on Pegylated Nanoliposomes Remote Loaded with Amphipathic Weak Acids Steroid Prodrugs as Anti-Inflammatory Agents / Keren Turjeman, Yechezkel Barenholz
    Nanodrugs in Medicine and Healthcare: Pulmonary, Nasal and Ophthalmic Routes, and Vaccination / Christel C Müller-Goymann, Mukta Paranjpe
    Neurodegenerative Diseases
    Alzheimer's Disease / Maria Gregori, Francesca Re
    The Nanopharmaceutical Market. A Practical Guide to Translating Nanomedical Products / Raj Bawa
    Development and Commercialization of Nanocarrier-Based Drug Products / Marianne Ashford
    Future Outlook of Nanopharmacy: Challenges and Opportunities / Dan Peer, Jean Cornier, Marcel Van de Voorde.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Zaheer-Ud-Din Babar, editor.
    Summary: A comprehensive and granular insight into the challenges of promoting rational medicine, this book serves as an essential resource for health policy makers and researchers interested in national medicines policies. Country-specific chapters have a common format, beginning with an overview of the health system and regulatory and policy environments, before discussing the difficulties in maintaining a medicines supply system, challenges in ensuring access to affordable medicines and issues impacting on rational medicine use. Numerous case studies are also used to highlight key issues and each chapter concludes with country-specific solutions to the issues raised. Written by highly regarded academics, the book includes countries in Africa, Asia, Europe, the Middle East and South America.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Part I Low and Middle Income Countries
    Part II Upper Middle Income Countries
    Part III High Income Countries
    Part IV Further Perspectives.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Walkiria S. Schlindwein, Mark Gibson.
    Contents:
    Front Matter
    Introduction to Quality by Design (QbD) / Bruce Davis, Walkiria S Schlindwein
    Quality Risk Management (QRM) / Noel Baker
    Quality Systems and Knowledge Management / Siegfried Schmitt
    Quality by Design (QbD) and the Development and Manufacture of Drug Substance / Gerry Steele
    The Role of Excipients in Quality by Design (QbD) / Brian Carlin
    Development and Manufacture of Drug Product / Mark Gibson, Alan Carmody, Roger Weaver
    Design of Experiments / Martin Owen, Ian Cox
    Multivariate Data Analysis (MVDA) / Claire Beckett, Lennart Eriksson, Erik Johansson, Conny Wikström
    Process Analytical Technology (PAT) / Line Lundsberg-Nielsen, Walkiria S Schlindwein, Andreas Berghaus
    Analytical Method Design, Development, and Lifecycle Management / Joe Sousa, David Holt, Paul A Butterworth
    Manufacturing and Process Controls / Mark Gibson
    Regulatory Guidance / Siegfried Schmitt, Mustafa A Zaman
    Index
    Supplemental Images.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Reem K. Al-Essa, Mohammed Al-Rubaie, Stuart Walker, Sam Salek.
    Contents:
    1. Overview of Medicines Regulatory Systems in the Gulf Region
    2. The Regulatory Review Process in the Gulf Region
    3. Regulatory Review Times in the Gulf Region
    4. Quality Measures in the Gulf Regulatory Practices
    5. The Current Status of the Common Technical Document
    6. The Current Status of Drug Safety and Pharmacovigilance
    7. The Centralized Regulatory Review in the Gulf Region
    8. The Gulf States Assessment and Experience With the Centralised Procedure
    9. The Pharmaceutical Companies Assessment and Experience With the Centralised Procedure
    10. Proposal For an Improved Centralized Regulatory System
    11. The Strategic Planning Process of the GCC Regulatory Authorities: Barriers And Solutions
    12. The Regulatory Dilemma in the Gulf Region: The Way Forward.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Anthony J. Hickey, Hugh D.C. Smyth.
    Summary: Non-linear phenomena pervade the pharmaceutical sciences. Understanding the interface between each of these phenomena and the way in which they contribute to overarching processes such as pharmaceutical product development may ultimately result in more efficient, less costly and rapid implementation. The benefit to Society is self-evident in that affordable treatments would be rapidly forthcoming. We have aggregated these phenomena into one topic "Pharmaco-complexity: Non-linear Phenomena and Drug Product Development".

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Chemistry and Thermodynamics
    Solid State
    Dynamics
    Quality by Design
    Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics
    Poputaltion Biology
    Machine Learning.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Brian R. Moyer, Narayan P.S. Cheruvu, Tom C.-C. Hu, editors.
    Summary: Advances in drugs and biologics to mitigate or cure some of nature's most complex medical problems have been incredible to behold. These accomplishments are due to the actions of a wide theatre of participants from biologists, pharmacologists, geneticists, chemists and manufacturers, molecular biologists, toxicologists, clinicians, nurses, program managers, quality assurance personnel, regulatory professionals and a new group of innovators the Imaging Scientists. Imaging has grown from the microscopy sections put on slides with special stains to now in vivo slices created with innovative physics, imaging tracers and contrast agents, and incredibly fast and accurate computational systems. The world of biology has become one of witnessing the actions of drugs and biologics through the window of mechanical and electrical engineering creating instruments and reporter molecules that can help us see into our bodies and paint them with medical information needed to resolve disease. This book will inspire imagination and elicit even more innovations in the development of new and novel drugs and biologics through imaging.

    Contents:
    Imaging Platforms and Drug Development: An Introduction / Brian R. Moyer
    Imaging in Drug Development: Animal Models, Handling and Physiological Constraints / David B. Stout
    Considerations for Preclinical Laboratory Animal Imaging Center Design, Setup, and Management Suitable for Biomedical Investigation for Drug Discovery / Brenda A. Klaunberg and H. Douglas Morris
    Pharmaco-Imaging in Translational Science and Research / Immanuel Freedman
    The Role of Pharmacokinetics and Allometrics in Imaging: Practical Issues and Considerations / Brian R. Moyer
    Quantitative Imaging Using Autoradiographic Techniques / Eric G. Solon and Brian R. Moyer
    Preclinical Imaging in Oncology: Considerations and Recommendations for the Imaging Scientist / Daniel P. Bradley and Tim Wyant
    Use of Radiolabelled Leukocytes for Drug Evaluation in Man / Chrystalla Loutsios, Neda Farahi, Charlotte Summers, Prina Ruparelia, Jessica White [and 9 others]
    Application of Bioluminescence Imaging (BLI) to the Study of the Animal Models of Human Infectious Diseases / Hana Golding and Marina Zaitseva
    Preclinical Imaging in BSL-3 and BSL-4 Environments: Imaging Pathophysiology of Highly Pathogenic Infectious Diseases / Lauren Keith, Svetlana Chefer, Laura Bollinger, Jeffrey Solomon [and 4 others]
    Magnetic Resonance as a Tool for Pharmaco-Imaging / Brian R. Moyer, Tom C.-C. Hu, Simon Williams and H. Douglas Morris
    Technologies and Principles of Mass Spectral Imaging / Kevin A. Douglass, Demian R. Ifa and Andre R. Venter
    Regulatory Considerations Involved in Imaging / Brian R. Moyer, Narayan P. S. Cheruvu and Tom C.-C. Hu.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    [editors], Jerika T. Lam, Mary A. Gutierrez, Samit Shah.
    Summary: " ... this textbook is created for clinicians who are interested in practicing precision medicine by using the science of pharmacogenomics and making actionable, genotype-guided recommendations to optimize treatments for their patients. Furthermore, this textbook contains updated information about pharmacogenomics resources and the ethical and legal considerations to assist clinicians who are interested in implementing pharmacogenomics in practice settings"--Introduction

    Contents:
    Introduction and Fundamentals of Pharmacogenomics
    Implementation: A Guide to Implementing Pharmacogenomics Services
    Ethical, Legal, and Social Issues in Pharmacogenomics
    Pharmacogenomics Resources
    Cardiology Pharmacogenomics
    Infectious Diseases Pharmacogenomics
    Oncology Pharmacogenomics
    Psychiatry and Neurology Pharmacogenomics
    Transplant Pharmacogenomics.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Qing Yan, PharmTao, Santa Clara, CA, USA.
    Contents:
    From pharmacogenomics and systems biology to personalized care : a framework of systems and dynamical medicine / Qing Yan
    Translational bioinformatics approaches for systems and dynamical medicine / Qing Yan
    Whole blood transcriptomic analysis to identify clinical biomarkers of drug response / Grant P. Parnell and David R. Booth
    Diagnostic procedures for paraffin-embedded tissues analysis in pharmacogenomic studies / Raffaele Palmirotta [and six others]
    Approach to clinical and genetic characterization of statin-induced myopathy / QiPing Feng
    Pharmacogenomics of membrane transporters : a review of current approaches / Tristan M. Sissung [and four others]
    G protein-coupled receptor accessory proteins and signaling : pharmacogenomic insights / Miles D. Thompson [and three others]
    G protein-coupled receptor mutations and human genetic disease / Miles D. Thompson [and four others]
    Pharmacogenetics of the G protein-coupled receptors / Miles D. Thompson [and six others]
    Pharmacogenomics of heart failure / Anastasios Lymperopoulos and Faren French
    Pharmacogenomics in the development and characterization of atheroprotective drugs / Efi Valanti, Alexandros Tsompanidis, and Despina Sanoudou
    Management of side effects in the personalized medicine era : chemotherapy-induced peripheral neuropathy / Paolo Alberti and G. Cavaletti
    Pharmacogenomics of Alzheimer's disease : novel therapeutic strategies for drug development / Ramón Cacabelos [and four others]
    Pharmacogenetics of antipsychotic treatment in schizophrenia / Jennie G. Pouget and Daniel J. Müller / Pharmacogenetics of addiction therapy / David A. Nielsen [and three others]
    Pharmacogenetics in rheumatoid arthritis / Deepali Sen, Jisna R. Paul, and Prabha Ranganathan
    Pharmacogenetics of osteoporotic fractures / José A. Riancho and Flor M. Pérez-Campo
    Pharmacogenomics and pharmacoepigenomics in pediatric medicine / Barkur S. Shastry
    Pharmacogenomics in children / Michael Rieder.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Weimin Cai, Zhaoqian Liu, Liyan Miao, Xiaoqiang Xiang , editors.
    Summary: This book provides an introduction to the principles of pharmacogenomics and precision medicine, followed by the pharmacogenomics aspects of major therapeutic areas such as cardiovascular disease, cancer, organ transplantation, psychiatry, infection, antithrombotic drugs. It also includes genotyping technology and therapeutic drug monitoring in Pharmacogenomics; ethical, Legal and Regulatory Issues; cost-effectiveness of pharmacogenetics-guided treatment; application of pharmacogenomics in drug discovery and development and clinical Implementation of Pharmacogenomics for Personalized Precision Medicine. The contributors of Pharmacogenomics in Precision Medicine come from a team of experts, including professors from academic institutions and practitioner from hospital. It will give an in-depth overview of the current state of pharmacogenomics in drug therapy for all health care professionals and graduate students in the era of precision medicine.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction and Principles of Pharmacogenomics and Precision medicine
    Chapter 2. Pharmacogenomics in Cardiovascular Diseases
    Chapter 3. Pharmacogenomics of Antitumor Chemotherapeutic Agents
    Chapter 4. Pharmacogenomics of Antitumor Targeted Agent and Immunotherapy
    Chapter 5. Pharmacogenomics of Immunosuppressant
    Chapter 6. Pharmacogenomics of Psychiatric drugs
    Chapter 7. Pharmacogenomics of Anti-Infective Agents
    Chapter 8. Pharmacogenomics of Antithrombotic drugs
    Chapter 9. Pharmacogenomics in Therapeutic Drug Monitoring
    Chapter 10. Pharmacomicrobiomics
    Chapter 11. Genotyping technology in Pharmacogenomics
    Chapter 12. The Ethical, Legal and Regulatory Issues Associated with Pharmacogenomics
    Chapter 13. Cost-effectiveness of pharmacogenetic-guided treatment
    Chapter 14. Application of pharmacogenomics in drug discovery and development
    Chapter 15. Barriers and Solutions in Clinical Implementation of Pharmacogenomics for Personalized Precision Medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Hector O. Ventura, editor.
    Contents:
    The Established Therapies: HF-PEF and HF-REF
    Novel Therapies for the Prevention and Management of Acute Decompensated Heart Failure
    A Comprehensive Transition of Care Plan For a Patient Admitted with Acute Decompensated Heart Failure
    Volume Assessment and Management: Medical and Device Therapies.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Parimelazhagan Thangaraj.
    Contents:
    1. Ethnobotanical study
    2. Pharmacognostical studies
    3. Extraction of bioactive compounds
    4. Preliminary phytochemical studies
    5. Proximate composition analysis
    6. Mineral quantification
    7. Anti-nutritional factors
    8. Quantification of secondary metabolites
    9. In vitro antioxidant assays
    10. In vitro antihaemolytic activity
    11. Antimicrobial activity
    12. In vitro anthelmintic assay
    13. Toxicity studies
    14. In vivo antioxidant assays
    15. Analgesic activity
    16. Anti-inflammatory activity
    17. Antipyretic activity
    18. Inflammatory bowel disease
    19. In vitro anti-arthritic activity
    20. Anti-diarrhoeal activity
    21. Anti-ulcer activity
    22. Hepatoprotective activity
    23. Anti-diabetic activity
    24. Evaluation of anti-diabetic property on streptozotocin-induced diabetic rats
    25. In vivo wound healing studies
    26. Determination of cytotoxicity
    27. Induction of apoptosis
    28. Anti-tumour activity
    29. Protein bioavailability in animal model
    30. Detection of phenolic and flavonoid compounds using high performance thin layer chromatography (HPTLC)
    31. Isolation of compounds
    32. Molecular docking of bioactive compounds against BRCA and COX proteins
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Yoo Keun Chan, Kwee Peng Ng, Debra Si Mui Sim, editors.
    Summary: This book is the 4th in a series of Acute Care books written with the aim to address the NEEDS of health care providers when handling the acutely ill patients. Globally it has become apparent that the study of pharmacology and subsequent clinical training has not always adequately equipped young doctors with the ability to administer drugs to their patients safely and confidently, particularly in the critically ill patient. Compounding this issue is the lack of resource material related to these pharmacological concepts contained in one book that can help health care providers to understand and manage drug therapy in the acute situation. In spite of progressively newer and more developed protocols, guidelines, algorithms and many other books addressing the technical aspects of what needs to be done, most health care providers still find it difficult to grasp the basic pharmacological knowledge and rationally deliver the CARE that is required in the acute phase of patient management. The editors/authors have therefore aimed for a book that highlights topics and pharmacological issues pertinent to management of patients in their hour of need. This is a multi-author book but the style has been guided by 3 editors. The editors have used a different perspective? that of normalizing abnormal physiological processes with pharmacological agents? to address the GAPS in a bedside to bench approach. The details are pared down but important principles/concepts are emphasized.

    Contents:
    Preface
    I General Principles of Pharmacology and Pharmaceutics.- Why drugs are administered.- Drug administration.- Drug absorption and bioavailability
    Drug distribution.- Drug elimination.- Steady-state principles.- Dose-response relationship.- Pharmaceutical aspects of drugs.
    Dosage forms, dose calculations and prescriptions.- Drug interactions. II Pharmacology of the various body systems.- Drugs and the cardiovascular system.- Drugs and the respiratory system.- Drugs and the central nervous system.- Drugs and the liver/ gastrointestinal system.- Drugs and the renal system.- Drugs and the endocrine system.- Drugs and the neuromuscular system.- Drugs for the management of pain.- III Pharmacology in special circumstances.- The patient in pain.- The pediatric patient.- The elderly patient.- The obstetric patient.- The obese patient.- The bleeding patient.- The septic patient.- The allergic patient.- The poisoned patient.- IV Pharmacology of special drugs.- Oxygen as a drug.- Fluids as drugs
    V Safety issues in pharmacology
    Medication Errors. Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Abimbola Farinde, PhD, PharmD, Megan Hebdon, PhD, DNP, RN, NP-C.
    Summary: "An evidence-based, quick-access reference for adult gerontology nurse practitioners and related healthcare providers, this text describes a holistic, patient-centered approach to prescribing drugs to older adults. Comprehensive yet concise writing distills timely guidance on the complexities of safely prescribing to this unique population"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
  • Digital
    Dimos D. Mitsikostas, Koen Paemeleire editors.
    Contents:
    1. Headache classification
    2. Epidemiology of headache disorders
    3. General principles of pharmacotherapy for headache disorders.- 4. Placebo and nocebo effects
    5. Review of existing guidelines
    6. Acute migraine treatment
    7. Preventive (episodic) migraine treatment
    8. Drug treatment for chronic migraine
    9. Drug treatment for episodic and chronic tension-type headache (TTH)
    10. Cluster headache: acute and transitional treatment
    11. Cluster headache: preventive treatment
    12. Pharmacotherapy for other primary headache disorders
    13. Pharmacotherapy for primary headache disorders in children
    14. Pharmacological strategies in the prevention of migraine in children
    15. Pharmacotherapy for primary headache disorders during pregnancy and lactation
    16. Pharmacotherapy for primary headache disorders in the elderly
    17. Acute and chronic posttraumatic headache
    18. Headache attributed to low and increased CSF pressure
    19. Medication-overuse headache
    20. Painful cranial neuropathies
    21. Dental and Musculoskeletal Pain
    22. Post-traumatic neuropathies and Burning mouth syndrome.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    María Alejandra Alvarez.
    Summary: The aim of this book is to offer information about the Pharmacological Properties of Native Plants from Argentina to students, researchers and graduates interested in the fields of Ethnobotany, Pharmacognosy, Phytochemistry, Pharmacy, and Medicine. The book includes summary information about the native plants from Argentina with medical activity comprising their botanical characteristics, distribution, characteristics of the regions where they grow, ethnobotanical information, chemical data, biological activity, establishment of in vitro cultures, toxicity, and legal status.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Medicinal Plants in Argentina
    Ethnobotany in Argentina
    Cuyo
    The Pampa: an infinite plain
    Mesopotamia-Paranaense Forest
    Puna- a surrealistic landscape in the Argentinean Highlands
    Yungas
    Chaco and Espinal
    Patagonia
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    George E. Barreto, Amirhossein Sahebkar, editors.
    Summary: Medicinal plants and their derived products remain as an indispensable source of bioactive molecules that serve as either drug candidates or lead compounds for drug design and discovery. There are several advantages for plant-derived therapeutics including wide availability, diverse pharmacological actions and a generally good profile of safety and tolerability. Over the recent years, there have been numerous reports from clinical studies testifying to the efficacy and safety of medicinal plants and phytochemicals in ameliorating several human diseases. A plethora of basic studies has also unravelled molecular mechanisms underlying the health benefits of herbal medicines. Nevertheless, issues such as identification of bioactive ingredients, standardization of the products and drug interactions remain to be further studied. In this book, we aim to put together several chapters on the medicinal properties and pharmacological action of medicinal plants, plant species and phytochemicals. The goal of this contributed volume is to present a comprehensive collection on most important therapeutic aspects of plant-derived natural products and their molecular mechanisms of action.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Gustavo Alves Andrade dos Santos, editor.
    Summary: Alzheimers disease is the most prevalent form of dementia. Although it was discovered about a century ago, the first drugs applied in treatment were only introduced in therapy in the last 30 years. This book focuses on the clinical pharmacology of drugs that aim to delay the progression of Alzheimers disease, such as anticholinesterases and glutamate receptor antagonists, as well as treatment for the behavioral changes caused by the progression of the disease: antidepressants, antipsychotics, anxiolytics, and mood stabilizers. In addition, it describes important information about the pathophysiology and diagnostic methods of Alzheimers disease, emergency situations conditioned by the dementia process, and presents new perspectives for the treatment of Alzheimers disease. The ten chapters cover topics such as mechanism of action, dosage regimen, adverse reactions, drug interactions, toxicity profiles, among other information of clinical relevance. The work comprises evidence-based studies, providing a valuable resource for analyzing, prescribing and monitoring patients being treated for Alzheimers disease. Written by experts with solid professional experience, this book will appeal to pharmacologists, geriatricians, neurologists, psychiatrists, biomedical clinicians, and other healthcare professionals.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Principles of Pharmacology in Dementia
    3. The Viability of Treatment Conditioned to the Pathophysiology of Alzheimer's Disease
    4. The Use of Esterase Inhibitors
    5. Pharmacology of NMDA (N-methyl-D-aspartate) receptor antagonists in Alzheimers Disease
    6. Supportive Pharmacological Treatment
    7. Herbal Medicines and Supplements
    8. Emergency Situations
    9. Relationships between Treatment and Clinical Evaluations
    10. New Perspectives for Treatment in Alzheimer's Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Pablo Avanzas, Juan Carlos Kaski, editors.
    Summary: This book describes the clinical challenge currently posed by stable angina pectoris and provides guidance for those making clinical decisions regarding its pharmacological treatment. The importance of providing effective treatment is beyond dispute and this book deals with the most relevant aspects related to its pharmacological treatment. The pathogenesis of myocardial ischemia as the basis for rational treatment of angina is discussed thoroughly together with all major management goals including optimal symptom control and the secondary prevention of serious cardiovascular events. Pharmacological Treatment of Chronic Stable Angina Pectoris provides a clear description of the mechanisms of action and clinical indications of available anti-angina drugs and strategies for the use of novel pharmacological agents. It also includes a critical appraisal of the major management guidelines, which will assist the reader to interpret current evidence and provide the most appropriate forms of treatment. The ongoing controversy regarding medical therapy versus myocardial revascularization for the management of stable angina pectoris is also addressed. This eminently practical book will help guiding the reader through the complexities of the field and will be highly appreciated by clinicians, clinical cardiologists and cardiology trainees alike.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Andrea E. Cavanna.
    Summary: "Seignot's 1961 scientific report of a case of Tourette syndrome effectively treated with Haloperidol promoted a further 'paradigm shift' from the psychoanalytic theories to the current genetic and neurochemical theories on the aetiology and pathogenesis of Tourette syndrome. Seignot's observation was replicated throughout the world, starting with Caprini and Melotti's case report, which was published in the same year. The introduction of a pharmacological agent to control tics led to the speculation about a neurochemical substrate upon which medications work. Specifically, the unprecedented success of Haloperidol in controlling tics by blocking dopamine receptors in the brain suggested that might therefore be an excess of dopaminergic neurotransmission. American psychiatrists Arthur and Elaine Shapiro promoted the description of Tourette syndrome as a neurological disorder that by definition stood in opposition to psychoanalytic claims. The psychoanalytic perspective was successfully challenged in a book on Tourette syndrome published by the Shapiros in 1978. This paradigm shift in turn kindled interest in tracing the genetic basis of Tourette syndrome, a line of research which has flourished since the 1970s. Throughout the 1980s, studies on other first generation antidopaminergic medications, as well as alpha-2 adrenergic medications, were published, whereas in the 1990s the second generation of antidopaminergic medications were developed. During the first decade of the new millennium, Aripiprazole (sometimes referred to as 'third generation antidopaminergic medication') was first shown to be characterized by good efficacy and tolerability in the treatment of tics. More recently, a range of other medications belonging to different pharmaceutical classes have been investigated in patients with Tourette syndrome. The vast majority of these medications are pharmacological agents initially developed to treat other neuropsychiatric conditions"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Catherine E. Pelletier-Dattu.
    Summary: Composed entirely of tables and diagrams, this innovative text delivers a complete review of pharmacology in a way that simulates the way students think and learn.

    Contents:
    Pharmacology basics
    Antimicrobial medications
    Autonomic nervous system structure and medications
    Psychiatric medications
    Drugs affecting neurologic function
    Medications affecting cardiac and renal function
    Respiratory drugs
    Gastrointestinal drugs
    Drugs affecting the endocrine system
    Oncologic drugs
    Immunomodulators
    Drugs used to treat inflammation
    Toxicology
    Alternative medications.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2017
  • Digital
    Mark A. Simmons, PhD.
    Summary: "Pharmacology: An Essential Textbook covers the facts of pharmacology--the study of the effects of drugs on the body--and integrates the concepts to master for success in the classroom, in the laboratory and for board examinations. It provides a focused text for pharmacology courses. It can also be used as a source of key knowledge for daily clinical practice"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    [edited by] Hugh C. Hemmings, Talmage D. Egan.
    Summary: "Pharmacology and Physiology for Anesthesia: Foundations and Clinical Application, 2nd Edition, delivers the information you need in pharmacology, physiology, and molecular-cellular biology, keeping you current with contemporary training and practice. This thoroughly updated edition is your one-stop, comprehensive overview of physiology, and rational anesthetic drug selection and administration, perfect for study, review, and successful practice"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Basic principles of pharmacology. Mechanisms of drug action
    Pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics for intravenous anesthetics
    Pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of inhaled anesthetics
    Drug metabolism and pharmacogenetics
    Physiology and pharmacology of obesity, prematurity, and aging
    Pharmacodynamic drug interactions
    Adverse drug reactions
    Section 2: Nervous system. Central nervous system physiology: neurophysiology
    Central nervous system physiology: cerebrovascular
    Pharmacology of intravenous anesthetics
    Pharmacology of inhaled anesthetics
    Neuropharmacology
    Autonomic nervous system: physiology
    Autonomic nervous system: pharmacology
    Thermoregulation
    Physiology of pain
    Intravenous opioid agonists and antagonists
    Oral and non-intravenous opioids
    Non-opioid analgesics and anti-inflammatory drugs
    Local anesthetics
    Neuromuscular physiology and pharmacology
    Neuromuscular blockers and reversal drugs
    Section 3: Cardiovascular system. Cardiovascular physiology: cellular and molecular regulation
    Cardiovascular physiology: integrative function
    Vasopressors and inotropes
    Antihypertensive drugs and vasodilators
    Anti-arrhythmic drugs
    Cardiopulmonary resuscitation
    Section 4: Pulmonary system. Pulmonary physiology
    Pulmonary pharmacology
    Section 5: Gastrointestinal and endocrine systems. Liver and gastrointestinal physiology
    Liver and gastrointestinal pharmacology
    Nutritional and metabolic therapy
    Pharmacology of postoperative nausea and vomiting
    Endocrine physiology
    Endocrine pharmacology
    Physiology and pharmacology of obstetric anesthesia
    Section 6: Immunity and Infection. Chemotherapy, Immunosuppression, and Anesthesia
    Infection, Antimicrobial Drugs and Anesthesia
    Section 7: Fluid, electrolyte and hematologic homeostasis. Renal physiology
    Intravascular volume: regulation and replacement therapy
    Electrolytes and diuretics
    Section 8: Blood and hemostasis. Blood and coagulation
    Transfusion and coagulation therapy
    Antiplatelet and anticoagulant therapy.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Frank J. Dowd, DDS, PhD (Professor Emeritus, Pharmacology, Cheighton University, School of Medicine and School of Dentistry, Omaha, Nebraska), Barton S. Johnson, DDS, MS (Director, General Practice Residency Program, Swedish Medical Center, Private Practice, Seattle Special Care Dentistry, Seattle, Washington), Angelo J. Mariotti, DDS, PhD (Professor and Chair, Periodontology, the Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio).
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Tom Peck, Consultant Anaesthetist, Royal Hampshire County Hospital, Winchester; Honorary Consultant, University Hospital Southampton, Benjamin Harris, Consultant Anaesthetist, Hampshire Hospitals NHS Trust.
    Summary: "The art of anaesthesia includes many different facets deeply rooted in medical behaviour: listening and talking to the patient, evaluating, diagnosing and taking the right decisions. Drugs are central to patient care in many areas of medical practice and the anaesthetist as well as all healthcare practitioners need to have a clear understanding of therapeutics. However, competence in anaesthetic management during the whole perioperative management of our patients implies good knowledge of pharmacology; it is the bread and butter of our profession. The dynamic nature of drug development in this field compels a continuous updating of the characteristics of drugs that form such an essential part of our armamentarium"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Blaine Templar Smith.
    Summary: "The Second Edition teaches undergraduate nursing students the basic concepts of pharmacology. The text draws on the experience of contributing authors in the field of nursing. It takes a new approach to teaching the complex topic of pharmacology through its concise, digestible coverage of material, reader friendly design, and use of images and tables to reinforce content"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to pharmacology
    Introduction to drug action : the interplay of pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics
    Medication administration
    Central nervous system drugs
    Autonomic nervous system drugs
    Cardiovascular medications
    Respiratory medications
    Pharmacology of the gastrointestinal tract
    Endocrine system drugs
    Medications for eye and ear disorders
    Pharmacology of the genitourinary system
    Drugs associated with pregnancy, labor and delivery, and lactation
    Pharmacology in dermatologic conditions
    Pharmacology of psychotropic medications
    Pharmacology of anesthetic drugs
    Pharmacology of antimicrobial drugs.
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Erin E. Jobst, Peter C. Panus, Marieke Kruidering-Hall.
    Summary: "The goal of this book is to provide a comprehensive - yet focused - foundation in pharmacology to help rehabilitation professionals understand how medication use may alter the clinical presentation of our patients as well as their responses to therapeutic interventions. In this second edition, two licensed physical therapists (Drs. Jobst and Panus) with extensive training in pharmacology worked closely with Dr. Marieke Kruidering-Hall, a pharmacologist previously involved in medical pharmacology texts. The information follows the sequence of traditional pharmacology textbooks and integrated organ systems-based curricula. The initial section is a synopsis of the nature of drugs, basic principles of pharmacodynamics and pharmacokinetics, and an overview of the drug development and approval process in the United States. Subsequent chapters include drugs that affect the autonomic and central nervous systems, cardiovascular and pulmonary systems, and the endocrine, gastrointestinal, and musculoskeletal systems. A chemotherapeutic section includes chapters covering anti-microbial drugs, cancer chemotherapy agents, and drugs that modify the immune system"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    PART I: BASIC PRINCIPLES
    Chapter 1: Introduction
    Chapter 2: Pharmacodynamics
    Chapter 3: Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacogenomics
    PART II: DRUGS AFFECTING THE CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM
    Chapter 4: Introduction to Autonomic Pharmacology
    Chapter 5: Drugs Affecting the Cholinergic System
    Chapter 6: Sympathomimetics and Sympatholytics
    Chapter 7: Antihypertensive Drugs
    Chapter 8: Drugs Used in the Treatment of Angina Pectoris
    Chapter 9: Drugs Used in Heart Failure
    Chapter 10: Antiarrhythmic Drugs
    Chapter 11: Drugs Affecting the Blood
    PART III: DRUGS AFFECTING THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM
    Chapter 12: Introduction to the Pharmacology of Central Nervous System Drugs
    Chapter 13: Sedative-Hypnotic Drugs
    Chapter 14: Antiseizure Drugs
    Chapter 15: General Anesthetics
    Chapter 16: Local Anesthetics
    Chapter 17: Pharmacologic Management of Parkinson's Disease and Other Movement Disorders
    ^Chapter 18: Antipsychotic Agents and Lithium
    Chapter 19: Antidepressant Agents
    Chapter 20: Opioid Analgesics and Antagonists
    Chapter 21: Drugs of Abuse
    PART IV: SELECTED TOPICS IN ENDOCRINE FUNCTION
    Chapter 22: Growth, Thyroid, and Gonadal Pharmacology
    Chapter 23: Corticosteroids and Corticosteroid Antagonists
    Chapter 24: Pancreatic Hormones and Antidiabetic Drugs
    Chapter 25: Drugs that Affect Bone Mineral Homeostasis
    Chapter 26: Antihyperlipidemic Drugs
    PART V: CHEMOTHERAPEUTICS
    Chapter 27: Antibacterial Agents
    Chapter 28: Antiviral Agents
    Chapter 29: Antifungal and Antiparasitic Agents
    Chapter 30: Miscellaneous Antimicrobial Agents: Disinfectants, Antiseptics, Sterilants, and Preservatives
    Chapter 31: Cancer Chemotherapy
    Chapter 32: Immunopharmacology
    PART VI: DRUGS AFFECTING THE MUSCULOSKELETAL SYSTEM
    Chapter 33: Skeletal Muscle Relaxants
    ^Chapter 34: Drugs Affecting Eicosanoid Metabolism, Disease-Modifying Antirheumatic Drugs, and Drugs Used in Gout
    PART VII: SPECIAL TOPICS
    Chapter 35: Drugs Affecting the Respiratory System
    Chapter 36: Drugs Used in Gastrointestinal Disorders.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessPhysiotherapy
  • Digital
    clinical editors, Carolyn Gersch, PhD (candidate), MSN, RN, CNE, Nicole M. Heimgartner, MSN, RN, COI, Cherie R. Rebar, PhD, MBA, RN, COI, Laura M. Willis, DNP, APRN, FNP-C.
    Summary: "The fully updated Pharmacology Made Incredibly Easy, Fourth Edition, clarifies all the major drug therapy concepts with expert direction on administering all classes of drugs."--Back cover.

    Contents:
    Fundamentals of nursing pharmacology / Victoria Wilson
    Autonomic nervous system drugs / Sharon Wing
    Neurologic and neuromuscular drugs / Sarah Clark
    Pain medications / Adair Lattimer
    Cardiovascular drugs / Katrin Moskowitz
    Respiratory drugs / Katrin Moskowitz
    Gastrointestinal drugs / Margaret M. Gingrich
    Genitourinary drugs / Amy Beckmann
    Hematologic drugs / Emily Sheff
    Endocrine drugs / Tracy Taylor
    Psychotropic drugs / Sarah Clark
    Anti-infective drugs / Charity L. Hacker
    Anti-inflammatory, antiallergy, and immunosuppressant drugs / Tracy Taylor
    Antineoplastic drugs / Sarah Clark
    Drugs for fluid and electrolyte balance / Emily Sheff.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    clinical editors, Cherie R. Rebar, Nicole M. Heimgartner, Carolyn J. Gersch.
    Digital Access Ovid 2022
  • Digital
    Clinton B. Mathias, Jeremy P. McAleer, Doreen E. Szollosi, editors.
    Summary: Medicine has entered a golden age in which therapeutic agents are becoming widely available due to advances in basic science and technology. As such, many drugs have been developed that target inflammatory processes and/or the immune system. This book is intended for health professionals examining the modulation of inflammation by immunotherapeutic drugs. The immune system fills the primordial role of host defense and resistance to infections with pathogenic microorganisms. Several hematopoietic-derived cells constituting the innate and adaptive immune systems cooperate to provide barriers for microbial colonization and/or promote pathogen destruction within the host. Conversely, many immune cells are also involved in the pathogenesis and propagation of chronic inflammatory diseases. The beginning of this book details various components of the immune system including the cell types, lymphoid tissues, soluble cytokines and surface molecules that are essential for host defense. Breakdowns in immune tolerance, or dysregulated immune responses to antigens derived from self tissues or innocuous sources, can lead to the development of autoimmunity or chronic inflammatory diseases. Pathophysiologic roles for the immune system are detailed in corresponding chapters on autoimmunity, epithelial surfaces (lungs, skin, intestine), and transplantation, with special emphasis placed on immunotherapeutic drug targets. The last section of the book focuses on treatments that stimulate our immune system to specifically target and fight infectious diseases and cancer. In each chapter, the medications used to treat various diseases/conditions in terms of their mechanism of action and other pharmacologic properties are discussed in detail. Chapters begin with a table showing drug names and classifications. The importance of basic science and clinical trials cannot be understated in the context of drug development. As such, the discovery of certain medications that had a lasting impact in medicine and pharmacy are highlighted in chapter subsections named "Bench to Bedside." Several clinical applications of immunotherapeutic drugs are described within end-of -chapter case studies including practice questions. The Pharmacology of Immunotherapeutic Drugs is a reference for immunologists and clinicians (medical doctors, pharmacists, nurses) examining the modulation of inflammatory processes by a variety of medications targeting the cells and mediators of our immune system.

    Contents:
    Preface Chapter 1: Overview of the Immune System and its Pharmacological Targets
    Chapter 2: Modulation of the Innate Immune System
    Chapter 3: Modulation of the Adaptive Immune System
    Chapter 4: Respiratory Disorders of the Immune System and their Pharmacological Treatment
    Chapter 5: Inflammation of the Skin and its therapeutic topics
    Chapter 6: Inflammatory Diseases of the Gastrointestinal Tract and Pharmacological Treatments
    Chapter 7: Mechanisms of Autoimmunity and Pharmacologic Treatments
    Chapter 8: Transplantation: Immunologic Principles and Pharmacologic Agents
    Chapter 9: Immunopathogenesis, Immunization, and Treatment of Infectious Diseases
    Chapter 10: Cancer Immunotherapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Alan Cowan, Gil Yosipovitch, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    editor, Anand Ramachandran.
    Summary: "Pharmacology Recall uses a 2-column Q&A format to provide quick and accessible review of pharmacology for medical students. Though the basic science volumes in this series have generally not fared well, this text has performed consistently and receives strong reviews from students. While subjects like Anatomy proved to be too complex for the Recall style, Pharmacology seems to be particularly effective due to the nature of the subject--there is lots to memorize, or "recall.""--Provided by publisher.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RM301.12 .P44 2020
    1
  • Digital
    Mario Babbini, Mary Thomas.
    Contents:
    General principles of pharmacology
    Autonomic nervous system
    Central nervous system
    Cardiovascular and renal systems
    Endocrine system
    Respiratory, gastrointestinal, and hematopoietic systems
    Inflammation and immunomodulation
    Chemotherapeutic drugs.
  • Digital
    editors: Manish Kumar, Ashita Sharma, Praveen Kumar.
    Summary: The book presents a comprehensive and up-to-date overview of phytochemicals as efficient cancer therapeutics. Over the last few decades there has been a paradigm shift from conventional cancer therapeutic approaches to alternative and complementary medicinal approaches especially using phytoconstituents from natural products. As such, the book provides an in-depth understanding of phytochemicals targeting diverse signaling pathways involved in cancer along with the evaluation of the cancer modulatory effects of phytochemicals. It also highlights the potential modulatory effect of single nucleotide polymorphisms (SNPs) on the cancer-associated cellular pathways and their interactions with the phytochemicals. Further, it analyzes the drug delivery methods, bioavailability of active components of botanicals, and toxicity of phytochemicals. Lastly, the book elucidates the 3D cell culture and animal models systems to analyze the beneficial effects of phytochemicals in cancer.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Editors and Contributors
    List of Contributors
    1: Phytochemicals in Cancer Chemoprevention: A Brief Perspective
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Phytochemicals in Cancer Therapy
    1.3 Potential of Phytochemicals for Cancer Chemoprevention
    1.3.1 Phytochemicals as ROS Scavengers and Redox Modulators
    1.3.2 Phytochemicals in DNA Damage and Repair
    1.3.3 Phytochemicals Control Gene Expression
    1.3.4 Phytochemicals Modulate Phase 1 and Phase 2 Enzymes
    1.3.5 Phytochemicals Inhibit Cell Proliferation
    1.3.6 Phytochemicals Promote Autophagy 1.3.7 Phytochemicals Exhibit Anti-inflammatory Effects
    1.3.8 Phytochemicals Modulate Tumor Metabolism
    1.3.9 Phytochemicals Modulate Gut Microbiota to Prevent Cancer
    1.4 Limitations of Phytochemicals as Therapeutics for Chemoprevention
    1.4.1 Complex Mixture of Metabolites
    1.4.2 Bioavailability of Phytochemicals
    1.4.3 Biphasic Effects
    1.5 Phytochemicals in Clinical Trials and the Therapies
    1.6 Future Directions: Filling in the Gaps
    1.7 Conclusions
    References
    2: Role of Phytochemicals in Modulating Signaling Cascades in Cancer Cells 2.4.5.1 Plant Products in the Modulation of PI3K-AKT Signaling
    2.4.6 Wnt Cell Signaling
    2.4.6.1 Plant Products in the Modulation of Wnt Signaling
    2.4.7 mTOR Pathway
    2.4.7.1 Plant Products in the Modulation of mTOR Signaling
    2.4.8 Phytochemicals as Modulators of Antioxidant and Anti-Inflammatory Stress
    2.4.9 Cell Cycle Modulators
    2.4.10 Tumor Suppressor Genes Activation and DNA Repair Mechanism
    2.4.11 Inducing Programmed Cell Death/Apoptosis
    2.4.11.1 Induction of Apoptosis by Phytochemicals
    2.5 Conclusion
    References 3: Diverse Cancer Therapeutic Interactions: Complexities in Cancer Management
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Complex Interaction of Anticancer Drugs with Signal Transduction Pathways in Cells
    3.3 Therapeutic Limitations of Anticancer Drugs
    3.3.1 Doxorubicin
    3.3.2 Abiraterone
    3.3.3 Asparaginase (Erwinia chrysanthemi)
    3.3.4 Axitinib
    3.3.5 Tamoxifen
    3.3.6 Crizotinib
    3.4 Competing the Complex Cellular Networks Towards a Rational Cancer Therapy
    3.5 Therapeutic Limitations Due to Personalized Cancer Treatment
    3.5.1 Applications of Personalized Therapy
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Amritpal Singh Saroya, Jaswinder Singh.
    Summary: "Natural Products have always played a pivotal role as sources for drug lead compounds. This book is aimed at providing inside purview of the scope of natural products (including herbal and marine) in the possible treatment of neurological disorders. The book explains pre-clinical neuropharmacological investigations done on herbs including Bacopa monnieri, Hypericum perforatum, Passiflora incarnata, Scutellaria baicalensis and Piper methysticum. It provides a comprehensive overview of the role of phytoconstituents like huperzine, curcumin, Salvinorin A, bioflavonoids, sulforaphane, tanshinone IIA, tetramethylpyrazine, tetrahydrocannabinol, and cannabidiol in the treatment of neurological disorders. The book provides a modern concept of herbal medications, neuropharmacology of marine bioactive products and Ayurvedic formulations, herbal drugs with abuse potential and neurotoxic mycotoxins."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction to Herbal Medicine
    2. Medicinal Herbs Used in Herbal Medicine for Neurological Disorders
    3. Neuropharmacology of Genus Hypericum. Hypericin and Hyperforin
    4. Neuropharmacology of Lavender, Rosemary and Salvia
    5. Neuropharmacology of Passiflora Genus
    6. Neuropharmacology of Scutellaria baicalensis Georgi
    7. Piper methysticum G. Forst: a Potent Antianxiety Agent
    8. Neuropharmacology of Melissa officinalis L.
    9. Neuropharmacology of Chamomiles
    10. Neuropharmacology of Bacopa monnieri with Reference to Bacosides
    11. Neuropharmacology of Acorus calamus L.
    12. Neuropharmacology of Celastrus paniculatus Willd.
    13. Phytopharmacology of Indian Nootropic Convolvulus pluricaulis
    14. Neuropharmacology of Rhodiola rosea L.
    15. Neuropharmacology of Salvia miltiorrhiza Bunge (Danshen)
    16. Neuropharmacology of Withania somnifera Dunal.
    17. Neuropharmacology of Nardostachys jatamansi DC.
    18. Neuropharmacology of Nutritional Supplements
    19. Neuropharmacology of Valeriana Genus
    20. Neuropharmacology of Curcumin. Intro; Contents; About the Authors; 1: Introduction toHerbal Medicine; 1.1 Some Basic Definitions; 1.2 History ofHerbal Medicine; 1.3 Renaissance ofHerbal Medicine; 1.4 Herbal Glossary; 2: Medicinal Herbs Used inHerbal Medicine forNeurological Disorders; 2.1 Albizia julibrissin Baker (Fabaceae); 2.2 Acorus gramineus Sol. Aiton (Acoraceae); 2.3 Acorus tatarinowii Schott (Acoraceae); 2.4 Amphilophium crucigerum (L.) L.G. Lohmann (Bignoniaceae); 2.5 Galphimia glauca Cav. (Malpighiaceae); 2.6 Hypoxis hemerocallidea Fisch. & C.A. Mey. (Hypoxidaceae) 2.7 Litsea glaucescens Kunth (Lauraceae)2.8 Leonurus sibiricus L. (Lamiaceae); 2.9 Melissa officinalis L. (Lamiaceae); 2.10 Nepeta cataria L. (Lamiaceae); 2.11 Nepeta hindostana (Roth) Haines (Lamiaceae); 2.12 Petiveria alliacea L.; 2.13 Salvia guaranitica St. Hil. (Lamiaceae); 2.14 Sceletium tortuosum (L.) N.E. Brown (Aizoaceae); 2.15 Sorbus alnifolia (Sieb. et Zucc.) K. Koch (Rosaceae); 2.16 Stereospermum kunthianum Cham. (Bignoniaceae); 2.17 Tilia tomentosa Moench (Tiliaceae); 2.18 Verbena officinalis L. (Verbenaceae); References 3.13.3 Hypericum andObsessive-Compulsive Disorder (OCD)3.13.4 Comparative Trials withSynthetic Drugs; 3.13.4.1 Hypericum Extract vs Maprotiline; 3.13.4.2 Hypericum Extract Versus Imipramine; 3.13.4.3 Hypericum Extract Versus Amitriptyline; 3.13.4.4 Hypericum Extract Versus Fluoxetine; 3.13.4.5 Hypericum Extract Versus Sertraline; 3.13.4.6 Hypericum Extract Versus Citalopram; 3.13.4.7 Hypericum Extract Versus Paroxetine; 3.14 Neuropharmacology ofOther Hypericum Species; 3.14.1 Hypericum calycinum L.; 3.14.2 Hypericum caprifoliatum Cham. & Schltdl. 3.6.1.5 Neuroprotective Activity3.7 Neuropharmacology ofHypericin; 3.7.1 Non-clinical; 3.7.2 Clinical; 3.8 Neuropharmacology ofPseudohypericin; 3.9 Neuropharmacology ofH. perforatum Xanthones; 3.10 Neuropharmacology ofH. perforatum Flavonoids; 3.11 Neuropharmacology ofHyperforin; 3.11.1 Non-clinical; 3.11.2 Clinical; 3.12 Neuropharmacology ofAdhyperforin; 3.13 Clinical Pharmacology ofH. perforatum Extract; 3.13.1 Clinical Trials inDepression; 3.13.1.1 Mild toModerate Depression; 3.13.1.2 Severe Major Depression; 3.13.2 Hypericum andSeasonal Affective Disorder (SAD) 3: Neuropharmacology ofGenus Hypericum: Hypericin andHyperforin3.1 Hypericum perforatum Linn. (Guttiferae); 3.2 Habitat; 3.3 Botany; 3.4 Traditional Use inTreatment ofDiseases oftheNervous System; 3.5 Chemistry; 3.5.1 Napthodianthrones; 3.5.2 Acylphloroglucinols; 3.5.3 Flavonoids; 3.5.4 Flavanols; 3.5.5 Xanthones andSterols (Mathis andOurisson 1964); 3.5.6 Terpenoids; 3.6 Neuropharmacology ofH. perforatum Extract; 3.6.1 Non-clinical Studies; 3.6.1.1 Antidepressant Activity; 3.6.1.2 Anxiolytic Activity; 3.6.1.3 Anti-dementia Activity; 3.6.1.4 Antistress Activity
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    editors, Virginia P. Arcangelo, PhD, NP, Family Nurse Practitioner, Retired, Berlin, New Jersey, Andrew M. Peterson, PharmD, PhD, FCPP, John Wyeth Dean, Professor of Clinical Pharmacy and Professor of Health Policy, University of the Sciences in Philadelphia, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Veronica F. Wilbur, PhD, APRN-FNP, CNE, FAANP, Assistant Professor of Graduate Nursing, West Chester University, West Chester, Pennsylvania, Jennifer A. Reinhold, BA, PharmD, BCPS, BCPP, Associate Professor of Clinical Pharmacy, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, University of the Sciences in Philadelphia, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.
    Contents:
    Unit 1: Principles of therapeutics. Issues for the practitioner in drug therapy
    Pharmacokinetic basis of therapeutics and pharmacodynamic principles
    Impact of drug interactions and adverse events on therapeutics
    Principles of pharmacotherapy in pediatrics
    Principles of pharmacotherapy in pregnancy and lactation
    Pharmacotherapy principles in older adults
    Principles of pharmacology in pain management
    Principles of antimicrobial therapy
    Complementary and alternative medicine
    Pharmacogenomics
    Unit 2: Pharmacotherapy for skin disorders. Contact dermatitis
    Fungal infections of the skin
    Viral infections of the skin
    Bacterial infections of the skin
    Psoriasis
    Acne vulgaris and rosacea
    Unit 3: Pharmacotherapy for eye and ear disorders. Ophthalmic disorders
    Otitis media and otitis externa
    Unit 4: Pharmacotherapy for cardiovascular disorders. Hypertension
    Hyperlipidemia
    Chronic stable angina
    Heart failure
    Arrhythmias
    Unit 5: Pharmacotherapy for respiratory disorders
    Upper respiratory infections
    Asthma
    Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
    Bronchitis and pneumonia
    Unit 6: pharmacotherapy for gastrointestinal tract disorders
    Nausea and vomiting
    Gastroesophageal reflux disease and peptic ulcer disease
    Constipation, diarrhea, and irritable bowel syndrome
    Inflammatory bowel disease
    Unit 7: pharmacotherapy for genitourinary tract disorders. Urinary tract infection
    Prostatic disorders and erectile dysfunction
    Overactive bladder
    Sexually transmitted infections
    Unit 8: Pharmacotherapy for musculoskeletal disorders. Osteoarthritis and gout
    Rheumatoid arthritis
    Unit 9: Pharmacology for neurological/psychological disorders. Headaches
    Seizure disorders
    Major depressive disorder
    Anxiety disorders
    Insomnia and sleep disorders
    Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder
    Alzheimer disease
    Parkinson disease
    Unit 10: Pharmacotherapy for endocrine disorders. Diabetes mellitus
    Thyroid disorders
    Unit 11: Pharmacotherapy for immune disorders. Allergies and allergic reactions
    Human immunodeficiency virus
    Unit 12: Pharmacotherapy for hematologic disorders. Pharmacotherapy for venous thromboembolism prevention and treatment, stroke prevention in atrial fibrillation, and thromboembolism prevention with mechanical heart valves
    Anemias
    Unit 13: Pharmacotherapy in health promotion. Immunizations
    Smoking cessation
    Weight loss
    Unit 14: Women's health. Contraception
    Menopause
    Osteoporosis
    Vaginitis
    Unit 15: Integrative approach to patient care. The economics of pharmacotherapeutics
    Integrative approaches to pharmacotherapy: a look at complex cases.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    editors, Joseph T. DiPiro, Gary C. Yee, L. Michael Posey, Stuart T. Haines, Thomas D. Nolin, Vicki L. Ellingrod.
    Summary: "The 11th edition of Pharmacotherapy : A Pathophysiologic Approach offers excellent information to address aspects of all four of these educational outcomes. Recognizing the need for a consistent process in the delivery of patient care across the profession, the Joint Commission of Pharmacy Practitioners (JCPP) in 2014 released the Pharmacists' Patient Care Process (PPCP). The process is applicable to any practice setting where pharmacists provide patient care and for any patient care service provided by pharmacists. ACPE Standards 2016 incorporated the PPCP as a required component of the curriculum. The 11th edition of Pharmacotherapy : A Pathophysiologic Approach provides a new chapter fully describing the PPCP's purpose and components. In a unique and very innovative approach the new edition provides a "patient care process box" for the clinical conditions addressed. Each "box" focuses on the collection and assessment of information relevant to the clinical condition, the development of a plan of treatment and its implementation, as well as how to monitor and evaluate the success of the plan. This new feature should make the 11th edition of Pharmacotherapy : A Pathophysiologic Approach stand out from any other clinical textbook for pharmacy students. Although I have focused this foreword, primarily as a textbook for faculty and students in the United States, as a site visitor for ACPE's International Services Program, I became aware of how much previous editions of Pharmacotherapy : A Pathophysiologic Approach have been adopted in other countries and the positive reactions from our international faculty and student colleagues. Likewise, because of the new edition's focus on the PPCP and the detail with which it is applied to various clinical conditions that pharmacists face in practice, I believe the 11th edition of Pharmacotherapy : A Pathophysiologic Approach will prove to be an outstanding source for the continuing professional development of pharmacists in all practice settings."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Section 1. Foundation issues
    Section 2. Common health problems
    Section 3. Special populations
    Section 4. Cardiovascular disorders
    Section 5. Respiratory disorders
    Section 6. Gastrointestinal disorders
    Section 7. Renal disorders
    Section 8. Neurologic disorders
    Section 9. Psychiatric disorders
    Section 10. Endocrinologic disorders
    Section 11. Gynecologic and obstetric disorders
    Section 12. Urologic disorders
    Section 13. Immunologic disorders
    Section 14. Rheumatologic disorders
    Section 15. Ophthalmic disorders
    Section 16. Dermatologic disorders
    Section 17. Hematologic disorders
    Section 18. Infectious diseases
    Section 19. Oncologic disorders
    Section 20. Nutritional disorders.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessAPN
    AccessAPN
    AccessPharmacy
  • Digital/Print
    editors, Joseph T. DiPiro, Robert L. Talbert, Gary C. Yee, Gary R. Matzke, Barbara G. Wells, L. Michael Posey ; associate editors, Vicki L. Ellingrod, Stuart T. Haines, Thomas D. Nolin.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RM263 .P56 2017
    1
  • Digital
    editors, Terry L. Schwinghammer, Julia M. Koehler, Jill S. Borchert, Douglas Slain, Sharon K. Park.
    Contents:
    Principles of patient-focused therapy
    Cardiovascular disorders
    Respiratory disorders
    Gastrointestinal disorders
    Renal disorders
    Neurologic disorders
    Psychiatric disorders
    Endocrinologic disorders
    Women's health (gynecologic disorders)
    Urologic disorders
    Immunologic disorders
    Bone and joint disorders
    Disorders of the eyes, ears, nose, and throat
    Dermatologic disorders
    Hematologic disorders
    Infectious disorders
    Oncologic disorders
    Nutrition and nutritional disorders
    Complementary and alternative therapies (Level III).
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2017
  • Digital
    Terry L. Schwinghammer, Julia M. Koehler, Jill S. Borchert, Douglas Slain, Sharon K. Park
    Summary: Medicine is an ever-changing science. As new research and clinical experience broaden our knowledge, changes in treatment and drug therapy are required. The authors and the publisher of this work have checked with sources believed to be reliable in their efforts to provide information that is complete and generally in accord with the standards accepted at the time of publication. However, in view of the possibility of human error or changes in medical sciences, neither the authors nor the publisher nor any other party who has been involved in the preparation or publication of this work warrants that the information contained herein is in every respect accurate or complete, and they disclaim all responsibility for any errors or omissions, or for the results obtained from use of the information contained in this work. Readers are encouraged to confirm the information contained herein with other sources. For example and in particular, readers are advised to check the product information sheet included in the package of each drug they plan to administer to be certain that the information contained in this work is accurate and that changes have not been made in the recommended dose or in the contraindications for administration. This recommendation is of particular importance in connection with new or infrequently used drugs

    Contents:
    Principles of patient-focused therapy
    Cardiovascular disorders
    Respiratory disorders
    Gastrointestinal disorders
    Renal disorders
    Neurologic disorders
    Psychiatric disorders
    Endocrinologic disorders
    Gynecologic and obstetric disorders
    Urologic disorders
    Immunologic disorders
    Bone and joint disorders
    Eyes, ears, nose and throat disorders
    Dermatologic disorders
    Hematologic disorders
    Infectious diseases
    Oncologic disorders
    Nutrition and nutritional disorders
    Complementary and alternative therapies (level III)
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPharmacy
    AccessAPN
    AccessAPN
  • Digital
    Xingshun Qi, Yongping Yang, editors.
    Summary: This book aims to provide an updated information on different types of major and emerging drugs for managing liver cirrhosis and its complications, including acute gastroesophageal variceal bleeding, ascites, hepatic encephalopathy, liver failure, acute kidney injury, and portal venous thrombosis. The chapters are organized by drug class, such as anti-HBV drugs, anti-HCV drugs, anticoagulants, and antibiotics, etc. The clinical efficacy, indication, and contra-indication of the various drug therapies are discussed using supportive reference material from authoritative sources and published clinical trials. It will be an invaluable reference for physicians who are treating patients with liver cirrhosis, especially those presenting with acute life-threatening complications.

    Contents:
    Anti-HBV drugs in liver cirrhosis
    Anti-HCV drugs in liver cirrhosis
    Anticoagulants in liver cirrhosis
    Antibiotics in liver cirrhosis
    Silymarin in liver cirrhosis
    Ursodeoxycholic acid in liver cirrhosis
    Emricasan in liver cirrhosis
    Non-selective beta blockers in liver cirrhosis
    Somatostatin and octreotide in liver cirrhosis
    Terlipressin in liver cirrhosis
    Diuretics in liver cirrhosis
    Statins in liver cirrhosis
    L-Ornithine L-Aspartate in liver cirrhosis
    Lactulose in liver cirrhosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Barbara G. Wells, PharmD, FASHP, FCCP, Dean Emeritus and Professor Emeritus, Executive Director Emeritus, Research Institute of Pharmaceutical Sciences, School of Pharmacy, the University of Missippi, Oxford, Missippi, Joseph T. DiPiro, FCCP, Professor and Dean, Archie O. McCalley Chair, School of Pharmacy, Virginia Commonwealth University, Richmond, Virginia, Terry L. Schwinghammer, PharmD, FCCP, FASHP, FAPHA, BCPS, Professor and Chair, Department of Clinical Pharmacy, School of Pharmacy, West Virginia University, Morgantown, University, Cecily V. DiPiro, PharmD, CDE, Consultant Pharmacist.
    Contents:
    Section 1: Bone And Joint Disorders Edited By Terry L. Schwinghammer
    Chapter 1: Gout And Hyperuricemia
    Chapter 2: Osteoarthritis
    Chapter 3: Osteoporosis
    Chapter 4: Rheumatoid Arthritis
    Section 2: Cardiovascular Disorders Edited By Terry L. Schwinghammer
    Chapter 5: Acute Coronary Syndromes
    Chapter 6: Arrhythmias
    Chapter 7: Cardiac Arrest
    Chapter 8: Dyslipidemia
    Chapter 9: Heart Failure
    Chapter 10: Hypertension
    Chapter 11: Ischemic Heart Disease
    Chapter 12: Shock
    Chapter 13: Stroke
    Chapter 14: Venous Thromboembolism
    Section 3: Dermatologic Disorders Edited By Terry L. Schwinghammer
    Chapter 15: Acne Vulgaris
    Chapter 16: Dermatologic Drug Reactions And Common Skin Conditions
    Chapter 17: Psoriasis
    Section 4: Endocrinologic Disorders Edited By Terry L. Schwinghammer
    Chapter 18: Adrenal Gland Disorders
    Chapter 19: Diabetes Mellitus
    Chapter 20: Thyroid Disorders
    Section 5: Gastrointestinal Disorders Edited By Joseph T. Dipiro And Terry L. Schwinghammer
    Chapter 21: Cirrhosis And Portal Hypertension
    Chapter 22: Constipation
    Chapter 23: Diarrhea
    Chapter 24: Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
    Chapter 25: Hepatitis, Viral
    Chapter 26: Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Chapter 27: Nausea And Vomiting
    Chapter 28: Pancreatitis
    Chapter 29: Peptic Ulcer Disease
    Section 6: Gynecologic And Obstetric Disorders Edited By Barbara G. Wells
    Chapter 30: Contraception
    Chapter 31: Menopausal, Perimenopausal, And Postmenopausal Hormone Therapy
    Chapter 32: Pregnancy And Lactation: Therapeutic Considerations
    Section 7: Hematologic Disorders Edited By Cecily V. Dipiro
    Chapter 33: Anemias
    Chapter 34: Sickle Cell Disease
    Section 8: Infectious Diseases Edited By Joseph T. Dipiro
    Chapter 35: Antimicrobial Regimen Selection
    Chapter 36: Central Nervous System Infections
    Chapter 37: Endocarditis
    Chapter 38: Fungal Infections, Invasive
    Chapter 39: Gastrointestinal Infections
    Chapter 40: Human Immunodeficiency Virus Infection
    Chapter 41: Influenza
    Chapter 42: Intra-abdominal Infections
    Chapter 43: Respiratory Tract Infections, Lower
    Chapter 44: Respiratory Tract Infections, Upper
    Chapter 45: Sepsis And Septic Shock
    Chapter 46: Sexually Transmitted Diseases
    Chapter 47: Skin And Soft-tissue Infections
    Chapter 48: Surgical Prophylaxis
    Chapter 49: Tuberculosis
    Chapter 50: Urinary Tract Infections
    Chapter 51: Vaccines, Toxoids, And Other Immunobiologics
    Section 9: Neurologic Disorders Edited By Barbara G. Wells
    Chapter 52: Alzheimer Disease
    Chapter 53: Epilepsy
    Chapter 54: Headache: Migraine And Tension-type
    Chapter 55: Pain Management
    Chapter 56: Parkinson Disease
    Chapter 57: Status Epilepticus
    Section 10: Nutrition Support Edited By Cecily V. Dipiro
    Chapter 58: Obesity
    Chapter 59: Nutrition Evaluation And Support. Section 11: Oncologic Disorders Edited By Cecily V. Dipiro
    Chapter 60: Breast Cancer
    Chapter 61: Colorectal Cancer
    Chapter 62: Lung Cancer
    Chapter 63: Lymphomas
    Chapter 64: Prostate Cancer
    Section 12: Ophthalmic Disorders Edited By Cecily V. Dipiro
    Chapter 65: Glaucoma
    Section 13: Psychiatric Disorders Edited By Barbara G. Wells
    Chapter 66: Generalized Anxiety Disorder, Panic Disorder, And Posttraumatic Stress Disorder
    Chapter 67: Bipolar Disorder
    Chapter 68: Major Depressive Disorder
    Chapter 69: Schizophrenia
    Chapter 70: Sleep-wake Disorders
    Chapter 71: Substance-related Disorders
    Section 14: Renal Disorders Edited By Cecily V. Dipiro
    Chapter 72: Acid–base Disorders
    Chapter 73: Acute Kidney Injury
    Chapter 74: Chronic Kidney Disease
    Chapter 75: Electrolyte Homeostasis
    Section 15: Respiratory Disorders Edited By Terry L. Schwinghammer
    Chapter 76: Allergic Rhinitis
    Chapter 77: Asthma
    Chapter 78: Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease
    Section 16: Urologic Disorders Edited By Cecily V. Dipiro
    Chapter 79: Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia
    Chapter 80: Erectile Dysfunction
    Chapter 81: Urinary Incontinence
    Appendices Edited By Barbara G. Wells
    Appendix 1: Drug Allergy
    Appendix 2: Geriatrics
    Appendix 3: Drug-induced Hematologic Disorders
    Appendix 4: Drug-induced Liver Disease
    Appendix 5: Drug-induced Pulmonary Disease
    Appendix 6: Drug-induced Kidney Disease.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Terry L. Schwinghammer, Joseph T. DiPiro, Vicki L. Ellingrod, Cecily V. DiPiro.
    Summary: Pharmacotherapy Handbook, Eleventh Edition delivers quick-access answers in any clinical setting. Whether you're a student, pharmacist, and hospital administrator, it offers a thorough understanding about what drugs are used in various situations, and why. The text delivers both the key points pharmacists needs to know in practice and the information students studying for the boards needs to pass. With JNC-VI guidelines-- the standard for drug therapy and pharmaceutical care--it facilitates fast and easy access to answers, and all text will appear on AccessPharmacy for the first time.

    Contents:
    Bone and Joint disorders
    Cardiovascular disorders
    Dermatologic disorders
    Endocrinologic disorders
    Gastrointestinal disorders
    Gynecologic and Obstetric disorders
    Hematologic disorders
    Infectious Diseases
    Neurologic disorders
    Nutrition Support
    Oncologic disorders
    Ophthalmic disorders
    Psychiatric disorders
    Renal disorders
    Respiratory disorders
    Urologic disorders.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2021
  • Digital
    Arturo Evangelista, Christoph A. Nienaber, editors.
    Summary: This book is driven by the considerable progress made by novel imaging techniques in understanding the pathophysiology and evolution of aortic disease and its diagnosis. Despite the lack of symptoms in stable conditions, most aortic diseases have a high morbidity and mortality. New therapeutic strategies such as endovascular treatment and surgical techniques have appeared to improve conventional surgery in advanced phases of the disease, but until recently, medical treatment has focused on the control of cardiovascular risk factors using beta-blockers to reduce aortic wall stress by reducing blood pressure and heart rate. Pharmacotherapy in Aortic Disease updates the reader on the new medical treatment that are changing the natural history of these diseases. Leading experts have created a critical in-depth, yet concise, analysis of the available medical treatments for different aortic disease entities. Both basic research studies and clinical trials discussed in this book serve as a base for improving therapeutic management, delaying the need for surgery, and prolonging survival in these patients.

    Contents:
    Aortic atherosclerosis as an embolic source
    Aortitis
    Aortic aneurysm
    Marfan Syndrome
    Acute Aortic Syndrome
    Chronic aortic dissection.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Marie A. Chisholm-Burns, Terry L. Schwinghammer, Patrick M. Malone, Jill M. Kolesar, P. Brandon Bookstaver, Kelly C. Lee.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2019
  • Digital
    Marie Chisholm-Burns, Terry Schwinghammer, Patrick Malone, Jill Kolesar, Kelly C Lee, P. Brandon Bookstaver.
    Summary: "Pharmacotherapy Principles & Practice uses a solid evidence-based approach to teach you how to design, implement, monitor, and evaluate medication therapy. Updated with additional content and reflecting the latest findings, this sixth edition provides everything you need to gain an in-depth understanding of the underlying principles of the pharmacotherapy of disease--and their practical application. All chapters were written or reviewed by pharmacists, nurse practitioners, physician assists, and physicians recognized by authorities in their fields. The book opens with an insightful introductory chapter and is followed by five chapters focused on specific populations: pediatrics, geriatrics, palliative care, critical care, and global health and travel medicine. The subsequent 97 disease-based chapters cover epidemiology, etiology, pathophysiology, clinical presentation and diagnosis, and nonpharmacologic therapy, followed by clear recommendations for medication selection, desired outcomes, dosing, and patient monitoring"--Amazon.

    Contents:
    Part I. Special Populations. Part II. Disorders of Order Systems. Cardiovascular Disorders
    Respiratory Disorders
    Gastrointestinal Disorders
    Renal Disorders
    Neurologic Disorders
    Psychiatric Disorders
    Endocrinologic Disorders
    Gynecologic and Obstetric Disorders
    Urologic Disorders
    Immunologic Disorders
    Bone and Joint Disorders
    Disorders of the Eyes, Ears, Nose, and Throat
    Dermatologic Disorders
    Hematologic Disorders
    Diseases of Infectious Origin
    Oncologic Disorders
    Nutrition and Nutritional Disorders.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2022
  • Digital
    Kathryn R. Matthias, Michael D. Katz.
    Contents:
    An Introduction On How To Use Study Guide And Practice Case
    Cardiovascular Disorders
    Respiratory Disorders
    Gastrointestinal Disorders
    Renal Disorders
    Neurologic Disorders
    Psychiatric Disorders
    Endocrinologic Disorders
    Gynecologic And Obstetric Disorders
    Urologic Disorders - Immunologic Disorders
    Bone And Joint Disorders
    Disorders Of The Eyes, Ears, Nose, And Throat
    Dermatologic Disorders
    Hematologic Disorders
    Diseases Of Infectious Origin
    Oncologic Disorders
    Nutrition And Nutritional Disorders.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2023
  • Digital
    Michael D. Katz, Kathryn R. Matthias.
    Contents:
    Cardiovascular Disorders
    Respiratory Disorders
    Gastrointestinal Disorders
    Renal Disorders
    Neurologic Disorders
    Psychiatric Disorders
    Endocrinologic Disorders
    Gynecologic And Obstetric Disorders
    Urologic Disorders - Immunologic Disorders
    Bone And Joint Disorders
    Disorders Of The Eyes, Ears, Nose, And Throat
    Dermatologic Disorders
    Hematologic Disorders
    Diseases Of Infectious Origin
    Oncologic Disorders
    Nutrition And Nutritional Disorders.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2020
  • Digital
    I. Ralph Edwards, Marie Lindquist, editors.
    Contents:
    1. How to learn Pharmacovigilance, now and in the Future
    2. Lost in Regulation
    3. What is the Future of Pharmacovigilance and how can we Make it as Good as Possible?
    4. Some Other Ideas About the Future of Pharmacovigilance
    5. Best Safety Practices now and in the Future
    6. Is There a Benefit from the Medical Literature Monitoring Service of the EMA?
    7. The Unified Drug Safety-Clinical Database
    8. Behind the Scenes
    'Silent Factors' Influencing Pharmacovigilance Practice and Decisions
    9. Shaking up Culture and Communication in PV [V6]
    10. Broadening the Scope of Pharmacovigilance
    11. Effective Treatment Matters: Revitalizing Pharmacoviglance
    12. There are More Weber-Effects
    13. Herbal and Traditional Medicines, Now and Future
    14. The Concept of 'Health'
    15. Impact of Referral Procedures on the Interaction of RMP and PSUR
    16. Other Sources of Information for Monitoring Drug Safety: Now and in the Future
    17. Ecopharmacovigilance.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Edoardo Spina, Gianluca Trifirò, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction: History of pharmacovigilance in psychiatry
    2. Adverse drug reactions: definition and pathogenesis
    3. Methodologies for pharmacovigilance monitoring of psychotropic drugs
    4. The role of prescription event monitoring in pharmacovigilance of psychotropic drugs
    5. The role of healthcare databases in pharmacovigilance of psychotropic drugs
    6. Monitoring of plasma concentrations of psychotropic drugs in pharmacovigilance
    7. The role of pharmacogenetics in pharmacovigilance of psychotropic drugs
    8. Safety and tolerability of antidepressants
    9. Safety and tolerability of antipsychotics
    10. Safety and tolerability of anxiolytics/sedative hypnotics
    11. Safety and tolerability of mood stabilizers
    12. Safety and tolerability of medications for ADHD
    13. Safety of psychotropic drugs in children and adolescents
    14. Safety of psychotropic drugs in the elderly(Safety of psychotropic drugs in the elderly
    15. Safety of psychotropic drugs in pregnancy and breastfeeding.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    by W. Cary Mobley.
    Contents:
    Pharmacy Calculations
    Supplemental Video Chapter --
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Ahmed Ibrahim Fathelrahmen, Mohamed Izham Mohamed Ibrahim, Alian A. Alrasheedy, Albert I. Wertheimer.
    Summary: Pharmacy Education in the Twenty First Century and Beyond: Global Achievements and Challenges offers a complete reference on global pharmacy education, along with a detailed discussion of future issues and solutions. This book begins with a brief overview of the history of pharmacy education, covering all levels of education and styles of learning, from undergraduate, continuing professional education, and methods for self-learning and development. Teaching strategies such as team-based learning, problem-based learning and interdisciplinary education are also described and compared to conclude why certain pharmacy programs attract students, and why educators prefer particular teaching strategies, assessment tools and learning styles. As a result, this book provides pharmacy educators, administrators, students and practitioners with a comprehensive guide to pharmacy education that will enable readers to choose the best approaches to improve, reform or select a program based on worldwide experience and the latest available evidence and research.

    Contents:
    Section I. Defining pharmacy education
    Section II. Pharmacy education: basic roles and contributions
    Section III. Pharmacy education: features and contributing factors
    Section IV. Special issues in pharmacy education
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    William J. Feinberg.
    Contents:
    Federal law summary
    Alabama
    Arizona
    Arkansas
    California
    Colorado
    Florida
    Georgia
    Illinois
    Indiana
    Kentucky
    Louisiana
    Maryland
    North Carolina
    NJ
    Ohio
    Oregon
    Pennsylvania
    South Carolina
    Texas
    Wisconsin.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] David P. Zgarrick, Leticia R. Moczygemba, Greg L. Alston, Shane P. Desselle.
    Summary: Addresses various aspects of pharmacy management, including people, materials, money, time, and information, applicable to practice settings. This book covers what from personal management to managing operations (business planning, quality control, managing technology), human resources management, financial management, and marketing.

    Contents:
    SECTION I: WHY STUDY MANAGEMENT IN PHARMACY SCHOOL?
    1: THE “MANAGEMENT” IN MEDICATION THERAPY MANAGEMENT
    2: MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
    3: CREATING AND MANAGING VALUE
    SECTION II: MANAGING OPERATIONS
    4: STRATEGIC PLANNING IN PHARMACY OPERATIONS
    5: BUSINESS PLANNING FOR PHARMACY PROGRAMS
    6: OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
    7: MANAGING MEDICATION USE PROCESS SUPPORTING TECHNOLOGIES AND AUTOMATION
    8: ENSURING QUALITY IN PHARMACY OPERATIONS
    9: RISK MANAGEMENT IN CONTEMPORARY PHARMACY PRACTICE
    10: PREVENTING AND MANAGING MEDICATION ERRORS: THE PHARMACIST’S ROLE
    11: COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS AND REGULATORY BODIES
    SECTION III: MANAGING PEOPLE
    12: TIME MANAGEMENT/ORGANIZATIONAL SKILLS
    13: ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE AND BEHAVIOR
    14: HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
    15: THE BASICS OF EMPLOYMENT LAW AND WORKPLACE SAFETY
    16: PERFORMANCE APPRAISAL SYSTEMS
    17: LEADERSHIP
    SECTION IV: MANAGING MONEY
    18: FINANCIAL REPORTS
    19: BUDGETING
    20: THIRD-PARTY PAYER CONSIDERATIONS
    SECTION V: MANAGING TRADITIONAL GOODS AND SERVICES
    21: MARKETING THEORY
    22: MARKETING APPLICATIONS
    23: CUSTOMER SERVICE
    24: PURCHASING AND INVENTORY MANAGEMENT
    25: MERCHANDISING
    SECTION VI: MANAGING VALUE-ADDED SERVICES
    26: VALUE-ADDED SERVICES AS A COMPONENT OF ENHANCING PHARMACISTS’ ROLES IN PUBLIC HEALTH
    27: IMPLEMENTING VALUE-ADDED PHARMACY SERVICES
    28: IMPACT OF HEALTH POLICY ON HEALTH CARE DELIVERY
    SECTION VII: MANAGEMENT APPLICATIONS IN SPECIFIC PHARMACY PRACTICE SETTINGS
    29: ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND INNOVATION
    30: APPLICATIONS IN INDEPENDENT COMMUNITY PHARMACY
    31: APPLICATIONS IN SAFETY NET CLINICS
    32: APPLICATIONS IN MANAGED AND SPECIALTY ENVIRONMENTS
    33: APPLICATIONS IN VARIED HEALTH CARE SYSTEMS.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] David P. Zgarrick, Leticia R. Moczygemba, Greg L. Alston, Shane P. Desselle.
    Summary: "The editors believed that there would be value in a comprehensive pharmacy management textbook that covered many content areas and gathered a variety of resources into one text. They also aimed to develop a text that uses "evidence-based management"; that is, material derived from the best and most contemporary primary literature, but that which at the same time focuses on the application of knowledge into skills that pharmacists will use every day"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    I. WHY STUDY MANAGEMENT IN PHARMACY SCHOOL?
    Chapter 1 The “Management” in Medication Therapy Management
    Chapter 2 Management Functions
    Chapter 3 Leadership in Pharmacy Practice
    Chapter 4 Ethical Decision-Making, Problem-Solving, and Delegating Authority
    Chapter 5 Creating and Managing Value
    II. MANAGING OPERATIONS
    Chapter 6 Strategic Planning in Pharmacy Operations
    Chapter 7 Business Planning for Pharmacy Programs
    Chapter 8 Operations Management
    Chapter 9 Managing Technology that Supports the Medication Use Process
    Chapter 10 Ensuring Quality in Pharmacy Operations
    Chapter 11 Risk Management in Contemporary Pharmacy Practice
    Chapter 12 Preventing and Managing Medication Errors: The Pharmacist’s Role
    Chapter 13 Compliance with Regulations and Regulatory Bodies
    III. MANAGING PEOPLE
    Chapter 14 Managing Yourself for Success
    Chapter 15 Negotiation Skills
    Chapter 16 Organizational Structure and Behavior
    Chapter 17 Human Resources Management Functions
    Chapter 18 The Basics of Employment Law and Workplace Safety
    Chapter 19 Pharmacy Technicians
    Chapter 20 Performance Appraisal Systems
    IV. MANAGING MONEY
    Chapter 21 Financial Reports
    Chapter 22 Budgeting
    Chapter 23 Third-Party Payer Considerations
    V. MANAGING TRADITIONAL GOODS AND SERVICES
    Chapter 24 Marketing Fundamentals
    Chapter 25 Marketing Applications
    Chapter 26 Customer Service
    Chapter 27 Supply Chain Management
    Chapter 28 Merchandising
    VI. MANAGING VALUE-ADDED SERVICES
    Chapter 29 Value-Added Services as a Component of Enhancing Pharmacists’ Roles in Public Health
    VII. MANAGEMENT APPLICATIONS IN SPECIFIC PHARMACY PRACTICE SETTINGS
    Chapter 31 Entrepreneurship and Innovation
    Chapter 32 Applications in Independent Community Pharmacy
    Index.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2020
  • Digital
    Fred G. Weissman, Jim Pinder, Mark R. Berns.
    Summary: Intends to help pharmacy students better understand the concepts of tort law and apply it to their own experiences. Focusing on the civil liabilities a pharmacist may face in real-world practice, this book describes each tort in detail, outlining the elements that must be proven for successful litigation.

    Contents:
    Introduction to tort law and its relevance to the practice of pharmacy
    "Briefing" : a tort law case
    Intentional torts encountered in pharmacy practice
    Background to negligence in pharmacy practice : elements of negligence (part I)
    Negligence (part II) : duty and breach of duty
    Negligence (part III) : causation and injury
    Negligence (part IV) : defenses
    Negligence (part V) : remedies
    Negligence (part VI) : miscellaneous categories : vicarious and premise liability
    Defamation
    Invasion of privacy and issues pertaining to confidentiality
    Intentional interference with business relations
    Fraud and negligent misrepresentation
    Products liability (part I) : general principles
    Products liability (part II) : case presentations.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2016
  • Digital
    Zaheer-Ud-Din Babar, editor.
    Contents:
    Pharmacy Practice Research- Evidence and Impact
    Research Methodologies related to pharmacy practice: An Overview
    Quantitative Methods in Pharmacy Practice Research
    Qualitative Methods in Pharmacy Practice Research
    Action Research in Pharmacy Practice
    Participatory Action Research in Pharmacy Practice
    Mixed Methods Research in Pharmacy Practice
    Applying organizational theory in Pharmacy Practice Research
    Applying pharmacoeconomic methods in community and hospital pharmacy research
    Concept Mapping and pattern matching in pharmacy practice research
    Pharmacoepidemiological approaches in healthcare
    Future of Pharmacy Practice Research
    Pharmacists' attitudes towards pharmacy practice research: a review.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Zaheer-ud-Din Babar, editor.
    Summary: The first edition of Pharmacy Practice Research Methods provided a contemporary overview of pharmacy practice research, discussing relevant theories, methodologies, models and techniques. It included chapters on a range of quantitative, qualitative, action research and mixed methods as well as management theories underpinning change in pharmacy practice. This new edition of the book is much broader and more diversified. It includes the quality improvement methods in pharmacy practice research, focusing on the key differences between high and low-income countries with regard to pharmacy practice research, as well as the main challenges faced when conducting such research - areas of significant global interest. In addition, a number of the chapters covering fast-moving fields where new methods have been developed and published have been updated. Featuring seven new topics and presenting future trends, the book also explains in detail methods used in covert and overt observations in pharmacy practice, as well as methods involved in realist research, which are important to countries seeking to produce evidence-based information in this area.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Pharmacy Practice Research: Evidence, Impact and synthesis
    Chapter 2. Qualitative Methods in Pharmacy Practice Research
    Chapter 3. Action Research in Pharmacy Practice
    Chapter 4. Quality Improvement Methods in Pharmacy Practice Research
    Chapter 5. Covert and overt observations in Pharmacy practice
    Chapter 6. Realist Research in Pharmacy Practice
    Chapter 7. Importance of Mixed Methods Research in Pharmacy Practice
    Chapter 8. Grounded theory in pharmacy practice research
    Chapter 9. Pharmacoepidemiology and Pharmacoepidemiological research
    Chapter 10. Randomized Control Trials and pharmacy practice research
    Chapter 11. Information sources for pharmacy practice researchers
    Chapter 12. Systematic reviews and meta analysis in pharmacy practice research
    Chapter. 13. The future of pharmacy practice research.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Vasudha Gupta, PharmD, BCACP, CDCES, Trang Nguyen, PharmD, BCACP, Mickayla Clark, PharmD, BCPS, Evan Williams, PharmD, MBA, BCPS, BCACP, Catherine Cone, PharmD, BCPS, Shane P. Desselle, RPh, PhD, FAPhA.
    Summary: "This book provides 33 chapters, each representing one or more active learning exercises in various topic areas that faculty can use to enhance didactic and experiential education and that students can employ to apply their knowledge and improve their learning"--Preface

    Contents:
    Patient Interview and Presentation
    Utilizing SCHOLARMAC to provide-self care recommendations
    Motivational interviewing and health coaching
    Patient interviewing and medication reconciliation
    Introductory SOAP
    Comprehensive Community-Based SOAP Note
    SOAP Note and MTM
    Advanced SOAP
    Relationship-Centered Communication & Top 200 counseling
    Discharge counseling
    Dispensing Error Patient Counseling
    Counseling difficult patients
    Transgender & gender non-conforming patient communication
    Cultural Awareness during medication consultations
    Addressing Empathy
    Transference and countertransference
    Strengthening Teams through conflict management
    Communication with resistant provider
    Building interprofessional teamwork
    Interprofessional roles and responsibilities
    Hospital errors and omissions
    Red flags and fraudulent prescriptions
    Intravenous (IV) product verification
    Prescription drug coverage
    Sterile IV Compounding
    Reconstitution
    Vaccine administration
    Introduction to physical assessment
    Formulary review
    DI Questions and communicating with HCPs
    Introduction to journal article evaluation
    Advanced journal club
    formulary management
    Debates of controversial therapeutic topics
    Strengths-based leadership and escape room.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2021
  • Digital
    Ruth E. Nemire, BSPh, PharmD, EdD, Associate Executive Vice President, American Association of Colleges of Pharmacy, Alexandria, Virginia, Karen L. Kier, PhD, MSc, RPh, BCPS, BCACP, Professor of Clinical Pharmacy, Director of Assessment, Preventive Care Specialist, ONU Healthwise, Raabe College of Pharmacy, Ohio Northern University, Ada, Ohio, Michelle Assa-Eley, PhD, RPh, Princeton, New Jersey.
    Summary: Suitable for those who want to excel in pharmacy practice courses, this book offers a combination of calculations, kinetics, drug information, medical terminology, and laboratory data book that helps you to organize case information, improve problem-solving skills, learn terminology, and impress faculty during rounds.

    Contents:
    First practice course expectations / Elizabeth Frenzel Shepherd
    Ethics in pharmacy practice / Nancy S. Collins
    Pharmacy as a community-based profession / Kevin R. Kearney
    Communication : an overview / Michelle T. Assa-Eley, Ceressa T. Ward
    Rounding, documentation, and patient education / Jacquelyn L. Bainbridge, Caleb Y. Oh
    Monitoring drug therapy / Chasity M. Shelton, Kelly C. Rogers
    Legal implications for pharmacy : regulatory agencies with pharmacy oversight, legal requirements for filling a prescription and political advocacy / Dean L. Arneson, Harold Bobrow, Loretta Brickman
    A brief look at the construction of medical terminology and common definitions of words that are part of the pharmacy vernacular / Ruth E. Nemire, Karen L. Kier
    Pharmacy calculations / A. Timothy Eley
    Physical assessment skills / Cristina E. Bello-Quintero, Rachel H. Bardowell
    Interpretation of clinical laboratory data / Karen Whalen, Nancy Borja-Hart
    Designing patient treatment plans : pharmacokinetic foundations / Sandra B. Earle
    Drug information and drug literature evaluation / Karen L. Kier
    Community/ambulatory care / Maria Maniscalco-Feichtl, Karen L. Whalen
    Institutional pharmacy practice / Stephanie D. Garrett, Antonia Zapantis
    Managed care / Sherry Clayton, Karen Martin, Kathryn Shalek
    Public health / Stuart Feldman, Ruth E. Nemire
    Taking it to the streets : reducing health disparities through domestic and global outreach to the undeserved / Kelly L. Scolaro, Lisa Inge Stewart, Hazel H. Seaba.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2015
  • Print
    Frank S. David, Seth Robey, Andrew Matthews.
    Contents:
    Preparing to build a biotech financial model
    Income. Addressable patient population
    Adherence and compliance
    Pricing
    Market share
    Launch curves
    Loss of exclusivity
    Expenses. Costs of goods sold
    Sales, general, and administrative
    Sales force
    Marketing
    R&D
    Regulatory
    Valuation. R&D and regulatory probability of success
    Discount rate.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    BioSciences Career Center Collection (Duck Room)
    Bus & Mgt 101
    1
  • Digital
    Timothy A. Yap, Jordi Rodon, David S. Hong, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a detailed review of how oncology drug development has changed over the past decade, and serves as a comprehensive guide for the practicalities in setting up phase I trials. The book covers strategies to accelerate the development of novel antitumor compounds from the laboratory to clinical trials and beyond through the use of innovative mechanism-of-action pharmacodynamic biomarkers and pharmacokinetic studies. The reader will learn about all aspects of modern phase I trial designs, including the incorporation of precision medicine strategies, and approaches for rational patient allocation to novel anticancer therapies. Circulating biomarkers to assess mechanisms of response and resistance are changing the way we are assessing patient selection and are also covered in this book. The development of the different classes of antitumor agents are discussed, including chemotherapy, molecularly targeted agents, immunotherapies and also radiotherapy. The authors also discuss the lessons that the oncology field has learnt from the development of hematology-oncology drugs and how such strategies can be carried over into therapies for solid tumors. There is a dedicated chapter that covers the specialized statistical approaches necessary for phase I trial designs, including novel Bayesian strategies for dose escalation. This volume is designed to help clinicians better understand phase I clinical trials, but would also be of use to translational researchers (MDs and PhDs), and drug developers from academia and industry interested in cancer drug development. It could also be of use to phase I trial study coordinators, oncology nurses and advanced practice providers. Other health professionals interested in the treatment of cancer will also find this book of great value.

    Contents:
    Paradigm shift in oncology drug development
    Practicalities in setting up phase I trials
    Optimizing the preclinical development of antitumor agents for entry into phase I trials
    Considerations for the development of novel chemotherapies in phase I trials
    Considerations for the development of novel targeted agents in phase I trials
    Development of immunotherapeutic strategies in early phase clinical trials
    Assessment of radiotherapeutic strategies in phase I trials
    Development of combinatorial strategies in phase I trials
    Novel trial designs for early phase clinical trials
    Incorporating pharmacokinetic strategies for phase I trials
    Development of pharmacodynamic biomarkers for phase I trials
    Efficacy considerations for Phase I trials
    Incorporating precision medicine into Phase I clinical trials
    Molecular profiling of patients for clinical trials
    Incorporating circulating biomarkers into clinical trials
    Statistical considerations for early phase clinical trials
    Lessons from hematology for solid tumor drug development.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Mohamed Fawzy Ramadan.
    Summary: Natural phenolics are powerful bioactive compounds, but their use as antioxidant agents in lipid-based foodstuffs and cosmetics is limited due to their hydrophilic traits. A promising technique to overcome low solubility of phenolics is to increase their hydrophobicity by grafting with lipophilic moiety to form lipid-enriched phenolics (lipo-phenolics). Another way to enhance the amphiphilic traits of phenolics is by lipophilization with phospholipids in a suitable solvent to form phenolics-enriched phospholipids (pheno-phospholipids). Both functionalized phenolics (phenolipids) exhibit high bioavailability and antioxidative potential. Functional phenolics-enriched phospholipids (pheno-phospholipids) play an important role in enhancing the functional properties of both phenolic compounds and phospholipids in food for their use in nutrition and health. Phenolipids have also found applications on an industrial scale, likely due to low costs, the availability of starting material and safety. Recent advances in the field of lipophilization allow accessing molecules with high potency and targeted action covering a wide spectrum of bioactivities. Owing to their cost and availability, phenolipids find applications in niche sectors such as cosmetics and pharmaceutics as well as in the novel food. This book reports on the chemistry, preparation, and functionality of lipid-enriched phenolics (lipo-phenolics), broadening their applications in food, pharmaceuticals and cosmetics. The strategies of the lipophilization of phenolics, the effect of modification on the biological properties and potential applications of the resulting lipo-phenolics are reviewed. The text also discusses the preparation, physicochemical characteristics and functional properties of phenolipids and phytosomes, including the latest developments and their current industrial status.

    Contents:
    1. Chemistry and Functionality of Phenolipids
    2. Chemistry, Functionality, and Techno-applications of Pheno-phospholipids
    3. Chemistry and Functionality of Lipo-phenolics.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ching Yee Oliver Wong, Dafang Wu.
    Summary: This casebook details key information and findings in PET oncology imaging. PET CT has been increasingly utilized in clinical practice for diagnostic evaluation, initial staging and restaging of malignancies, and plays an important role in optimal patient care. Although F-18 fluorodeoxyglucose (FDG) is still the dominant radioactive tracer in oncology PET imaging services, a handful of new tracers have recently gained the US FDA approval, such as Ga-68 or Cu-64 DOTATATE for carcinoid/neuroendocrine tumors, and F-18 Fluciclovine (AXUMIN) and PSMA for recurrent or metastatic prostate cancers. Clinical interpretation of PET CT oncology scans is often challenging, due to the specific nature of these positron emission radioactive tracers, variable background tracer activities in different organs/tissues with normal variants, complex tumor biology, and wide-ranged treatment responses, especially with emerging and new molecular and immune therapy agents. This book serves as a hands-on casebook on how to interpret oncologic PET CT studies in clinical services with a special emphasis on phenotypic nature of oncologic imaging. Clinical cases are presented in a way that is familiar to physicians from their training in nuclear medicine services. Each case starts with key clinical information or background, followed by well-displayed PET CT images, along with pertinent questions highlighting the key findings and explanation, as well as the importance in diagnosis and clinical implications on separate pages. Clinical and imaging key findings and final impressions are highlighted throughout along with qualitative and quantitative demonstrations of phenotypic nature of modern PET imaging. Written by two nuclear medicine PET specialists with decades of first-hand clinical experience, this is an ideal guide for nuclear medicine attending physicians, diagnostic radiologists, medical and surgical oncologists, and relevant trainees.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Chapter 1: Case 1: Double Pulmonary Nodules
    1.1 Case 1: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 2: Case 2: Nodular Sclerosing Hodgkin's Lymphoma
    2.1 Case 2: Interpretation and Teaching
    2.2 Assessment of Treatment Response
    Reference
    Chapter 3: Case 3: Transformation in Non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma
    3.1 Case 3: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 4: Case 4: Metabolic Phenotypes in Different Neoplasms
    4.1 Case 4: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference Chapter 5: Case 5: Marrow Involvement in Non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma
    5.1 Case 5: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 6: Case 6: Hip Pain in Lymphoma
    6.1 Case 6: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 7: Case 7: Prostate Cancer-Specific PET Agent with Rising PSA
    7.1 Case 7: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 8: Case 8: Brain Tumor Evaluation
    8.1 Case 8: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 9: Case 9: Metabolic Phenotype in a Slowly Growing Lung Cancer
    9.1 Case 9: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference Chapter 10: Case 10: Metabolic Phenotype in Lung Metastasis from Colon Cancer
    10.1 Case 10: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 11: Case 11: PET and Bone Scans in Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer
    11.1 Case 11: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 12: Case 12: Neuroendocrine Cancer of the Ileum
    12.1 Case 12: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 13: Case 13: Coexisting Different PET Tumor Phenotypes
    13.1 Case 13: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 14: Case 14: COVID-19 Vaccination and Lung Nodules 14.1 Case 14: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 16: Case 16: Breast and Ovarian Uptake
    16.1 Case 16: Interpretation and Teaching
    References
    Chapter 17: Case 17: Rising PSA in Radical Prostatectomy for Prostate Cancer
    17.1 Case 17: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 18: Case 18: Concurrent Lung and Brain Metastatic Cancer
    18.1 Case 18: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 19: Case 19: Tumor Phenotypes in Metastatic Prostate Cancer
    19.1 Case 19: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference Chapter 20: Case 20: Metastatic Recurrent Melanoma
    20.1 Case 20: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 21: Case 21: Post-prostatectomy for Prostate Cancer with Rising PSA
    21.1 Case 21: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 22: Case 22: Left Adrenal Mass
    22.1 Case 22: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 23: Case 23: Cutaneous T-Cell Lymphoma
    23.1 Case 23: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 24: Case 24: Active Myeloma Versus Schmorl's Node
    24.1 Case 24: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Samir S. Shah, Lisa B. Zaoutis, Marina Catallozzi, Gary Frank.
    Contents:
    1. Adolescent Medicine
    2. Allergy and Asthma
    3. Analgesia and Sedation
    4. Calculations
    5. Cardiology
    6. Dermatology
    7. Emergency Medicine
    8. Endocrinology
    9. Fluids and Electrolytes
    10. Gastroenterology
    11. Genetics
    12. Hematology
    13. Human Immunodeficiency Virus Infection
    14. Immunology
    15. Infectious Diseases
    16. Metabolism
    17. Neonatology
    18. Nephrology
    19. Neurology
    20. Nutrition
    21. Oncology
    22. Ophthalmology
    23. Orthopedics
    24. Otolaryngology
    25. Procedures
    26. Psychiatry
    27. Pulmonology
    28. Rheumatology
    29. Surgery
    30. Toxicology.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Samir S. Shah, Jeanine C. Ronan, Marina Catallozzi, Gary Frank.
    Summary: "Focusing specifically on caring for pediatric patients in the hospital setting, this unique handbook addresses more than 350 of the most commonly encountered inpatient pediatric medical conditions. Unlike similar handbooks on the subject, The Philadelphia Guide goes beyond diagnostic strategies to include complete treatment and management guidelines"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2021
  • Digital
    Chiayi Shen, H. Ralph Rawls, Josephine F. Esquivel-Upshaw.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Kenneth S. Kendler and Josef Parnas.
    Summary: The revisions of both DSM-IV and ICD-10 have again focused the interest of the field of psychiatry and clinical psychology on the questions of nosology. This book reviews issues within psychiatric nosology from clinical, historical and particularly philosophical perspectives. It brings together an interdisciplinary group of distinguished authors.

    Contents:
    Part I. Nature of psychiatric illness
    Part II. Reification, epidemics, and individual symptoms
    Part III. Epistemic iteration
    Part IV. Descriptive to etiologic and living document.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Engelhardt, H. Tristram; Spicker, Stuart F.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Philosophy and medicine to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    Marta Bertolaso.
    Summary: Since the 1970s, the origin of cancer is being explored from the point of view of the Somatic Mutation Theory (SMT), focusing on genetic mutations and clonal expansion of somatic cells. As cancer research expanded in several directions, the dominant focus on cells remained steady, but the classes of genes and the kinds of extra-genetic factors that were shown to have causal relevance in the onset of cancer multiplied. The wild heterogeneity of cancer-related mutations and phenotypes, along with the increasing complication of models, led to an oscillation between the hectic search of the few key factors that cause cancer and the discouragement in face of a seeming endless complexity . To tame this complexity, cancer research started to avail itself of the tools that were being developed by Systems Biology. At the same time, anti-reductionist voices began claiming that cancer research was stuck in a sterile research paradigm. This alternative discourse even gave birth to an alternative theory: the Tissue Organization Field Theory (TOFT). A deeper philosophical analysis shows limits and possibilities of reductionist and anti-reductionist positions and of their polarization. This book demonstrates that a radical philosophical reflection is necessary to drive cancer research out of its impasses. At the very least, this will be a reflection on the assumptions of different kinds of cancer research, on the implications of what cancer research has been discovering over 40 years and more, on a view of scientific practice that is most able to make sense of the cognitive and social conflicts that are seen in the scientific community (and in its results), and, finally, on the nature of living entities with which we entertain this fascinating epistemological dance that we call scientific research. The proposed Dynamic and Relational View of carcinogenesis is a starting point in all these directions."

    Contents:
    Cancer Biology
    The Evolution of Explanatory Models of Cancer
    The Systemic Approach to Cancer: Models and Epistemology
    The Tissue Organization Field Theory and the Anti-reductionist Campaign
    Towards a Relational Ontology for Cancer
    On Biological Explanations
    Complementary issues of a relational view of biological determination
    Conclusion: beyond dichotomies.
  • Digital
    edited by Kostas Kampourakis, Université de Genève, Tobias Uller, Lund University.
    Summary: "Biologists rely on theories, apply models and construct explanations, but rarely reflect on their nature and structure. This book introduces key topics in philosophy of science to provide the required philosophical background for this kind of reflection, which is an important part of all aspects of research and communication in biology. It concisely and accessibly addresses fundamental questions such as: Why should biologists care about philosophy of science? How do concepts contribute to scientific advancement? What is the nature of scientific controversies in the biological sciences? Chapters draw on contemporary examples and case studies from across biology, making the discussion relevant and insightful. Written for researchers and advanced undergraduate and graduate students across the life sciences, its aim is to encourage readers to become more philosophically minded and informed to enable better scientific practice. It is also an interesting and pertinent read for philosophers of science"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Eric Mowatt-Larssen [and others], editors.
    Summary: The management of venous pathology has been revolutionized by technological advancements. Venous disease is now managed with a wide variety of techniques that collectively allow physicians to diagnose and treat venous problems in ways that few surgeons would have anticipated even a decade ago. Techniques include laser ablation, radiofrequency ablation, chemical ablation (sclerotherapy), high ligation with or without stripping, ambulatory phlebectomy, powered phlebectomy, subfascial endoscopic perforator surgery, three-dimensional venography, and intravascular ultrasound. All of these topics are covered in this comprehensive, up-to-date textbook, which guides the practitioner through every aspect of care of the venous patient and includes essential background information on anatomy and pathophysiology. This book is exceptional in that it is based entirely on the curriculum designed for board certification by the American College of Phlebology (ACP). A further unique aspect of the text is the integration of ultrasound and various other imaging modalities, that play a fundamental role in diagnosis and management. The authors come from a wide range of specialties, mirroring the diversity of practitioners who care for patients with venous disease. The book will accordingly serve the needs of vascular and general surgeons, interventional radiologists, phlebologists, nurses, ultrasonographers, allied health professionals, and scientists, as well as American College of Phlebology fellowship candidates and those preparing for board examinations in vascular surgery.

    Contents:
    Basic Sciences: Anatomy
    Pathophysiology of Reflux.-Presentation of Chronic Venous Disease.-Reflux Management. Vein Testing: Ultrasound Physics.-Ultrasound For Reflux.-Ultrasound For Phlebology Procedures.-Physiologic Testing
    Conventional and Cross-Sectional Venography. Superficial Vein Therapy
    Endovenous Thermal Ablation
    Chemical Superficial Vein Ablation
    Surgical Techniques
    Transcutaneous Laser Vein Ablation. Non-Superficial Veins: Perforator Veins
    Upper Deep Vein Disease
    Lower Deep Vein Disease
    Low Flow Vascular Malformations. Thrombosis: Ultrasound for Thrombosis
    Superficial Venous Thrombophlebitis
    Deep Vein Thrombosis
    Anticoagulation for Venous Thromboembolism
    Thrombophilias. Special Topics: Lymphedema
    Venous Leg Ulcers
    Biostatistics
    Vein Anesthesia.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    Pilch, Herbert.
    Access via Bibliotheca phonetica ; 1964; 1
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    1964.
    SHELVED AS A PERIODICAL UNDER: Bibliotheca phonetica ; no. 1.
  • Digital
    Antoinette am Zehnhoff-Dinnesen, Bozena Wiskirska-Woznica, Katrin Neumann, Tadeus Nawka, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Karen N. Allen.
    Summary: High-energy phosphate ester bonds are often thought of as the energetic currency of the cell. Phosphoryl transfer is involved in processes ranging from the biosynthesis and catabolism of carbohydrates and polysaccharides, nucleic acids, and cofactors, to the regulation if cellular pathways. In addition, Phosphoryl groups on small-molecule metabolites confer important properties - providing excellent "handles" for enzyme bonding, trapping metabolic intermediates within the cell, and controlling the reversibility of metabolic pathways. The phosphorylation states of proteins also afford key control points for signal transduction and the regulation of myriad critical physiological processes. For this reason, kinases are extremely important therapeutic targets and there is significant interest in developing diverse approaches to regulate their function through small-molecule inhibitors. We present here the less studied but equally important complement of phosphate ester chemistry, namely the coordinated action of phosphatases. Phosphatases represent control points in pathways and new opportunities for use in chemoenzymatic synthesis. In many cases, such critical players may be functionally unannotated. However, there are many challenges in their study - spurring on the efforts described in this volume ... This volume of Methods in Enzymology on phosphatases which draws upon approaches from the varied disciplines of computational and organic chemistry, biophysics, biochemistry, bioinformatics, and cell biology to address the structure, mechanism, and regulation of phosphatases."--Preface.

    Contents:
    Empirical Valence Bond Simulations of Organophosphate Hydrolysis: Theory and Practice / Miha Purg and Shina Caroline Lynn Kamerlin
    Analysis of Phosphoryl-Transfer Enzymes With QM/MM Free Energy Simulations / Daniel Roston, Xiya Lu, Dong Fang, Darren Demapan and Qiang Cui
    Defining Dynamics of Membrane-Bound Pyrophosphatases by Experimental and Computational Single-Molecule FRET / Steven P.D. Harborne, Jannik Strauss, Ainoleena Turku, Matthew A. Watson, Roman Tuma, Sarah A. Harris and Adrian Goldman
    A Simple Strategy to Determine the Dependence of Membrane-Bound Pyrophosphatases on K+ as a Cofactor / Jannik Strauss, Craig Wilkinson, Keni Vidilaseris, Steven P.D. Harborne and Adrian Goldman
    Crystallization of Liganded Phosphatases in the HAD Superfamily / Christine Harvey, Katherine H. O'Toole and Karen N. Allen
    Structure, Mechanism, and Substrate Profiles of the Trinuclear Metallophosphatases From the Amidohydrolase Superfamily / Swapnil V. Ghodge and Frank M. Raushel
    Affinities and Comparisons of Enzyme States by Principal Component Analysis of NMR Spectra, Automated Using TREND Software / Jia Xu and Steven R. Van Doren
    Assessment and Impacts of Phosphorylation on Protein Flexibility of the [alpha]-D-Phosphohexomutases / Kyle M. Stiers and Lesa J. Beamer
    Chemical Tools for Studying the Impact of cis/trans Prolyl Isomerization on Signaling: A Case Study on RNA Polymerase II Phosphatase Activity and Specificity / Nathaniel Tate Burkholder, Brenda Medellin, Seema Irani, Wendy Matthews, Scott A. Showalter and Yan Jessie Zhang
    Quantitative Analysis of Intracellular Response Regulator Phosphatase Activity of Histidine Kinases / Rong Gao and Ann M. Stock
    Measuring the Activities of Two-Component Regulatory System Phosphatases / Robert B. Bourret and Ruth E. Silversmith
    Assembly of PGAM5 Into Multimeric Complexes Provides a Mechanism for Allosteric Regulation of Phosphatase Activity / Peter Tipton, Tong Su and Mark Hannink
    Purification of Lipin and Measurement of Phosphatidic Acid Phosphatase Activity From Liposomes / Mitchell E. Granade and Thurl E. Harris
    Combining SAMDI Mass Spectrometry and Peptide Arrays to Profile Phosphatase Activities / Lindsey C. Szymczak, Che-Fan Huang, Eric J. Berns and Milan Mrksich
    Protein Chemical Approaches to Understanding PTEN Lipid Phosphatase Regulation / Daniel R. Dempsey and Philip A. Cole.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Mohammed S. Razzaque, editor.
    Summary: This contributed volume discusses the most important physiological aspects of phosphate metabolism, and how its pathological dysregulation can induce organ damage, which includes but is not limited to blood vessels, kidney, bone and tumor. The editor has selected a varied group of world renowned experts to provide a basic understanding of normal phosphate regulation, to then move on to explain the complex molecular mechanisms of abnormal phosphate regulation, also shedding some light on the downstream clinical consequences owing to phosphate toxicity. Each chapter clearly presents the biochemically important problems related to phosphate dysregulation with the necessary illustrations. Readers will be able to use the proposed book as a quick reference for updated information on phosphate metabolism, ranging from cellular system to physiology, from pathology to toxicity, also including the associated clinical consequences, without much prior acquaintance with the field.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Chapter 1. Phosphate Metabolism: from Physiology to Toxicity (Mohammed S. Razzaque)
    Chapter 2. Phosphate Burden and Inflammation (Sarah Erem , Satoko Osuka and Mohammed S. Razzaque)
    Chapter 3. Extracellular Phosphate, Inflammation and Cytotoxicity (Toshimi Michigami, Miwa Yamazaki, Mohammed S. Razzaque)
    Chapter 4. Phosphate-sensing (Yuichi Takashi and Seiji Fukumoto)
    Chapter 5. Vitamin D and phosphate interactions in health and disease (Nuraly S. Akimbekov, Ilya Digel, Dinara K. Sherelkhan, Mohammed S. Razzaque)
    Chapter 6. Fibroblast growth factor 23 as regulator of vitamin D metabolism (Shinya Nakatani; Ayumi Nakatani, Katsuhito Mori, Masanori Emoto; Masaaki Inaba; and Mohammed S. Razzaque)
    Chapter 7. Phosphate and Cellular Senescence (Ming Chang Hu and Orson W. Moe)
    Chapter 8. Phosphate toxicity and epithelial to mesenchymal transition (EMT) (Eric Lewis, Faith Seltun, Mohammed S. Razzaque, Ping He)
    Chapter 9. Phosphate & endothelial function: How sensing of elevated inorganic phosphate concentration generates signals in endothelial cells (Nima Abbasian, Alan Bevington and Dylan Burger)
    Chapter 10. Common dietary sources of natural and artificial phosphate in food (Ken-ichi Miyamoto, Joanna Oh, Mohammed S. Razzaque)
    Chapter 11. Phosphate is a Cardiovascular Toxin (Maren Leifheit-Nestler, Isabel Vogt, Dieter Haffner and Beatrice Richter)
    Chapter 12. Coordination of Phosphate and Magnesium Metabolism in Bacteria (Roberto E. Bruna, Christopher G. Kendra and Mauricio H. Pontes)
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Louise von Stechow.
    Contents:
    Thiol-ene-enabled detection of thiophosphorylation as a labeling strategy for phosphoproteins / Kaelyn E. Wilke and Erin E. Carlson
    Phosphopeptide detection with biotin-labeled phos-tag / Emiko Kinoshita-Kikuta, Eiji Kinoshita, and Tohru Koike
    Phosphopeptide enrichment by covalent chromatography after solid phase derivatization of protein digests on reversed phase supports / Heinz Nika, Ruth Hogue Angeletti, and David H. Hawke
    Peptide labeling using isobaric tagging reagents for quantitative phosphoproteomics / Lei Cheng ... [et al.]
    Identification of direct kinase substrates using analogue-sensitive alleles / Daniel A. Rothenberg ... [et al.]
    Quantitative analysis of tissue samples by combining iTRAQ isobaric labeling with selected/multiple reaction monitoring (SRM/MRM) / Ryohei Narumi and Takeshi Tomonaga
    Enrichment strategies in phosphoproteomics / Alexander Leitner
    Phosphopeptide enrichment by immobilized metal affinity chromatography / Tine E. Thingholm and Martin R. Larsen
    Use of titanium dioxide for selective enrichment of phosphorylated peptides / Tine E. Thingholm and Martin R. Larsen
    Sequential elution from IMAC (SIMAC) : an efficient method for enrichment and separation of monoand multi-phosphorylated peptides / Tine E. Thingholm and Martin R. Larsen
    Improving the phosphoproteome coverage for limited sample amounts using TiO2-SIMAC-HILIC (TiSH) phosphopeptide enrichment and fractionation / Kasper Engholm-Keller and Martin R. Larsen
    Offline high pH reversed-phase peptide fractionation for deep phosphoproteome coverage / Tanveer S. Batth and Jesper V. Olsen
    Phosphopeptide enrichment using various magnetic nanocomposites : an overview / Íris L. Batalha and Ana Cecília A. Roque
    Two dimensional gel electrophoresis-based plant phosphoproteomics / Chao Han and Pingfang Yang
    Variable digestion strategies for phosphoproteomics analysis / Humberto Gonczarowska-Jorge ... [et al.]
    Online LC-FAIMS-MS/MS for the analysis of phosphorylation in proteins / Hongyan Zhao, Andrew J. Creese, and Helen J. Cooper
    Simple and reproducible sample preparation for single-shot phosphoproteomics with high sensitivity / Rosa R. Jersie-Christensen, Abida Sultan, and Jesper V. Olsen
    Identification of direct kinase substrates via kinase assay-linked phosphoproteomics / Liang Xue, Justine V. Arrington, and W. Andy Tao
    Phosphoprotein detection by high-throughput flow cytometry / Johannes Landskron and Kjetil Taskén
    Resources for assignment of phosphorylation sites on peptides and proteins / Vaishnavi Ravikumar, Boris Macek, and Ivan Mijakovic
    From phosphosites to kinases / Stephanie Munk ... [et al.]
    Search databases and statistics : pitfalls and best practices in phosphoproteomics / Jan C. Refsgaard, Stephanie Munk, and Lars J. Jensen
    Systems analysis for interpretation of phosphoproteomics data / Stephanie Munk, Jan C. Refsgaard, and Jesper V. Olsen.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Spiros Liras and Andrew S. Bell.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Christian Rommel, Bart Vanhaesebroeck, Peter K. Vogt, editors.
    Contents:
    Vol. 1 / (ix, 306 p.)
    v. 2. / (x, 301 p.).
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Springer
  • Digital
    Paramjit S. Tappia, Naranjan S. Dhalla, editors.
    Summary: Phospholipases generate lipid signaling molecules through their hydrolytic action on phospholipids and are known to regulate function of a variety of cells under normal and diseased conditions. While several physiological, biochemical and molecular techniques have identified key players involved in different disease processes, phospholipases have also emerged as critical players in the pathogenesis of a number of different diseases including cancer and heart disease. In addition, phospholipases are also implicated in such conditions as brain disorder/injury, kidney and immune cell dysfunction. Phospholipases in Health and Disease is a compilation of review articles dedicated to the study of the field with respect to biochemical and molecular mechanisms of normal and abnormal cell function. The wide range of area covered here is of interest to basic research scientists, clinicians and graduate students, who are engaged in studying pathophysiological basis of a variety of diseases. Furthermore, this book highlights the potential of the different phospholipases as therapeutic targets as well as part of prevention strategies. Twenty three articles in this book are organized in four sections that are designed to emphasize the most characterized forms of the phospholipases in mammalian cells. The first section discusses general aspect of phospholipases. Section two covers the role and function of phospholipase A in different pathophysiological conditions. The third section is focussed on phospholipase C which is believed to play a central role in transmembrane signaling. The final section covers phospholipase D which is present in a variety of different cells. The book illustrates that the activation of phospholipases is of fundamental importance in signal transduction affecting cell function. Overall, this book discusses the diverse mechanisms of phospholipase mediated signal transduction in different pathophysiological conditions and raises the possibility of specific forms of phospholipases serving as novel targets for drug development.

    Contents:
    Phospholipases in Health and Disease
    Role of Phospholipases in Regulation of Cardiolipin Biosynthesis and Remodelling in the Heart and Mammalian Cells
    Role of Phospholipases and Oxidized Phospholipids in Inflammation
    Phospholipases in Cardiovascular Disease
    The Structures and Functions of Intracellular Phospholipase A1 Family Proteins
    Phospholipase A and Breast Cancer
    Pathophysiological Aspects of Lipoprotein Associated Phospholipase A2: A Brief Overview
    Phospholipase A2 Activity Exhibited by a Bacterial Virulence Protein that Enters and Operates within a Variety of Host Cells
    Expression and Role of Phospholipase A2 in Central Nervous System Injury and Disease
    Cytoplasmic Phospholipase A2 and Autotaxin Inhibitors as Potential Radiosensitizers
    Phospholipase A2 Enzymes: Potential Targets for Therapy
    The Role of Phospholipase C Isozymes in Cellular Homeostasis
    Phospholipase C in the Immune Cell
    Phosphoinositide-specific Phospholipase C Enzymes and Cognitive Development ?and Decline
    Where life begins: Sperm PLCz in mammalian egg activation and implications in male infertility
    Oocyte Activation and Phospholipase C zeta (PLC?): Male Infertility and ?Implications for Therapeutic Intervention
    Phospholipase C Signaling in Heart Disease
    Activation of Phospholipase C in Cardiac Hypertrophy
    The Protective Effect of Phospholipase C From Cardiac Ischemia-Reperfusion Injury
    Role of Phospholipase C in Cardioprotection During Oxidative Stress
    Mammalian Phospholipase D: Structure, Regulation and Physiological Functions of Phospholipase D and its Link to Pathology
    Emerging Roles of Phospholipase D in Pathophysiological Signaling
    Alterations in Phospholipase D During the Development of Myocardial Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    editors, Lloyd A. Horrocks, G. Brian Ansell, Giuseppe Porcellati.
    Contents:

    v. 1. Metabolism.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP752.P53 P48
    1
  • Digital
    Ratan Singh Ray [and 4 others], editors.
    Summary: This book highlights the problem of UV-R-induced photocarcinogenesis and its molecular mechanism. It covers different photosensitive xenobiotics (drugs, cosmetics, and environmental pollutants) and their photosensitization mechanisms under ambient UV-R exposure. It also summarizes the role of nanotechnology in skin cancer remedies. It provides a brief overview of the various novel nanocarriers for cosmeceuticals like nanoemulsions, liposomes, solid lipid nanoparticles (SLNs), dendrimers, inorganic nanoparticles, nanocrystals, etc., nanotechnology-based cosmeceutical products which are available in the market. It highlights the possible health hazards caused by nanoparticles on exposure of nano-based cosmetics and describes the recent regulatory rules applied to avoid the nanotoxicity.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Acknowledgments; Contents; Contributors; About the Editors; Abbreviations;
    1: Ultraviolet Radiation (UVR): An Introduction; 1.1 Introduction; 1.1.1 Electromagnetic Radiation (EMR); 1.1.2 Nature of Ultraviolet Radiation; 1.1.3 UV Regions of Solar Spectrum; 1.1.4 Nomenclature and Units; 1.1.5 Minimum Erythemal Dose; 1.1.6 Standard Erythemal Dose; 1.1.7 UV Index; 1.1.8 Sources and Exposure of Solar UVR; 1.2 Ozone Depletion; 1.2.1 Production of O3 in Upper Atmosphere; 1.2.2 Consequences of O3 Depletion; 1.2.3 Detection of UVR; 1.3 Conclusion; References
    2: UVR-Induced Epigenetic Regulation and Photocarcinogenesis2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Mechanisms of Epigenetic Modification; 2.2.1 DNA Methylation; 2.3 Histone Modifications; 2.4 Noncoding RNAs in Skin Cancer; 2.5 Conclusion; References;
    3: Molecular and Genetic Response of Human Skin Under Ultraviolet Radiation; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Effects of Ultraviolet Radiation on Skin; 3.2.1 Ultraviolet Radiation and Vitamin D Synthesis in Skin; 3.2.2 Ultraviolet Radiation and Skin Pigmentation; 3.2.2.1 Molecular Mechanisms of Tanning; 3.3 Genetic Responses to UV Radiation 3.4 Photoproduct Formation3.5 UV and DNA Repair Systems; 3.6 DNA Damage and UV Radiation; 3.6.1 Genes Under UV Threat; 3.6.1.1 Tumor Suppressor Gene p53; 3.6.1.2 PTCH Tumor Suppressor Gene; 3.6.1.3 Ras Proto-Oncogenes; 3.6.1.4 Other Genes; 3.7 Conclusion; References;
    4: Photocarcinogenesis and Molecular Mechanism; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Types of Skin Cancer; 4.3 Mechanisms Involved in UVR-Induced Carcinogenesis; 4.3.1 ROS and DNA Damage; 4.3.2 Molecular Mechanisms; 4.3.3 Tumor Suppressor Genes (TSGs); 4.3.4 Oncogenes; 4.3.5 Other Molecules; 4.3.6 Signal Transduction Pathways 4.3.7 Mitochondrial DNA Damage4.3.8 Inflammation Cascade; 4.3.9 Immunosuppression; 4.3.10 Extracellular Remodeling: Network of Collagen, Elastin, and Matrix Metalloproteinases; 4.4 Treatment for Skin Cancer; 4.5 Photoprotection; 4.6 Photoprotective Agents; 4.7 Conclusion; References;
    5: Immunomodulation and Photocarcinogenesis; 5.1 The Immune System of Skin; 5.2 UVR-Induced Immunomodulation; 5.3 UVR-Induced Immunosuppression; 5.4 Mechanism of UVR-Mediated Immunomodulation; 5.5 Skin Cancer Immunotherapy; References;
    6: Epidemiological Aspects of Photocarcinogenesis 6.1 Introduction6.2 Basal Cell Carcinoma; 6.3 Squamous Cell Carcinoma; 6.4 Cutaneous Melanoma; 6.5 Geographical Variation in UV Radiation; 6.6 Geographical Variation of Skin Pigmentation; 6.7 Geographical Variation of Photocarcinogenesis; 6.7.1 Ethnic Origin; 6.7.2 Place of Residence; 6.8 Factors Responsible for Photocarcinogenesis; 6.8.1 Occupational Exposure; 6.8.2 Anatomic Site; 6.8.3 Total Lifetime Exposure; 6.8.4 Ambient Sunlight Exposure; 6.8.5 Safety Guidelines; 6.9 Conclusion; References;
    7: Photoaging; 7.1 Introduction
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Johannes W. Rohen, Chihiro Yokochi, Elke Lütjen-Drecoll.
    Summary: Photographic Atlas of Anatomy features outstanding full-colour photographs of actual cadaver dissections, with accompanying schematic drawings and diagnostic images, to help students develop an unparalleled mastery of human anatomy with ease. Depicting anatomic structures more realistically than illustrations in traditional atlases, this proven resource shows students exactly what they will see in the dissection lab. Chapters are organised by region in the order of a typical dissection, with each chapter presenting regional anatomical structures in a systematic manner. This updated ninth edition includes revised content throughout and features additional cadaver dissection photos, medical imaging, and clinical illustrations, as well as a new appendix with learning resources that strengthen students' understanding of the vascular, lymphatic, muscular, and nervous systems.

    Contents:
    1. General anatomy
    2. Trunk
    3. Upper limb
    4. Lower limb
    5. Thoracic organs
    6. Abdominal organs
    7. Retroperitoneal organs
    8. Head and neck
    9. Brain and sensory organs.
  • Digital
    James W.H. Sonne, PhD.
    Summary: "Photographic Dissector for Students of Physical Therapy: A Step-by-Step Approach is designed to facilitate a mixed approach to cadaveric human dissection for students of physical therapy. This Dissector has been specifically modelled to follow the curriculum of Doctor of Physical Therapy programs, which often includes simultaneous courses in kinesiology and physiology. This dissection sequence benefits from, but does not require, concurrent study of kinesiology with musculoskeletal dissection, and physiology with the central nervous system and visceral dissections. Furthermore, this Dissector features clinical descriptions common to the Doctor of Physical Therapy that bring to life the anatomical structures and that provide a meaning to the laboratory work while inspiring diagnostic thinking about structure and function. Each chapter contains a checklist of important structures, the terms in bold within the step-by-step instructions, which provides a reference for studying. Also, chapters contain licensing exam-style multiple choice questions. Answers to those questions, along with explanations and strategies for working through the questions, can be found in the back of the book"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The Back
    The Upper Limb
    The Lower Limb
    The Head and Neck
    The Brain
    The Thorax
    The Abdomen and Pelvis.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2020
  • Digital
    Paola Pasquali, editor.
    Summary: This book explains how medical photography is part of the workflow in many specialties: it is needed for registries, to preserve information, for follow up, second opinion and teaching, among others. The book gathers information on this field, providing valuable practical tips for those that have never used photography for medical uses as well as those who use it regularly. Covering specialities ranging from dermatology, plastic surgery, dentistry, ophthalmology and endoscopy to forensic medicine, specimen photography and veterinary medicine, it highlights standardization for each procedure and relevance to ethical, patients perception of medical photography, cybersecurity and legal aspects. The book also presents practical sections explaining how to organize a photographic file, coding, reimbursement, compliance, use of social media and preservation as well as in depth concepts on sharp focus on blurred vision. This volume will appeal to all clinicians and practitioners interested in acquiring a high level of technical skill in medical photography. .

    Contents:
    SECTION I: History of Medical Photography and its ancestors
    1. Medical iconographic representations in the pre-photographic era
    2. The Dermatology Photographic Ancestors
    3. History of Veterinary Illustration
    4. History of Medical Photography
    Section II: Approaching the subject
    5. Treating with patients: the photographic approach
    6. Doctors as subjects. Medical Imaging in Personal Branding
    SECTION III: Equipment and how to use it
    7. Basic equipment
    8. Basic photographic concepts
    9. Smartphone medical photography
    SECTION IV: Special Cameras
    10. 3D Photography Digital imaging software, stitching and stacking
    11. Panoptic Camera
    SECTION: V Color
    12. Understanding color
    13. Color calibration
    SECTION VI: Photography in Dermatology
    14. Standardizing images in dermatology Magnification Ratio
    15. Nail and Hair photography
    16. Digital Dermoscopy images
    17. Total Body Photography
    18. Dermatological Imaging a Survey of Techniques
    SECTION VII: Photography in other medical specialties
    19. Photography in Plastic Surgery
    20. Photography in Ophthalmology
    21. Photography in Dentistry
    22. Laboratory imaging
    23. Photography in Pathology. Photographing procedures
    24. Photo- Endoscopy
    25. Forensic Photography
    26. Veterinary Photography
    SECTION VIII: Special Settings
    27. Setting up a photographic medical studio
    28. Intraoperative photography
    SECTION IX: Photographing the invisible
    29. Beyond the visible - UV, IR and fluorescence imaging of skin
    30. Thermography
    SECTION X: After photography: whats next
    31. Storing images
    32. Metadata issues, DICOM standard
    33. Coding, reimbursement
    34. HIPPA/PHI Compliance
    35. Submitting images for publication
    36. Conservation, restauration and digitalization of medical images
    37. Imaging archives for teaching, learning & research
    SECTION XI: Ethical and Legal Aspects
    38. Ethical aspects
    39. Legal considerations
    SECTION XII: Becoming a Medical Photographer
    40. Formal training for the medical photographer
    SECTION XIII: Photography and the Web
    41. Cyber security. Medical Photography and Social Media
    SECTION XIV
    42. Deep learning performance for triage and diagnosis
    43. Philosophy in Image analysis: Fuzzy Pictures as Philosophical Problem and Scientific Practice
    44. Future of imaging
    Glossary of Terms. .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Sidney Cambridge.
    Contents:
    Photoinduced damage resulting from fluorescence imaging of live cells / Matthew K. Daddysman, Michael A. Tycon, and Christopher J. Fecko
    Modification of purified proteins with photochemical protection compounds for high-resolution photoactivation of protein function in vitro and in vivo / Sidney Cambridge
    Optochemical activation of kinase function in live cells / Andrei V. Karginov, Klaus M. Hahn, and Alexander Deiters
    Photoswitching of cell surface receptors using tethered ligands / Andreas Reiner and Ehud Y. Isacoff
    Photocontrol of AMPA receptors with a photochromic ligand / Martin Sumser and Philipp Stawski
    Photoconversion of CFP to study neuronal tissue with electron microscopy / Nina Wittenmayer
    Light-inducible gene regulation with engineered zinc finger proteins / Lauren R. Polstein and Charles A. Gersbach
    Manipulation of plasma membrane phosphoinositides using photoinduced protein-protein interactions / Olof Idevall-Hagren and Pietro DeCamilli
    Roadmap to applying optogenetics in neuroscience / Consuelo Fois, Pierre-Hugues Prouvot, and Albrecht Stroh
    Salvaging ruins : reverting blind retinas into functional visual sensors / Marion Mutter, Natalia Swietek, and Thomas A. Münch
    Photoactivated adenylyl cyclases as optogenetic modulators of neuronal activity / Wagner Steuer Costa, Jana Liewald, and Alexander Gottschalk
    Structural basis of photoswitching in fluorescent proteins / Chenxi Duan ... [et al.]
    Using photoactivatable GFP to track axonal transport kinetics / Archan Ganguly and Subhojit Roy
    In vivo cell tracking using PhOTO zebrafish / William P. Dempsey, Hanyu Qin, and Periklis Pantazis
    In vivo optogenetics for light-induced oxidative stress in transgenic zebrafish expressing the killerred photosensitizer protein / Cathleen Teh and Vladimir Korzh
    Photoactivatable fluorescent proteins for super-resolution microscopy / Yuji Ishitsuka, Karin Nienhaus, and G. Ulrich Nienhaus
    pcSOFI as a smart label-based superresolution microscopy technique / Benjamien Moeyaert and Peter Dedecker.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Anthony W.D. Larkum, Arthur R. Grossmann, John A. Raven.
    Summary: Algae, including cyanobacteria, are in the spotlight today for a number of reasons; firstly it has become abundantly clear over recent years that algae have been neglected in terms of basic research and that knowledge gap is being rapidly closed with the establishment of some surprising discoveries, such as the presence of Near-Infra-Red-Absorbing cyanobacteria and a wealth of natural products; secondly molecular approaches have provided a wealth of approaches to genetically modify algae and produce value-added products; thirdly it has become clear just how important, marine phytoplankton is to global carbon capture and the production of food globally; and fourthly, it has also become clear that algae present unparalleled opportunities to generate biofuels in a sustainable and non-polluting way. This volume presents 15 chapters by world experts on their subjects, ranging from reviews of algal diversity and genetics to in-depth reviews of special algal groups such as diatoms (which account for over 30% of marine carbon capture). Other chapters chart the ways in which this carbon capture occurs or how there are a multiplicity of ways in which algae intercept sun light and deploy this energy for carbon capture. A fascinating aspect here is the way in which sun light is harvested. A special chapter is devoted to the very recent and exciting possibility that algae use coherent light energy transformation to enhance the efficiency of light capture, an aspect of quantum physics that has implications for future developments at several levels and a variety of industries. Just how and why algae use Chlorophyll a as the major light capture pigment is discussed in several chapters. However, attention is also given to those cyanobacteria, which have been found to use the special Near-Infra Red absorbing chlorophylls mentioned above. And attention is also given to those algae that employ phycobiliproteins to fill in the "green window", i.e., the spectral region from 400 - 6 50 nm, which is not efficiently covered by chlorophyll and carotenoid pigments. Photoinhibition and photoprotection is the subject area of several chapters and one which it is essential to understand a we work towards greater efficiency of algal photosynthesis. A final chapter is devoted to understanding the molecular basis for coral bleaching, a much-neglected area that is essential in trying to come up with solutions to this very worrying phenomenon, caused by global warming and ocean acidification. This is a book for research scientists, environmentalists, planners in a range of areas including those of marine resources, nutrient control and pollution of water bodies and that growing body of concerned citizens interested in controlling carbon emissions and global warming. Special attention has been given to generating a set of articles that will be read by university students, informed laymen and all those whose wish to understand the rapid changes that have come about in our knowledge of algae over the past decade.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Introductory Chapters
    Chapter 1. Recent Advances in the Photosynthesis of Cyanobacteria and Eukaryotic
    Chapter 2. The Algal Tree of Life from a Genomics Perspective
    Part 2. Molecular Genetics Of Algae
    Chapter 3. Chlorophyll-Xanthophyll Antenna Complexes: in between Light Harvesting and Energy Dissipation
    Chapter 4. The Dynamics of the Photosynthetic Apparatus in Algae
    Chapter 5. Biosynthesis of Chlorophyll and Bilins and Assembly of the Photosynthetic Apparatus
    Part 3. Biochemistry and Physiology of Algae
    Chapter 6. Chloroplast Ion and Metabolite Transport in Algae
    Chapter 7. Structural and Biochemical Features of Carbon Acquisition in Algae
    Chapter 8. Light-Driven Oxygen Consumption in the Water-Water Cycles and Photorespiration, and Light Stimulated Mitochondrial Respiration
    Chapter 9. The Algal Pyrenoid
    Part 4. Light-Harvesting Systems in Algae
    Chapter 10. Light-Harvesting in Cyanobacteria and Eukaryotic Algae; An Overview
    Chapter 11. Light Harvesting by Long-Wavelegth Chlorophyll Forms (Red Forms) in Algae: Focus on their Presence, Distribution and Formation
    Chapter 12. Diversity in Photoprotection and Energy Balancing in Terrestrial and Aquatic Phototrophs
    Chapter 13. Photoinhibition in Algae
    Chapter 14. Modulating Energy Transfer from Phycobilisomes to Photosystems: State transitions and OCP-related Non-Photochemical Quenching
    Chapter 15. Coherent Processes in Photosynthetic Energy Transport and Transduction
    Chapter 16. Light Harvesting Complexes of Diatoms
    Fucoxanthin Chlorophyll. Proteins
    Chapter 17. Symbiodinium, Corals and Coral Bleaching.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Wei-Sheng Chong, Jiun-Yit Pan, Eugene Sern-Ting Tan.
    Summary: "Phototherapy, or the usage of light to treat diseases, is an important modality in a physician's therapeutic armamentarium. It is effective for a number of common skin conditions like atopic dermatitis, psoriasis and vitiligo. The accurate diagnosis of a photodermatosis or light-related skin disorder relies on a good clinical history and physical examination, supported by diagnostic investigations such as phototesting. Phototherapy and Photodiagnostic Methods for the Practitioner is the first published set of practical guidelines for Asian skin, drawing upon our cumulative clinical experience with phototherapy for various conditions at the National Skin Centre in Singapore, amalgamated with up-to-date evidence from the scientific literature. It is designed to serve as a concise and comprehensive reference manual for dermatologists, as well as clinicians, medical physicists and nurses with an interest in photodiagnostic investigations and phototherapy for the evaluation and treatment of skin disorders."--Publisher's website.

    Contents:
    Introduction to phototherapy
    Nursing considerations in phototherapy
    Narrowband ultraviolet B phototherapy
    Combined ultraviolet A/narrowband ultraviolet B phototherapy
    Psoralen-ultraviolet A photochemotherapy
    Ultraviolet A-1 phototherapy
    Excimer light phototherapy
    Photodynamic therapy
    Phototesting
    Photopatch testing
    Photoprovocation testing.
    Digital Access World Scientific 2017
  • Digital
    Rosa A. Scherson, Daniel P. Faith, editors.
    Summary: "Biodiversity" refers to the variety of life. It is now agreed that there is a "biodiversity crisis", corresponding to extinction rates of species that may be 1000 times what is thought to be "normal". Biodiversity science has a higher profile than ever, with the new Intergovernmental Science-Policy Platform on Biodiversity and Ecosystem Services involving more than 120 countries and 1000s of scientists. At the same time, the discipline is re-evaluating its foundations - including its philosophy and even core definitions. The value of biodiversity is being debated. In this context, the tree of life ("phylogeny") is emerging as an important way to look at biodiversity, with relevance cutting across current areas of concern - from the question of resilience within ecosystems, to conservation priorities for globally threatened species - while capturing the values of biodiversity that have been hard to quantify, including resilience and maintaining options for future generations. This increased appreciation of the importance of conserving "phylogenetic diversity", from microbial communities in the human gut to global threatened species, has inevitably resulted in an explosion of new indices, methods, and case studies. This book recognizes and responds to the timely opportunity for synthesis and sharing experiences in practical applications. The book recognizes that the challenge of finding a synthesis, and building shared concepts and a shared toolbox, requires both an appreciation of the past and a look into the future. Thus, the book is organized as a flow from history, concepts and philosophy, through to methods and tools, and followed by selected case studies. A positive vision and plan of action emerges from these chapters, that includes coping with inevitable uncertainties, effectively communicating the importance of this "evolutionary heritage" to the public and to policy-makers, and ultimately contributing to biodiversity conservation policy from local to global scales.

    Contents:
    1. Phylogenetic diversity and conservation evaluation : perspectives on multiple values, indices, and scales of application / Daniel P. Faith
    2. The use of EDGE (evolutionary distinct globally endangered) and EDGE-like metrics to evaluate taxa for conservation / Nick J.B. Isaac and William D. Pearse
    3. Biodiversity, the tree of life, and science communication / James Rosindell and Yan Wong
    4. Indicators for the expected loss of phylogenetic diversity / Daniel P. Faith, Simon Veron, Sandrine Pavoine, and Roseli Pellens
    5. Phylogenetic resolution and metrics of biodiversity and signal in conservation / Nathan G. Swenson and Samantha J. Worthy
    6. Phylogeny-based measurements at global and regional scales / Shawn W. Laffan
    7. Phylogeny-based measures of biodiversity when data is scarce : examples with the vascular flora of Chile and California / Rosa A. Scherson, Taryn Fuentes-Castillo, Rafael Urbina-Casanova, and Patricio Pliscoff
    8. Priority areas for phylogenetic diversity : maximising gains in the Mediterranean Basin / Simon Veron, Daniel P. Faith, Roseli Pellens, and Sandrine Pavoine
    9. Evolutionary diversity patterns in the Cape flora of South Africa / Félix Forest, Jonathan F. Colville, and Richard M. Cowling
    10. Effects of phylogenetic diversity and phylogenetic identity in a restoration ecology experiment / Andrew L. Hipp, Mary-Claire Glasenhardt, Marlin L. Bowles, Mira Garner, Bryant C. Scharenbroch, Evelyn W. Williams, Rebecca S. Barak, Amy Byrne, Adrienne R. Ernst, Emily Grigg, Meghan G. Midgley, Hayley Wagreich, and Daniel J. Larkin.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Jenny Lieberman.
    Summary: This compact book uniquely examines individual lived experience with spinal cord injury (SCI). It provides education and a clearer understanding of the many facets of a SCI -- medical, physical, psychological, cognitive, personal, and social -- in a single compact volume, so that readers learn the effect a SCI can have on a person. The contents also include resources for more specific exploration of information. SCI is a direct public health concern due to not only the cause of the injury itself, most often of violent origin, but also how the individuals perceive themselves after the injury and their participation in society, as well as how society welcomes them back. This compact book has four distinct chapters, each one addressing a different component of SCI with a set of resources to guide the individual with SCI, their family and their friends in the process. It first explores the physical as a means to provide an understanding of what body changes occur. From there, it goes on to examine what is the subjective meaning and lived experience of disability for persons with SCI. The brief ends with an examination of what organizations and programs exist to promote independence and a sense of community for persons with SCI. The Physical, Personal, and Social Impact of Spinal Cord Injury: From the Loss of Identity to Achieving a Life Worth Living is a book with broad appeal. It is written in such a way that it serves as a useful and accessible resource for people who work with persons with SCI, students and instructors with an interest in the subject, as well as persons with SCI themselves and their families. Jenny Lieberman, PhD, OTR/L, ATP is a senior clinical specialist of wheelchair seating and positioning in the Department of Rehabilitation and Human Performance at The Mount Sinai Hospital Center in New York, NY, USA. She is also an adjunct professor in the Department of Occupational Therapy at New York University in New York, NY, USA.

    Contents:
    1 Background
    2 Interventions
    3 Subjective Experience
    4 The Future
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Kazuyuki Kanosue, Satomi Oshima, Zhen-Bo Cao, Koichiro Oka.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Part I: Current Status of Physical Activity and Sedentary Behavior Research
    Physical Activity Levels and Physical Activity Recommendations in Japan
    Population Strategy for Physical Activity Promotion in the Community
    Promotion of Strength Training
    Does Newspaper Coverage Promote Cancer Prevention?
    Health Impact of Light
    Evaluation of Physical Activity and Sedentary Behavior
    Sedentary Behaviour
    Prevalence, Trends, and Correlates of Sedentary Behavior
    Part II: Effects of Physical Activity, Exercise, and Fitness on the Human Organism
    Responses of the Autonomic Nervous and Endocrine Systems to Exercise
    Exercise Modes and Vascular Functions
    Exercise, Appetite Control, and Body Weight Regulation
    Exercise and Food Intake
    Role of Physical Exercise on Postprandial Blood Glucose Responses to Low-Carbohydrate/High-Fat Diet Intake
    Posttranslational Modification of Proteins
    Relationship of Cardiorespiratory Fitness and Obesity Genes to Metabolic Syndrome in Adult Japanese Men
    Mechanisms Underlying the Suppression of Inflammatory Responses in Peritoneal Macrophages of Middle-aged Mice
    Effects of b2-Agonist Administration on Bacterial Phagocytosis by Splenic Macrophages in Mice
    Functional Roles of b2-Adrenergic Receptors in Skeletal Muscle Hypertrophy and Atrophy
    Part III: Physical Activity, Exercise, Nutrition, Aging, and Health
    The Role of Exercise and Nutrition in Lifestyle-related Disease
    Vasopressin V1a receptor gene and voluntary exercise in humans and mice
    The Role of Physical Activity in the Prevention of Atherosclerosis
    Association Between Exercise and Diet on Maintaining Bone Health in Postmenopausal Women and Female Athletes
    Pain Management Among Elderly People with Knee Pain
    Effective Exercise Programs Among Frail Elderly People
    Rowing
    Influence of Aging on Postural Control in Terms of Sensory Movements.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Ronald Ross Watson.
    Summary: A complete guide to the manifold effects of exercise and physical activity on the aging brain. This book examines the role that exercise and physical activity play in halting or modulating the deleterious effects of these numerous aging concerns.

    Contents:
    Overview of exercise and neurological changes. Effects of physical activity on the cerebral networks / A. Begega, P. Alvarez-Suarez, P. Sampedro-Piquero and M. Cuesta
    Exercise and the developing brain in children and adolescents / M.M. Herting and M.F. Keenan
    Differential expression of the brain proteme in physical training / T. Ravikiran, R. Vani and S. Anand
    Physical exercise-induced changes in brain temperature / A.C. Kunstetter, W.C. Damasceno, C.G. Fonseca and S.P. Wanner
    Drugs of abuse with exercise to modify neurological structure and function. Physical activity as a therapeutic intervention for addictive disorders / S.S. Somkuwar, M.J. Fannon-Pavlich
    Pharmacological intervention of brain neurotransmission affects exercise capacity / X. Zheng and H. Hasegawa
    The endocannabinoid system and chronic disease / A. Yoder
    Factors modulating exercise in aging and neurological consequences. Changes in cerebral blood flow during steady-state exercise / M. Hiura and T. Nariai
    Biochemical mechanisms associated with exercise-induced neuroprotection in aging brains and related neurological diseases / M.S. Shanmugam, W.M. Tierney, R.A. Hernandez, A. Cruz, T.L. Uhlendorf and R.W. Cohen
    Role of melatonin supplementation during strenuous exercise / J. Díaz-castro, M. Pulido-Morán, J. Moreno-Fernández, N. Kajarabille, S. Hijano and J.J. Ochoa
    Exercises as therapy for neurological diseases. Mechanisms of functional recovery with exercise and rehabilitation in spinal cord injuries / M. Cowan and R.M. Ichiyama
    Neural structure, connectivity, and cognition changes associated to physical exercise / S. Bonativa and G. Tedeschi
    The effect of exercise on motor function in neuroplasticity in parkinson's disease / J. Watson, K.E. Welman and B. Sehm
    Physical exercise and its effects on alzheimer's disease / A.M. Stein and R.V. Pedroso
    Cortical reorganization in response to exercise / P. Stephane
    Exercise enhances cognitive capacity in the aging brain / S. Snigdha and G.A. Prieto
    Lifestyle exercise affecting neurological structure and function in older adults. Synergistic effects of combined physical activity and brain training on neurological functions / T.M. Shah and R.N. Martins
    Physical activity / R. Beurskens and M. Dalecki
    Update of nutritional antioxidants and antinociceptives on improving exercise-induced muscle soreness / N. Leelayuwat
    Effects of exercise-altered immune functions on neuroplasticity / A.L. Aral and L. Pinar.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Gordon G. Hammes, Sharon Hammes-Schiffer.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Heat, Work, and Energy (pages 1-21)
    Chapter 2. Entropy and Gibbs Energy (pages 23-42)
    Chapter 3. Applications of Thermodynamics to Biological Systems (pages 43-76)
    Chapter 4. Thermodynamics Revisited (pages 77-94)
    Chapter 5. Principles of Chemical Kinetics (pages 95-120)
    Chapter 6. Applications of Kinetics to Biological Systems (pages 121-152)
    Chapter 7. Fundamentals of Quantum Mechanics (pages 153-176)
    Chapter 8. Electronic Structure of Atoms and Molecules (pages 177-202)
    Chapter 9. X-ray Crystallography (pages 203-224)
    Chapter 10. Electronic Spectra (pages 225-252)
    Chapter 11. Circular Dichroism, Optical Rotary Dispersion, and Fluorescence Polarization (pages 253-276)
    Chapter 12. Vibrations in Macromolecules (pages 277-288)
    Chapter 13. Principles of Nuclear Magnetic Resonance and Electron Spin Resonance (pages 289-314)
    Chapter 14. Applications of Magnetic Resonance to Biology (pages 315-330)
    Chapter 15. Fundamentals of Statistical Mechanics (pages 331-356)
    Chapter 16. Molecular Simulations (pages 357-382)
    Chapter 17. Ligand Binding to Macromolecules (pages 383-414)
    Chapter 18. Hydrodynamics of Macromolecules (pages 415-440)
    Chapter 19. Mass Spectrometry (pages 441-456).
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    Steven D. Waldman.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Salvatore Mangione, Peter D. Sullivan and Michael S. Wagner
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    Géza T. Terézhalmy, Michaell A. Huber, Lily T. García, Ronald L. Occhionero.
    Summary: "The revised Second Edition of Physical Evaluation and Treatment Planning in Dental Practice has been expanded to include information pertinent when considering comprehensive treatment planning for a wide variety of dental procedures. Written by internationally recognized specialists and discipline experts in their field, the Second Edition offers new chapters on dental and oral diseases and disorders, including insights and diagnostics for each category. Readers will learn about diagnosis and planning considerations for orofacial pain, caries, periodontics, oral surgery, endodontics, restorative, prosthodontics and esthetic dentistry, and more. Beginning with a complete introduction of oral health and associated systemic health, the book incorporates discussions of patient history profiles, basic procedures in physical examinations, including examination of the head, neck, extraoral and intraoral tissues, radiographic examination and interpretation, as well as laboratory methods. Designed for general dental practitioners, periodontists, prosthodontists, dental residents and fellows, and dental students, Physical Evaluation and Treatment Planning in Dental Practice is a logically organized one-stop reference for patient evaluation and treatment"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to the clinical process
    The historical profile
    Basic procedures in physical examination
    Examination of the head and neck
    Examination of oral cavity
    Radiographic examination
    Laboratory methods
    Diagnostic and treatment planning considerations for orofacial pain
    Evidence-Based treatment planning in restorative dentistry
    Periodontal and peri-implant examination
    Oral and maxillofacial surgery
    Endodontic evaluation : diagnosis and treatment planning / Anibal R. Diogenes and Fabricio B. Teixeira
    Prosthodontic restoration : diagnosis and treatment planning
    Exam, diagnosis and treatment planning in pediatric patients
    Orthodontics for the general practitioner
    Putting it all together : introduction to treatment planning.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    Ryan J. Warth, Peter J. Millett.
    Contents:
    About this Book
    Range of Motion
    Strenght Testing
    Strength Testing
    Rotator Cuff Disorders
    Disorders of the Long Head of the Biceps Tendon
    Glenohumeral Instability
    The Acromioclavicular Joint
    The Sternoclavicular Joint
    Scapular Dyskinesis
    Neurovascular Disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Todd J. Albert, Alexander R. Vaccaro.
    Contents:
    The fundamentals
    Physical examination of the cervical spine
    Physical examination of the thoracic spine
    Physical examination of the lumbosacral spine.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    Junjie Xiao, editor.
    Summary: This book shares the latest findings on exercise and its benefits in preventing and ameliorating numerous diseases that are of worldwide concern. Addressing the role of exercise training as an effective method for the prevention and treatment of various disease, the book is divided into eleven parts: 1) An Overview of the Beneficial Effects of Exercise on Health and Performance, 2) The Physiological Responses to Exercise, 3) Exercise and Metabolic Diseases, 4) Exercise and Cardiovascular Diseases, 5) Exercise and Musculoskeletal Diseases, 6) Exercise and Neurological and Psychiatric Diseases, 7) Exercise and the Respiration System, 8) Exercise and Immunity, 9) Exercise and HIV/AIDS, 10) Exercise and Neuropsychiatric Disorders, and 11) Future Prospects. Given its scope, the book will be particularly useful for researchers and students in the fields of physical therapy, physiology, medicine, genetics and cell biology, as well as researchers and physicians with a range of medical specialties. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    [I]. Overview: An overview of the beneficial effects of exercise on health and performance / Andreas Kramer. [II]. The physiologicla responses to exercise: Type of exercise training and training methods / Sascha Ketelhut, Reinhard G. Ketelhut
    Molecular mechanisms mediating adaptation to exercise / Zahra Gholamnezhad, Bruno Mégarbane, Ramin Rezaee
    Exercise and organ cross talk / Zhiqing Fan, Minjun Xu. [III]. Exercise and metabolic diseases: Exercise and hyperlipidemia / Nana He, Honghua Ye
    Exercise and type 2 diabetes / Sasan Amanat, Simin Ghahri, Aria Dianatinasab, Mohammad Fararouei, Mostafa Dianatinasab
    Exercise and type 1 diabetes / Xiya Lu, Cuimei Zhao
    Exercise and polycystic ovary syndrome / Amie Woodward, Markos Klonizakis, David Brook
    Exercise and insulin resistance / Stephney Whillier. [IV]. Exercise and cardiovascular diseases: Exercise and hypertension / Şeref Alpsoy
    Exercise and coronary heart disease / Aydin Akyuz
    Exercise and peripheral arteriosclerosis / Demet Ozkaramanli Gur
    Exercise and stroke / Carmen García-Cabo, Elena López-Cancio
    Exercise and cardiovascular protection / Guohua Li, Jia Li, Feng Gao. [IX]. Exercise and HIV/AIDS: Effects of exercise on the immune function, quality of life, and mental health in HIV/AIDS individuals / Mostafa Dianatinasab, Simin Ghahri, Aria Dianatinasab, Sasan Amanat, Mohammad Fararouei. [V]. Exercise and musculoskeletal diseases: Exercise and osteoarthritis / Lei Chen, Yan Yu
    Exercise and chronic pain / Anna Borisovskaya, Elizabeth Chmelik, Ashwin Karnik
    Exercise and muscle atrophy / Nana He, Honghua Ye. [VI]. Exercise and neurologicla and psychiatric diseases: Exercise and depressive disorder / Javier Bueno-Antequera, Diego Munguía-Izquierdo
    Exercise and Parkinson's disease / Simona Bonavita
    Exercise and dementia / Zahra Gholamnezhad, Mohammad Hossien Boskabady, Zahra Jahangiri
    Exercise and schizophrenia / Javier Bueno-Antequera, Diego Munguía-Izquierdo
    Exercise and multiple sclerosis / Robert W. Motl
    Exercise and anxiety / Aaron Kandola, Brendon Stubbs. [VII]. Exercise and respiration system: Exercise and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD) / Giuseppe Fiorentino, Antonio M. Esquinas, Anna Annunziata
    Exercise and asthma / Shengguang Ding, Chongjun Zhong
    Exercise and cystic fibrosis / Shengguang Ding, Chongjun Zhong. [VIII]. Exercise and immunity: Exercise regulates the immune system / Jing Wang, Shuqin Liu, Guoping LI, Junjie Xiao. [X]. Exercise and neuropsychiatric disorders: Effects of exercise on memory interference in neuropsychiatric disorders / Lindsay Crawford, Paul D. Loprinzi
    Effects of exercise on long-term potentiation in neuropsychiatric disorders / Paul D. Loprinzi. [XI]. Future prospects: Prospective advancesc in beneficial effects of exercise on human health / Zuoxu Hou, Xing Zhang, Feng Gao.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    David J. Castle, Peter F. Buckley, Fiona P. Gaughran.
    Contents:
    1. Physical morbidities and schzophrenia: more than a chance co-occurrence
    2. Reasons for excess medical morbidity in schizophrenia
    3. The metabolic syndrome in schizophrenia
    4. Other physical health problems in people with schizophrenia
    5. Smoking and schizophrenia
    6. Effects of antipsychotic medications on physical health
    7. A comprehensive monitoring approach to physical healthcare in people with schizophrenia
    8. Interventions for metabolic problems in people with schizophrenia.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Sara J. Cuccurullo
    Summary: "Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation Board Review, Fourth Edition, will appeal to medical students, residents, and practicing physiatrists. The book concentrates on board-related concepts in the field of Rehabilitation Medicine"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2019
  • Digital
    editor, R. Samuel Mayer.
    Summary: "Revised second edition of the singular review book devoted to helping candidates prepare for and succeed on the ABPMR Part II certification examination. This interactive workbook has been updated and expanded to reflect changes to the oral exam format and introduce topics of increasing importance. With new chapters on complex medical rehabilitation, cancer rehabilitation, pain medicine, spinal disorders, and sports medicine and a total of 86 cases across all practice areas on the board outline, this is the study tool that positions you to pass Part II the first time out. The book uses a question and response format to actively engage readers for individual or group study. Chapter vignettes set up common physiatric problems and are structured to walk readers through the types of questions encountered in daily practice. This unique conversational method simulates a discussion between examiner and examinee, presenting a focused exchange that unfolds organically and leads respondents to the most appropriate answers. Case questions are organized by the five domains measured on the oral boards: data acquisition, problem solving, patient management, systems-based practice, and interpersonal and communication skills"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Amputations, prosthetics, and orthotics / Heikki Uustal
    Brain impairments and central nervous system disorders / Michael H. Marino, Miriam Segal, and Thomas K. Watanabe
    Cancer and other medically related impairments / Julie K. Silver
    Cardiovascular and pulmonary rehabilitation / Matthew N. Bartels
    Complex medical rehabilitation / R. Samuel Mayer
    Durable medical equipment / Brad E. Dicianno
    Geriatric rehabilitation / George Forrest
    Musculoskeletal impairments / Michael Mallow
    Neuromuscular impairments and electrodiagnosis / Tae Hwan Chung
    Pain rehabilitation / Andrew Nava
    Pediatric rehabilitation / Sarah A. Korth
    Soft tissue impairments / R. Samuel Mayer
    Spinal impairments / Bryt A. Christensen
    Spinal cord injury / Argyrios Stampas and Joel Frontera
    Sports medicine / Brian J. Krabak, Brian C. Liem, Melinda S. Loveless, and Amanda Wise
    Stroke rehabilitation / Benjamin J. Friedman, Deena Hassaballa, and Richard L. Harvey
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    edited by Bryan J. O'Young, Mark A. Young, Steven A. Stiens, Sam S. H. Wu.
    Summary: For more than 30 years, the highly regarded Secrets Series® has provided students, academics, and practitioners in all areas of health care with concise, focused, and engaging resources for quick reference and exam review. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation Secrets, 4th Edition, offers practical, up-to-date coverage of the full range of essential topics in this dynamic field. This highly regarded resource features the Secrets’ popular question-and-answer format that also includes lists, tables, weblinks, pearls, memory aids, and an easy-to-read style – making an inquiry, reference, and review quick, easy, and enjoyable.

    Contents:
    The interdisciplinary team: Origins, interactions, and scope of interventions
    Scientific foundations of physiatric care
    Learning in rehabilitation
    Physical and psychological evaluation: Recognizing strengths and resilience
    Electrodiagnostic evaluation of neuromuscular conditions
    Coordination of person-centered transdisciplinary care
    Therapeutic modalities
    Interventional procedures
    Impairment and activity limitation focused interventions
    Musculoskeletal
    Neurological rehabilitation
    Other organ based rehabilitation
    Chronic pain
    Lifetime development with optimal function
    Person centered life role: Work and play
    Community participation of people with disabilities
    Past, present, and future of rehabilitation
    Emerging topics.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    Guillaume Duménil, Sven van Teeffelen, editors.
    Summary: This book emerges from the idea that specific physics-inspired approaches are necessary to understand different stage of bacterial physiology and the infections they cause. Many aspects of bacterial life depend on processes typically described by physical laws: The rheology of biofilms is determined by complex cohesive forces. Physical laws of diffusion are essential to all processes of bacterial metabolism. The formation of the numerous bacterial biomacromolecules require complex self-organization processes and their function are powered by potent molecular motors. Host-pathogen interactions during infection frequently occur in environments determined by fluid mechanics. In this book, different chapters represent research at the interface between microbiology and physics. Topics range from intracellular organization to cell-cell interactions. A good part of the book is devoted to mechanical forces, which are involved in the function of elaborate bacterial nanomachines, chromosome segregation, and cell division. The effect of bacterial toxins provides an example of the alteration of cellular membrane properties by bacteria. Symmetrically, histones from mammalian cells alter bacterial membranes as a defense mechanism during infection. The editors of this book, Guillaume Duménil and Sven van Teeffelen, have selected researchers at the forefront of research in physical microbiology to provide the most recent view in this fast-moving field. The contents of this book are designed to be accessible for scientists with training in biology and for scientists with training in physics. The objective is to provide a fresh perspective on microbiology and infection by highlighting recent multidisciplinary research and favor rapid advances at this fruitful interface.

    Contents:
    Dewetting: from physics to the biology of intoxicated cells
    Physical views on ParABS-mediated DNA segregation
    Mechanisms and dynamics of the Bacterial Flagellar Motor
    Efficiency and Robustness of Processes Driven by Nucleoid Exclusion in Escherichia coli
    ­The mechanical properties of bacteria and why they matter
    Physical Mechanisms of Bacterial Killing by Histones
    Complex Diffusion in Bacteria.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Zhongquan Sui and Xiangli Kong, editors.
    Summary: This book provides comprehensive information on starch modification using physical approaches - a field that has attracted increasing interest in recent years due to the fact that it is no longer desirable to label starch a modified. The required functionalities can be conveniently achieved by physical methods that are less expensive and more environmentally friendly. Intended for researchers and product developers working on starch, the book summarizes recent developments in the areas of starch physical modifications and reviews the structure, function and potential industrial applications of modified starch.

    Contents:
    Structure and physiochemical properties of starch
    Heat-moisture treatment of starch
    Annealing
    Pre-gelatinized modification of starch
    Gamma irradiation of starch
    Microwave treatment
    Ultrahigh pressure treatment
    Ultrasonic treatment
    Milling process of starch.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Mary Ellen Goldberg, Julia Tomlinson.
    Contents:
    Introduction to physical rehabilitation for veterinary technicians/nurses / Mary Ellen Goldberg
    Joining a rehabilitation team / Julia E. Tomlinson
    The veterinary technician and rehabilitation pain management / Mary Ellen Goldberg
    Communicating the treatment plan / Tracy A. Darling and Chnthia M. Otto
    Manual therapy treatment / Judy Coates
    Home exercises / Abby Rafferty and Jacqueline R. Davidson
    Supporting the client and patient / Robin Downing and mary Ellen Goldberg
    Nutritional counseling / Kara M. Burns
    Motivating your patient / Megan Nelson and Julia E. Tomlinson
    The disabled patient part 1 : assistive devices and technology / Mary Ellen Goldberg and Julia E. Tomlinson
    The disabled patient part 2 : the neurological patient / Stephanie Kube and Mary Ellen Goldberg
    The disabled patient part 3 : special considerations for geriatrics / Mary Ellen Goldberg and Julia E. Tomlinson
    The disabled patient part 4 : home nursing care / Julia E. Tomlinson and Elizabeth E. Waalk
    Modalities part 1 : thermotherapy / Julia E. Tomlinson and Mary Ellen Goldberg
    Modalities part 2 : laser therapy / Kristin Kirkby Shaw and Liz Brown
    Modalities part 3 : electrotherapy and electromagnetic therapy / Shari Sprague and Mary Ellen Goldberg
    Modalities part 4 : therapeutic ultrasound / Carolina Medina and Wendy Davies
    Modalities part 5 : shockwave therapy / Douglas Stramel and Angela Stramel
    Therapeutic exercises part 1 : land exercises / Jance L. Huntingford and Jessy Bale
    Therapeutic exercises part 2 : hydrotherapy (aquatic therapy) / Pádraig Egan and Noel Fitzpatrick
    Troubleshooting as a team / Amie Hesbach, Julia E. Tomlinson, and Erin White
    Equine rehabilitation / Steve Adair and Dawn Phillips
    Adjunctive therapies part 1 : acupuncture and traditional Chinese medicine / Robin Downing
    Adjunctive therapiesm part 2 : veterinary chiropractic / Robin Downing
    Adjunctive therapies part 3 : myofascial trigger point therapy / Douglas Stramel and Angela Stramel.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Mark Dutton, PT, Melissa Schneider, PTA, M.Ed, Janice Lwin, PT, DPT, Cassady Bartlett, PT,DPT, Annie Burke-Doe, PT, MPT, PhD.
    Summary: "This book will provide the necessary information to prepare for the National Physical Therapist Assistant Examination (NPTAE) including a breakdown of the NPTAE format, a comprehensive content review of all body systems, clinical tips, yellow and red flags to treatment, testing strategies, and sample questions"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessPhysiotherapy
  • Digital
    Shinichiro Morishita, Junichiro Inoue, Jiro Nakano, editors.
    Summary: This collection of chapters describes in detail the physical therapy research in patients with various types of cancers to help medical professionals and physical therapists help improve the physical function, activity of daily living, quality of life, the survival rate in cancer patients and cancer survivors. It provides not only information on rehabilitation but details on physical therapy cancer research and research methods. The book provides practical skills to treat the patients and to create useful and effective physical therapy programs by giving step-by-step tutorials to help readers learn various techniques. Along with presenting an introduction to physical therapy of cance and new findings, the authors provide recommendations on each cancer therapy. Physical Therapy and Research in Patients with Cancer is aimed at physical therapists and student physical therapists. Undergraduate and postgraduate students also can use our book to understand the basics and get up-to-date information. By sharing the latest research with our readers, the book creates a foundation for further development in this field of study. .

    Contents:
    Part 1 Physical Function and Health Related Quality of Life
    1 Physical function and health related QOL in cancer survivors
    2 Physical function and health-related quality of life after breast cancer surgery
    3 Physical function and health-related quality of life in patients with gastrointestinal cancer
    4 Physical function and health related QOL in surgically treated patients with malignant pleural mesothelioma
    5 Muscle mass, cachexia, and health-related quality of life in patients with hematologic malignancies
    6 Exercise capacity and health-related quality of life in patients after lung resection for non-small cell lung cancer
    Part 2 Physical Exercise
    7 Effect of physical exercise on physical function and survival rate in cancer patients
    8 Exercise therapy on muscle mass and physical function in patients undergoing allogeneic hematopoietic stem cell transplantation
    9 Physical exercise and immune function in patients with hematological malignancies
    10 Exercise protocols for counteracting cancer cachexia-related declines in muscle mass and strength and the clinical assessment of skeletal muscle
    11 Physical Exercise and Skeletal Muscle Adaptation in Cancer Cachexia
    12 Physical function and physical activity in patients with advanced lung cancer
    13 Physical Activity in Patients with Breast Cancer
    Part 3 Physical Function and Other Symptom
    14 Multiple frailty in elderly patients with cancer
    15 Postoperative complications in patients with esophageal cancer
    16 Cancer-related lymphedema and obesity
    17 Cancer-related pain and effects of non-pharmacologic intervention
    18 Nutrition and daily activities in older patients after gastrectomy
    19 Frailty and mental health in older patients with gastrointestinal cancer
    20 Physical function and nutrition in patients with hematological malignancies
    21 Physical Function and Nutrition in Patients with Esophageal Cancer and Head and Neck Cancer
    Part 4 Skeletal Muscle
    22 Skeletal muscle oxygenation in patients with malignant hematopoietic disease
    23 Sarcopenia and physical performance in patients with cancer
    24 Cachexia and postoperative outcomes in elderly patients with gastrointestinal cancer
    25 Mechanism of skeletal muscle atrophy using a mice cancer cachexia model.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Eric S. Pelletier ; series editor: Erin E. Jobst.
    Summary: Thirty pediatrics physical therapy cases sharpen students' critical thinking skills and prepare them for real-world practiceThis unique review features case studies that help physical therapy students successfully transition from coursework to clinical work. Thirty pediatrics physical therapy cases sharpen students' critical thinking skills and prepare them for real-world practiceThis unique review features case studies that help physical therapy students successfully transition from coursework to clinical work. Each case includes a discussion of the health condition, examination, evaluation, diagnosis, plan of care, and interventions, evidence-based practice recommendations, and references. NPTE-style review questions accompany each case, reinforcing students' learning. These case studies give students practical experience before they actually work with patients and helps build the confidence they need to succeed in real-world clinical practice.

    Contents:
    1. Brachial Plexus Palsy 2. Spinal Cord Injury 3. Cerebral Hemispherectomy 4. Hemipolymicrogyria: Bracing for Gait 5. Extreme Prematurity and the Neonatal Intensive Care Unit 6. Cerebra Palsy
    Early Intervention 7. Cerebral Palsy
    Elementary School 8. Cerebral Palsy
    Postsecondary Education and Transition to Adulthood 9. Fitness in Cerebral Palsy 10. Down Syndrome 11. Duchenne Muscular Dystrophy 12. Developmental Coordination Disorder 13. Autism Spectrum Disorder: Motor Concerns 14. Anterior Neck Burn 15. Palmar Hand Burn 16. Chronic Wound 17. Congenital Muscular Torticollis 18. Osteogenesis Imperfecta 19. Spina Bifida 20. Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia 21. Cystic Fibrosis 22. Hemophilia 23. Complex Regional Pain Syndrome 24. Post-Concussion Syndrome 25. Congenital Limb Deficiency: Proximal Femoral Focal Deficiency 26. Relapsed Clubfoot 27. Joint Hypermobility Condition 28. Idiopathic Toe Walking 29. Femoroacetabular Impingement 30. Anterior Cruciate Ligament Rupture: Postoperative Management 31. Medial Epicondyle Apophysitis (Little League Elbow)
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2016
  • Digital
    Jason Brumitt ; series editor: Erin E. Jobst.
    Summary: "The Physical Therapy Case Files series gives students realistic cases designed to help them make the transition from classroom to clinical work and is an outstanding review for the specialty topics included on the American Physical Therapy Association certification exams. This evidence-based series can stand alone or is the perfect complement to textbooks for enhanced learning in the context of real patients. Each case includes clinical tips, evidence-based practice recommendations, analysis, and review questions. These cases teach students how to think through evaluation, assessment, and treatment planning. Includes 42 realistic sports medicine cases. A great clinical refresher for practitioners looking to brush up on their skills."--Provided by publisher
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2016
  • Digital
    Annie Burke-Doe.
    Summary: "Dozens of realistic neurology cases help students make the transition from classroom to clinic Physical Therapy Case Files: Neurology delivers 30 neurology cases that help students sharpen their critical thinking skills and prepare them for real-world practice. Clinicians will find the book to be a valuable refresher. Each case includes clinical tips, evidence-based practice recommendations, analysis, and references. Features National Physical Therapy Examination-style review questions accompany each case to prepare students for the boards Provides students with practical experience before working with patients Analysis of case includes remediation content, saving students the necessity of having to go a textbook for answers"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note: Working with Patients; How to Approach Clinical Examination; How to Approach Clinical Decision-Making; How to Determine Treatment Approach using Evidence-Based Practice; Acute Care Case Studies; 50 cases.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2014
  • Digital
    Frances M. Wedge.
    Summary: "This book is a concise and condensed clinical pocket guide designed specifically to help physical therapist assistant students and practitioners easily obtain information in the areas of physical therapy evidence-based interventions"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access R2Library 2023
  • Digital
    editor: Urs F. Greber.
    Summary: This book explores a new challenge in virology: to understand how physical properties of virus particles (virions) and viruses (infected cells) affect the course of an infection. Insights from the emerging field of physical virology will contribute to understanding of the physical nature of viruses and cells, and will open new ways for anti-viral interference. Nine chapters and an editorial written by physicists, chemists, biologists and computational experts describe how virions serve as trail blazers in uncharted territory of cells. The authors outline how particles change in composition as they interact with host cells. Such virus dynamics are crucial for virus entry into cells and infection. It influences the modern concepts of virus-host interactions, viral lineages and evolution. The volume gives numerous up-to-date examples of modern virology and provides a fascinating read for researchers, clinicians and students in the field of infectious diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Ruth Ballweg, Darwin Brown, Daniel T. Vetrosky, Tamara S. Ritsema.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Print
    [edited by] James Van Rhee, MS, PA-C, DFAAPA; Jonathan Kilstrom, MPAS, PA-C, NRP; Stephanie Neary, MPA, MMS, PA-C; Mary Ruggeri, MEd, MMSc, PA-C
    Contents:
    Cardiovascular system
    Pulmonary system
    Gastroenterology system
    Musculoskeletal system
    Endocrine system
    Eyes, ears, nose, and throat system
    Neurologic system
    Reproductive system --Infectious disease
    Psychiatry/behavioral science
    Dermatologic system-- Hematologic system-- Genitourinary and Renal systems
    Pediatrics
    Pharmacology
    Laboratory medicine
    Professional issues
    Test-taking strategies.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    R697.P45 P482 2023
    1
  • Digital
    Brennan Bowker.
    Summary: The first pocket-size resource to guide PA students through their surgery rotation Prepare for and thrive during your clinical rotations with the quick-access pocket guide series, The Physician Assistant Student's Guide to the Clinical Year. The Surgery edition of this 7-volume series, discounted when purchased as a full set, delineates the exact duties required in this specialty. Written by an experienced PA educator, this guide details common surgical procedures you'll see, such as thyroidectomy, hernia repair, mastectomy, and appendectomy. It also provides important information on surgical emergencies, including gastrointestinal bleeding, perforated viscus, and limb ischemia. System-based chapters reviewing the presentation and management of common conditions that may require surgery are also included. Advice on taking good SOAP notes, guidance on how to prepare patients for surgery, and tips on surgical etiquette will help you excel during this intense rotation. Additional chapters on pre- and post-operative management of patients, sterile technique, and common wound closure methods will arm you with the knowledge you'll need to succeed.
  • Digital
    Dipali Yeh, MS, PA-C, CHSE, Erin Marthedal, MS, PA-C.
    Summary: The first pocket-size resource to guide PA students through their emergency medicine rotation Prepare for and thrive during your clinical rotations with the quick-access pocket guide series, The Physician Assistant Student's Guide to the Clinical Year. The Emergency Medicine edition of this 7-volume series, discounted when purchased as a full set, delineates the exact duties required in this specialty.Written by experienced PA educators, this guide details the clinical approach to common presentations such as chest pain, altered mental status, and headache. It also provides a systems-based approach to more than 40 of the most frequently encountered disease entities you will see in this rotation, including traumatic injury, cerebrovascular accident, and acute coronary syndrome.Distinguished by brief, bulleted content with handy tables and figures, the reference offers all pertinent laboratory and imaging studies needed to confirm a diagnosis, with medication and management guidelines. This guide also describes the most common procedures you will learn during the emergency medicine rotation, including incision and drainage, wound repair, and foreign body removal. Also included is a special chapter on non-medical situations you'll find in the emergency department, such as drug-seeking behavior, violent or incarcerated patients, and malingering and factitious disorders
  • Digital
    Gerald Kayingo, PhD, PA-C, Deborah Opacic, MMS, EdD, PA-C, DFAAP, Mary Carcella Allias, MPAS, PA-C.
    Contents:
    Introduction: The Approach to the Patient in Family Medicine
    Chapter 1: Common Presentations in Family Medicine
    Chapter 2: Common Disease Entities in Family Medicine
    Chapter 3: Diagnostic Testing in Family Medicine
    Chapter 4: Patient Education and Counseling in Family Medicine
    Chapter 5: Urgent Management in Family Medicine
    Chapter 6: Common Procedures in Family Medicine
    Chapter 7: Common Abbreviations in Family Medicine
  • Digital
    Elyse Watkins, series editor Maureen Knechtel
    Summary: The first pocket-size resource to guide PA students through their OB/GYN rotation Prepare for and thrive during your clinical rotations with the quick-access pocket guide series, The Physician Assistant Student's Guide to the Clinical Year. The OB/GYN edition of this 7-volume series, discounted when purchased as a full set, delineates the exact duties required in obstetrics and gynecology. Written by an experienced PA educator, this guide details the clinical approach to common obstetric and gynecologic presentations such as pelvic pain, abnormal uterine bleeding, and an overview of the initial prenatal visit. It also provides treatment and management details for more than 30 of the most frequently encountered disease entities you will see in this rotation, including cervical dysplasia, dysmenorrhea, and ectopic pregnancy. Distinguished by brief, bulleted content with handy tables and figures, the reference offers all pertinent laboratory and imaging studies needed to confirm a diagnosis, with medication and management guidelines. This guide also describes the most common procedures you will learn during your OB/GYN, including PAP test, colposcopy, labor induction, and cesarean delivery. A special chapter on urgent gynecologic and obstetric conditions, such as placental abruption, sexual assault, and severe uterine bleeding, is also included.
  • Digital
    Tanya L. Fernandez, MS, PA-C, IBCLC, Amy Akerman, MPAS, PA-C.
    Summary: Written by experienced PA educators, this guide details the clinical approach to common presentations such as cough, fever, and skin changes. It also provides a systems-based approach to more than 60 of the most frequently encountered disease entities you will see in this rotation, including dermatitis, pharyngitis, and otitis media. Distinguished by brief, bulleted content with handy tables and figures, the reference offers all pertinent laboratory and imaging studies needed to confirm a diagnosis, with medication and management guidelines. This guide also describes the most common procedures you will learn during the pediatrics rotation, including foreign body removal, reduction of subluxed radial head, and administration of nebulizer treatments.A special chapter on management of urgent pediatric conditions, such as asthma exacerbation, head injuries, and fractures, is also included
  • Digital
    Roderick S. Hooker, James F. Cawley, Christine M. Everett.
    Contents:
    Introduction and overview of the profession
    Development of the profession
    Current status : a profile of the physician assistant profession
    Physician assistant education
    Physician assistants in primary care
    Physician assistant specialization : non-primary care
    Physician assistants in hospital settings
    Physician assistants in rural health
    Economic assessment of physician assistants
    Legal aspects of physician assistant practice
    Professional and workforce issues
    Physician assistants on multidisciplinary teams
    Future directions of the physician assistant profession.
  • Digital
    Kirk J. Brower, Michelle B. Riba, editors.
    Summary: This book explores the important topic of mental health and related problems among physicians, including trainees. The all-too-common human response of "suffering in silence" and refusing to seek help for professional and personal issues has ramifications for physicians who work in safety-sensitive positions, where clear-headed judgment and proper action can save lives. Problems covered include burnout, disruptive and unprofessional behaviors, impaired performance, traumatic stress, addiction, depression and other mood disorders, and suicide. The authors of this work include psychologists, psychiatrists, and other physicians who diagnose and treat a range of patients with stress-related syndromes. Among their patients are physicians who benefit greatly from education, support, coaching, and treatment. The book's content is organized into three parts with interconnecting themes. Part I focuses on symptoms and how physicians' problems manifest at the workplace. Part II discusses the disorders underlying the manifesting symptoms. Part III focuses on interventions at both the individual and organizational levels. The major themes investigated throughout the book are developmental aspects; mental health and wellbeing as a continuum; and the multifactorial contributions of individual, interpersonal, organizational, and cultural elements to physician health. This book is intended for anyone who works with, provides support to, or professionally treats distressed physicians. It is also intended for healthcare leaders and organizations that are motivated to improve the experience of providing care and to change the culture of silence, such that seeking help and counsel become normal activities while minimizing stigma. By writing this book, the authors aim to outline effective pathways to well-being and a healthy work-life balance among physicians, so that they may provide optimal and safe care to their patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    editor, Karen M. Sanders.
    Summary: This unique volume teaches those in the medical fields about the scientific value of neuropsychology in assessing cognition, the 6th vital sign, as part of well integrated collaborative care. It offers physicians a comprehensive tour of the many dimensions neuropsychology can add to primary and specialized medical care across the lifespan. Noted experts examine cognitive ramifications of a wide range of medical, psychological, and neuropsychological conditions, among them brain tumors, stroke, epilepsy, pediatric and adult TBI, schizophrenia, and adult ADHD. The books generous selection of case examples demonstrates the benefits of cognitive assessment in building accurate diagnoses, better understanding of patient needs, and more appropriate treatment and management strategies, as well as other neuropsychologist roles in consulting, referral, and forensic areas. In addition, tables, callout boxes, review questions, and other features are included throughout the text for ease in comprehension and retention. A sampling of the coverage: · The value of neuropsychological evaluation in medical practice. · A model of collaboration between primary care and neuropsychology. · Neuropsychological assessment of extremely preterm children. · Alzheimers Disease and overview of dementia. · Deep brain stimulation for Parkinson's Disease. · Neuropsychology in the 21st century: the rise of multicultural assessment. · Neuropsychological interventions for individuals with brain injury. The Physicians Field Guide to Neuropsychology is both a rigorous and an accessible reference for clinicians in diverse disciplines including general practice, family medicine, neuropsychology, pediatrics, gerontology, and sports medicine.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    The Distinct Worlds of Neuropsychology and Medicine. -The world of the neuropsychologist: origins in norm-referenced testing.-The world of the medical practitioner: origins in Bayesian model
    Existing models of collaboration
    The difference between neuropsychological testing, cognitive screens, and neuroradiological exams
    The current debates in assessment: issues concerning evidenced-based testing, cognitive screens, computer-based cognitive tests, and standard neuropsychological testing
    Symptom validity in neuropsychological and medical settings
    Case Examples
    Pediatrics: Neuroimaging.
    Pediatrics: Epilepsy. -Mild Cognitive Impairment vs. Alzheimers Disease. -Frontotemporal Dementia
    Vascular Dementia
    Middle Cerebral Artery Stroke
    Aneurysms: Ruptured and Unruptured.
    Cardiovascular: Hypoxia. -Cardiovascular Surgery Outcomes. -Parkinsons Disease
    Parkinsons Plus Disorders
    Huntingtons Disease
    Lewy Body Dementia. -Traumatic Brain Injury: Sports Concussion. -Pediatric Brain Injury. -Cancer and Chemotherapy Outcomes
    Adult Epilepsy
    Multiple Sclerosis
    Psychiatric: Schizophrenia
    Neuroimaging and Biomarkers
    Surgery: Pre- and Post-Neurological Testing.-Related Issues in Collaboration: Specialties and Essential Considerations
    Multicultural Considerations. -Learning Disorders
    Forensic and Medicolegal Issues
    Medical Rehabilitation.-Vocational Issues. -Psychotherapy and Neuropsychotherapy
    Neuropsychological Feedback.-Family Needs and Involvement. –Appendix. -References.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Amanda Christian, MD & Nick Christian, MBA.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    R728.5 C47 2021
    1
  • Digital
    Nenad Blau, Marinus Duran, K. Michael Gibson, Carlo Dionisi-Vici, editors.
    Contents:
    Introductory Chapters
    Amino acids
    Organic acids
    Vitamins and neurotransmitter
    Energy metabolism
    Organelles
    Selected disorder
    Biochemical phenotypes of questionable clinical significance
    Profiles.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Nenad Blau, Carlo Dionisi Vici, Carlos R. Ferreira, Christine Vianey-Saban, Clara D. M. van Karnebeek, editors.
    Summary: This updated and enlarged second edition is a unique source of information on the diagnosis, treatment, and follow-up of metabolic diseases. The clinical and laboratory data characteristic of rare metabolic conditions can be bewildering for clinicians and laboratory personnel alike reference laboratory data is scattered, and clinical descriptions can be obscure. The new Physicians Guide with the additional more than 600 diseases now featured, documents 1200 conditions grouped according to type of disorder, organ system affected (e.g. liver, kidney, etc) or phenotype (e.g. neurological, hepatic, etc). It includes relevant clinical findings and highlights the pathological values for diagnostic metabolites. Guidance on appropriate biochemical genetic testing is also provided and established experimental therapeutic protocols are described, with recommendations on follow-up and monitoring. The authors are acknowledged experts, and the book is a valuable desk reference for all who deal with inherited metabolic diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Peter Yellowlees, MBBS, M.D.
    Summary: "The figures are stark: 10-15 years after entering medical school, the average physician has twice the level of burnout of the average professional. Suicide rates among physicians are 1.4 and 2 times higher than in the general population for men and women, respectively. Physician Well-Being argues that the major reasons for physician distress are organizational and systemic and focuses on solutions that work. The guide focuses its gaze on the range of the provider experience, from pre-med programs and practice settings that include a large health system and multidisciplinary clinic to specific scenarios such as medical marriages. Through fictional but realistic and nuanced case studies, it proposes solutions designed to make today's typical health care environments more effective. Concise literature reviews highlight each chapter's most salient points, and detailed lists of references serve as springboards for further exploration. Throughout the volume, wisdom gleaned from the author's 30-year career as a psychiatrist-during which he has treated hundreds of physicians as patients-makes a powerful case for changes in the culture and process of medicine that are essential for improving both provider well-being and patient care and safety"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: "Our Dedicated Dad"
    Chapter 2: Health Care Is a Team Sport
    Chapter 3: A Unified Mission
    Chapter 4: Trust, Mentoring, and Innovation
    Chapter 5: Pre-Med : Vulnerability and Trauma
    Chapter 6: Medical School : Implicit Biases and a Well-Being Curriculum
    Chapter 7: Residency : A Narcotic Addict's New Career -Chapter 8: Cognitive Dissonance and Defining Meaning in Medicine
    Chapter 9: Medical Marriages : Caring for Each Other
    Chapter 10: The Joy and Meaning of Medicine
    Index.
  • Print
    [edited by] Edward Chu, Vincent T. DeVita, Jr.
    Summary: "Completely revised and updated for 2023, the Physicians' Cancer Chemotherapy Drug Manual is an up-to-date guide to the latest information on standard therapy and recent advances in the field. Written by world-class experts in clinical cancer therapeutics, this essential reference provides a complete, easy-to-use catalogue of over 100 drugs and commonly used drug regimens-both on- and off-label-for the treatment of all the major cancers." -- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access R2Library [2023]
  • Digital
    J. Donald Boudreau, Eric J. Cassell, Abraham Fuks.
    Summary: This book re imagines the education of medical students in its entire scope, from first year to graduation. The educational blueprint presented here rests on a new definition of sickness, one focused on impairments of function as the primary issue of concern for both patients and their care givers. This perspective avoids the common shift of medical attention from persons to diseases, and thus provides the basis for an authentic and robust patient-centered mindset.

    Contents:
    Health, illness and disease
    Functioning
    The goals of physicians
    Person-centeredness
    The doctor-patient relationship
    The "good doctor"
    The clinical method and subjectivity in medicine
    Medical education : highlights of the past two centuries
    Competency-based education
    The rise and fall of clinical teaching
    Teaching a clinical method adapted to contemporary medicine
    Building on past experience
    Theory
    Educational blueprint: phases I to IV
    Phase I: the person
    Phase II: sick persons
    Phases III and IV: doctoring.
    Digital Access Oxford 2018
  • Digital
    Antonio Pisano.
    Summary: This book, now in its 2nd edition, discusses, explains and provides detailed, up-to-date information on physics applied to clinical practice in anesthesiology and critical care medicine, with the aid of simple examples from daily life. Almost everything that happens around us, including in the operating room and intensive care units, can be explained by physical laws. An awareness and understanding of relatively simple laws such as the Hagen-Poiseuille equation, or of slightly more complex topics such as harmonic motion and electromagnetism, to name just a few, offer anesthesiologists and intensivists fascinating insights into why they do what they do. After an introductory chapter that brushes up on all the (few) mathematics the reader will need to face the book, with many practical examples and clinical applications, each of the following 20 chapters deals with some everyday phenomena, explains them with one or more physical laws, and shows why these laws are important in anesthesia and critical care practice. Many illustrations are included for extra clarity. This enriched and updated edition of Physics for Anesthesiologists is intended for anesthesiologists, intensivists, anesthesia and intensive care medicine teachers and trainees, as well as medical students.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Patricia Bassereau, Pierre Sens, editors.
    Summary: This book mainly focuses on key aspects of biomembranes that have emerged over the past 15 years. It covers static and dynamic descriptions, as well as modeling for membrane organization and shape at the local and global (at the cell level) scale. It also discusses several new developments in non-equilibrium aspects that have not yet been covered elsewhere. Biological membranes are the seat of interactions between cells and the rest of the world, and internally, they are at the core of complex dynamic reorganizations and chemical reactions. Despite the long tradition of membrane research in biophysics, the physics of cell membranes as well as of biomimetic or synthetic membranes is a rapidly developing field. Though successful books have already been published on this topic over the past decades, none include the most recent advances. Additionally, in this domain, the traditional distinction between biological and physical approaches tends to blur. This book gathers the most recent advances in this area, and will benefit biologists and physicists alike.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Part I Introduction; Understanding Membranes and Vesicles: A Personal Recollection of the Last Two Decades; 1 Introduction; 2 Fluid Domains and Rafts in Fluid Membranes; 2.1 Intramembrane Domains in Ternary Lipid Mixtures; 2.2 Lipid Phase Domains or Rafts In Vivo; 2.3 Intramembrane Domains Arising from Protein Clusters; 3 Segmentation of Membranes by Heterogeneous Environments; 3.1 Lateral Diffusion in Cell Membranes; 3.2 Ambience-Induced Segmentation of Membranes; 3.3 Impeded Formation of Intramembrane Domains; 4 Emergence of Membrane Curvature on Nanoscopic Scales 10.3 Exergonic Fission for Large Spontaneous Curvatures10.4 Free Energy Difference for Domain-Induced Fission; 11 Summary and Outlook; References; Advanced Concepts and Perspectives of Membrane Physics; Abbreviations; 1 Introduction; 2 The Composite Cell Membrane a Multipurpose Machine; 3 Generation of Functional Membrane Domains by Electrostatic-Hydrophobic Recruitment of Proteins; 4 Transmembrane Signal Transmission by Remodeling of Plasma Membranes; 4.1 Regulation of PI(4,5)P2-PI(3,4,5)P3 Equilibrium by the Tandem PTEN and PI-3K (Fig. 4a) 4.1 Basic Aspects of Membrane Curvature4.2 Tensionless States of Membranes; 4.3 Simulations of More Complex Membrane Processes; 5 Local Curvature Generation and Spontaneous Curvature; 5.1 Local Curvature Generated by Membrane-Bound Proteins; 5.2 From Local to Spontaneous Curvature; 5.3 Short History of Spontaneous Curvature; 5.4 Sign of Spontaneous Curvature; 6 Two Mechanisms for the Formation of Membrane Nanotubes; 6.1 Spontaneous Tubulation of Membranes; 6.2 Necklace-to-Cylinder Transformation of Nanotubes; 6.3 Increased Robustness of Tubulated Vesicles 6.4 Force-Induced Tubulation of Membranes7 Interplay Between Spontaneous and Force-Induced Tubulation; 7.1 Tube Width Determined by Composite Curvature; 7.2 Composite Curvature and Total Membrane Tension; 7.3 Total Membrane Tension Versus Aspiration Tension; 7.4 Different Parameter Regimes; 8 Engulfment of Nanoparticles by Membranes; 8.1 Nanoparticles in Contact with Membranes; 8.2 (In)stability of Free Particle State and Onset of Adhesion; 8.3 (In)stability of Completely Engulfed Particle State; 8.4 Engulfment Regimes of Single Nanoparticles 8.5 Engulfment Regimes and Local Energy Landscapes8.6 Exocytic Engulfment of Interior Nanoparticles; 8.7 Engulfment Patterns and Curvature-Induced Forces; 8.8 Further Aspects of Membrane-Nanoparticle Interactions; 9 Wetting of Membranes by Aqueous Droplets; 9.1 Transitions Between Distinct Wetting Morphologies; 9.2 Partial Wetting and Apparent Contact Angles; 9.3 Intrinsic Contact Angles; 9.4 Nucleation and Growth of Nanodroplets at Membranes; 10 Topological Transformations of Membranes; 10.1 Free Energy Landscapes of Fusion and Fission; 10.2 Exergonic Fusion for Small Spontaneous Curvatures
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Val M. Runge, Wolfgang R. Nitz, Miguel Trelles, Frank L Goerner.
    Summary: "The text is organized into concise chapters, each discussing an important point relevant to clinical MR and illustrated with images from routine patient exams. The topics covered encompass the breadth of the field, from imaging basics and pulse sequences to advanced topics including contrast-enhanced MR angiography, spectroscopy, perfusion, and advanced parallel imaging techniques. Discussion of the latest hardware and software innovations--for example, MR-PET, interventional MR, compressed sensing, and multishot EPI--is included because these topics are critical to current and future advances. Included in the third edition are a large number of new topics, keeping the text up-to-date in this increasingly complex field. The text has also been revised to include additional relevant clinical images, to improve the clarity of descriptions, and to increase the depth of content"--Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    Val M. Runge, Wolfgang R. Nitz, Johannes T. Heverhagen.
    Summary: "To make optimal use of MRI technology, radiologists need an understanding of MRI physics. This can be a difficult area to master for radiologists, and it becomes increasingly challenging as new MRI techniques and new software programs are introduced. While most MRI physics books and chapters are filled with dense text and equations, Runge's book takes a very reader-friendly and practice-oriented approach, leading with images and presenting clear, concise text on understanding MRI physics and on using these principles to acquire optimal MRI Images and interpret results. The new edition text and images are extensively revised to reflect developments in the field, and there are 12 new chapters"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Runge, Val M.; Heverhagen, Johannes T.
    Summary: The objective of this 5th edition of the book, as with the prior editions, is to teach through images a practical approach to magnetic resonance (MR) physics and image quality. Unlike other texts covering this topic, the focus is on clinical images rather than equations. A practical approach to MR physics is developed through images, emphasizing knowledge of fundamentals important to achieve high image quality. Pulse diagrams are also included, which many at first find difficult to understand. Readers are encouraged to glance at these as they go through the text. With time and repetition, as a reader progresses through the book, the value of these and the knowledge thus available will become evident (and the diagrams themselves easier to understand). The text is organized into concise chapters, each discussing an important point relevant to clinical MR and illustrated largely with images from routine patient exams. The topics covered encompass the breadth of the field, from imaging basics and pulse sequences to advanced topics including contrast-enhanced MR angiography, spectroscopy, perfusion and advanced parallel imaging/data sparsity techniques. Discussion of the latest hardware and software innovations, for example next generation low field MR, deep learning, MR-PET, 7 T, interventional MR, 4D flow, CAIPIRINHA, spiral techniques, radial acquisition, simultaneous multislice, compressed sensing and MR fingerprinting, is included because these topics are critical to current clinical practice as well as to future advances. Included in the fifth edition are a large number of new topics, keeping the text up to date in this increasingly complex field. The text has also been thoroughly revised to include additional relevant clinical images, to improve the clarity of descriptions, and to increase the depth of content. The book is highly recommended for radiologists, physicists, and technologists interested in the background of image acquisition used in standard as well as specialized clinical settings. .

    Contents:
    Section I. Hardware
    Section II. Basic Imaging Physics
    Section III. Basic Image Acquisition
    Section IV. Advanced Image Acquisition
    Section V. Flow
    Section VI. Tissue-
    Section VII. Artifacts, Including Those Due to Motion, and the Recluction Thereof
    Section VIII. Further Improving Diagnostic Quality, Technologic Innovation
    Section IX Recent Innovations
    Section X Appendix.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Magnus Dahlbom.
    Contents:
    Principles of SPECT and PET imaging / Magnus Dahlbom and Michael A. King
    Scintillators for PET and SPECT / Charles L. Melcher
    Photodetectors / Magnus Dahlbom
    Acquistion electronics / Thomas K. Lewellen
    SPECT instrumentation / Wei Chang, Michael Rozler, and Scott D. Metzler
    PET instrumentation / Andrew L. Goertzen and Jonathan D. Thiessen
    SPECT corrections: quantitative SPECT / Irène Buvat
    PET corrections/quantitative PET / Suleman Surti
    Image reconstruction for PET and SPECT / Richard M. Leahy, Bing Bai, and Evren Asma
    High-performance computing in emission tomography / Guillem Pratx
    Methods and applications of dynamic SPECT imaging / Anna M. Celler, Troy H. Farncombe, Alvin Ihsani, Arkadiusz Sitek and R. Glenn Wells
    Dynamic PET imaging / Sung-Cheng Huang and Koon-Pong Wong
    PET/CT / Søren Holm, Osama Mawlawi, and Thomas Beyer
    SPECT/CT / Yothin Rakvongthai, Jinsong Ouyang, and Georges El Fakhri
    PET/mri instrumentation and applications / Ciprian Catana and Leon Menezes
    Preclinical PET and SPECT / Steven R. Meikle, Andre Z. Kyme, Peter Kench, Frederic Boisson, Arvind Parmar
    Clinical applications of PET-CT and SPECT-CT imaging / Johannes Czernin, Ora Israel, Ken Herrmann, Martin Barrio, David Nathanson, and Martin Allen-Auerbach.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Print
    Oordt, Marinus van.
    Contents:
    Bd.
    1. Die Behandlung innerer Krankheiten durch Klima, spectrale Strahlung und Freiluft, Meteorotherapie.
  • Digital
    Shabir H. Wani, Amita Mohan, Gyanendra Pratap Singh, editors.
    Summary: World population is growing at an alarming rate and may exceed 9.7 billion by 2050, whereas agricultural productivity has been negatively affected due to yield limiting factors such as biotic and abiotic stresses as a result of global climate change. Wheat is a staple crop for ~20% of the world population and its yield needs be augmented correspondingly in order to satisfy the demands of our increasing world population. "Green revolution", the introduction of semi-dwarf, high yielding wheat varieties along with improved agronomic management practices, gave rise to a substantial increase in wheat production and self-sufficiency in developing countries that include Mexico, India and other south Asian countries. Since the late 1980's, however, wheat yield is at a standoff with little fluctuation. The current trend is thus insufficient to meet the demands of an increasing world population. Therefore, while conventional breeding has had a great impact on wheat yield, with climate change becoming a reality, newer molecular breeding and management tools are needed to meet the goal of improving wheat yield for the future. With the advance in our understanding of the wheat genome and more importantly, the role of environmental interactions on productivity, the idea of genomic selection has been proposed to select for multi-genic quantitative traits early in the breeding cycle. Accordingly genomic selection may remodel wheat breeding with gain that is predicted to be 3 to 5 times that of crossbreeding. Phenomics (high-throughput phenotyping) is another fairly recent advancement using contemporary sensors for wheat germplasm screening and as a selection tool. Lastly, CRISPR/Cas9 ribonucleoprotein mediated genome editing technology has been successfully utilized for efficient and specific genome editing of hexaploid bread wheat. In summary, there has been exciting progresses in the development of non-GM wheat plants resistant to biotic and abiotic stress and/or wheat with improved nutritional quality. We believe it is important to highlight these novel research accomplishments for a broader audience, with the hope that our readers will ultimately adopt these powerful technologies for crops improvement in order to meet the demands of an expanding world population

    Contents:
    1. Food production: Global challenges to mitigate climate change
    2. Reduced-immunogenicity wheat now coming to age
    3. Wheat quality improvement for micronutrients
    4. Changing Nutrition Scenario: Color wheat- a new perspective
    5. Genetics and Breeding of Fe and Zn improvement in wheat
    6. Membrane Fluidity and Compositional Changes in Response to High Temperature Stress in Wheat
    7. Current understanding of thermo-tolerance in Wheat
    8. Advances in molecular markers and their use in genetic improvement of wheat
    9. Genomic selection for wheat improvement
    10. Genetic Dissection for Yield and Yield Related Traits in Bread Wheat (Triticum aestium L.)
    11. Marker-assisted breeding for resistance against wheat rusts
    12. Genome Editing and Trait Improvement in Wheat.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Frederick Sargent II [and others].
    Contents:
    Pt 1 Efficiency of young men under temperate conditions
    Pt. II, v. 1. Efficiency of young men under conditions of moderate cold
    Pt. III. Efficiency of young men under conditions of moist heat
    Pt. III, v.2. Efficiency of young men under conditions of moist heat appendices of methods and original data
    Pt. IV. Integrative study of the all-purpose survival ration for temperate, cold and hot weather.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    1
  • Print
    mit Beiträgen von J. Crossland ... [and others].
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L407 .M74 1963
    2
  • Print
    Hrsg. von B. Flaschenträger unter Mitwerkung von E. Lehnartz.
    Contents:
    1. Bd. Die Stoffe
    2. Bd. Der Stoffwechsel.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    F514 .F58
    2
  • Print
    Bell, George Howard.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    F40 .P57 [n.d.]
    1
  • Digital/Print
    [edited by] Patricia J. Metting, PhD.
    Contents:
    High-yield facts
    General principles: cellular physiology
    General principles: multisystem processes
    Physiology of the hematopoeitic and lymphoreticular systems
    Neurophysiology
    Musculoskeletal physiology
    Respiratory physiology
    Cardiovascular physiology
    Gastrointestinal physiology
    Renal and urinary physiology
    Reproductive physiology
    Endocrine physiology.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    QP40 .P73 2014
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Pim van Dijk, Deniz Başkent, Etienne Gaudrain, Emile de Kleine, Anita Wagner, Cris Lanting, editors.
    Contents:
    Effects of Age and hearing loss on the processing of auditory temporal fine structure / Brian C. J. Moore
    Aging effects on behavioural estimates of suppression with short suppressors / Erica L. Hegland and Elizabeth A. Strickland
    Contributions of coding efficiency of temporal-structure and level information to lateralization performance in young and early-elderly listeners / Atsushi Ochi, Tatsuya Yamasoba and Shigeto Furukawa
    Investigating the role of working memory in speech-in-noise identification for listeners with normal hearing / Christian Füllgrabe and Stuart Rosen
    The contribution of auditory and cognitive factors to intelligibility of words and sentences in noise / Antje Heinrich and Sarah Knight
    Do hearing aids improve affect perception? / Juliane Schmidt, Diana Herzog, Odette Scharenborg and Esther Janse
    Suitability of the binaural interaction component for interaural electrode pairing of bilateral cochlear implants / Hongmei Hu, Birger Kollmeier and Mathias Dietz
    Binaural loudness constancy / John F. Culling and Helen Dare
    Intelligibility for binaural speech with discarded low-SNR speech components / Esther Schoenmaker and Steven van de Par
    On the contribution of target audibility to performance in spatialized speech mixtures / Virginia Best, Christine R. Mason, Jayaganesh Swaminathan, Gerald Kidd, Kasey M. Jakien, Sean D. Kampel, Frederick J. Gallun, Jörg M. Buchholz and Helen Glyde
    Optimization of a Spectral contrast enhancement algorithm for cochlear implants based on a vowel identification model / Waldo Nogueira, Thilo Rode and Andreas Büchner
    Roles of the contralateral efferent reflex in hearing demonstrated with cochlear implants / Enrique A. Lopez-Poveda, Almudena Eustaquio-Martín, Joshua S. Stohl, Robert D. Wolford, Reinhold Schatzer and Blake S. Wilson
    Deactivating cochlear implant electrodes based on pitch information for users of the ACE Strategy / Deborah Vickers, Aneeka Degun, Angela Canas, Thomas Stainsby and Filiep Vanpoucke
    Speech masking in normal and impaired hearing: interactions between frequency selectivity and inherent temporal fluctuations in noise / Andrew J. Oxenham and Heather A. Kreft
    Effects of pulse shape and polarity on sensitivity to cochlear implant stimulation: a chronic study in guinea pigs / Olivier Macherey and Yves Cazals
    Assessing the firing properties of the electrically stimulated auditory nerve using a convolution model / Stefan B. Strahl, Dyan Ramekers, Marjolijn M. B. Nagelkerke, Konrad E. Schwarz, Philipp Spitzer, Sjaak F. L. Klis, Wilko Grolman and Huib Versnel
    Modeling the individual variability of loudness perception with a multi-category psychometric function / Andrea C. Trevino, Walt Jesteadt and Stephen T. Neely
    Auditory fMRI of sound intensity and loudness for unilateral stimulation / Oliver Behler and Stefan Uppenkamp
    Tinnitus- and task-related differences in resting-state networks / Cris Lanting, Aron Woźniak, Pim van Dijk and Dave R. M. Langers
    The role of conduction delay in creating sensitivity to interaural time differences / Catherine Carr, Go Ashida, Hermann Wagner, Thomas McColgan and Richard Kempter
    Objective measures of neural processing of interaural time differences / David McAlpine, Nicholas Haywood, Jaime Undurraga and Torsten Marquardt
    Minimum audible angles measured with simulated normally-sized and oversized pinnas for normal-hearing and hearing-impaired test subjects / Filip M. Rønne, Søren Laugesen, Niels S. Jensen and Julie H. Pedersen
    Moving objects in the Barn Owl's auditory world / Ulrike Langemann, Bianca Krumm, Katharina Liebner, Rainer Beutelmann and Georg M. Klump
    Change detection in auditory textures / Yves Boubenec, Jennifer Lawlor, Shihab Shamma and Bernhard Englitz
    The relative contributions of temporal envelope and fine structure to mandarin lexical tone perception in auditory neuropathy spectrum disorder / Shuo Wang, Ruijuan Dong, Dongxin Liu, Luo Zhang and Li Xu
    Interaction of object binding cues in binaural masking pattern experiments / Jesko L.Verhey, Björn Lübken and Steven van de Par
    Speech intelligibility for target and masker with different spectra / Thibaud Leclère, David Théry, Mathieu Lavandier and John F. Culling
    Dynamics of cochlear nonlinearity / Nigel P. Cooper and Marcel van der Heijden
    Responses of the human inner ear to low-frequency sound / Markus Drexl, Eike Krause, Robert Gürkov and Lutz Wiegrebe
    Suppression measured from chinchilla auditory-nerve-fiber responses following noise-induced hearing loss: adaptive-tracking and systems-identification approaches / Mark Sayles, Michael K. Walls and Michael G. Heinz
    Does signal degradation affect top-down processing of speech? / Anita Wagner, Carina Pals, Charlotte M. de Blecourt, Anastasios Sarampalis Deniz Baṣkent
    The effect of peripheral compression on syllable perception measured with a hearing impairment simulator / Toshie Matsui, Toshio Irino, Misaki Nagae, Hideki Kawahara and Roy D. Patterson
    Towards objective measures of functional hearing abilities / Hamish Innes-Brown, Renee Tsongas, Jeremy Marozeau and Colette McKay
    Connectivity in language areas of the brain in cochlear implant users as revealed by fNIRS / Colette M. McKay, Adnan Shah, Abd-Krim Seghouane, Xin Zhou, William Cross and Ruth Litovsky
    Isolating neural indices of continuous speech processing at the phonetic level / Giovanni M. Di Liberto and Edmund C. Lalor
    Entracking as a brain stem code for pitch: the Butte Hypothesis / Philip X Joris
    Can temporal fine structure and temporal envelope be considered independently for pitch perception? / Nicolas Grimault
    Locating melody processing activity in auditory cortex with magnetoencephalography / Roy D. Patterson, Martin Andermann, Stefan Uppenkamp and André Rupp
    Studying effects of transcranial alternating current stimulation on hearing and auditory scene analysis / Lars Riecke
    Functional organization of the ventral auditory pathway / Yale E. Cohen, Sharath Bennur, Kate Christison-Lagay, Adam Gifford and Joji Tsunada
    Neural segregation of concurrent speech: effects of background noise and reverberation on auditory scene analysis in the ventral cochlear nucleus / Mark Sayles, Arkadiusz Stasiak and Ian M. Winter
    Audio visual integration with competing sources in the framework of audio visual speech scene analysis / Attigodu Chandrashekara Ganesh, Frédéric Berthommier and Jean-Luc Schwartz
    Relative pitch perception and the detection of deviant tone patterns / Susan L. Denham, Martin Coath, Gábor P. Háden, Fiona Murray and István Winkler
    Do Zwicker tones evoke a musical pitch? / Hedwig E. Gockel and Robert P. Carlyon
    Speech coding in the midbrain: effects of sensorineural hearing loss / Laurel H. Carney, Duck O. Kim and Shigeyuki Kuwada
    Sources of variability in consonant perception and implications for speech perception modeling / Johannes Zaar and Torsten Dau
    On detectable and meaningful speech-intelligibility benefits / William M. Whitmer, David McShefferty and Michael A. Akeroyd
    Individual differences in behavioural decision weights related to irregularities in cochlear mechanics / Jungmee Lee, Inseok Heo, An-Chieh Chang, Kristen Bond, Christophe Stoelinga, Robert Lutfi and Glenis Long
    On the interplay between cochlear gain loss and temporal envelope coding deficits / Sarah Verhulst, Patrycja Piktel, Anoop Jagadeesh and Manfred Mauermann
    Frequency tuning of the efferent effect on cochlear gain in humans / Vit Drga, Christopher J. Plack and Ifat Yasin.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    edited by E.J. Briskey, R.G. Cassens [and] J.C. Trautman.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    I602.1 .B85 1965
    1
  • Digital
    S. Ali Mirjalili, editor.
    Summary: This book is designed as a learning tool to assist candidates to become familiar with the common, yet often complex, physiology topics covered in the GSSE examination. Its aim is to give candidates ideas to focus their studies in high yield areas. It is specially designed for the GSSE exam, which is a requirement for applying any surgical program in Australia and New Zealand. An important component of the guide is diagrams to aid better understanding of normal human physiology. Great care has been taken to ensure the subject and emphasis of the questions accurately simulates the actual exam. The book is organized in 5 chapters, totaling 140 pages including colour images, diagrams and tables. This is an accompany book with Anatomy for the Generic Surgical Sciences Examination (GSSE), Springer, 2017, which is written by the same author.

    Contents:
    Intro; Contents;
    Chapter 1: Endocrine and Reproductive Physiology; 1.1 Mechanisms of Hormonal Action; 1.2 Hypothalamus and Posterior Pituitary; 1.3 Anterior Pituitary; 1.4 Adrenal Medulla; 1.5 Adrenal Cortex; 1.6 Thyroid Hormones; 1.7 Calcium and Phosphate Metabolism; 1.8 Glucoregulatory Hormones; 1.9 Female Hormones; 1.10 Male Hormones;
    Chapter 2: Gastrointestinal Physiology; 2.1 Gastrointestinal Function; 2.2 Liver and Pancreas; 2.3 Stomach, Small Intestine and Large Intestine; 2.4 Hormones; 2.5 Absorption of Nutrients; 2.6 Disorders of Swallowing and of the Oesophagus
    Chapter 3: Cardiovascular Physiology3.1 The Cardiac Cycle: Mechanical Events; 3.2 Conduction with ECG; 3.3 Cardiac Output; 3.4 Blood Pressure; 3.5 Control Through Different Circulations; 3.6 Flow, Arteries, Veins and Lymph;
    Chapter 4: Respiratory Physiology; 4.1 Structure and Function; 4.2 Ventilation; 4.3 Diffusion; 4.4 Blood Flow and Metabolism; 4.5 Ventilation-Perfusion Relationship; 4.6 Gas Transport in the Blood; 4.7 Mechanics of Breathing; 4.8 Control of Ventilation;
    Chapter 5: Renal Physiology; 5.1 Body Water; 5.2 Function of Glomerulus and Tubules; 5.3 Renal Blood Flow 5.4 Control of Osmolarity, ECF and RBF5.5 Acid Base; 5.6 Ion Transport; Index
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Nikolai Petrovich Alekseev.
    Summary: This comprehensive Monograph examines all peripheral and central mechanisms of regulating the secretion of milk from the lactating breast. The author reviews the complete female breast development, starting with the early childhood, up to pregnancy and lactation. Structural and ultrastructural data on the alveolar-ductal system, together with details of breast innervation, are used to investigate the physiological process of lactation. Readers will appreciate the special focus on reflexes, both in the child and the mother, that help to regulate maternal milk production and secretion. Following this, the author sheds a light on the composition and dynamics of milk components during the different periods of lactation. The final section of this volume focusses on practical aspects of modern breastfeeding, like the use of breast pumps or galactogogues, to influence the productivity of milk production. These fundamental principles and structural details will be particularly useful for physiologists and clinicians working in gynecology and pediatrics.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Introduction
    Chapter 2: Origin and development of the breast
    Chapter 3: Structure of the lactating breast
    Chapter 4: Breast function during the initial period of lactation (lactogenesis I and II)
    Chapter 5: The period of established lactation (lactogenesis III).
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Zsolt Radák.
    Summary: The Physiology of Physical Training provides complete coverage of the physiological and methodological aspects of physical training, providing essential knowledge for anyone involved in exercise physiology. Physiological processes at the cellular level (and for the whole organism) are covered to better explain particular training methods and convey a deeper knowledge and understanding of training techniques. Coverage of exercise training-induced adaptive responses and the most appropriate training methods to bring about targeted adaptive changes are also included. This is the perfect reference for researchers of physiology/kinesiology and human kinetics, practicing coaches, graduate students and sports medicine specialists.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Print
    foreword by Walter B. Lancaster.
    Contents:
    v. 1. Optics
    v. 2. Vision.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    Q5 .L75
    2
  • Digital
    editor-in-chief Hamid M. Said ; associate editors Fayez K. Ghishan, Jonathan D. Kaunitz, Juanita L. Merchant, Jackie D. Wood.
    Summary: "Physiology of the Gastrointestinal Tract, Sixth Edition, a Two-Volume set, covers the study of the mechanical, physical and biochemical functions of the GI Tract by linking clinical disease and disorder, thus bridging the gap between clinical and laboratory medicine while also covering breakthroughs in gastroenterology, such as the brain-gut axis and microbiome. Additionally, information is provided at the organism level, including animal models of gastrointestinal disorders and therapeutic possibilities. The book covers a wide range of conditions, from food allergies, constipation, chronic liver disease and IBS, also exploring emerging techniques to diagnose and normalize functions of the GI tract. As a highly referenced book, this is a useful resource for gastroenterologists, physiologists, internists, professional researchers and instructors teaching courses for clinical and research students. Discusses the multiple processes governing gastrointestinal function Presents new information on the brain-gut axis and microbiome Edited by preeminent scientists in the field Includes coverage of issues, such as food allergies, constipation, chronic liver disease, IBS, Crohn's disease, and more"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Volume 1. Section I: Basic cell physiology, genetics, and growth of the GI tract
    Transcription and epigenetic regulation
    Gastrointestinal hormones
    Growth factors in the intestinal tract
    Hedgehog signaling in gastrointestinal morphogenesis and morphostasis
    The role of hippo signaling in intestinal homeostasis
    Notch pathway regulation of intestinal cell fate
    WNT signaling in the intestine: development, homeostasis, disease
    The cell cycle
    Cell death
    Molecular physiology of gastrointestinal function during development
    Section II: Neurogastroenterology. Development of the enteric nervous system
    Enteric neurogenesis
    The physiology and pathophysiology of interstitial cells of Cajal: pacemaking, innervation, and stretch sensation
    Enteric nervous system structure and neurochemistry related to function and neuropathology
    Enteric nervous system: brain-in-the-gut
    Brain processing of gastrointestinal sensory signaling
    Extrinsic sensory afferent nerves innervating the gastrointestinal tract in health and disease
    Neuroimaging of brain-gut interactions in functional gastrointestinal disorders
    Enteric neural regulation of mucosal secretion
    Neuromuscular function in the biliary tract
    Physiology of gastric motility patterns
    Clinical and translational aspects of normal and abnormal motility in the esophagus, small intestine and colon
    Neurophysiologic mechanisms of human large intestinal motility
    Neuromuscular physiology of the pelvic floor
    Section III: Host environmental interaction. Tight junctions and the intestinal barrier
    Gut barrier: adaptive immunity
    Gut barrier: innate immunity
    Chemosensing in the colon
    Mucosal restitution and repair
    Luminal chemosensing and mucosal defenses in the upper GI tract
    Intestinal tuft cells
    Section IV: Gut microbiome. Gastrointestinal microbial ecology with perspectives on health and disease
    Diet effects on gut microbiome composition, function, and host physiology
    Influence of the gut microbiome on immune development during early life
    Gut microbiome and metabolism
    Microbial physiology of the digestive tract and its role in inflammatory bowel diseases
    Volume 2. Section V: Physiology of secretion. Salivary gland secretion
    The cell biology of gastric acid secretion
    Structure-function relationships in the pancreatic acinar cell
    Regulation of pancreatic secretion
    Bile formation and the enterohepatic circulation
    Mechanisms of hepatocyte organic anion transport
    Mechanisms of hepatocyte detoxification
    Physiology of cholngiocytes
    Section VI: Digestion and absorption. Molecular mechanisms of polarized protein trafficking in epithelial cells
    Sugar absorption
    Protein digestion and absorption
    Enterocyte fatty acid handling proteins and chylomicron formation
    Genetic regulation of intestinal lipid transport and metabolism
    Digestion and intestinal absorption of dietary carotenoids and vitamin A
    The vitamin D system: biological and molecular actions in the intestine and colon
    Bioavailability of vitamin E
    Intestinal absorption of vitamin K: cellular and molecular mechanisms
    Intestinal absorption of water-soluble vitamins: cellular and molecular mechanisms
    Water transport in the gastrointestinal tract
    Na+/H+ exchange in mammalian digestive tract
    Intestinal anion absorption
    Ion channels of the gastrointestinal epithelial cells
    Molecular mechanisms of intestinal transport of calcium, phosphate, and magnesium
    Mechanisms and regulation of intestinal iron transport
    Trace metal absorption and transport
    Section VII: Integrated GI physiology and pathophysiology. The gastrointestinal tract and control of food intake
    Mechanisms of helicobacter pylori-induced gastric inflammation
    Host-pathogen interactions in pathophysiology of diarrheal disorders
    Recruitment of inflammatory and immune cells in the gut
    Mechanisms of gastrointestinal malignancies
    Neuropathophysiology of the irritable bowel syndrome
    Pathophysiology of diarrhea and its clinical implications
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital/Print
    Contents:
    [1] 1901-1921.
    [2] 1922-1941.
    [3] 1942-1962.
    [4] 1963-1970.
    Digital Access 1901-present.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    v. 1-3, 1964-67.
    (Covers 1901-1962)
    QP31.2 .P497
    3
  • Digital
    Abraham M. Joshua, editor.
    Summary: This is a comprehensive book on physiotherapy for adult neurological disorders with chapters describing physiotherapy assessment and management for those adult patients in the acute care and rehabilitation units of hospitals or centers. Each chapter additionally provides brief introduction, historical background, etiology, pathophysiology, clinical manifestations, medical and surgical management. The aim is to help build a theoretical foundation on which principles of management are laid, and to improve and update the readers' clinical and therapeutic skills. Improving the overall care and management of patients suffering from adult neurological conditions such as stroke, Parkinson's disease, traumatic brain injury, and multiple sclerosis, is the key objective. Supported with ample practical contents (exercise training and therapeutic strategies) and pictures it prepares the readers to effectively manage patients with neurological conditions. The contents of this book will serve as a guide and source of knowledge of both contemporary and advanced treatment techniques for undergraduate and post-graduate students and therapists practicing worldwide in adult neurological physiotherapy.

    Contents:
    1 Neuroplasticity
    2 Therapeutic Approaches
    3 Stroke
    4 Extrapyramidal Disorders
    5 Cerebellar Dysfunction
    6 Traumatic Brain Injury
    7 Vestibular Rehabilitation
    8 Motor Neuron Disease
    9 Multiple Sclerosis
    10 Infections Of The Central Nervous System
    11 Peripheral Nerve Disorders
    12 Muscular Dystrophies
    13 Myasthenia Gravis
    14 Perceptual Disorders
    15 Neurobehavioral Issues In Adult Neurological Conditions
    16 Gadgets And Technologies In Adult Neurological Physiotherapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Naveen Kumar Arora, Narendra Kumar, editors.
    Summary: The increasing human population and the associated activities have negatively influenced the ecosystems and life on earth. The continuous addition of agrochemicals, heavy metals and industrial wastes/ effluents in the ecosystems have caused great harm, including loss of productivity, biodiversity, climate change and diseases in plants, animals and humans, resulting in increased marginal lands and endangered sustainability of life on earth. Hence, there is an urgent need to reverse the impact of dangerous pollutants through a holistic, sustainable and biotic approach. Bioremediation involves the utilization of biological systems, mainly plants (phytoremediation) or microorganisms or both in combination (rhizoremediation) for the removal or degradation of pollutants and revive the habitats in an eco-friendly manner. Recently, there have been many success stories related to bioremediation involving plants or plant-microbe interactions. These success stories are related to the removal of heavy metals, pesticides, polyaromatic hydrocarbons, explosives, radionuclides or reduction of biological oxygen demand, total dissolved solids, total suspended solids, oil spills in water bodies. Rhizoremediation has also been successfully used for reclamation of saline or marginal soils. With the range of pollutants and the total area (on earth) covered by these toxic chemicals, it is important that these eco-friendly technologies be utilized in a better way. The book throws light on the recent happenings, research and success stories related to bioremediation of polluted habitats through phytoremediation or rhizoremediation. The book also highlights some of the significantly important plant and microbial species involved in remediation, the physiology, biochemistry and the mechanisms of remediation by various plants and microbes, and suggestions for future improvement of bioremediation technology.

    Contents:
    1. Natural and artificial soil amendments for the efficient phytoremediation of contaminated soil 2. Rhizoremediation: A sustainable approach to improve the quality and productivity of polluted soils. 3. Phycoremediation of Pollutants for Ecosystem Restitution 4. Phytoremediation of heavy metals and pesticides present in water using aquatic macrophytes 5. Plant growth promoting rhizospheric microbes for remediation of saline soils 6. Plant-microbe-soil interactions for reclamation of degraded soils: potential and challenges 7. Lichens as sinks of airborne organic pollutants: A case study in the natural ecosystem of Himalayas 8. Rhizoremediation of poly aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs): A task force of plants and microbes 9. Cadmium stress tolerance in plants and role of beneficial soil microorganisms 10. Acid Tolerant Microbial Inoculants
    A Requisite for Successful Crop Production in Acidic Soils 11. Plant growth promoting microbes as front runners for onsite remediation of organophosphate pesticide residues in agriculture soils 12. Influence of zeolite support on integrated biodegradation and photodegradation of molasses wastewater for organic load reduction and colour removal 13. An overview on the microbial degradation of linear alkylbenzenesulfonate (LAS) surfactants.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Manoj Kumar Solanki, Prem Lal Kashyap, Baby Kumari, editors.
    Summary: To satisfy the food demands of the global population, advanced technology based research is needed, that can extract the information from the plant metabolism and microbial gene pool and use it for improving plant health and productivity. Modern biotechnological tools have the ability to unlock the limitations of agricultural practices. However, the application of these tools is not well equipped. Moreover, eco-friendly agriculture by microbial inoculants is known to have positive influences on soil/plant health. Therefore it is relevant to explore the plant associated microbial niches, especially endophytes, epiphytes, and soil microbes and understand how they are benefitting each other. It can open new insights to develop sustainable agriculture practices by using consortia of microbes as plant helpers that recover the imbalanced agriculture systems and manage pathogenic diseases. This book presents the updates about the plant associated microbiomes and their contemporary uses. It covers the knowledge gap between soil and plant helper microbiomes and their application in the agriculture and allied sectors. Modern insights of phytobiomes are explored in various chapters on a variety of interrelated aspects of the fascinating areas like plant microbial interaction, integrated pest management, soil fertility intensification, sustainable crop production, and disease management. Sections in the book describe how to plant beneficial microbiomes have been utilized for sustainable green farming, with the aim to resolve the global food problem without harming the soil and environment health. This book is intended for everyone who is involved in agriculture, microbial biotechnology, bioinformatics, and all disciplines related to microbial biotechnology. These include academic students, scientists, and researchers at universities, institutes, industries, and government organizations who want to understand microbial linkages in a shorter time. It contains basic information th at will be help to the non-specialist readers to understand progressive research.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    1: Phytobiomes: Role in Nutrient Stewardship and Soil Health
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Plant-Soil-Microbe Interactions in a Typical Phytobiome
    1.3 Beneficial Rhizospheric Microbes and Phytobiome
    1.4 Phytobiome and Nutrient Stewardship in Soil
    1.4.1 C-Cycle and Phytobiome
    1.4.1.1 Endurance of Soil Organic Matter and Its Microbial Decomposition
    1.4.1.2 Microbial Functions in Soil Carbon Cycle Subsequent Climate Change
    1.4.1.3 Microbial Growth Dynamics and Energy Balance
    1.4.2 N Cycle and Phytobiome 1.4.2.1 Nitrogen Fixation and Transformations
    1.4.2.2 N in Soil and Its Mineralization
    1.4.3 Phosphorus Nutrition and Phytobiome
    1.4.3.1 Phytobiomes and P Nutrition in Plants
    1.4.3.2 Microbiome and P Nutrition in Plants
    1.4.3.3 Rhizosphere Engineering and P Nutrition
    1.4.4 K-Bioavailability and Phytobiome
    1.4.4.1 K-Solubilizing Microbial Species
    1.4.5 S Cycle and Phytobiome
    1.4.5.1 Mineralization and Immobilization of Sulfur
    1.4.5.2 Microbial Oxidation and Reduction of S
    1.4.6 Trace Metals and Phytobiome 1.4.6.1 Conducive Soil Condition for Trace Metal Toxicity
    1.4.6.2 Trace Metals' Crop Response and Phytoremediation
    1.4.6.3 Siderophore and Phytosiderophore Engineering and Trace Metal Chemistry
    1.5 Phytobiome: An Early Indicator of Soil Health
    1.6 Future Outlook
    1.7 Conclusions
    References
    2: Role of a Quorum Sensing Signal Acyl-Homoserine Lactone in a Phytobiome
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Plant Senses and Responds to AHL
    2.3 AHL Impact on Plant Root Growth and Architecture
    2.4 AHL as Plant Strengthener
    2.5 Effect of AHL on Symbiosis and Nitrogen Cycle 2.6 AHL-Induced Plant Diseases
    2.7 AHL Uptake in Plant and Possible Signaling Pathways for Plant Response to AHL
    2.8 Plant Interference with QS Signals
    2.8.1 Plant Interferes with QS via AHL Mimics
    2.8.2 Plant Metabolites and Enzymatic Interference of QS
    2.9 Role of Endophyte in a Phytobiome
    2.10 Conclusion and Forthcoming Prospects
    References
    3: Plant Microbiomes: Understanding the Aboveground Benefits
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Soil Microbiome Characterization
    3.3 Structural and Compositional Factors in Plant-Associated Microbial Network 3.3.1 Plant-Associated Bacterial and Archaeal Microbiomes
    3.3.2 The Fungal Microbiota of Plants
    3.3.3 Plant-Associated Protists: The Outcasted Fraction of the Plant Microbiota
    3.4 Microbial Currency: Exudates
    3.4.1 Plant Uptake and Release
    3.4.2 Microbial Uptake/Release
    3.5 Ecological Considerations for Utilizing Plant's Benefits in the Farmer's Field
    3.5.1 Impact on Plant Functions
    3.5.2 Impact on Bacterial Functions
    3.6 Formation of Biofilm
    3.7 Molecular Communications
    3.8 Ecology of the Microbiome
    3.8.1 Rhizosphere and Rhizoplane
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Vivek Kumar, Manoj Kumar, Ram Prasad, editors.
    Summary: This book offers present-day retrospectives and future perspectives on 'phytobiont' studies in the context of phyto-micro restitution, filling some of the information gaps in this promising research field. It discusses several ecosystem restitution strategies using dissimilar groups of microbes alone or in association with plants, as well as advances in metagenomics technology for studying in situ micro and macro communities in contaminated soil. It addresses topics such as the status quo, and the perspectives of microbial researchers and scientists, foresters, students, environmentalists, agriculturists and professional engineers. The rising pollution levels caused by xenobiotics is one of the biggest problems of our times, and as such the book comprehensively elaborates the latest research in this field and describes how the issue can be tackled using micro-organisms.

    Contents:
    Intro; Contents; About the Editors;
    1: Nanobiotechnology Approaches for Crop Protection; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Nanoparticles Against Pathogens; 1.3 Nanoparticles for Plant Disease Suppression; 1.4 Nano-encapsulated Phytoextracts for the Control of Pest; 1.5 Nanoparticles in Bioremediation; 1.6 Nanosystems in Biofertilizers; 1.7 Conclusions; References;
    2: Roles of Plants and Bacteria in Bioremediation of Petroleum in Contaminated Soils; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Fate of Petroleum in Soil; 2.3 Use Bacteria in Bioremediation; 2.3.1 Thermophilic Bacteria; 2.3.2 Bacterial Populations 2.3.3 Bioaugmentation2.3.4 Effects of Abiotic Factors; 2.3.4.1 Temperature; 2.3.4.2 pH; 2.3.4.3 Other Factors; 2.3.5 Genetic Engineering; 2.3.6 Tracking GMB; 2.4 Phytoremediation: Role of Plants; 2.4.1 The Rhizosphere; 2.4.2 Potential Use of Plants; 2.4.3 Plant-Bacteria Interactions; 2.4.4 Limitations of Petroleum Phytoremediation; 2.5 Conclusion; References;
    3: Recent Advances in Microbial Remediation of Textile Azo Dyes; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Toxicity of Azo Dyes; 3.3 Biodegradation Azo Dyes; 3.3.1 Reduction of Azo Dye; 3.3.2 Degradation of Aromatic Amines; 3.3.3 Decolourisation 3.4 Congo Red, Bordeaux, Ranocid Fast Blue and Blue3.4.1 Reactive Red Black 5, Reactive Orange 16, Disperse Red 78 and Direct Red 81; 3.4.2 Reactive Black-B; 3.4.3 Reactive Blue 160; 3.4.4 C.I. Remazol Red; 3.4.5 Acid Maroon V; 3.4.6 Red 3BN; 3.4.7 Reactive Violet 5R; 3.4.8 Methyl Red; 3.4.9 Acid Orange 10; 3.4.10 Hexavalent Chromium and Reactive Black-5; 3.4.11 Metanil Yellow; 3.4.12 Remazol Black-B; 3.4.13 Scarlet R; 3.4.14 Reactive Yellow 107, Reactive Red 198, Reactive Black-5 and Direct Blue 71; 3.5 Conclusion and Future Prospective; References 4.11 Plant-Microbe Interactions in Management of Phytopathogens4.12 Plant-Microbe Interactions for Enhanced Phytoremediation of Contaminants; 4.12.1 Organic Acids; 4.12.2 Biosurfactants; 4.12.3 Bioaccumulation/Biosorption; 4.12.4 Bioexclusion; 4.12.5 Bioleaching; 4.12.6 Oxidation and Reduction of Metals; 4.13 Conclusion; References;
    5: Phytoremediation for the Elimination of Metals, Pesticides, PAHs, and Other Pollutants from Wastewater and Soil; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Phytoremediation of Soil; 5.3 Soil Phytoremediation Process; 5.3.1 Phytostimulation (Biodegradation of Enhanced Rhizosphere)
    4: Application of Plant-Microbe Interactions in Contaminated Agroecosystem Management4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Beneficial Plant-Microbe Interactions; 4.3 Harmful Plant-Microbe Interactions; 4.4 The Role of Plant Signal Molecules in Plant-Microbe Interactions; 4.5 Role of Microbial Signal Molecules in Plant-Microbe Interactions; 4.6 Bacterial Quorum-Sensing Signals; 4.7 Management of Contaminants in Agroecosystem; 4.8 Advances in Microbial Bioremediation; 4.9 Advances in Phytoremediation; 4.10 Relevance of Plant-Microbe Interactions to Agroecosystem
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Reinhard Jetter.
    Summary: The Phytochemical Society of North America (PSNA) is a nonprofit scientific organization with membership open to those interested in plant biochemistry, phytochemistry, and the role of plant substances in related disciplines. The PSNA exists to encourage and stimulate research in the chemistry and biochemistry of plant constituents, their effects upon plant and animal physiology and pathology, and their industrial importance and utilization. Annual meetings featuring symposium topics of current general interest and contributed papers by conference participants are held throughout Canada, the United States, and Mexico. PSNA meetings provide participants with exposure to cutting-edge research presented by prominent international scientists, but remain intimate enough to allow interaction and collegiality.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Soybean Seed Isoflavonoids: Biosynthesis and Regulation
    Mehran Dastmalchi and Sangeeta Dhaubhadel
    Chapter 2: Biosynthesis of Natural Products in Plants by Fungal Endophytes with an Emphasis on Swainsonine
    Daniel Cook, Dale R. Gardner, James A. Pfister and Daniel Grum
    Chapter 3: Lectins from Medicinal Plants: Bioeffectors with Diverse Activities
    Alexander V. Timoshenko, Irina V. Gorudko and Hans-Joachim Gabius
    Chapter 4: Bioactive Phytochemicals from Canadian Boreal Forest Species Used Traditionally by Eastern James Bay Cree Aboriginals to Treat Diabetes Mellitus
    Jose A Guerrero-Analco, Asim Muhammad, Ammar Saleem, Louis C. Martineau, Lina Musallam, Hoda M. Eid,?Nan Shang, Paleah Black, Alain Currier, Pierre S. Haddad and John T Arnason
    Chapter 5: Bioproducts, Biofuels and Perfumes: Conifer Terpene Synthases and their Potential for Metabolic Engineering
    Philipp Zerbe and Jorg Bohlmann
    Chapter 6: Engineering Elevated Vitamin C in Plants to Improve their Nutritional Content, Growth and Tolerance to Abiotic Stress
    Katherine A Lisko, Siddique I Aboobucker, Raquel Torres and Argelia Lorence
    Chapter 7: Evaluating the Phytochemical Potential of Camelina? an Emerging New Crop of Old World Origin
    Mark A. Berhow, Steven F. Vaughn, Bryan Moser, Deniz Belenli and Umit Polat
    Chapter 8: Analysis of?-Methylamino-Alanine in Environmental and Food Samples
    W. Broc Glover and Susan J. Murch.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Shashank Kumar, Chukwuebuka Egbuna, editors.
    Summary: Phytochemistry is the branch of science that deals with the study of plant-derived chemicals or compounds, which are also known as phytochemicals or plant-derived secondary metabolites. Plants are known to produce phytochemicals that are essential for their growth and reproduction, as they protect them from insects, pathogens, and herbivores. Some of the major groups of plant-derived secondary metabolites are phenolics, flavonoids, terpenoids, alkaloids, tannin etc. Plant-derived phytochemicals are pharmacologically active and have the potential to cure various human diseases and disorders. Natural plant products have been known for their medicinal properties for untold years, and form the basis of several medicinal systems such as Chinese, Unani, and Ayurvedic Medicine. This book offers an essential introduction to phytochemicals and their synthetic analogues. It discusses various in silico approaches used to identify pharmacologically active phytochemicals and their biological activities, as well as in vitro and in vivo models/assays that have been utilized for the pharmacological profiling of plant-derived products to combat cancer, diabetes, cardiovascular diseases and neurological disorders. The intended audience includes upper-level undergraduate and graduate students; researchers and scientists from the pharmaceutical/food chemistry/nutrition sciences/biochemistry, and clinical biochemistry fields; and medical students. Sharing the latest findings, the book will familiarize these readers with the concepts, chemistry, and tremendous potential of phytochemistry.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Sarah E. Edwards, Ines Rocha, Elizabeth M. Williamson, Michael Heinrich.
    Summary: Healthcare professionals, including doctors, pharmacists and nurses, are often confronted with patients who use over-the-counter (OTC) herbal medicinal products and food supplements. While taking responsibility for one's own health and treatment options is encouraged, many patients use these products based on limited (and sometimes inaccurate) information from non-scientific sources, such as the popular press and internet. There is a clear need to offer balanced, well-informed advice to patients, yet a number of studies have shown that, generally, conventionally trained health practitioners consider their knowledge about herbal medicinal products and supplements to be weak. Phytopharmacy fills this knowledge gap, and is intended for use by the busy pharmacist, nurse, or doctor, as well as the 'expert patient' and students of pharmacy and herbal medicine. It presents clear, practical and concise monographs on over a hundred popular herbal medicines and plant-based food supplements. Information provided in each monograph includes: Indications Summary and appraisal of clinical and pre-clinical evidence Potential interactions Contraindications Possible adverse effects An overview of the current regulatory framework is also outlined, notably the EU Traditional Herbal Medicinal Products Directive. This stipulates that only licensed products or registered traditional herbal medicinal products (THRs), which have assured quality and safety, can now legally be sold OTC. Monographs are included of most of the major herbal ingredients found in THRs, and also some plant-basedfood supplements, which while not strictly medicines, may also have the potential to exert a physiological effect.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    Govind Pratap Rao, Assunta Bertaccini, Nicola Fiore, Lia W. Liefting, editors.
    Summary: Provides recent and updated information on emerging and re-emerging phytoplasma diseases affecting important crops in tropics and subtropics. Provides comprehensive information on disease distribution, occurrence, and identification of the phytoplasmas Includes the recent approaches for diagnostics, transmission, and information about losses and geographical distribution along with and management aspects.

    Contents:
    Phytoplasmas: an update
    Phytoplasmas infecting vegetable, pulse and oil crops
    Occurrence and epidemiological aspects of phytoplasmas in cereals
    Phytoplasma diseases of industrial crops
    Grapevine phytoplasmas
    Fruit Crop phytoplasmas
    Phytoplasma diseases in ornamental crops
    Phytoplasma diseases of medicinal crops
    Phytoplasma diseases of palms
    Major phytoplasma diseases of forest and urban trees
    Phytoplasma in weeds and wild plants.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Assunta Bertaccini, Phyllis G Weintraub, Govind Pratap Rao, Nicola Mori, editors.
    Summary: Phytoplasma-associated diseases are a major limiting factor in the context of the quality and productivity of many ornamental, horticultural and other economically important agricultural crops worldwide. Annual losses due to phytoplasma diseases vary, but under pathogen-favorable conditions they have disastrous consequences for the farming community. As there is no effective cure for these diseases, the management options focus on their exclusion, minimizing their spread by insect vectors and propagation materials and on the development of host plant resistance. This book discusses the latest information on the epidemiology and management of phytoplasma-associated diseases, providing a comprehensive, up-to-date overview of distribution, occurrence and identification of the phytoplasmas, recent diagnostics approaches, transmission, losses and geographical distribution as well as management aspects.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Insects as phytoplasma vectors: ecological and epidemiological aspects
    Chapter 2. The biology and ecology of leafhopper transmission of phytoplasmas
    Chapter 3. Psyllid vectors
    Chapter 4. Vector role of cixiids and other planthopper species
    Chapter 5. Transovarial transmission in insect vectors
    Chapter 6. Phytoplasma transmission by seed
    Chapter 7. Transmission of phytoplasmas by agronomic practices
    Chapter 8. Control of phytoplasma diseases through resistant plants
    Chapter 9. Phytoplasma elimination from perennial horticultural crops
    Chapter 10. Microbes relationship with phytoplasmas in plants and insects
    Chapter 11. Integrated management of phytoplasma diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Assunta Bertaccini, Kenro Oshima, Michael Kube, Govind Pratap Rao, editors.
    Summary: Phytoplasma III is the last of three books in the series covering all the aspects of phytoplasma-associated diseases. Phytoplasmas are a major limiting factor in the quality and productivity of many ornamental, horticultural and economically important agriculture crops worldwide, and losses due to phytoplasma diseases have disastrous consequences for farming communities. As there is no effective cure for these diseases, management strategies focus-on exclusion, minimizing their spread by insect vectors and propagation materials, and developing host plant resistance. This book provides an update on genomics, effectors and pathogenicity factors toward a better understanding of phytoplasma-host metabolic interactions. It offers a comprehensive overview of biological, serological and molecular characterization of the phytoplasmas, including recently developed approaches in diagnostics, such as transcriptomics studies, which have paved the way for analyzing the gene expression pattern in phytoplasmas on infection and revealed the up-regulation of genes associated with hormonal response, transcription factors, and signaling genes. Although phytoplasmas remain the most poorly characterized pathogens, recent studies have identified virulence factors that induce typical disease symptoms and have characterized the unique reductive evolution of the genome. Reviewing the advances in cultivation in axenic media together with the perspectives for future research to reduce the global incidence of these pathogens and the associated agricultural losses, the book is a valuable resource for plant pathologists, researchers in agriculture and PhD students.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Genome sequencing
    Chapter 2. Phytoplasma effectors and pathogenicity factors
    Chapter 3. Transcriptomic and proteomic studies of phytoplasma-infected plants
    Chapter 4. Plant-insect host switching mechanism
    Chapter 5. Diversity and functional importance of phytoplasma membrane proteins
    Chapter 6. Phytoplasma cultivation
    Chapter 7. Molecular and serological approaches in detection of phytoplasmas in plants and insects
    Chapter 8. The development and deployment of rapid in-field phytoplasma diagnostics exploiting isothermal amplification DNA-detection systems
    Chapter 9. Multilocus genetic characterization of phytoplasmas
    Chapter 10. Host metabolic interaction and perspectives in phytoplasma research.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Brian R. Shmaefsky, editor.
    Summary: This book provides in-situ phytoremediation strategies that are particularly well suited for developing nations. Its goal is to promote the use of field-tested phytoremediation methods for removing soil and water pollutants from agricultural, industrial, military, and municipal sources. These strategies include using algae and a variety of aquatic and terrestrial plants. The book subsequently discusses the use of crops and native plants for phytoremediation, and how phytoremediation efforts impact the rhizosphere. After having finished the book, readers will be able to directly adapt the strategies described here for their specific purposes.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    1 Principles of Phytoremediation
    1.1 Introduction
    1.1.1 Origins of Phytoremediation
    1.1.2 History of Pollution Remediation
    1.2 Traditional Methods of Removing Contaminants
    1.2.1 Traditional Soil Remediation
    1.2.2 Traditional Methods of Removing Water Contaminants
    1.3 A Survey of Bioremediation
    1.3.1 History of Bioremediation
    1.3.2 Mechanisms of Bioremediation
    1.4 A Survey of Phytoremediation
    1.4.1 Phytoremediation Defined
    1.4.2 History of Phytoremediation
    1.4.3 Mechanisms of Phytoremediation 1.5 Genetic Modification and Phytoremediation
    1.6 The Reality of Phytoremediation
    References
    2 Phytoremediation of Agricultural Pollutants
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Agricultural Pollutants and Their Sources
    2.2.1 Major Agricultural Pollutants
    2.2.2 Mechanism and Sources of Organic and Inorganic Agricultural Pollutants
    2.3 Strategies for the Removal of Agricultural Pollutants
    2.4 Phytoremediation of Nitrates and Phosphorus
    2.4.1 Phytoremediation of Nitrate
    2.4.2 Phytoremediation of Phosphorus
    2.5 Phytoremediation of Heavy Metals
    2.5.1 Pytoextraction of HMs 2.5.2 Phytovolatilization of HMs
    2.5.3 Phytostabilization of HMs
    2.5.4 Rhizofiltration of HMs
    2.5.5 Dendroremediation of HMs
    2.6 Phytoremediation of Pesticides
    2.6.1 Phytoaccumulation/Phytoextraction of Pesticides
    2.6.2 Phytodegradation of Pesticides
    2.6.3 Phytovolatilization of Pesticides
    2.6.4 Rhizoremediation of Pesticides
    2.7 Phytoremediation of Other Pollutants
    2.8 Major Challenges to Phytoremediation
    2.9 Overcoming the Challenges
    2.10 Conclusions
    References
    3 Phytoremediation of Soils Contaminated by Hydrocarbon
    3.1 Introduction 3.2 Contaminated Soil and the Rhizosphere
    3.2.1 The Role of the Microorganisms and the Rhizosphere in the Degradation of Hydrocarbons
    3.3 Degradation of Hydrocarbons Through the Combination of Tree Species and Organic Fertilizers
    3.4 Perspectives and Necessary Research
    3.5 Conclusions
    Literature Cited
    4 In Situ Phytoremediation of Metals
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 What is In Situ Phytoremediation?
    4.3 Mechanisms of In Situ Phytoremediation
    4.3.1 Phytoextraction
    4.3.2 Phytostabilization
    4.3.3 Phytovolatilization
    4.3.4 Phytodegradation 4.4 Advantages of In Situ Phytoremediation
    4.5 Limitations of In Situ Phytoremediation
    4.6 In Situ Phytoremediation of Some Important Metals
    4.6.1 Nickel (Ni)
    4.6.2 Arsenic (As)
    4.6.3 Iron (Fe)
    4.6.4 Cobalt (Co)
    4.6.5 Copper (Cu)
    4.6.6 Selenium (Se)
    4.6.7 Lead (Pb)
    4.6.8 Cadmium (Cd)
    4.6.9 Chromium (Cr)
    4.6.10 Mercury (Hg)
    4.7 Conclusions and Future Recommendations
    References
    5 In Situ Phytoremediation of Uranium Contaminated Soils
    5.1 Introduction
    5.1.1 Uranium-History, Discovery, Occurrence and Uses
    5.1.2 Uranium and Human Health
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Abid A. Ansari, Sarvajeet Singh Gill, Ritu Gill, Guy R. Lanza and Lee Newman.
    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors; Part I: Phytoremediation Applications: An Update;
    Chapter 1: Redesigning Abandoned Gas Stations Through Phytotechnologies; 1.1 Scope andIntroduction; 1.2 Method; 1.3 Background; 1.3.1 Benefits ofReclaiming Urban Brownfields intoPublic Open Space; 1.3.2 Abandoned Gas Stations andTheir Contaminants; 1.3.3 Phytotypologies asPhytotechnology Planting Types; 1.3.4 Application ofPhytotypologies forGas Stations andAuto-Repair Shops; 1.3.4.1 Planted Stabilization Mat; 1.3.4.2 Phytoirrigation; 1.3.4.3 Green andBlue Roof; 1.3.4.4 Interception Hedgerow 1.3.4.5 Degradation Bosque1.3.4.6 Degradation Hedge: Living Fence; 1.3.4.7 Degradation Cover; 1.3.4.8 Airflow Buffer; 1.3.4.9 Stormwater Filter; 1.3.5 Plant Selection; 1.4 Application of Phytotypologies at a Former Gas Station in Hadley, MA; 1.4.1 Site Description and Analysis; 1.4.2 Overall Design Description and Considerations; 1.4.3 Selection and Application of Phytotypologies; 1.5 Concluding Remarks; References;
    Chapter 2: Microbial-Assisted Phytoremediation: A Convenient Use of Plant and Microbes to Clean Up Soils; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Phytoremediation of Metals Assisted by Fungi 2.3 Phytoremediation of Metals Assisted by Bacteria2.4 Phytoextraction; 2.4.1 Assisted by Fungi; 2.4.2 Assisted by Bacteria; 2.5 Conclusions and Future Prospects; References; Part II: Phytoremediation Applications for Contaminated Soils;
    Chapter 3: Sorption: Release Processes in Soil-The Basis of Phytoremediation Efficiency; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Soil Sorption and Bioavailability; 3.2.1 Soil Properties; 3.3 Sorption Processes in Soil; 3.3.1 Modeling Soil Sorption; 3.3.1.1 The Langmuir Equation; 3.3.1.2 The Freundlich Equation; 3.3.1.3 Further Equations; 3.3.2 Desorption Processes 3.4 A Case Study: The Relationship Between Desorption Parameters and Plant Uptake at a Pb Contaminated Site 3.4.1 The Site; 3.4.2 Experimental Procedure; 3.4.3 Results and Discussion; 3.5 Concluding Remarks; References;
    Chapter 4: A Survey on the Metal(loid) Accumulation Ability of Spontaneous and Established Plants for the Phytomanagement of an Industrial Landfill in the Venice Lagoon; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Materials and Methods; 4.2.1 Study Area; 4.2.2 Plant, Water, and Soil Sampling; 4.2.3 Sample Preparation for Soil Characterization and Metal(loid) Analysis in the Matrices 4.2.4 Soil and Groundwater Properties and Chemical Analysis4.2.5 Heavy Metal and Metalloid Concentration Analysis; 4.2.6 Data Analyses; 4.3 Results; 4.3.1 Characterization of Soil and Groundwater; 4.3.2 Characterization o f the Plant Community; 4.3.3 Metal(loid) Concentrations in Plants; 4.3.4 Bioconcentration Factor (BCF); 4.4 Discussion; 4.5 Conclusion; References; Part III: Phytoremediation Applications for Contaminated Waters;
    Chapter 5: Role of PGPR in the Phytoremediation of Heavy Metals and Crop Growth Under Municipal Wastewater Irrigation; 5.1 Introduction; 5.1.1 Phytoremediation
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Iqbal Ramzan.
    Contents:
    Phytotherapies : past, present, and future / Iqbal Ramzan, George Q. Li
    Quality control and quality assurance of phytomedicines : key considerations, methods, and analytical challenges / Wai-Ping Yau, Cheong Hian Goh, Hwee-Ling Koh
    Pre-clinical (in vivo) and laboratory (in vitro) evidence of phytomedicine efficacy / Mohi Iqbal Mohammed Abdul, Tom Hsun-Wei Huang
    Clinical efficacy trials with herbal medicines / Christina L. Nance
    Novel formulations and drug delivery systems for phytotherapies / Shengpeng Wang, Meiwan Chen, Qi (Tony) Zhou, Hak-Kim Chan
    Phytotherapies used by indigenous populations / Bradley S. Simpson, Susan J. Semple
    Phytotherapies from traditional Chinese medicines / Michael Rieder
    Integrating traditional Greco-Arab and Islamic herbal medicine in research and clinical practice / Bashar Saad
    Evolution of herbal medicine in Europe and its relationship with modern medicine / Elizabeth M Williamson, Kelvin Chan
    Chemical classification and chemistry of phytotherapeutic constituents / Pei H. Cui, Colin C. Duke
    Therapeutic potential of ginsenosides in management of atherosclerosis / Xiao-Jing Zhang, Huanxing Su, Jian-Bo Wan, Yi-Tao Wang
    Phytotherapy pharmacophores for major cellular drug targets / Jennifer A. Ong, Paul W. Groundwater, David E. Hibbs
    Use of kava as a phytotherapeutic agent and kava related hepatotoxicity / Dong Fu, Iqbal Ramzan
    Phytotherapies as new drug sources : gossypol and curcumin / Vivian Wan Yu Liao, Rajeshwar Narlawar, David E. Hibbs, Paul W. Groundwater
    Phytotherapies for the management of obesity and diabetes / Michel Rapinski, Alain Cuerrier
    Phytotherapeutics for cancer therapy / Daniel M.-Y. Sze, Hao Liu, Maureen V. Boost, Raimond Wong, Stephen Sagar
    Phytomedicines for fatty liver disease and functional gastrointestinal conditions / George Q. Li, Moon-Sun Kim, Fangming Jin, Jun-Lae Cho
    Phytomedicines for inflammatory conditions / Sigrun Chrubasik
    Phytotherapies for infectious diseases : are these really useful? / Gail B. Mahady, Gabrielle Escalante, Pooja Mikkilineni, Laura J. Mahady, Temitope O. Lawal, Bolanle A. Adeniyi
    Phytomedicines for CNS disorders : safe issues for use with anti-epileptic drugs? / Sophia Yui Kau Fong, Rosina Yau Mok, Qiong Gao, Yin Cheong Wong, Zhong Zuo
    Phytotherapy drug interactions in cancer / Andrew J. McLachlan, Stephen J. Clarke
    Quality use of medicines (QUM) considerations in phytotherapy / Lynn Weekes
    Intellectual property and patent issues with phytotherapy products / Gint Silin, Jennifer Tan, Kelvin Chan
    International regulatory status of phytotherapies / Ernest V. Linek.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    Mohammad Faisal, Quaiser Saquib, Abdulrahman A. Alatar, Abdulaziz A. Al-Khedhairy, editors.
    Summary: This book provides relevant findings on nanoparticles' toxicity, their uptake, translocation and mechanisms of interaction with plants at cellular and sub-cellular level. The small size and large specific surface area of nanoparticles endow them with high chemical reactivity and intrinsic toxicity. Such unique physicochemical properties draw global attention of scientists to study potential risks and adverse effects of nanoparticles in the environment. Their toxicity has pronounced effects and consequences for plants and ultimately the whole ecosystem. Plants growing in nanomaterials-polluted sites may exhibit altered metabolism, growth reduction, and lower biomass production. Nanoparticles can adhere to plant roots and exert physicochemical toxicity and subsequently cell death in plants. On the other hand, plants have developed various defense mechanisms against this induced toxicity. This books discusses recent findings as well as several unresolved issues and challenges regarding the interaction and biological effects of nanoparticles. Only detailed studies of these processes and mechanisms will allow researchers to understand the complex plant-nanomaterial interactions.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Acknowledgments; Contents; Editors and Contributors; About the Editors; List of Contributors;
    1: Nanoparticle Uptake by Plants: Beneficial or Detrimental?; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Nanoparticle Physicochemical Properties; 1.3 Nanoparticles in Agriculture; 1.3.1 Pesticides and Fertilizers; 1.3.2 Nanoparticle Soil Interaction and Accumulation; 1.4 Nanoparticle Uptake in Plants; 1.4.1 Nanoparticle Uptake Routes; 1.4.2 Nanoparticle Composition-Dependent Uptake in Plants; 1.4.3 Nanoparticle Size-Dependent Plant Uptake; 1.4.4 Nanoparticle Crystalline Structure-Dependent Plant Uptake. 1.4.5 Nanoparticle Charge-Dependent Plant Uptake1.5 Detrimental Effect of Nanoparticles in Plants; 1.5.1 Composition and Plant-Specific Phytotoxicity; 1.5.2 Plant Growth Inhibition; 1.5.3 Nutrient Depletion in Nanoparticle-Contaminated Plants; 1.5.4 Nanoparticle-Induced Genotoxicity; 1.5.5 Nanoparticle Transgenerational Effects in Plants; 1.6 Beneficial Effects of Nanoparticles in Plants; 1.7 Nanoparticle Toxicity in Humans and Animals; 1.7.1 Nanoparticle Physicochemical Characteristic-Dependent Toxicity; 1.7.2 Nanoparticle Internalization and Biodistribution. 1.7.2.1 Inhalation, Ingestion, and Dermal Exposure1.7.2.2 Nanoparticle Persistence and Disease; 1.7.2.3 Nanoparticle Size-Dependent Accumulation; 1.7.2.4 Nanoparticle Corona; 1.7.2.5 Nanoparticle Uptake by Cells; 1.7.3 Nanoparticle Association to Respiratory Diseases; 1.7.4 Nanoparticle Association to Cardiovascular Diseases; 1.7.5 Nanoparticles in the Central Nervous System; 1.7.6 Nanoparticle Toxicity Following Maternal Exposure; 1.7.7 Nanoparticles in the Liver, Kidneys, and Other Organs; 1.7.8 Toxicity of Nanoparticles with Various Compositions; 1.7.8.1 Toxicity of Gold Nanoparticles. 1.7.8.2 Toxicity of Silver Nanoparticles1.7.8.3 Toxicity of Titanium Dioxide Nanoparticles; 1.7.8.4 Toxicity of Zinc Oxide Nanoparticles; 1.7.8.5 Toxicity of Copper Oxide Nanoparticles; 1.7.8.6 Toxicity of Cerium Oxide Nanoparticles; 1.7.8.7 Iron Oxide, Cobalt, and Nickel Nanoparticle Toxicity; 1.7.8.8 Toxicity of Silicon and Silica Nanoparticles; 1.7.8.9 Toxicity of Carbon-Based Nanoparticles; 1.7.9 Comparative Toxicity of Nanoparticles with Various Compositions; 1.8 Beneficial or Detrimental Effect of Nanoparticles?; References.
    2: Interplay Between Engineered Nanomaterials (ENMs) and Edible Plants: A Current Perspective2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Engineered Nanomaterials (ENMs); 2.3 Production and Release of ENMs into the Environment; 2.4 Exposure Conditions of Plants to ENMs; 2.5 Mechanisms of ENMs Uptake; 2.6 Foliar Uptake; 2.7 Uptake by Roots; 2.8 Role of Plant Cell Walls and Membranes in Uptake; 2.9 Bioaccumulation and Subcellular Distribution of ENMs in Plants; 2.10 ENM Interactions with Secretions of Plant; 2.11 Biotransformation of ENMs; 2.12 Translocation of ENMs in Plant Tissues.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Nandini Dey, Pradip De, Brian Leyland-Jones, editors.
    Contents:
    PI3K-Akt-mTOR Signaling in Cancer and Cancer Therapeutics
    Part 1: PI3K-mTOR Pathway in Cancers
    The mTOR Complexes in Cancer Cell Metabolism
    PI3K-AKT-mTOR Pathway Co-operates with the DNA Damage Repair Pathway: Carcinogenesis in Triple Negative Breast Cancers and Beyond
    The AKT-mTOR Signaling Pathway for Drug Response Prediction and Prognostic Signatures
    Resistance to PI3K Pathway Inhibition
    Part 2: PI3K-mTOR Pathway in Cancer Medicine
    Combination Therapies Targeting the PI3K/AKT/mTOR Pathways
    Phospho-Inositol-3-Kinase Activity and Dysregulation in Pediatric Leukemia and Lymphoma
    HER2 Signaling Network in Advanced Breast Cancer: Opportunities for Combination Therapies
    The PI3K-mTOR Pathway in Prostate Cancer: Biological Significance and Therapeutic Opportunities.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    co-sponsored by University Affiliated Program, Childrens Hospital of Los Angeles and the University of Southern California Schools of Education and Religion ; editors, Marie K. Poulsen, Gerald I. Lubin.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    BF723.C5 I57 1978
  • Digital
    Antonio Malvasi, Domenico Baldini, editors.
    Summary: This richly illustrated book focuses on one of the specific and crucial steps of the Medically Assisted Procreation techniques that is often overlooked: the oocyte pick-up. Enhanced by a large number of high-quality pictures, this atlas of oocyte retrieval comprehensively describes important aspects such as the setting of the ultrasonic equipment, the choice of needle, the layout of the devices in the room and the technique to be used, which, if not properly handled, can lead to erroneous behaviors. The original and detailed illustrations, mainly microscopic images and explanatory drawings, help readers to better understand how to manage all the phases of the ovarian pick-up and oocyte management. This practical atlas provides a valuable guide for all specialists who want to improve their skills and gain confidence with the MPA techniques.

    Contents:
    Brief Pick Up History. PART I ANATOMY: Pelvic Anatomy
    Ultrasonography Pelvic Anatomy
    Hysteroscopy Before Pick Up
    PART II PREPARATION: Surgery Room Preparation
    Device And Probe Setting
    Patient Preparation
    PART III OVARIAN STIMULATION: Oocyte Stimulation
    Monitoring
    Trigger And Pick Up Timing
    Ultrasound In OHSS
    PART IV PICK UP: Anesthesia Technique And Complications
    The Classic Technique Of Oocyte Pick Up
    Alternative Pick Up Techniques
    Oocyte Pick Up In Poor Responders And Washing Utility
    The Oocyte Pick Up In IVM
    The Pick Up In Oocyte Donation
    The Pick Up Double Stimulation
    PART V COMPLICATIONS : Patients With Hemocoagulative Problems
    Severe And Chronic Complications
    PART VI SPECIAL CASES: Endometriosis Patients
    Oncological Patients
    Patients With Previous Surgery
    ART in aged patient: ovary and uterus implications
    PART VII OOCYTE QUALITY: Oocyte Quality
    Oocyte Damage After The Pick Up
    Relationship Between Oocyte Embryo And Endometrium
    Pharmacological supplementation to improve Oocyte Quality
    Ovarian Aging
    Gamete Aneuploidya
    PART VIII ETHICAL AND MEDICO-LEGAL ISSUES: Ethical Issues
    Medico-Legal Issues.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Bruce J.W. Evans.
    Summary: Now in a fully up-to-date 6th Edition, Pickwell's Binocular Vision Anomalies provides a practical introduction to binocular vision, offering comprehensive theory, how-to clinical guidance, and a summary of current research in a single, consolidated volume. Ideally suited for both students and clinicians, this bestselling text serves as an accessible, evidence-based reference when faced with binocular vision or pediatric challenges. Covers routine examinations and testing protocols, including CISS questionnaire, cover test, foveal suppression, fixation disparity, four prism diopter base out test, Lindblom's method, and double Maddox rod test. Includes numerous video clips of key testing procedures, including new clips on Mallett fixation disparity test and fusional reserve testing, as well as an interactive video quiz to help you test your knowledge. Features sweeping content updates such as the latest information on 3-D displays, therapeutic uses of computer games and virtual reality for vision therapy, computerized testing methodologies, binocular and accommodative mechanisms associated with myopia, updated prescribing criteria, therapeutic use of contact lenses, detection of pathology associated with strabismus, drugs causing diplopia, and the evidence-based treatment of convergence insufficiency syndrome and amblyopia. Contains helpful study features throughout, including Clinical Key Points boxes, step-by-step test routines, typical features of extraocular muscle palsies and syndromes, and Case Study boxes that cover important clinical and legal scenarios, and new boxes that summarize testing procedures for each of the main binocular vision tests. Enhanced eBook version included with purchase. Your enhanced eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references from the book on a variety of devices.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Vinay K. Kapoor, editor.
    Summary: This book covers various aspects of gall bladder cancer, e.g. its epidemiology, etiology, pathology, clinical presentation, diagnosis, investigations, staging, management, prevention, etc. Gall bladder cancer is the most common form of biliary tract cancer worldwide, there are peculiar geographical variations in its incidence; while it is rare in the developed west (North America and Western Europe), high incidence rates are reported from Central and South America, Central and Eastern Europe, East Asia (Japan and Korea) and northern India. In addition, the book addresses a number of related issues including thick walled gall bladder, gall bladder cancer with surgical obstructive jaundice, incidental gall bladder cancer, the role and place of common bile duct excision, the Japanese aggressive surgical approach, management of asymptomatic gall stones, etc. An authoritative work that provides detailed insights into various aspects of gall bladder cancer and its management, the book offers a valuable resource for physicians in high-incidence areas and low-incidence areas alike. It is richly illustrated throughout with radiographs (US, CT, MRI, etc.) and operative and specimen photos.

    Contents:
    Anatomy of the biliary tract
    Physiology of obstructive jaundice
    Epidemiology of gall bladder cancer
    Etiopathology of gall bladder cancer
    Clinical presentation of gall bladder cancer.-Diagnosis and staging of gall bladder cancer
    Management of gall bladder cancer
    Incidental gall bladder cancer
    Adjuvant and neoadjuvant therapy in gall bladder cancer
    Prognosis of gall bladder cancer
    Prevention of gall bladder cancer
    Institutional contributions in gall bladder cancer
    Unanswered questions and areas for research in gall bladder cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Ranna A. Rozenfeld, MD, Professor of Pediatrics, The Warren Alpert Medical School of Brown University, Attending Physician, Division of Critical Care Medicine, Hasbro Children's Hospital, Providence, Rhode Island.
    Summary: "An innovative new survival guide for the pediatric intensive care unit (PICU) The PICU Handbook is a unique, portable compilation of the information essential for residents and fellows to successfully navigate the modern Level 1 and Level 2 pediatric intensive care unit (PICU). Enhanced by numerous tables, formulas, algorithms, guidelines, checklists, rapid-sequence medication formularies, troubleshooting guides, and clinical pearls this is a true must read for all residents and fellows in pediatrics, family medicine, emergency medicine, and critical care, as well as pediatric hospitalists, pediatric nurse practitioners and advance practice nurses, physician assistants, and medical students. The Handbook is designed to be an easy-reference guide and is logically divided into two parts: Part 1: General Pediatric Critical Care covers important topics such as resuscitation and stabilization, surgical critical care procedures, and pharmacology Part 2: Organ Systems includes sections on respiratory, cardiovascular, neurology, renal/fluids & electrolytes, hematology/oncology, gastroenterology/nutrition/hepatology, environmental/toxicology emergencies, and allergy/immunology/genetics The book reflects the fact that pediatric critical care medicine requires a true multidisciplinary approach, with expert chapter contributors who are physicians, nurses, nurse practitioners, respiratory therapists, pharmacists, and nutritionists"-- Provided by publisher. "The essential pediatric critical care data you need to survive the PICU"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2018
  • Digital
    Prasad Kumarasinghe, editor.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Constantin E. Orfanos, Christos C. Zouboulis, Chalid Assaf, editors.
    Summary: The vast majority of the global population has pigmented non-Caucasian skin; accordingly, this book focuses on the diagnosis and management of skin diseases in dark-skinned populations, paying particular attention to different reactive profiles, the frequency and the clinical pictures of diseases in pigmented ethnic skin that arise in hot climate zones. Supplemented by a wealth of high-quality, full-color images, this comprehensive work covers the full range of dermatological entities and issues characteristic of the tropical and subtropical regions of the globe, including those that are now emerging in developed countries as a result of intensified travel, globalized business, and migration. Each disorder is described by respected experts on subtropical and tropical countries, and each chapter is clearly structured, examining the incidence, pathogenesis, clinical presentation, management and course. The book illustrates the clinical features and includes major schedules for the diagnosis and management of skin diseases presented in darkly pigmented to black skin. As such, it offers an invaluable tool for all dermatologists in developing and developed countries, especially those who are used to dealing with skin lesions mainly in white Caucasian skin. While enabling physicians to provide proper advice, medical services and support, Pigmented Ethnic Skin and Imported Dermatoses also represents a guide for a broader range of professionals working for governmental institutions, health and refugee agencies.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Verena Geweniger, Alexander Bohlander.
    Summary: "Millions of people use Pilates training to improve health and fitness, or regain movement capability following injury or disease. Competent, professional support from physiotherapists, sports teachers and trainers is of vital importance for every client or patient. "Pilates: A teachers' manual“ provides you, as a professional, with fundamental teaching structures and practical guidelines. The concepts which characterized the traditional approach to Pilates are combined with the evolved methods of modern Pilates training, and backed up by current findings in sports science and kinesiology."--Publisher's website.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. History
    3. The Pilates concept
    4. Pilates as preventative exercise: foundations
    5. The exercises
    6. Class formats
    7. Therapeutic Pilates: fundamental prinicples
    8. Therapeutic Pilates: applications
    9. Therapeutic Pilates: clinical conditions/patient examples
    10. Pilates and motor learning
    11. General and specialized instruction
    12. Formal basis for the implementation of Pilates training
    Appendix.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Jan G. van den Tweel, editor.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    David Tolhurst.
    Contents:
    INTRODUCTION
    LIST OF PIONEERS
    19TH CENTURY SURGEONS
    Short review of main developments
    Abbe
    Bier
    Diefffenbach
    Fergusson
    Joseph
    Lanz
    Lexer
    Morestin
    20th CENTURY SURGEONS
    Short review of main developments
    Blair
    Burian
    Esser
    Gillies
    Kilner
    Mowlem
    McIndoe
    Sanvenero
    Staige
    Davis.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Von G. Samedi, Therese Bocklage, .
    Contents:
    Breast Cytology
    Female Reproductive System Cytology
    Salivary Gland Cytology
    Gastrointestinal Tract
    Pancreaticobiliary Tract
    Liver Cytology
    Respiratory Tract Cytology
    Urinary Tract Cytology
    Endocrine Cytology
    Body Cavity Fluids
    Lymph Nodes Cytology
    Bone and Soft Tissue Cytology
    Cerebrospinal Fluid Cytology.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Wilfred C.G. Peh, editor.
    Summary: The practice of diagnostic radiology has become increasingly complex, with the use of numerous imaging modalities and division into many subspecialty areas. It is becoming ever more difficult for subspecialist radiologists, general radiologists, and residents to keep up with the advances that are occurring year on year, and this is particularly true for less familiar topics. Failure to appreciate imaging pitfalls often leads to diagnostic error and misinterpretation, and potential medicolegal problems. Diagnostic errors may be due to various factors such as inadequate imaging technique, imaging artifacts, failure to recognize normal structures or variants, lack of correlation with clinical and other imaging findings, and poor training or inexperience. Many, if not most, of these factors are potentially recognizable, preventable, or correctable. This textbook, written by experts from reputable centers across the world, systematically and comprehensively highlights the pitfalls that may occur in diagnostic radiology. Both pitfalls specific to different modalities and techniques and those specific to particular organ systems are described with the help of numerous high-quality illustrations. Recognition of these pitfalls is crucial in helping the practicing radiologist to achieve a more accurate diagnosis.

    Contents:
    Part1: Imaging modality and technique pitfalls
    Radiography and fluoroscopic and contrast-based techniques
    Ultrasonography
    Computed tomography
    Magnetic resonance imaging
    Nuclear medicine imaging including SPECT-CT and PET
    Interventional radiology techniques
    Bone mineral density and quantitative imaging
    Radiation dose management
    Approach to characterizing radiological errors
    Part 2: System-based imaging pitfalls
    Musculoskeletal system
    Spine
    Brain
    Head and neck
    Chest including lungs
    Cardiac and vascular system
    Abdomen- solid organs
    Gastrointestinal system
    Genitourinary system
    Reproductive system- female
    Obstetrics
    Breast
    Pediatrics. .
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Geraldine B Hunt.
    Contents:
    Can't you do anything right / Geraldine B Hunt
    Beastly bellies / Geraldine B Hunt
    The Friday night special, or, Why do patients become critical just before the weekend? / Geraldine B Hunt
    Between a rock and a hard place : when to refer and what do you do when referral is not an option
    Courage, mystery and awe : the intangibles of being a veterinary doctor / Julie M Meadows
    Placed on earth to test us : the not-so-humble spay / Catherine F Le Bars
    "Oops!", not a good word to hear during surgery / Geraldine B Hunt
    Learning the hard way : student, resident, teacher / Geraldine B Hunt
    "But I don't want to look stupid" : how to let others help you / Geraldine B Hunt
    "It didn't look like that on paper" / Geraldine B Hunt
    It will be interesting to see whether that works : how to be a creative surgeon / Geraldine B Hunt
    When the unthinkable happens : mishaps, mis-steps and medical errors / Geraldine B Hunt
    "Things went south, now what?" / Geraldine B Hunt
    There's got to be a morning after : things went wrong, now live with it / Geraldine B Hunt
    One leg too many : patients who lost limbs / Geraldine B Hunt
    Reconstruction rescue : when the hole just keeps getting bigger and bigger / Geraldine B Hunt
    "Why is Sam straining?" : iatrogenic strictures and stray oddities / Geraldine B Hunt
    "An alien in my waiting room" : everyday occurences of the unexpected and unbelievable / Geraldine B Hunt
    Rewind : what would I do differently if I had the chance / Geraldine B Hunt.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Shlomo Melmed.
    Contents:
    Setion I Hypothalamic - Pituitary Function
    1. Pituitary development / Jacques Drouin
    2. Hypothalamic regulation of anterior pituitary function / Anat Ben-Shlomo and Shlomo Melmed
    3. Adrenocorticotrophin / Carmen L. Soto-Rivera and Joseph A. Majzoub
    4. Growth hormone / Vivien S. Bonert and Shlomo Melmed
    5. Prolactin / Nadine Binart
    6. Thyroid-stimulating hormone / Virginia D. Sarapura and Mary H. Samuel
    7. Gonadotrophin hormones / Ursula B. Kaiser
    8. The posterior pituitary / Daniel G. Bichet
    Section II Hypothalamic-Pituitary Disorders
    9. The hypothalamus / Andrea Giustina, Stefano Frara, Alfio Spina and Pietro Mortini
    10. Anterior pituitary failure / John D. Carmichael
    11. Pituitary dysfunction in systemic disorders / Maria Fleseriu
    12. Drugs and pituitary function / Maria Fleseriu
    13. The pituitary gland in pregnancy / Andrea Glezer and Marcello D. Bronstein
    14. Psychiatric disease in hypothalamic-pituitary disorders / Caroline Sievers and Gunter K. Stalla
    Section III Pituitary Tumors
    15. Acromegaly / Shlomo Melmed
    16. Prolactinoma / Phillipe Chanson and Dominique Maiter
    17. Cushing disease / John D.C Newell-Rice
    18. Thyrotrophin-secreting pituitary tumors / Yona Greenman
    19. Nonfunctioning and gonadotrophin-secreting adenomas
    20. Atypical pituitary adenomas / Daniel A. Donoho and Gabriel Zada
    21. Genetics of pituitary tumor syndromes / Adrian F. Daly and Albert Beckers
    22. Nonpituitary sellar masses / Luis V. Syro, Fabio Rotondo, Olga Moshkin and Kalman Kovacs
    Section IV Pituitary Procedures
    23. Pituitary imaging / Marcel Maya and Barry D. Pressman
    24. Pituitary surgery / Rudolf Fahlbusch and Michael Buchfelder.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Gianluca Tamagno, Manuel D. Gahete, editors.
    Summary: Stemming from the ENEA Young Researcher Committee, this didactical book comprehensively discusses all aspects of pituitary adenomas, particularly the practical aspects arising in everyday clinical practice. Offering valuable tips, it serves as a guide for young trainee endocrinologists facing their first cases of pituitary adenomas. It also includes illustrative clinical cases of acromegaly, prolactinomas, Cushing's disease, and TSHomas. In addition, a Questions & Answers section is available online. The mix of fresh enthusiasm and well-established expertise in the field provided by the editors and the committee they belong to make the book both solid and innovative, with an appropriate balance between the traditional knowledge and the most exciting innovations from recent or ongoing research. Written and edited by young researchers active in the field of neuroendocrinology, it is a valuable resource for anyone working or interested in the field.

    Contents:
    Anatomy of the pituitary gland
    Physiology of the pituitary hormone secretion
    Pathogenesis of pituitary adenomas
    Epidemiology of pituitary adenomas
    Acromegaly
    Clinical case of acromegaly
    Prolactinoma
    Clinical case of prolactinoma
    Cushing disease
    Clinical case of Cushing disease
    TSHoma
    Clinical case of TSHoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Dora Reglodi, Andrea Tamas, editors.
    Summary: The first comprehensive book to cover all aspects of the last 25 years of PACAP (pituitary adenylate cyclase activating polypeptide) research, this book contains contributions from virtually all the leading researchers in the field, and addresses some of the following topics: evolutionary aspects of PACAP, distribution and occurrence of PACAP and its receptors, hormonal effects of PACAP, intracellular signaling, effects on cellular proliferation and differentiation, protective effects of PACAP, behavioral effects of PACAP, developmental aspects of PACAP, other physiological effects of PACAP (cardiovascular, thermoregulatory), human studies, drug design, metabolism and transport. This compendium can serve as an important reference for researchers and students in PACAP research and can also be a thorough introduction for those in related fields.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Mehmet Turgut [and three others], editors.
    Summary: Pituitary apoplexy is a rare and life-threatening complication that occurs in 0.6-10.5% of all patients with pituitary adenomas. Unfortunately, pituitary apoplexy is often misdiagnosed before surgery. Furthermore, in spite of all the advances in imaging techniques and therapeutic methods, its optimal management is still controversial owing to the limited individual experience and the very variable clinical course of the condition, which ranges from asymptomatic to critical illness with visual loss and subarachnoid hemorrhage. The management of visual dysfunction in particular remains a subject of debate. This book provides an in-depth review of knowledge of the management of pituitary apoplexy, with an emphasis on clinical and neuroradiological findings and treatment modalities, medical and surgical. In addition, it supplies clinicians and investigators with detailed information on current evidence and considers future areas of investigation and innovative therapeutic philosophies. Both the editors and the authors are leading international authorities in the field.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Definition, History, Frequency, Histopathology and Pathophysiology of Pituitary Apoplexy. Overview: Conservative versus Surgical Decompression for Pituitary Apoplexy. Tumours Types which Show Apoplexy: Predisposing factors for Pituitary Apoplexy
    Non-functioning tumour apoplexy
    Apoplexy in previously known tumours
    Post-operative Pituitary Apoplexy. Clinical Features: Clinical features of Pituitary Apoplexy
    Subarachnoid hemorrhage with Pituitary Adenoma
    Cerebral ischaemia in Pituitary Apoplexy. Visual and Endocrine Assessment: Visual acuity, eye movements and visual fields
    Visual outcome following Pituitary Apoplexy.- Preoperative endocrine function and fluid electrolyte balance
    Endocrinopathies and other biochemical abnormalities in Pituitary Apoplexy. Mimicking Conditions: Carotid artery aneurysm
    Hypothalamic lymphoma
    Rathke's cleft cysts mimicking Pituitary Apoplexy. Management: Conservative management of Pituitary Apoplexy
    Surgical decompression for Pituitary Apoplexy
    Timing of surgery and outcome in Pituitary Apoplexy. Complications: Subarachnoid hemorrhage after transsphenoidal surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Susan L. Samson, Adriana G. Ioachimescu, editors.
    Summary: The pituitary gland is often referred to as the master gland, coordinating hormonal signals from the hypothalamus and peripheral circulation to maintain homeostasis in the body. Patients with pituitary dysfunction are faced with challenges unique to each stage of their life cycle. For example, the goals of management for a hypopituitary adolescent transitioning to adulthood would be to optimize growth and sexual development. In early adulthood, approaches that optimize of fertility in men and women can be a priority, and the management approach will be very different from that of older adults requiring sex hormone replacement. This case-based guide will provide practical clinical guidance on approaches to the management of pituitary disorders organized by time of life, from childhood and fertile years through to older age. Sensibly divided into sections, various pituitary disorders and conditions are described and relevant treatment strategies are outlined. Sections included discussions of the unique considerations for the pituitary gland in childhood and adolescents, patients desiring fertility and pregnant patients, health optimization and non-tumoral diagnoses in adults, and management of disorders of the hypothalamic-pituitary axis in the elderly. Each chapter presents a clinical case vignette as an introduction to the concepts and a framework for the discussion of the diagnosis, management and unique consideration of each pituitary pathology. Practical and user-friendly, Pituitary Disorders throughout the Life Cycle is an excellent resource for practicing clinical endocrinologists (pediatric, transitional care, adult) and reproductive endocrinologists as well as specialty residents and trainees.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    editor, Lisa B. Nachtigall.
    Summary: Comprised of cases presenting diverse clinical scenarios involving pituitary tumors and related conditions, this concise, practical casebook provides clinical endocrinologists with the best real-world strategies to properly diagnose and treat the various presentations and symptoms they may encounter in daily practice. Discussing macroprolactinoma, non-functioning adenoma, TSH-secreting adenoma, Cushing’s disease and acromegaly, each chapter is a case that provides a unique clinical presentation of a patient’s symptoms and clinical findings, diagnostic work-up and the thought process involved in navigating the treatment options, as well as the supporting evidence. Cases included illustrate different types of tumors, related disorders and special situations and considerations, in addition to various management strategies, complications and outcomes, with helpful clinical pearls and pitfalls. Pragmatic and reader-friendly, Pituitary Tumors: A Clinical Casebook is written by experts in the field and is designed to facilitate and guide endocrinologists in the sometimes challenging decision-making process by presenting real case scenarios that span the spectrum of pituitary tumor presentations and treatment options.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Jenny C. Dohlman, Alice C. Lorch, editors.
    Summary: Pivotal Trials in Ophthalmology: A Guide for Trainees is an introductory text designed to give trainees a comprehensive and accessible overview of landmark trials in the different subspecialties of ophthalmology, and may also serve as a useful reference for practicing ophthalmologists, optometrists and researchers in the field. The text is subdivided by subspecialty, with each chapter authored by both a trainee and an expert in the field. A selection of pivotal research studies that have shaped how practitioners diagnose, manage, and treat disease are reviewed in chronological order. The purpose, study design, results, and study limitations are reviewed, and the key takeaway points from each study are listed in a digestible, bullet-point format. By listing the studies in chronological order, the reader will have an understanding of how studies have built upon each other and how knowledge has evolved over time. This text can serve as a basic introductory text for first year ophthalmology residents around which a standardized curriculum can be shaped, a study guide for board examination study, or a reference text for practitioners and researchers at any stage of training and practice. .

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Glaucoma
    Cornea
    Neuro-ophthalmology
    Pediatric Ophthalmology and Strabismus
    Retina
    Uveitis
    Oculoplastics
    Ocular Trauma.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Mikiko C. Siomi.
    Contents:
    Chromatin Immunoprecipitation Assay of Piwi in Drosophila / Hang Yin and Haifan Lin
    Drosophila Germline Stem Cells for In Vitro Analyses of PIWI-Mediated RNAi / Yuzo Niki, Takuya Sato, Takafumi Yamaguchi, Ayaka Saisho, Hiroshi Uetake, and Hidenori Watanabe
    RNAi and Overexpression of Genes in Ovarian Somatic Cells / Kuniaki Saito
    Making piRNAs In Vitro / Shinpei Kawaoka, Susumu Katsuma, and Yukihide Tomari
    A Framework for piRNA Cluster Manipulation / Ivan Olovnikov, Adrien Le Thomas, and Alexei A. Aravin
    Biochemical and Mass Spectrometric Analysis of 3ʹ-End Methylation of piRNAs / Takeo Suzuki, Kenjyo Miyauchi, Yuriko Sakaguchi, and Tsutomu Suzuki
    HITS-CLIP (CLIP-Seq) for Mouse Piwi Proteins / Anastassios Vourekas and Zissimos Mourelatos
    DNA Methylation in Mouse Testes / Satomi Kuramochi-Miyagawa, Kanako Kita-Kojima, Yusuke Shiromoto, Daisuke Ito, Hirotaka Koshima, and Toru Nakano
    Analysis of Small RNA-Guided Endonuclease Activity in Endogenous Piwi Protein Complexes from Mouse Testes / Michael Reuter and Ramesh S. Pillai
    Small RNA Library Construction from Minute Biological Samples / Jessica A. Matts, Yuliya Sytnikova, Gung-wei Chirn, Gabor L. Igloi, and Nelson C. Lau
    Analysis of sDMA Modifications of PIWI Proteins / Shozo Honda, Yoriko Kirino, and Yohei Kirino
    Analyses of piRNA-Mediated Transcriptional Transposon Silencing in Drosophila: Nuclear Run-On Assay on Ovaries / Sergey Shpiz and Alla Kalmykova
    Combined RNA/DNA Fluorescence In Situ Hybridization on Whole-Mount Drosophila Ovaries / Shpiz, Sergey Lavrov, and Alla Kalmykova
    Fast and Accurate Method to Purify Small Noncoding RNAs from Drosophila Ovaries / Thomas Grentzinger and Séverine Chambeyron
    Isolation of Zebrafish Gonads for RNA Isolation / Hsin-Yi Huang and René F. Ketting
    Small RNA Library Construction for High-Throughput Sequencing / Jon McGinn and Benjamin Czech
    Analysis of Piwi-Loaded Small RNAs in Terahymena / Tomoko Noto, Henriette M. Kurth, and Kazufumi Mochizuki
    Effective Gene Knockdown in the Drosophila Germline by Artificial miRNA-Mimicking siRNAs / Hailong Wang, Haidong Huang, and Dahua Chen
    Isolation and Bioinformatic Analyses of Small RNAs Interacting with Germ Cell-Specific Argonaute in Rice / Reina Komiya and Ken-Ichi Nonomura.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    editors, Susan M. Blaney, MD, Professor, Hematology-Oncology Section, Baylor College of Medicine, Deputy Director, Texas Children's Cancer Center and Hematology Centers, Texas Children's Hospital, Houston, Texas, Peter C. Adamson, MD, Professor of Pediatrics and Pharmacology, Perelman School of Medicine, The University of Pennsylvania, Children's Hospital of Philadelphia, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Lee J. Helman, MD, Professor, Pediatrics and Medicine, Keck School of Medicine, University of Southern California, Head, Basic and Translational Research, Cancer and Blood Disease Institute, Children's Hospital Los Angeles, Los Angeles, California.
    Summary: "This authoritative reference is a comprehensive resource on the biology and genetics of childhood cancer as well as its diagnosis, multimodal treatment, as well as long-term management of young patients with cancer. Also addressed are a broad array of topics on the supportive and psychosocial aspects of care of children and families. Covering virtually every aspect of the breadth and depth of childhood cancer, this reference provides expert guidance on state-of-the-art, multidisciplinary care for children and families"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library (Oncology)
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Brian Castellani, Rajeev Rajaram, J. Galen Buckwalter, Michael Ball, Frederic Hafferty.
    Summary: The history of public health has focused on direct relationships between problems and solutions: vaccinations against diseases, ad campaigns targeting risky behaviors. But the accelerating pace and mounting intricacies of our lives are challenging the field to find new scientific methods for studying community health. The complexities of place (COP) approach is emerging as one such promising method. ℗ℓ Place and Health as Complex Systems demonstrates how COP works, making an empirical case for its use in for designing and implementing interventions. This brief resource reviews the defining characteristics of places as dynamic and evolving social systems, rigorously testing them as well as the COP approach itself. The study, of twenty communities within one county in the Midwest, combines case-based methods and complexity science to determine whether COP improves upon traditional statistical methods of public health research. Its conclusions reveal strengths and limitations of the approach, immediate possibilities for its use, and challenges regarding future research. Included in the coverage: ℗ℓ Characteristics of places and the complexities of place approach. The Definitional Test of Complex Systems. Case-based modeling using the SACS toolkit. Methods, maps, and measures used in the study. Places as nodes within larger networks. Places as power-based conflicted negotiations. ℗ℓ Place and Health as Complex Systems brings COP into greater prominence in public health research, and is also valuable to researchers in related fields such as demography, health geography, community health, urban planning, and epidemiology. ℗ℓ

    Contents:
    The Complexities of Place Approach.-Definitional Test of Complex Systems
    Case-Based Modeling and the SACS Toolkit
    Methods
    C1: Places are Complex
    C2: Places are Emergent and Self-Organizing
    C3 Places are Nodes Within Larger Networks
    C4: Places are Dynamic and Evolving
    C5: Places are Nonlinear
    C6: Places are Subjective and Historical
    C7: Places are Open- Ended with Fuzzy Boundaries
    C8: Places are Power-Based Conflicted Negotiations
    C9: Places are Agent-Based
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Fabrizio Benedetti, Paul Enck, Elisa Frisaldi, Manfred Schedlowski, editors.
    Summary: Due to the recent explosion of placebo research at many levels the Editors believe that a volume on Placebo would be a good addition to the Handbook of Experimental Pharmacology series. In particular, this volume will be built up on a meeting on Placebo which will be held in Tuebingen (Germany) in January 2013, and where the most prominent researchers in this field will present and exchange their ideas. The authors who will be invited to write chapters for this volume will be the very same speakers at this meeting, thus guaranteeing high standard and excellence in the topic that will be treated. The approach of the book is mainly pharmacological, including basic research and clinical trials, and the contents range from different medical conditions and systems, such as pain and the immune system, to different experimental approaches, like in vivo receptor binding and pharmacological/behavioral conditioning. Overall, the volume will give an idea of modern placebo research, of timely concepts in both experimental and clinical pharmacology, as well as of modern methods and tools in neuroscience.

    Contents:
    Pain: Placebo and Nocebo Effects.-Placebo, Nocebo and Learning Mechanisms
    A Meta-Analysis of Brain Mechanisms of Placebo Analgesia
    Placebo Analgesia: Cognition of Perception
    Pain Related Negative Emotions and Placebo Analgesia
    How Positive and Negative Expectations Shape the Experience of Visceral Pain.-Placebo Effects in Idiopathic and Neuropathic Pain Conditions.-Emerging Models: Great Expectations: The Placebo Effect in Parkinsons's Disease
    The Effects of Placebos and Nocebos on Physical Performance
    Learned Placebo Responses in Neuroendocrine and Immune Functions
    Placebo Responses on Cardiovascular, Gastrointestinal, and Respiratory Organ Functions
    Placebo and Nocebo Effects in Itch and Pain. Clinical Practice and Clinical Trials: Clinical and Ethical Implications of Placebo Effects: Enhancing Patients' Benefits from Pain Treatment
    Traditional and Innovative Eperimental and Clinical Trial Designs and Their Advantages and Pitfalls
    Lessons to be Learned from Placebo Arms in Psychopharmacology Trials.-The Emperor's New Drugs: Medication and Placebo in the Treatment of Depression.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Dimos D. Mitsikostas, Fabrizio Benedetti, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses the role of placebos and nocebos in the treatment of headache disorders. These disorders are usually treatable, but safety and tolerability issues mean that available preventive treatments have often limited success, even in the right hands – one in five patients treated with a migraine preventive pharmaceutical agent discontinues treatment for those reasons. The nocebo effect plays a role here, with patients’ negative expectation and previous unpleasant treatment experiences creating negative belief in the treatment’s benefits and safety, which in turn limits treatment outcomes and adherence significantly. In RCTs on migraine prevention, one in 20 patients treated with a placebo discontinued treatment because of adverse events, indicating a considerable nocebo effect; the fewer potential adverse events described in the consent form, the smaller the nocebo effect. As such, physicians treating headache sufferers should acknowledge nocebo as a significant cofactor for treatment adherence and failure, and plan techniques to limit the effects, such as patient education and close follow-up. This highly informative and painstakingly presented book provides scientific insights for professionals and scholars with an interest in internal medicine, neurology and pain medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Kush R. Desai, Osman Ahmed, Thuong Van Ha, editors.
    Summary: This book addresses placement and retrieval of inferior vena cava (IVC) filters. Until 2010, utilization of IVC filters had been increasing since their introduction in 1967. Studies in the early 2000's, however, identified that prolonged caval interruption with IVC filters were fraught with complications including filter fracture, migration, and caval thrombosis. This subsequently led the FDA to issue an advisory recommending judicious placement and timely retrieval of IVC filters by treating physicians. This safety advisory ultimately created a heightened awareness by medical professionals and the general public regarding the negative consequences surrounding long-term caval filtration. Subsequently, IVC filter placements decreased nationally while retrievals conversely increased in the post-FDA advisory era. During this same time period, interest in complex IVC filter retrieval also increased as a method to manage patients identified to have or be at risk for complications secondary to prolonged filter implantation. Given these established trends and interest surrounding advanced techniques in IVC filter retrieval, this book addresses these topics in a reader-friendly, case-based format. Chapters focus particularly around the recognition and management of filter-related complications. Additionally, advanced techniques employed by experienced operators for complex filter retrieval are also discussed. For completeness, the book also includes a review of indications and appropriate methods for IVC filter placement. This book is unique in that, at present, descriptions of complications and advanced techniques utilized for complicated IVC filter removal consist mainly of case reports and case series scattered throughout the literature. This publication serves to compile these sources into a single comprehensive entity for physicians treating patients with IVC filters. Chapters are organized to begin with a few introductory paragraphs highlighting the relevant literature (and providing references for in-depth reading) followed by several cases demonstrating tips, tricks, and procedural pitfalls. When possible, each case will include a step-by-step description of the technique being described. This is an ideal guide for interventional radiologists, interventional cardiologists, and vascular surgeons that perform or are interested in performing filter retrieval beyond standard techniques.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    Contributors
    1: Current Data and Trends on Inferior Vena Cava Filter Placement and Retrieval
    History
    Why Filters Are Inserted
    Trends in Filter Placement
    Trends in Filter Complications
    Filter Retrieval
    Conclusion
    References
    2: IVC Filter Placement: Accepted and Relative Indications
    Introduction
    Accepted Indication for IVCF Insertion
    Relative and Prophylactic Indications of IVCF Insertion
    Special Patient Populations
    Recommendations Against IVCF Insertion
    Bibliography 3: Inferior Vena Cava Filter Placement: Anatomical Evaluation and Approach to Variant Anatomy
    Introduction
    Embryogenesis of the Inferior Vena Cava
    Procedural Technical and Anatomic Considerations
    Variant Anatomic Considerations
    Renal Vein Variants
    Duplicated IVC
    Mega Cava
    Suprarenal Filter Placement Considerations
    Conclusions
    References
    4: IVC Filter Retrieval: Routine Approach
    IVC Filter Clinic
    Equipment and Technique
    Escalation to Complex Retrieval
    References
    5: Complex Filter Retrieval Planning
    Introduction Defining Complex IVC Filter Retrieval
    Pre-procedure Clinical Evaluation
    Pre-procedure Imaging Workup
    Informed Consent and Anesthetic Considerations
    References
    6: Filter Strut Penetration: Does It Matter?
    Case 1: Retroperitoneal Fat Strut Penetration
    Case 2: Filter Strut and Apex Penetration into Extra-Caval Space
    Case 3: Filter Penetration into Nonvascular Organs - Bowel
    Case 4: Filter Penetration into Nonvascular Organs - Spine
    Case 5: Filter Strut Penetration with Aortic Involvement and Intraluminal Thrombus Case 6: Penetrating Filter Removal Complicated by Renal Arteriovenous Fistula Formation
    References
    7: Retrieval of Filters with Embedded Apices
    Case 1: Tilted IVC Filter
    Case 2: Tilted and Embedded Filter
    Case 3: Deeply Embedded Filter
    References
    8: Filter Strut Incorporation: Tools for Success and Improved Procedural Safety
    Excimer Laser-Assisted Retrieval for Filter Strut Incorporation
    Case 1: Chronically Embedded Optease Filter
    References
    9: Mechanism and Approach to Fractured Filters
    Introduction
    Filter Construction
    Filter Geometry Mechanism of Filter Fracture
    Evaluation of a Patient with a Fractured IVCF
    Fragment Characterization
    Local
    Technical Considerations
    Extracaval Involvement
    Central Embolization
    Intracardiac
    Technical Considerations
    Intrapulmonary
    Technical Considerations
    Patient Preference
    Understanding Limitations
    Conclusions
    References
    10: IVC Filter Migration and Misplacement
    Case 1: Pulmonary Filter Strut Migration
    Case 2: Cardiac Migration of an IVC Filter
    Case 3: Filter Misplacement: Azygos Vein
    Case 4: Filter Misplacement: Right Renal Vein
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Sherif A. Shazly, Ahmed A. Nassr, editors.
    Summary: Placenta accreta spectrum (PAS), an obstetric emergency associated with significant maternal morbidity and mortality, has increasingly become a global challenge with the rising trend of cesarean deliveries. This book provides a comprehensive review of basic science-related to PAS, discusses modern practice in diagnosis and classification of PAS disorders, and appraise current recommendations on PAS management in view of recent studies, guidelines, and expert opinions. In the last few years, there have been many new updates to practice guidelines including ACOG, RCOG, and FIGO guidelines in addition to several new studies, some of which were unusually multicenter and of large sample size, that are eligible to make major changes in our PAS practice. In addition, the book aims at providing more comprehensive review of all aspects related to PAS from experts, including topics that are deficient in similar books e.g., vascular anatomy, risk reduction, adjuvant treatments. The book provides a single source that provides academic knowledge for researchers and investigators, and clinical guidance to best practice and recent updates in management of women with PAS.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: History of Placenta Accreta Spectrum
    References
    Chapter 2: Epidemiology of Placenta Accreta Spectrum: A Comprehensive Review of Current Evidence
    Introduction
    Definition and Terminology
    Incidence and Increasing Trend Globally
    Morbidity and Mortality
    Risk Factors
    Caesarean Section
    Placenta Praevia
    Advanced Maternal Age
    Assisted Reproductive Technologies
    Previous Gynaecological History
    Previous Obstetric History
    Management
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: Pathogenesis of Placenta Accreta Spectrum Introduction
    Clinicopathology Classification
    Vascular Classification
    Placental-Type Invasion
    Type 1
    Type 2
    Type 3
    Type 4
    Type 5
    Placental Mapping for Prenatal Diagnosis of Placenta Accreta Spectrum Grading
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 6: Diagnosis of Placenta Accreta Spectrum: Clinical and Radiological Diagnosis of Placenta Accreta Spectrum and the Ability of Sonographic and MRI Findings to Predict Definitive Diagnosis
    The Importance of Antenatal Diagnosis of Placenta Accreta Spectrum
    Antenatal Diagnosis: Role of Different Imaging Modalities First Trimester Imaging
    Second or Third Trimester Ultrasound Evaluation
    MRI Evaluation
    Special Considerations
    References
    Chapter 7: Definitive Management of Placenta Accreta Spectrum
    Introduction
    Preoperative Preparation
    Anaesthesia
    Surgical Management of an Antenatally Suspected Case
    Surgical Management of an Unexpected Case
    Postoperative Considerations
    Surgical Morbidity
    Psychological Impact
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 8: Conservative Management of Placenta Accreta Spectrum
    Definition
    Risk Factors
    Clinical Presentation and Diagnosis Management
    Timing of Delivery
    Cesarean Delivery and Hysterectomy
    Conservative Management
    Follow-Up After Conservative Management
    Long-Term Considerations
    References
    Chapter 9: Adjunctive Treatment of Placenta Accreta Spectrum
    Introduction
    Surgical Control of Bleeding
    Uterine Artery Embolization
    Internal Iliac Artery Ligation
    Endovascular Balloon Occlusion of the Pelvic Circulation
    Uterine Compression Sutures
    Use of Tranexamic Acid
    Investigational Therapies
    High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound
    Methotrexate
    Conclusions
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    edited by Raymond W. Redline, Case Western Reserve University, Theonia K. Boyd, Harvard Medical School, Drucilla J. Roberts, Harvard Medical School.
    Summary: This concise and comprehensive resource is vital for the pathologist faced with providing accurate, timely, and clinically useful diagnoses for placentas, products of conception, and gravid hysterectomies. Combining the pathologic, research, and clinical expertise of a diverse group of editors and authors from centers of excellence for placental pathology, this book enables easy application of the latest Amsterdam international consensus classification criteria, with cross-references to previous terminology and a pathophysiology-based classification system. It provides complete descriptions and illustrations of diagnostic gross, microscopic, and immunohistochemical findings together with a thorough discussion of potential pitfalls and differential diagnosis. Current theories of the genetic and physiologic basis for disease processes, culminating in placental lesions are discussed. The book features high-quality images and standardized measurement tables to assist real-time diagnoses and provides access to an online version on Cambridge Core, which can be accessed via the code printed on the inside of the cover.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Christoph Lees, Gerard H.A. Visser, Kurt Hecher.
    Summary: "Master the effective evaluation, analysis and management of placental-fetal growth restriction (PFGR), reducing the risk of perinatal mortality and morbidity in patients worldwide. Extensively researched by international experts, this manual provides practitioners with a detailed, hands-on approach to the practical 'pearls' for direct patient management. This authoritative volume advises on matters such as the correct evaluation and management of high-risk patients in danger of PFGR through to delivery. Extensive and wide-ranging, this book is an invaluable companion to the developing research interest and clinical applications in PFGR, including developmental outcomes in early childhood. Featuring a critical evaluation of a variety of abnormal conditions, such as fetal hypoxia, which are clearly displayed through extensive illustrations. This essential toolkit ensures that practitioners of all levels can effectively limit the risk of mortality and morbidity, and reach the correct diagnosis, first-time"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Samuel Myers and Howard Frumkin.
    Summary: Human health depends on the health of the planet. Earth's natural systems--the air, the water, the biodiversity, the climate--are our life support systems. Yet climate change, biodiversity loss, scarcity of land and freshwater, pollution and other threats are degrading these systems. The emerging field of planetary health aims to understand how these changes threaten our health and how to protect ourselves and the rest of the biosphere. Planetary Health: Protecting Nature to Protect Ourselves provides a readable introduction to this new paradigm. With an interdisciplinary approach, the book addresses a wide range of health impacts felt in the Anthropocene, including food and nutrition, infectious disease, non-communicable disease, dislocation and conflict, and mental health. It also presents strategies to combat environmental changes and its ill-effects, such as controlling toxic exposures, investing in clean energy, improving urban design, and more.

    Contents:
    Front Cover
    About Island Press
    Subscribe
    Title Page
    Copyright Page
    Dedication
    Contents
    List of Tables
    List of Boxes
    Preface: A Note on Covid-19
    Acknowledgments
    Part 1: Foundations
    1. An Introduction to Planetary Health
    2. Assembling Planetary Health: Histories of the Future
    3. Population, Consumption, Equity, and Rights
    4. A Changing Planet
    Part 2: The Health of Populations
    5. Food and Nutrition on a Rapidly Changing Planet
    6. Planetary Health and Infectious Disease
    7. Global Environmental Change and Noncommunicable Disease Risks
    8. Environmental Change, Migration, Conflict, and Health
    9. Mental Health on a Changing Planet
    10. Climate Change and Human Health
    11. Happiness on a Healthier Planet
    Part 3: Pivoting from Threat to Opportunity
    12. Energy and Planetary Health
    13. Urban Places and Planetary Health
    14. Controlling Toxic Exposures
    15. A New Economics for Planetary Health
    16. The Business of Planetary Health: From Economic Theory to Policy and Practice
    Part 4: Saving Ourselves, Saving Our Planet
    17. Planetary Health Ethics
    18. A Bright Future for Planetary Health
    Afterword: Coronavirus and Planetary Health
    Index
    About the Editors
    Island Press Board of Directors.
  • Digital
    Mónica S. Hoffmeyer, Marina E. Sabatini, Frederico P. Brandini, Danilo L. Calliari, Norma H. Santinelli, editors.
    Summary: This book integrates a variety of issues such as regional settings of productivity and nutrient cycling; plankton of coastal and shelf systems; plankton, climate change and human-induced changes; harmful algae and their impacts; and gelatinous zooplankton. This book explores the intriguing marine plankton communities of the SWA region of South America encompassing low to high latitude environments, framed by a complex hydrographic background and global climate change. This vast and iconic region has been largely under-recognized and under-studied. However, in recent years a strong interest has emerged along with the acknowledgment of its high biological productivity. The book concludes by discussing conservation in the region, highlighting regional biodiversity hotspots where the challenges of climate change, habitat loss, and other threats to biodiversity may be particularly acute. Plankton Ecology of the Southwestern Atlantic is a timely synthesis of the field, setting a new baseline for future research. It will be important reading for both researchers and graduate students, and will also be of interest and use to a professional audience of oceanographers, conservation biologists, stake holders and educated science enthusiasts.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Avrum I. Gotlieb.
    Summary: Planning for a Career in Biomedical and Life Sciences: Learn to Navigate a Tough Research Culture by Harnessing the Power of Career Building, Second Edition, presents useful information, insights and tips to those pursuing a career in the biomedical and life sciences. The book focuses on making educated choices during schooling, training, and the job search in both the academic and non-academic sectors. The book's premise lies in the notion that if users understand the full path of a career in either the biomedical or life science fields, they can proactively plan their career, recognize any opportunities that present themselves, and be well prepared to address important aspects of their own professional development. Topics include choosing a training path, selecting the best supervisor/mentor, and negotiating a job offer. Updates to this edition include an outline of core competencies to achieve success, how to build soft skills and tailor them to specific job opportunities, and how to increase collaborations across disciplines. Additionally, coverage on issues around diversity, health, wellness and work/life balance are expanded. This book is a valuable resource for undergraduate, graduate, medical and postdoctoral students in the biomedical and life sciences, as well as academic faculty and advisors.--Publisher's description
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Mirza Hasanuzzaman, Khalid Rehman Hakeem, Kamrun Nahar, Hesham F. Alharby, editors.
    Summary: Plants have to manage a series of environmental stresses throughout their entire lifespan. Among these, abiotic stress is the most detrimental; one that is responsible for nearly 50% of crop yield reduction and appears to be a potential threat to global food security in coming decades. Plant growth and development reduces drastically due to adverse effects of abiotic stresses. It has been estimated that crop can exhibit only 30% of their genetic potentiality under abiotic stress condition. So, this is a fundamental need to understand the stress responses to facilitate breeders to develop stress resistant and stress tolerant cultivars along with good management practices to withstand abiotic stresses. Also, a holistic approach to understanding the molecular and biochemical interactions of plants is important to implement the knowledge of resistance mechanisms under abiotic stresses. Agronomic practices like selecting cultivars that is tolerant to wide range of climatic condition, planting date, irrigation scheduling, fertilizer management could be some of the effective short-term adaptive tools to fight against abiotic stresses. In addition, "system biology" and "omics approaches" in recent studies offer a long-term opportunity at the molecular level in dealing with abiotic stresses. The genetic approach, for example, selection and identification of major conditioning genes by linkage mapping and quantitative trait loci (QTL), production of mutant genes and transgenic introduction of novel genes, has imparted some tolerant characteristics in crop varieties from their wild ancestors. Recently research has revealed the interactions between micro-RNAs (miRNAs) and plant stress responses exposed to salinity, freezing stress and dehydration. Accordingly transgenic approaches to generate stress-tolerant plant are one of the most interesting researches to date. This book presents the recent development of agronomic and molecular approaches in conferring plant abiotic stress tolerance in an organized way. The present volume will be of great interest among research students and teaching community, and can also be used as reference material by professional researchers.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; About the Book; Contents; Editors; Contributors; About the Editors; Maize Production Under Salinity and Drought Conditions: Oxidative Stress Regulation by Antioxidant Defense and Glyoxalase Systems; Introduction; General Situation of Maize Production Under Salinity and Drought; Oxidative Stress in Maize; Antioxidative Defense Mechanisms; Superoxide Dismutase; Catalase; Peroxidase; Ascorbate Peroxidase; Glutathione Peroxidase; Glutathione Reductase; Monodehydroascorbate Reductase; Dehydroascorbate Reductase; Glutathione S-Transferases Effect of Salinity on Chlorophyll and CarotenoidsEffect of Salinity on Photosynthesis; Effect of Salinity on Nutrients; Effect of Salinity on Na+ and K+ Concentration in Plant and Its Relation with Salinity Tolerance; Effect of Salinity on Osmolites and Osmoprotectants; Effect of Salinity on Proline Content in Plants; Effect of Salinity on Cell Membrane Stability; Salinity Tolerance in Plants; Salt Tolerance Mechanisms; Salinity Tolerance at the Whole Plant; Salinity Tolerance at Molecular Level; Salinity Tolerance at the Cellular Level; Screening Methods for Salinity Tolerance Methylglyoxal Detoxification EnzymesNonenzymatic Antioxidants; Ascorbic Acid; Glutathione; Osmoregulation and Osmoprotection; Conclusion; References; Plants Behavior Under Soil Acidity Stress: Insight into Morphophysiological, Biochemical, and Molecular Responses; Introduction; Soil pH and Acidic Soil; Causes; Worldwide Distribution; Nutrient Imbalance and Toxicity Due to Acidity; Biogeography of Plants in Relation to Acidic Soil; Effects of Soil Acidity Stress on Plants; Germination and Seedling Emergence; Vegetative Stage; Reproductive Stage; Yield Attributes and Yield Physiological Responses of Plants to Acidity StressMembrane Integrity; Photosynthetic Machinery; Water Relations and Transpiration; Oxidative Damages; Antioxidative Defense; Mechanisms of Acid Stress Tolerance in Plants; Conclusion and Future Perspectives; References; Salinity: A Major Agricultural Problem-Causes, Impacts on Crop Productivity and Management Strategies; Introduction; Causes of Salinity and General Effects; Effects of Salinity on Crops; Salinity Management Approaches; Modifications in Agricultural Practices Seed Priming and Plant Growth Promoting Bacteria (Bio-Priming) for Salinity ManagementConclusions; References; Salinity Stress Tolerance in Plants: Physiological, Molecular, and Biotechnological Approaches; Introduction: An Overview on Salinity; Definition of Salinity; Types of Salinity and Its Causes; Primary or Natural Salinity; Secondary Salinity or Salinity Created by Humans; Problems Caused by Salinity in Plants; Effects of Salinity; Effect of Salinity on Plant Germination; Effects of Salinity on Plant Morphology; Effect of Salinity on Vegetative Growth
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Richard Crang, Sheila Lyons-Sobaski, Robert Wise.
    Summary: Intended as a text for upper-division undergraduates, graduate students and as a potential reference, this broad-scoped resource is extensive in its educational appeal by providing a new concept-based organization with end-of-chapter literature references, self-quizzes, and illustration interpretation. The concept-based, pedagogical approach, in contrast to the classic discipline-based approach, was specifically chosen to make the teaching and learning of plant anatomy more accessible for students. In addition, for instructors whose backgrounds may not primarily be plant anatomy, the features noted above are designed to provide sufficient reference material for organization and class presentation. This text is unique in the extensive use of over 1150 high-resolution color micrographs, color diagrams and scanning electron micrographs. Another feature is frequent side-boxes that highlight the relationship of plant anatomy to specialized investigations in plant molecular biology, classical investigations, functional activities, and research in forestry, environmental studies and genetics, as well as other fields. Each of the 19 richly-illustrated chapters has an abstract, a list of keywords, an introduction, a text body consisting of 10 to 20 concept-based sections, and a list of references and additional readings. At the end of each chapter, the instructor and student will find a section-by-section concept review, concept connections, concept assessment (10 multiple-choice questions), and concept applications. Answers to the assessment material are found in an appendix. An index and a glossary with over 700 defined terms complete the volume.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Section I: Plants as Unique Organisms; History and Tools of Plant Anatomy
    1. The Nature of Plants
    2. Microscopy and Imaging
    Section II: Cellular Plant Anatomy
    3. Plant Cell Structure and Ultrastructure
    4. Mitosis and Meristems
    5. Cell Walls
    6. Parenchyma, Collenchyma and Sclerenchyma
    Section III: Vascular Tissues
    7. Xylem
    8. Phloem
    Section IV: Primary Vegetative Growth
    9. Epidermis
    10. The Root
    11. The Stem
    12. The Leaf
    13. Secondary Structures
    Section V: Secondary Vegetative Growth
    14. Vascular Cambium
    15. Wood: Economics, Structure and Composition
    16. Periderm
    Section VI: Flowering and Reproduction
    17. Floral Development & Male Reproduction
    18. Female Reproduction & Embryogenesis
    19. Fruits, Seeds and Seedlings
    Appendices: Answers to end-of-chapter review and assessment material
    Glossary
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Munir Ozturk, Khalid Rehman Hakeem, editors.
    Summary: Early anthropological evidence for plant use as medicine is 60,000 years old as reported from the Neanderthal grave in Iraq. The importance of plants as medicine is further supported by archeological evidence from Asia and the Middle East. Today, around 1.4 billion people in South Asia alone have no access to modern health care, and rely instead on traditional medicine to alleviate various symptoms. On a global basis, approximately 50 to 80 thousand plant species are used either natively or as pharmaceutical derivatives for life-threatening conditions that include diabetes, hypertension and cancers. As the demand for plant-based medicine rises, there is an unmet need to investigate the quality, safety and efficacy of these herbals by the "scientific methods". Current research on drug discovery from medicinal plants involves a multifaceted approach combining botanical, phytochemical, analytical, and molecular techniques. For instance, high throughput robotic screens have been developed by industry; it is now possible to carry out 50,000 tests per day in the search for compounds which act on a key enzyme or a subset of receptors. This and other bioassays thus offer hope that one may eventually identify compounds for treating a variety of diseases or conditions. However, drug development from natural products is not without its problems. Frequent challenges encountered include the procurement of raw materials, the selection and implementation of appropriate high-throughput bioassays, and the scaling-up of preparative procedures. Research scientists should therefore arm themselves with the right tools and knowledge in order to harness the vast potentials of plant-based therapeutics. The main objective of Plant and Human Health is to serve as a comprehensive guide for this endeavor. Volume 1 highlights how humans from specific areas or cultures use indigenous plants. Despite technological developments, herbal drugs still occupy a preferential place in a majority of the population in the third world and have slowly taken roots as alternative medicine in the West. The integration of modern science with traditional uses of herbal drugs is important for our understanding of this ethnobotanical relationship. Volume 2 deals with the phytochemical and molecular characterization of herbal medicine. Specifically, It will focus on the secondary metabolic compounds which afford protection against diseases. Lastly, Volume 3 focuses on the physiological mechanisms by which the active ingredients of medicinal plants serve to improve human health. Together this three-volume collection intends to bridge the gap for herbalists, traditional and modern medical practitioners, and students and researchers in botany and horticulture.

    Contents:
    Intro; Dedication; Foreword; Preface; Contents; Contributors; About the Editors; Free Radicals, Diabetes, and Its Complexities; Introduction; Homeostasis; Oxidative Stress; Reactive Species; Free Radicals; The Role of ROS; ROS Involve in Lipid Peroxidation; The Source of Reactive Species; Oxidative Stress-Inducing Agents; Air Pollution; Dust; Heavy Metals; Temperature; Electromagnetic Fields; Alcohol; Herbicides; Pesticide; Fungicides; Cigarette Smoke; Industrial Foods; Oxidative Stress Is the Main Reason of Diseases; Cancer; Cardiovascular Disease; Neurological Disease; Pulmonary Disease Anti-tick ActivityAntibacterial Activity; Antifungal Activity; Herbicidal Activity; Antioxidant Activity; Anticancer Activity; Sedative Activity; Antidiabetic Activity; Antidiuretic Activity; Anti-inflammatory Activity; Conclusions; References; Evidence-Based Assessment of Moringa oleifera Used for the Treatment of Human Ailments; Introduction; Botanical Description; Nutrition Value; Medicinal Properties; Antispasmodic, Antiulcer, and Hepatoprotective Activities; Antihypertensive, Diuretic, and Cholesterol-Lowering Activities; Antibacterial and Antifungal Activities; Antidiabetic Activity Geographical DistributionEssential Oil of Vetiver; Phyto-constituents; Biosynthesis; Distillation; Economics; Ethnobotanical Uses; Traditional Application; Nutraceutical Application; Commercial Applications; Agriculture-Related Uses; Manure; Pesticide; Weed Control; Flavoring Agent; Perfumery; Aromatherapy; Other Uses; Refrigerant; Handicrafts; Construction; Textiles; Medicinal Uses and Health Benefits; An Update of Therapeutic Potentials of Vetiveria zizanioides; Insecticidal Activity; Termicidal Activity; Pesticidal Activity; Anti-plasmodial (Antimalarial) and Larvicidal Activity Reduction in Food Security and Increasing the Risk of Agricultural ProductionConclusion; References; Secondary Metabolites from Turkish Astragalus Species; Introduction; Phytochemistry and Biological Activity; Chemotaxonomy; Structural Summary of Cycloartanes; 20,24-Epoxy Side Chain Compounds; Acyclic Side Chain Compounds; 20,25-Epoxy Side Chain Compounds; Stereochemistry of Astragalus Cycloartanes; References; Vetiveria zizanioides (L.) Nash: A Magic Bullet to Attenuate the Prevailing Health Hazards; Introduction; Description of Plant; Types; Common Names; Morphology; Habit; Leaves; Flowers Rheumatoid ArthritisNephropathy; Ocular Disease; Aging; Defensive Systems Against Free Radicals; Antioxidants; Antioxidants with New Conversation; Sleeping; Fasting; Mountains' Clean Air Have Bracing Effect; Lifestyle Alteration Eliminates Oxidative Stressors; Diabetes; Glucose Auto-oxidation; Synergism Between Oxidative Stress and Glycation; Preservatives; New Conversation; Molecular Oxidative Stress; Diabetes Complications; Diabetes and Climate Changes; Direct Effects; Thermal Stress; Spiritual Consequences; Indirect Effects; Suburbs; Food Quality and Food Habits
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Munir Ozturk, Khalid Rehman Hakeem, editors.
    Summary: Early anthropological evidence for plant use as medicine is 60,000 years old as reported from the Neanderthal grave in Iraq. The importance of plants as medicine is further supported by archeological evidence from Asia and the Middle East. Today, around 1.4 billion people in South Asia alone have no access to modern health care, and rely instead on traditional medicine to alleviate various symptoms. On a global basis, approximately 50 to 80 thousand plant species are used either natively or as pharmaceutical derivatives for life-threatening conditions that include diabetes, hypertension and cancers. As the demand for plant-based medicine rises, there is an unmet need to investigate the quality, safety and efficacy of these herbals by the "scientific methods". Current research on drug discovery from medicinal plants involves a multifaceted approach combining botanical, phytochemical, analytical, and molecular techniques. For instance, high throughput robotic screens have been developed by industry; it is now possible to carry out 50,000 tests per day in the search for compounds which act on a key enzyme or a subset of receptors. This and other bioassays thus offer hope that one may eventually identify compounds for treating a variety of diseases or conditions. However, drug development from natural products is not without its problems. Frequent challenges encountered include the procurement of raw materials, the selection and implementation of appropriate high-throughput bioassays, and the scaling-up of preparative procedures. Research scientists should therefore arm themselves with the right tools and knowledge in order to harness the vast potentials of plant-based therapeutics. The main objective of Plant and Human Health is to serve as a comprehensive guide for this endeavor. Volume 1 highlights how humans from specific areas or cultures use indigenous plants. Despite technological developments, herbal drugs still occupy a preferential place in a majority of the population in the third world and have slowly taken roots as alternative medicine in the West. The integration of modern science with traditional uses of herbal drugs is important for our understanding of this ethnobotanical relationship. Volume 2 deals with the phytochemical and molecular characterization of herbal medicine. Specifically, it will focus on the secondary metabolic compounds which afford protection against diseases. Lastly, Volume 3 focuses on the physiological mechanisms by which the active ingredients of medicinal plants serve to improve human health. Together this three-volume collection intends to bridge the gap for herbalists, traditional and modern medical practitioners, and students and researchers in botany and horticulture.

    Contents:
    Intro; Dedication; Foreword; Preface; Contents; Phytochemical Constituents and Pharmacological Effects of Licorice: A Review; Introduction; Taxonomic Description; Botanical Description; Traditional Uses; Pharmacological Activities; Antimicrobial Activity; Antiviral Activity; Anti-inflammatory; Anti-ulcer; Antitumor; Antioxidant; Hepatoprotective Activity; Dermatological Effect; Antidepressant and Memory-Enhancing Activity; Other Effects; Phytochemistry; Flavonoids; Saponins; Phenolic Compounds; Coumarins; Essential Oils and Other Compounds; Side Effects and Toxicity; Conclusion; References Amino AcidSaponins; Terpenoids (Isoprenoids); Abscisic Acid (ABA); Lycopene and b-Carotene; Oxyphytosterol; Phytosterols/Stanols; Conclusion; Future Consideration; References; Antianxiety Activities Associated with Herbal Drugs: A Review; Introduction; Allopathic Anxiolytic Agents, Pharmacodynamics, and Disadvantages; Plants Having Anxiolytic Effects; Ashwagandha; Kava; St. John's-Wort; Brahmi; Passionflower; Siberian Ginseng; Star Flower; Ginseng; Salvia reuterana; Ginkgo; American Skullcap; Valerian; Damiana; Nees; Safed Musli; Griseb; Clary; Mugwort; Magnoliaceae Antidiabetes Effects of Artemisia absinthiumAnticancer Activity of Artemisia absinthium; Gastrointestinal Effects of Artemisia absinthium; Antioxidant Activity of Artemisia absinthium; Immunomodulatory Effect of Artemisia absinthium; Central Nervous System and Epileptic Effects of Artemisia absinthium; Anti-obesity Effects of Artemisia absinthium; Antifertility Effects of Artemisia absinthium; Toxicity and Interaction of Artemisia absinthium; References; Dietary Phytochemicals and Their Potential Effects on Diabetes Mellitus 2; Introduction; Pathogenesis; Dietary Phytochemicals; Polyphenols Comparison of Anxiolytic Activity of Herbal Plant Against Allopathic FormulationsConclusion; References; Medicinal Plants in the Treatment of Arthritis; Introduction; Causes; Epidemiology; Need for Herbal Drugs for the Management of RA; Medicinal Plants with Antiarthritic Potential; Arctium lappa; Artemisia absinthium L.; Senna; Citrus medica L.; Clematis ochroleuca; Colchicum autumnale; Cuscuta epithymum; Asafoetida; Black Caraway; Rhubarb Root; China Root; Nux Vomica; Karanja; Punarnava; Haritaki; Avocado; Cat's Claw; Tayuya; Chuchuhuasi; Carrapicho; Guaco; Shallaki; Sarasaparilla Glycyrrhiza glabra (Licorice) in Turkmenistan: Medicinal and Biological AspectsIntroduction; Medicinal Value of Licorice (G. glabra); Industrial Aspects; Conclusions; References; Chemical Composition and Biological Uses of Artemisia absinthium (Wormwood); Introduction; Historical Background of Artemisia absinthium; Medicinal Importance of Artemisia absinthium; Taxonomy; Phytochemistry of Artemisia absinthium; Active Constituents; Antimicrobial Activity of Artemisia absinthium; Adaptogenic and Nootropic Activity of Artemisia absinthium; Forced Swimming Test (FST); Tail Suspension Test
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by David Edwards.
    Contents:
    Using GenBank / Eric W. Sayers and Ilene Karsch-Mizrachi
    UniProtKB/Swiss-Prot, the manually annotated section of the UniProt knowledgebase : how to use the entry view / Emmanuel Boutet ... [et al.]
    KEGG bioinformatics resource for plant genomics and metabolomics / Minoru Kanehisa
    Plant pathway databases / Pankaj Jaiswal and Björn Usadel
    Plant ontology : a tool for plant genomics / Laurel Cooper and Pankaj Jaiswal
    Ensembl plants : integrating tools for visualizing, mining, and analyzing plant genomics data / Dan Bolser ... [et al.]
    Gramene : a resource for comparative analysis of plants genomes and pathways / Marcela Karey Tello-Ruiz ... [et al.]
    PGSB/MIPS plant genome information resources and concepts for the analysis of complex grass genomes / Manuel Spannagl ... [et al.]
    MaizeGDB : the maize genetics and genomics database / Lisa Harper ... [et al.]
    WheatGenome.info : a resource for wheat genomics resource / Kaitao Lai
    User guidelines for the brassica database : BRAD / Xiaobo Wang, Feng Cheng, and Xiaowu Wang
    TAG sequence identification of genomic regions using TAGdb / Pradeep Ruperao
    Short read alignment using SOAP2 / Bhavna Hurgobin
    Tablet : visualizing next-generation sequence assemblies and mappings / Iain Milne ... [et al.]
    Analysis of genotyping-by-sequencing (GBS) data / Sateesh Kagale ... [et al.]
    Skim-based genotyping by sequencing using a double haploid population to call SNPs, infer gene conversions, and improve genome assemblies / Philipp Emanuel Bayer
    Finding and characterizing repeats in plant genomes / Jacques Nicolas, Pierre Peterlongo, and Sébastien Tempel
    Analysis of RNA-Seq data using TopHat and cufflinks / Sreya Ghosh and Chon-Kit Kenneth Chan.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Anja Geitmann, Joseph Gril, editors.
    Summary: This book provides important insights into the operating principles of plants by highlighting the relationship between structure and function. It describes the quantitative determination of structural and mechanical parameters, such as the material properties of a tissue, in correlation with specific features, such as the ability of the tissue to conduct water or withstand bending forces, which will allow advanced analysis in plant biomechanics. This knowledge enables researchers to understand the developmental changes that occur in plant organs over their life span and under the influence of environmental factors. The authors provide an overview of the state of the art of plant structure and function and how they relate to the mechanical behavior of the organism, such as the ability of plants to grow against the gravity vector or to withstand the forces of wind. They also show the sophisticated strategies employed by plants to effect organ movement and morphogenesis in the absence of muscles or cellular migration. As such, this book not only appeals to scientists currently working in plant sciences and biophysics, but also inspires future generations to pursue their own research in this area.

    Contents:
    Organ and Tissue Mechanics
    Wood cell wall structure and organization in relation to mechanics
    Modelling, evaluation and biomechanical consequences of growth stress profiles inside tree stems
    Bending stress in plant stems: Models and assumptions
    Tree mechanics and wind loading
    Growth, Morphogenesis & Motion
    The mechanics of leaf growth on large scales
    Twisting growth in plant roots
    Plants at bodybuilding: development of plant "muscles"
    Modeling plant morphogenesis: An introduction
    Mechanical conflicts in growth heterogeneity
    Folding, wrinkling and buckling in plant cell walls
    Structural principles in the design of hygroscopically moving plant cells
    Using modeling to understand the hygromechanical and hysteretic behavior of the S2 cell wall layer of wood
    Molecular Underpinnings of Cell Wall Mechanics
    Calcium-pectin chemistry and biomechanics: Biological background and mathematical modelling
    Cell wall expansion as viewed by the creep method
    Tensile testing of primary plant cells and tissues.+- Water Transport, Mechanosensing & Biomimetics
    Water motion and sugar translocation in leaves
    Molecular mechanisms of mechanosensing and mechanotransduction
    Biomechanics and functional morphology of plants
    inspiration for biomimetic materials and structures.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Guanqun Chen, Randall J. Weselake, Stacy D. Singer, editors.
    Summary: Among the major challenges facing society today, seeking renewable alternatives to petroleum-based fuels and manufactured goods is critically important to reducing society's dependency on petroleum and tackling environmental issues associated with petroleum use. In recent years there has been considerable research targeted toward the development of plant-derived bioproducts to replace petrochemical feedstocks for both fuel and manufacturing. Plants not only provide a large amount of renewable biomass, but their biochemical diversity also offers many chemical and molecular tools for the production of new products through biotechnology. Plant Bioproducts is an introduction to the production and application of plant bioproducts, including biofuels, bioplastics, and biochemicals for the manufacturing sector. Contributing authors examine various bioproducts with respect to their basic chemistry, relationship to current petrochemical-based products, and strategies for their production in plants. Chapters cover the integrated roles of agronomy, plant breeding, biotechnology, and biorefining in the context of bioproduct development. Environmental, economic, ethical, and social issues surrounding bioproducts, including the use of genetically modified crops, challenges to food security, and consumer acceptance, are also covered.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors; Editor Biographies;
    Chapter 1: Building a Case forPlant Bioproducts; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Towards Closing the Carbon Cycle; 1.3 Why Plant Bioproducts?; 1.4 Closing Comments; References;
    Chapter 2: Introduction to Plant Biomolecules and Cellular Metabolism; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Atoms and Molecules; 2.3 Lipids; 2.4 Carbohydrates; 2.5 Amino Acids and Proteins; 2.6 Biochemical Reactions Are Catalyzed by Enzymes; 2.7 Elementary Plant Metabolism; 2.8 Structural Diversity as a Major Advantage for Bioproducts; References 4.7 Improving Biodiesel ThroughModification ofPlant Storage Lipid Biosynthesis4.7.1 Seed Oil Biosynthesis; 4.7.2 Strategies forAltering Plant Fatty Acid Composition forImproved Biodiesel Quality; 4.7.3 Strategies forEnhancing Seed Oil Content toIncrease Supplies ofBiodiesel Feedstocks; 4.8 Applications forBy-Products ofBiodiesel Production: Maximizing theValue ofBiodiesel Feedstocks; 4.9 Closing Comments; References;
    Chapter 5: Production ofOther Bioproducts fromPlant Oils; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Industrial Feedstocks; 5.2.1 Fatty Acids; 5.2.1.1 Medium-Chain Saturated Fatty Acids 5.2.1.2 Monounsaturated Fatty Acids5.2.1.3 Unusual Fatty Acids; 5.2.2 Plant-Derived Wax Esters; 5.2.3 Lipid-Derived Polymers; 5.2.3.1 Bioplastics; 5.2.3.2 Natural Rubber; 5.3 Production of Bioactive Oils in Plants; 5.3.1 Very Long-Chain Polyunsaturated Fatty Acids; 5.3.2 Conjugated Linolenic Acids; 5.4 Challenges Associated with the Metabolic Engineering of Lipid Composition in Plants; 5.4.1 Preference of Kennedy Pathway Acyltransferases for Particular Substrates; 5.4.2 The Importance of Acyl Transfer from Phosphatidylcholine to Triacylglycerol in Fatty Acid Composition; 5.5 Closing Comments
    Chapter 3: An Integrated Approach to Plant Bioproduct Production 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Plant Breeding and Agronomy; 3.3 Plant Biotechnology, Genomics, and Modern Plant Breeding; 3.4 The Biorefinery; 3.5 Bioproduct Development and the Social Sciences; References;
    Chapter 4: Production of Biodiesel from Plant Oils; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 What Is Biodiesel?; 4.3 Other Types of Fuel Produced from Plant Oils; 4.4 Advantages and Challenges of Biodiesel Versus Petroleum-Derived Diesel; 4.5 Structure/Function Relationships Influencing Biodiesel Performance; 4.6 Sources of Plant-Derived Biodiesel
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    S.M. Paul Khurana, Rajarshi Kumar Gaur, editors.
    Summary: Refinement in sequencing technologies and potential of genomic research resulted in meteoric growth of biological information such as sequences of DNA, RNA and protein requiring databases for efficient storage, management and retrieval of the biological information. Also, computational algorithms for analysis of these colossal data became a vital aspect of biological sciences. The work aims to show the process of turning bioscience innovation into companies and products, covering the basic science, the translation of science into technology. Due to rapid developments, there seems to be no basic difference between the pharmaceutical industry and the biotechnological industry. However, approved products in the pipeline and renewed public confidence make it one of the most promising areas of economic growth in the near future. India offers a huge market for the products as well as cheap manufacturing base for export. The book is a sincere work of compilation of new and recent advances in the topic of concern through various innovative researches and scientific opinion therefrom. The book is dedicated to the readers who will definitely find it interesting and knowledgeable in carrying out their respective researches in different aspects of applied microbiology and biotechnology.

    Contents:
    Selected Innovative Solutions for the Regulation of GM crops in times of Gene Editing
    Principles and Implications of various genome enrichment approaches for targeted sequencing of plant genomes
    Genomic intervention in wheat improvement
    Current Trends in Biotechnology: from genome sequence to crop improvement
    Emergence of Medicagotruncatula as a model for legume genomics
    Genomics and supporting factors involved in plant response to abiotic and biotic stress accompanied with molecular mechanism
    Genome editing: Advances and Prospects
    Bioinformatics Intervention In Plant Biotechnology In The Era of Genomics: An Overview
    Plant Oil Biodiesel: Technologies for Commercial Production, Present Status and Future Prospects
    Effect of nanomaterials and their possible implication on the plants
    Generating bioelectricity from different organic residues using microbial fuel cells
    Progress and Prospects in the Production of Cellulosic Ethanol
    Importance of Actinobacteria for Bioremediation
    Medicinal properties and health benefits of Withania somnifera
    Active compounds and Bacteria harbouring capacity of Lichens and its medicinal use in bacterial and cancer infections
    Symbiosis between Sebacinales and Aloe vera
    Nanotechnological Interventions For Improving Plant Health And Productivity
    Root nodule development in model versus non-canonical plants
    CRISPR Applications in Plant Genetic Engineering and Biotechnology
    Defense mechanism and diverse actions of fungal biological control agents against plant biotic stresses
    Role of ROS in induction signalling mediated defense in Plants against abiotic stresses
    Plant viruses as Virus Induced Gene Silencing (VIGS) vectors
    Post-transcriptional gene silencing as a tool for controlling viruses in plants
    Plant platform for therapeutic monoclonal antibody production
    Droplet digital PCR for absolute quantification of plant pathogens
    Diagnostics for citrus greening disease (Huang longbing): current and emerging technologies
    Chloroplast proteins & virus interplay: a pathfinder to crop improvement.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Mohamed Ramadan Rady.
    Summary: Plant tissue culture and advanced biotechnologies have proven to be influential tools that complement conventional breeding and accelerate development of many medicinal plants. Various approaches, such as pathway engineering, precursor feeding, transformation, elicitation with biotic and abiotic elicitors and scaling up in bioreactors, have been explored to improve the production of secondary metabolites from different medicinal plants. This book provides a comprehensive description of various studies, carried out on in vitro culture and hairy root cultures of Catharanthus roseus, Silybum marianum and Digitalis species which have been considered as alternative sources for the production of anti-tumour compounds, flavonolignans and cardenolides. Specific focus is on elicitation strategy for increasing production of bioactive compounds of C. roseus L., S. marianum and Digitalis species to overcome the constrains of conventional propagation. This book is valuable for researchers or students working on medicinal plants, phytochemistry, and plant tissue culture. It also serves as a reference for the pharmaceutical industry.

    Contents:
    1. Terpenoid indole alkaloid production from in vitro culture of Catharanthus roseus through biotic, abiotic elicitation and precursors feeding
    2. Biotic elicitation and TIA production from in vitro cultures of C.roseus
    3. Precursor feeding and TIA production from in vitro cultures of C.roseus
    4. Conclusion and future aspects
    5. Terpenoid indole alkaloid production from in vitro culture of Silybum marianum through biotic, abiotic elicitation and precursors feeding
    6. Biotic elicitation and TIA production from in vitro cultures of S. marianum
    7. Precursor feeding and TIA production from in vitro cultures of S. marianum
    8. Conclusion and future aspects
    9. Terpenoid indole alkaloid production from in vitro culture of Digitalis species through biotic, abiotic elicitation and precursors feeding
    10. Biotic elicitation and TIA production from in vitro cultures of Digitalis species
    11. Precursor feeding and TIA production from in vitro cultures of Digitalis species
    12. Conclusion and future aspects.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Ajit Varma, Swati Tripathi, Ram Prasad, editors.
    Summary: This book highlights recent advances in the field of plant-biotic interactions and explores current serious issues in the crop production industry. It is intended to attract more attention to these important, but often overlooked areas, and to stimulate new ideas for future research. Plants are constantly under attack by pathogens, pests, and parasites, which can significantly impact worldwide food production and human health. While pathogens and pests attack and interconnect with their hosts in a variety of ways, plants have developed sophisticated immune systems to fight infections. In the field of plant-biotic interactions, most of the studies to date have focused on the function and signaling pathways of plant disease resistance proteins and pattern recognition receptors, as well as pathogen effector proteins. In contrast, this book presents new and emerging research areas, and introduces students, researchers, academics, and policy advisors to the latest trends in e.g. microbial technology, environmental microbiology, agricultural science, the health sciences, biological sciences and other related disciplines.

    Contents:
    Endophytic Microorganisms as Biological Control Agents for Plant Pathogens: A Panacea for Sustainable Agriculture
    Plant
    Phytophthora Interaction Proteomics
    Impact of Climate Change on Soil- Microbial Community
    Industrial Effluents: Impact on Agricultural Soils and Microbial Diversity
    Plant Metabolites Involved in Plant-Pathogen Interactions
    Management of Root Knot Nematode in Different Crops Using Microorganisms
    Plant Growth Promoting Bacterial Life at High Salt Concentrations: Genetic Variability
    Rhizosphere: A Home for Human Pathogens
    Effect of Organic Farming on Structural and Functional diversity of Soil Microbiome- Benefits and Risks
    Plants for Biocontrol and Biological Control of Plant Pathogens
    Entomopathogenic Nematodes in Biological Control of Insect Pests with Reference to Insect Immunity
    Interaction Between Aromatic Oil Components and Bacterial Targets
    Enhancement of Active Constituents of Medicinal Plants Through the Use of Microbes
    Effect of Agnihotra Ash on Drug Resistant Escherichia coli in water
    Plant Microbe Interface: The Plant Antimicrobial Peptides
    Microbe Mediated Abiotic Stress Alleviation: Molecular and Biochemical Basis
    Microbial Diversity in Soil: Biological Tools for Abiotic Stress Management in Plants.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    P. M. Priyadarshan.
    Summary: This book offers a detailed overview of both conventional and modern approaches to plant breeding. In 25 chapters, it explores various aspects of conventional and modern means of plant breeding, including: history, objective, activities, centres of origin, plant introduction, reproduction, incompatibility, sterility, biometrics, selection, hybridization, methods of breeding both self- and cross- pollinated crops, heterosis, synthetic varieties, induced mutations and polyploidy, distant hybridization, quality breeding, ideotype breeding, resistance breeding, breeding for stress resistance, G x E interactions, tissue culture, genetic engineering, molecular breeding, genomics, gene action and varietal release. The book's content addresses the needs of students worldwide. Modern methods like molecular breeding and genomics are dealt with extensively so as to provide a firm foundation and equip readers to read further advanced books. Each chapter discusses the respective subject as comprehensively as possible, and includes a section on further reading at the end. Info-boxes highlight the latest advances, and care has been taken to include nearly all topics required under the curricula of MS programs. As such, the book provides a much-needed reference guide for MS students around the globe.

    Contents:
    Part I. General Topics
    1. Introduction
    2. Objectives, Activities and Centres of Origin
    3. Plant Introduction
    Part II. Developmental Aspects
    4. Mode of Reproduction and Breeding Systems in Plants
    5. Incompatibility
    6. Sterility
    7. Biometrics and Informatics
    Part III. Breeding Methods
    8. Selection
    9. Backcross Method of Selection
    10. Hybridization
    11. Breeding Self-pollinated Crops
    12. Breeding Cross-Pollinated Crops
    13. Inbred Line Development
    14. Population Improvement
    Part IV. Specialized Breeding
    15. Heterosis
    16. Hybrids and Synthetic Cultivars
    17. Induced Mutations and Polyploidy Breeding
    18. Distant Hybridization
    19. Quality Breeding
    20. Ideotype Breeding and Multi-trait Selection
    21. Host Plant Resistance Breeding
    22. Breeding for Stress Adaptation
    23. Genotype-By-Environment Interactions
    Part V. Plant Biotechnology
    24. Tissue Culture
    25. Genetic Engineering
    26. Molecular Breeding
    27. Genomics in Plant Breeding
    Part VI Intellectual Property Management
    28. Intellectual Property Management.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Charles T. Anderson, Elizabeth S. Haswell, Ram Dixit.
    Summary: "Plant Cell Biology, volume 160 in "Methods in Cell Biology", includes chapters on modern experimental procedures and applications developed for research in the broad area of plant cell biology. Topics covered in this volume include techniques for imaging and analyzing membrane dynamics and movement across membranes; cell wall composition, structure and mechanics; cytoskeleton dynamics and organization; cell development; ion channel physiology; cell mechanics; and methods related to quantifying cell morphogenesis."--publisher's web page, viewed September 7, 2020.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2020
  • Digital
    edited by José M. Estevez.
    Contents:
    Penium margaritaceum as a model organism for cell wall analysis of expanding plant cells / Maja G. Rydahl ... [et al.]
    Using chemical genomics to study cell wall formation and cell growth in Arabidopsis thaliana and Penium margaritaceum / N. Worden ... [et al.]
    Optimized method for growing in vitro Arabidopsis thaliana pollen tubes / Cecilia Borassi ... [et al.]
    Imaging of calcium dynamics in pollen tube cytoplasm / María Laura Barberini and Jorge Muschietti
    Live imaging of root hairs / Silvia M. Velasquez, Jose R. Dinneny, and José M. Estevez
    Improved ROS measurement in root hair cells / Paola Silvina Denita Juárez, Silvina Mangano, and José M. Estevez
    Root hair assay to expedite cell death research / Joanna Kacprzyk and Paul F. McCabe
    Vacuolar staining methods in plant cells / David Scheuring ... [et al.]
    Live cell imaging of FM4-64, a tool for tracing the endocytic pathways in Arabidopsis root cells / Adeline Rigal, Siamsa M. Doyle, and Stéphanie Robert
    Salt-stress regulation of root system growth and architecture in Arabidopsis seedlings / Lina Duan, Jose Sebastian, and Jose R. Dinneny
    Quantification of fluorescent reporters in plant cells / Michael Pound, Andrew P. French, and Darren M. Wells
    Live cell imaging of the cytoskeleton and cell wall enzymes in plant cells / Arun Sampathkumar and Raymond Wightman
    Using the split-ubiquitin yeast two-hybrid system to test protein-protein interactions of transmembrane proteins / Logan Bashline and Ying Gu
    Activation tag screening for cell expansion genes in Arabidopsis thaliana / Chaowen Xiao and Charles T. Anderson
    BiFC for protein-protein interactions and protein topology : discussing an integrative approach for an old technique / Giovanni Stefano, Luciana Renna, and Federica Brandizzi
    N-Glycosylation and plant cell growth / Christiane Veit, Ulrike Vavra, and Richard Strasser
    Peptide separation methodologies for in-depth proteomics / Sajad Majeed Zargar ... [et al.]
    Structural and mechanical characterization of growing Arabidopsis plant cell walls / Friederike Saxe, Ingo Burgert, and Michaela Eder.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Viktor Žárský, Fatima Cvrčková.
    Contents:
    Essential Methods of Plant Sample Preparation for Light Microscopy / Aleš Soukup and Edita Tylová
    Selected Simple Methods of Plant Cell Wall Histochemistry and Staining for Light Microscopy / Aleš Soukup
    Resin Embedding, Sectioning and Immunocytochemical Analyses of Plant Cell Walls in Hard Tissues / Kieran J.D. Lee and J. Paul Knox
    Automated Microscopy in Forward Genetic Screening of Arabidopsis / Tereza Dobisová and Jan Hejátko
    Image Analysis: Basic Procedures for Description of Plant Structures / Jana Albrechtová, Zuzana Kubínová, Aleš Soukup, and Jiří Janáček
    Identifying Subcellular Protein Localization with Fluorescent Protein Fusions After Transient Expression in Onion Epidermal Cells / Andreas Nebenführ
    Visualizing and Quantifying the in vivo Structure and Dynamics of the Arabidopsis Cortical Cytoskeleton using CLSM and VAEM / Amparo Rosero, Viktor Žárský, and Fatima Cvrčková
    Sequential Replicas for In Vivo Imaging of Growing Organ Surfaces / Dorota Kwiatkowska and Agata Burian
    Time-lapse Imaging of Developing Meristems using Confocal Laser Scanning Microscope / Olivier Hamant, Pradeep Das, and Agata Burian
    Quantifying Cell Shape and Gene Expression in the Shoot Apical Meristem using MorphoGraphX / Pierre Barbier de Reuille, Sarah Robinson, and Richard S. Smith
    Mechanical Measurements on Living Plant Cells by Micro-indentation with Cellular Force Microscopy / Anne-Lise Routier-Kierzkowska and Richard S. Smith
    High-pressure Freezing and Low-temperature Processing of Plant Tissue Samples for Electron Microscopy / Ichirou Karahara and Byung-Ho Kang
    Reconstructing Plant Cells in 3D by Serial Section Electron Tomography Kiminori Toyooka and Byung-Ho Kang
    Imaging Plant Nuclei and Membrane-associated Cytoskeleton by Field Emission Scanning Electron Microscopy / Jindřiška Fišerová and Martin W. Goldberg
    Immunogold Labeling of Resin-embedded Electron Microscopical Sections / Ilse Foissner and Margit Hoeftberger
    Live Cell Imaging of Arabidopsis Root Hairs / Tijs Ketelaar
    Morphological Analysis of Cell Growth Mutants in Physcomitrella / Jeffrey P. Bibeau and Luis Vidali
    Plant Cell Lines in Cell Morphogenesis Research / Daniela Seifertová, Petr Klíma, Markéta Pařezová, Jan Petrášek, Eva Zažímalová, and Zdeněk Opatrný
    Antisense Oligodeoxynucleotide-mediated Gene Knockdown in Pollen Tubes / Radek Bezvoda, Roman Pleskot, Viktor Žárský, and Martin Potocký
    Lab-on-a-Chip for Studying Growing Pollen Tubes / Carlos G. Agudelo, Muthukumaran Packirisamy, and Anja Geitmann
    Laser Microdissection of Plant Cells / Yvonne Ludwig and Frank Hochholdinger
    Optical Trapping in Plant Cells / Tijs Ketelaar, Norbert de Ruijter, and Stefan Niehren
    Heterologous Expression in Budding Yeast as a Tool for Studying the Plant Cell Morphogenesis Machinery / Fatima Cvrčková and Michal Hála .
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Glenn R. Hicks, Stéphanie Robert.
    Contents:
    Fully-automated Compound Screening in Arabidopsis thaliana Seedlings
    Time-profiling Fluorescent Reporters in the Arabidopsis Root
    Screening for Bioactive Small Molecules by in vivo Monitoring of Luciferase-based Reporter Gene Expression in Arabidopsis thaliana
    Application of Yeast-two Hybrid Assay to Chemical Genomic Screens: A High-throughput System to Identify Novel Molecules Modulating Plant Hormone Receptor Complexes
    High-throughput Screening of Small Molecule Libraries for Inducers of Plant Defense Responses
    Using a Reverse Genetics Approach to Investigate Small Molecule Activity
    Investigating the Phytohormone Ethylene Response Pathway by Chemical Genetics
    Screening for Inhibitors of Chloroplast Galactolipid Synthesis Acting in membrano and in Planta
    Forward Chemical Screening of Small RNA Pathways
    Identification and Use of Fluorescent Dyes for Plant Cell Wall Imaging Using High-Throughput Screening
    High-throughput Identification of Chemical Endomembrane Cycling Disruptors Utilizing Tobacco Pollen
    Plant Chemical Genomics: Gravity Sensing and Response
    Screening Chemical Libraries for Compounds that Affect Protein Sorting to the Yeast Vacuole
    The use of Multi-drug Approach to Uncover New Players of the Endomembrane System Trafficking Machinery
    Cheminformatic Analysis of High-Throughput Compound Screens
    Endomembrane Dissection Using Chemically-Induced Bioactive Clusters
    Statistical Molecular Design: A Tool to Follow Up Hits From Small Molecule Screening
    Early Stage Hit Triage for Plant Chemical Genetic Screens and Target Site Identification
    Screening for Gene Function using the FOX (Full-length cDNA OvereXpressor gene) Hunting System
    Quantification of Stable Isotope Label in Metabolites via Mass Spectrometry
    1H NMR Based Metabolomics Methods for Chemical Genomics Experiments
    Determination of Auxin Transport Parameters on the Cellular Level
    Analyzing the in vivo Status of Exogenously Applied Auxins: A HPLC-based Method to Characterize the Intracellularly Localized Auxin Transporters.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Dorothee Staiger.
    Summary: "Plant Circadian Networks: Methods and Protocols provides a collection of protocols to investigate clock-controlled parameters including transcript and small RNA levels, promoter activity using luciferase reporters, protein levels and posttranslational modification, protein-protein interaction, in vivo DNA-protein interaction and RNA-protein interaction, cellular redox state, Ca2+ levels, and innate immune responses. Furthermore, the use of bioinformatics resources is described to evaluate high throughput data sets and to integrate the data into an overarching picture of circadian networks in the cell. Additional chapters focus on seasonal processes like flowering time control, and techniques on trees, moss and algae. Written in the highly successful Methods in Molecular Biology series format, chapters include introductions to their respective topics, lists of the necessary materials and reagents, step-by-step, readily reproducible laboratory protocols, and key tips on troubleshooting and avoiding known pitfalls. Authoritative and practical, Plant Circadian Networks: Methods and Protocols is designed not only for the chronobiology community dealing with circadian biology but also for the plant community in general."--Back cover.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Dirk K. Hincha, Ellen Zuther.
    Contents:
    Introduction : plant cold acclimation and freezing tolerance / Dirk K. Hincha and Ellen Zuther
    Measuring freezing tolerance : survival and regrowth assays / Daniel Z. Skinner and Kimberly Garland-Campbell
    Measuring freezing tolerance : electrolyte leakage and chlorophyll fluorescence assays / Anja Thalhammer, Dirk K. Hincha, and Ellen Zuther
    Conducting field trials for frost tolerance breeding in cereals / Luigi Cattivelli
    A whole-plant screening test to identify genotypes with superior freezing tolerance / Annick Bertrand, Yves Castonguay, and Josée Bourassa
    Mapping of quantitative trait loci (QTL) associated with plant freezing tolerance and cold acclimation / Evelyne Téoulé and Carine Géry
    Common garden experiments to characterize cold acclimation responses in plants from different climatic regions / Andrey V. Malyshev, Hugh A.L. Henry, and Juergen Kreyling
    Identification of Arabidopsis mutants with altered freezing tolerance / Carlos Perea-Resa and Julio Salinas
    Infrared thermal analysis of plant freezing processes / Gilbert Neuner and Edith Kuprian
    Cryo-scanning electron microscopy to study the freezing behavior of plant tissues / Seizo Fujikawa and Keita Endoh
    Three-dimensional reconstruction of frozen and thawed plant tissues from microscopic images / David P. Livingston III and Tan D. Tuong
    Proteomic approaches to identify cold-regulated soluble proteins / Stefanie Döll, Rico Lippmann, and Hans-Peter Mock
    Proteomic approaches to identify cold-regulated plasma membrane proteins / Daisuke Takahashi [and four others]
    Profiling methods to identify cold-regulated primary metabolites using gas chromatography coupled to mass spectrometry / Frederik Dethloff [and eigt others]
    A lipidomic approach to identify cold-induced changes in Arabidopsis membrane lipid composition / Hieu Sy Vu [and three others]
    Quantification of superoxide and hydrogen peroxide in leaves / Ilona Juszczak and Margarete Baier
    Estimating ice encasement tolerance of herbage plants / Bjarni E. Gudleifsson and Brynhildur Bjarnadottir
    Characterization of ice binding proteins from sea ice algae / Maddalena Bayer-Giraldi, EonSeon Jin, and Peter W. Wilson
    Isolation and characterization of ice-binding proteins from higher plants / Adam J. Middleton [and five others].
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Mallappa Kumara Swamy, editor.
    Summary: Plants produce a vast number of bioactive compounds with different chemical scaffolds, which modulate a diverse range of molecular targets and are used as drugs for treating numerous diseases. Most present-day medicines are derived either from plant compounds or their derivatives, and plant compounds continue to offer limitless reserves for the discovery of new medicines. While different classes of plant compounds, like phenolics, flavonoids, saponins and alkaloids, and their potential pharmacological applications are currently being explored, their curative mechanisms are yet to be understood in detail. This book is divided into 2 volumes and offers detailed information on plant-derived bioactive compounds, including recent research findings. Volume 1, "Plant-derived Bioactives: Chemistry and Mode of Action" discusses the chemistry of highly valued plant bioactive compounds and their mode of actions at the molecular level. Volume 2, "Plant-derived Bioactives: Production, Properties and Therapeutic Applications" explores the sources, biosynthesis, production, biological properties and therapeutic applications of plant bioactives. Given their scope, these books are valuable resources for members of the scientific community wishing to further explore various medicinal plants and the therapeutic applications of their bioactive compounds. They appeal to scholars, teachers and scientists involved in plant product research, and facilitate the development of new drugs.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    About the Book
    Contents
    About the Editor
    1: Orientin: A C-Glycosyl Flavonoid that Mitigates Colorectal Cancer
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Flavonoid's Role in Cancer Prevention
    1.3 About Orientin
    1.3.1 Chemistry
    1.3.2 Natural Occurrence
    1.3.3 Pharmacological Properties
    1.4 Experimental Colorectal Carcinogenesis
    1.4.1 HT29 (Human Colorectal Adenocarcinoma) Cell Line
    1.4.2 Chemically Induced Animal Models
    1.4.2.1 DMH-Induced Experimental Colon Carcinogenesis
    1.4.2.2 Metabolism of DMH 1.5 Orientin Against Colon Cancer in Different Ways
    1.5.1 Body Weight, Growth Rate, and Polyp's Incidence
    1.5.2 Lipid Peroxidation and Antioxidant Status
    1.5.3 Xenobiotic Metabolizing Enzymes
    1.5.4 ACF Formation
    1.5.5 Tumor Marker Levels
    1.5.6 Mast Cell Infiltration
    1.5.7 Tumor Cell Proliferation
    1.5.8 NF-B and Inflammatory Cytokine Expression
    1.5.9 Pro-Inflammatory Enzymes
    1.5.10 Cell Cycle Arrest
    1.5.11 Apoptosis
    1.6 Conclusions
    References
    2: Plant Flavonoids Against Colorectal Cancer and Mechanisms of Action
    2.1 Introduction 2.2 Bacterial Enzymes and Colon Cancer
    2.3 Reactive Oxygen Species (ROS) and Cancer
    2.4 Flavonoid
    2.5 Functional Flavonoids as Antioxidants
    2.5.1 Eriodictyol
    2.5.2 Umbelliferone
    2.5.3 Luteolin
    2.6 Conclusions
    References
    3: Plant Neoflavonoids: Chemical Structures and Biological Functions
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Classification of Neoflavonoids
    3.2.1 Dalbergin Group
    3.2.2 Latifolin Group
    3.3 Biological Activities of Neoflavonoids
    3.3.1 Cytotoxic Activities
    3.3.2 Cardiovascular Activities
    3.3.3 Antidiabetic Activity 3.3.4 Antioxidant Activity
    3.3.5 Antiplasmodial Activity
    3.3.6 Anti-Allergic and Anti-Inflammatory Activities
    3.3.7 Anti-Melanogenic Activity
    3.3.8 Antimicrobial Activity
    3.3.9 Antileishmanial Activity
    3.3.10 Urease Inhibitor Activity
    3.3.11 Anti-Osteoporosis Activity
    3.4 Conclusions and Future Prospects
    References
    4: Polyphenols' Role in Autoimmune and Chronic Inflammatory Diseases and the Advent of Computer-Driven Plant Therapies
    4.1 Introduction 4.2 Major Biomarkers in the Progression of Chronic Inflammatory Diseases and Atherosclerosis under the Perspective of Autoimmunity
    4.3 Polyphenol-Driven Modulation of Signalling Pathways in both Chronic Inflammation and Autoimmune Pathologies
    4.4 Challenges and Progress in Herbal Therapies
    4.5 Computer-Aided Approaches in Polyphenolic Therapies
    4.6 Conclusions
    References
    5: Plant Alkaloids: Structures and Bioactive Properties
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Classification of Plant Alkaloids
    5.2.1 True Alkaloids (Heterocyclics)
    5.2.1.1 Pyrrole Alkaloids
    5.2.1.2 Pyrrolidine Alkaloids.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Mallappa Kumara Swamy, editor.
    Summary: Plants produce a vast number of bioactive compounds with different chemical scaffolds, which modulate a diverse range of molecular targets and are used as drugs for treating numerous diseases. Most present-day medicines are derived either from plant compounds or their derivatives, and plant compounds continue to offer limitless reserves for the discovery of new medicines. While different classes of plant compounds, like phenolics, flavonoids, saponins and alkaloids, and their potential pharmacological applications are currently being explored, their curative mechanisms are yet to be understood in detail. This book is divided into 2 volumes and offers detailed information on plant-derived bioactive compounds, including recent research findings. Volume 1, Plant-derived Bioactives: Chemistry and Mode of Action, discusses the chemistry of highly valued plant bioactive compounds and their mode of actions at the molecular level. Volume 2, Plant-derived Bioactives: Production, Properties and Therapeutic Applications, explores the sources, biosynthesis, production, biological properties and therapeutic applications of plant bioactives. Given their scope, these books are valuable resources for members of the scientific community wishing to further explore various medicinal plants and the therapeutic applications of their bioactive compounds. They appeal to scholars, teachers and scientists involved in plant product research, and facilitate the development of innovative new drugs. .

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editor
    Molecular Approaches to Screen Bioactive Compounds from Medicinal Plants
    1 Introduction
    2 Medicinal Plants
    3 Bioactive Compounds in Medicinal Plants
    3.1 Secondary Metabolites
    3.2 Bioactive Peptides
    4 Screening of the Bioactive Compounds
    4.1 Extraction
    4.1.1 Conventional Extraction Techniques
    Soxhlet's Extractor
    Maceration
    Hydrodistillation
    Sonification
    4.1.2 Non-conventional Extraction Techniques
    Ultrasound-Assisted Extraction (UAE)
    Pulsed-Electric Field Extraction (PEF) 5 Essential Oil Isolation Methods
    6 Healing Characteristics of Essential Oils
    6.1 Action Against Viruses
    6.2 Action Against Bacteria
    6.3 Action Against Free Radicals
    6.4 Action Against Malignancy
    6.5 Action Against Fungi
    7 Challenges
    8 Metabolic Engineering Aspects
    8.1 Engineering Biosynthesis in Microbial Terpenoids
    8.2 Engineering Biosynthesis in Plant Terpenoids
    8.3 Engineering Biosynthesis in Plant Phenylpropanoids
    9 Case Study: Sandalwood Oil
    9.1 Initial Detection of the Gene and Full-Sequence cDNA Cloning
    9.2 Results of This Study 6.2 High-Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) and Ultra HPLC
    6.3 Hyphenated Chromatographic Techniques
    7 Conclusions and Future Prospects
    References
    Essential Oils: An Update on Their Biosynthesis and Genetic Strategies to Overcome the Production Challenges
    1 Introduction
    2 Sources and Plant Defense Responsibility
    3 Biosynthesis of Essential Oils
    3.1 The MVA Pathway
    3.2 The MEP Pathway
    3.3 Formation of Prenyldiphosphates
    3.4 The Shikimate Pathway
    4 Synthesis of Essential Oils
    4.1 From Cell and Callus Cultures
    4.2 From Hairy Root Cultures 9.2.1 The Functional Documentation of SaCYP76Fs of Clade I and II, In Vitro
    9.2.2 Discrete Sesquiterpene Mediated Clade I and II SaCYP76F Characterization
    9.2.3 Synthesis of Bergamotol and Santalols in Altered Yeast Cells
    9.3 Inferences from This Study
    10 Conclusions and Future Prospects
    References
    Biosynthesis of Secondary Metabolites in Plants as Influenced by Different Factors
    1 Introduction
    2 Metabolomics Engineering
    2.1 Approaches in Plant Metabolomics
    2.1.1 Targeted Metabolomics
    2.1.2 Un/Non-targeted Metabolomics Enzyme-Assisted Extraction (EAE)
    Microwave-Assisted Extraction (MAE)
    Pressurized Liquid Extraction (PLE)
    Supercritical Fluid Extraction (SFE)
    5 Identification and Characterization
    5.1 Thin-Layer Chromatography and Bio-autography Technique
    5.2 UV-Visible Spectroscopy
    5.3 Infrared Spectroscopy: Near-Infrared Spectroscopy and Mid-Infrared Spectroscopy
    5.4 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy (NMR)
    5.5 Mass Spectrometry
    6 Phytochemical Screening Assays
    6.1 Fourier-Transform Infrared Spectroscopy (FTIR)
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Imran Ul Haq, Siddra Ijaz, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an account of the classical and recent trends in plant sciences, which have contributed for disease management strategies in plants for sustainable agriculture. Advancements in the disciplines of biological sciences like biotechnology, microbiology, bioinformatics as well as information and communication technology etc has given the new dimensions for the development of new plant disease management strategies. By keeping this perspective in view, the editors collected and compiled the useful, practical and recent information regarding plant disease management from a diverse group of authors from different countries associated with well-reputed scientific, teaching and research organizations with the objective to update and equip the researchers with comprehensive and latest knowledge of plant disease management. This book is based on the knowledge of traditional and modern approaches for plant disease management. It has 15 chapters, each chapter describing the pillar strategies, which may be the possible way for crop protection from diseases. This effort deals with the history and recent trends in plant disease control, plant genetics and physiology in disease prognosis, conventional plant breeding program for disease resistance, synthetic chemicals: major component of plant disease management, biological antagonism: expected safe and sustainable way to manage plant diseases, soil microbes and plant health, conventional and modern technologies for the management of post-harvest diseases, nanobiotechnology, an innovative plant disease management approach, transgenic approaches in plants: strategic control for disease management, exploiting RNAi mechanism in plants for disease resistance, genome editing technologies for resistance against phytopathogens: principles, applications and future prospects, plant health clinics in Pakistan: operations and prospects, precision agriculture technologies for management of plant disease, quarantine and regulat ions and development and implementation of IDM program for annual and perennial crops.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: History and Recent Trends in Plant Disease Control: An Overview
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Plant Pathology: Food Safety and Security
    1.3 Brief History of Plant Pathology
    1.4 Basic Principles of Plant Disease Management
    1.5 Biological Control
    1.6 Integrated Plant Disease Management
    1.7 Recent Advances in Plant Disease Management
    References
    Chapter 2: Plant Genetics and Physiology in Disease Prognosis
    2.1 Introduction 2.2 Recent Trends in Biochemical and Molecular Detection of Plant Pathogens
    2.3 Physiology of Diseased Plants
    2.4 Rhizobacteria and Host Plants
    2.5 Induced Resistance Against Pathogen Infection
    References
    Chapter 3: Conventional Plant Breeding Program for Disease Resistance
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Disease Economic Impact
    3.2.1 Examples of Plant Diseases
    3.3 Pathogens Targeted by Plant Breeders
    3.3.1 Fungi
    3.3.2 Nematodes
    3.3.3 Protozoa and Algae
    3.3.4 Bacteria
    3.3.5 Actinomycetes
    3.3.6 Mycoplasmas and Spiroplasms
    3.3.7 Viruses and Viroids 3.11 Advantages of Breeding for Disease Resistance
    3.12 Problems in Breeding for Disease Resistance
    3.13 Breeding Challenges for Pathogen Resistance
    References
    Chapter 4: Synthetic Chemicals: Major Component of Plant Disease Management
    4.1 Historical Prospective of Chemicals for Plant Disease Control
    4.2 Basic Principles of Plant Disease Management with Synthetic Chemicals
    4.2.1 Fungicides
    4.2.2 Antibiotics
    4.2.3 Nematicides
    4.2.4 Viricides
    4.3 Application of Chemicals
    4.4 Human Civilization and Fungicides
    4.5 Classification of Fungicides 3.4 Management of Plant Diseases
    3.5 Genetics of Disease Resistance
    3.5.1 Vertical Resistance
    3.5.2 Horizontal Resistance
    3.6 Resistance Breeding Strategies
    3.6.1 Prioritize the Importance of Diseases
    3.6.2 Steps in Breeding for Disease Resistance
    3.6.2.1 Sources of Resistance Genes
    3.6.2.2 Utilization of Genetic Resource
    3.7 Planned Deployment of Resistance Genes
    3.7.1 Self-Pollinated Crops
    3.7.2 Cross-Pollinated Crops
    3.8 Evaluation
    3.9 Release to Growers
    3.10 Factors Affecting Expression of Disease Resistance 4.5.1 Mode of Action
    4.5.2 Classification Based on General Uses
    4.6 Recent Trends in Development of Synthetic Chemicals
    4.7 Broad Spectrum and New Chemistry Fungicides in Plant Disease Control
    4.8 Fungicide Market, Policies and Procedures
    4.9 Fungicide Resistance and Plant Pathogens
    References
    Chapter 5: Biological Antagonism: A Safe and Sustainable Way to Manage Plant Diseases
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Biological Control
    5.2.1 Terminology
    5.3 Biological Management of Fungal Plant Pathogens
    5.3.1 Beneficial Microbes and Plant Interaction
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Frédérique Van Gijsegem, Jan M. van der Wolf, Ian K. Toth, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a detailed review of many different aspects of pathogens, from the effects of single base pair mutations to large-scale control options, bringing into a single volume over 100 years of findings from thousands of researchers worldwide. Diseases caused by soft rot Pectobacteriaceae (SRP) are a major cause of loss to crop, vegetables and ornamental plants worldwide, and have been found on all continents except Antarctica. While different aspects of the SRP have appeared in other books on plant disease, no book, until now, has been dedicated solely to them.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. General characteristics and history
    Chapter 2. Taxonomy and Evolution. I Toth, John Elphinstone
    Chapter 3 Environment to disease development. I Toth, Jacquie van der Walls, Kristyna Hromodova
    Chapter 4 Molecular plant pathogen interactions
    Chapter 5. Detection and diagnostics
    Chapter 6. Economic impact in potato cultures
    Chapter 7 Disease management
    Chapter 8. Soft rot diseases around the world
    Chapter 9. Outlook
    Chapter 10. Methodology section.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ernst-Detlef Schulze [and more] ; with contributions by Almust Arneth [and more].
    Summary: This completely updated and revised second edition provides a unique and up-to-date treatment of all aspects of plant ecology, making it an ideal textbook and reference work for students, researchers and practitioners. More than 500 high-quality images and drawings, mostly in colour, aid readers' understanding of various key topics, while the clear structure and straightforward style make it user friendly and particularly useful for students. Written by leading experts, it offers authoritative information, including relevant references. While Plant Ecology primarily addresses graduate students in biology and ecology, it is also a valuable resource for post-graduate students and researchers in botany, environmental sciences and landscape ecology, as well as all those whose study or work touches on agriculture, forestry, land use, and landscape management. Key Topics: - Molecular ecophysiology (molecular stress physiology: light, temperature, oxygen deficiency, water deficit (drought), unfavorable soil mineral conditions, biotic stress) - Physiological and biophysical plant ecology (ecophysiology of plants: thermal balance, water, nutrient, carbon relations) - Ecosystem ecology (characteristics of ecosystems, approaches how to study and how to model terrestrial ecosystems, biogeochemical fluxes in terrestrial ecosystems) - Community ecology and biological diversity (development of plant communities in time and space, interactions between plants and plant communities with the abiotic and the biotic environment, biodiversity and ecosystem functioning) - Global ecology (global biogeochemical cycles, Dynamic Global Vegetation Models, global change and terrestrial ecosystems).

    Contents:
    Introduction
    General Themes of Molecular Stress Physiology
    Light
    Temperature
    Oxygen Deficiency
    Water Deficiency (Drought)
    Adverse Soil Mineral Availability
    Biotic Stress
    Thermal Balance of Plants and Plant Communities
    Water Relations
    Nutrient Relations
    Carbon Relations
    Ecosystem Characteristics
    Approaches to Study Terrestrial Ecosystems
    Approaches to Model Processes at the Ecosystem Level
    Biogeochemical Fluxes in Terrestrial Ecosystems
    Development of Plant Communities in Time
    Spatial Distribution of Plants and Plant Communities
    Interactions between Plants, Plant Communities and the Abiotic and Biotic Environment
    Biodiversity
    Global Biogeochemical Cycles
    Dynamic Global Vegetation Models
    Global Change and Terrestrial Ecosystems.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Mirza Hasanuzzaman, editor.
    Summary: This book presents the state-of-the-art in plant ecophysiology. With a particular focus on adaptation to a changing environment, it discusses ecophysiology and adaptive mechanisms of plants under climate change. Over the centuries, the incidence of various abiotic stresses such as salinity, drought, extreme temperatures, atmospheric pollution, metal toxicity due to climate change have regularly affected plants and, and some estimates suggest that environmental stresses may reduce the crop yield by up to 70%. This in turn adversely affects the food security. As sessile organisms, plants are frequently exposed to various environmental adversities. As such, both plant physiology and plant ecophysiology begin with the study of responses to the environment. Provides essential insights, this book can be used for courses such as Plant Physiology, Environmental Science, Crop Production and Agricultural Botany. Volume 1 provides up-to-date information on the impact of climate change on plants, the general consequences and plant responses to various environmental stresses.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Editor and Contributors
    About the Editor
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: Climate Change Influences the Interactive Effects of Simultaneous Impact of Abiotic and Biotic Stresses on Plants
    1.1 Introduction: Climate Change Alters Habitats and Affects Ecosystem Functioning
    1.2 New Ecological Entities "Metaorganism" and "Holobiont"
    1.3 Climate Change Affects Natural Habitats and Biodiversity of Plants and Microorganisms
    1.3.1 Physicochemical Soil Properties
    1.3.2 Soil Influence on Microbiota and Plant Diversity 1.3.3 The Role of Microbiota in Habitat Modulation
    1.3.4 The Role of Plants in Modulation of Habitats
    1.4 Global Climate Change Affects Diversity of Plants and Microbiota and Interactions in Ecosystems
    1.4.1 The Effect on Plants Adapted to Extremal Climate Conditions
    1.4.2 Climate Change and Plant Invasion
    1.4.3 The Role of Links Between Genotypes and Phenotypes in Adaptation to Climate Changes
    1.5 Ecological Interactions Between the Soil, Plants, and Microorganisms Promoting Plastic Response to Climate Change
    1.5.1 The Rhizomicrobiomes
    1.5.2 The Endosymbionts 1.5.3 Plant-Pathogen Interaction
    1.6 Plant and Microbiota Internal Factors Enabling the Response to Complex Environmental Challenges
    1.7 Carbon and Nitrogen Balance Under Climate Change
    1.8 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 2: Loss of Agro-Biodiversity and Productivity Due to Climate Change in Continent Asia: A Review
    2.1 Introduction
    2.1.1 Agro-Biodiversity: Trends and Varieties
    2.1.2 Productivity of Crops
    2.1.2.1 100 Years of Agricultural Change: Trends and Figures Related to Agro-Biodiversity
    2.1.2.2 The Decrease in Cultivated Land and Green Revolution Agriculture 2.1.2.3 Food System and Marketing Globalization
    2.1.2.4 Reduced Incorporation of Livestock in Arable Production
    2.1.3 Varieties of Crops and Their Production
    2.1.3.1 South Asia
    2.1.3.2 Southeast Asia
    2.1.3.3 East Asia
    2.2 Impact of Climate Change on Crops
    2.2.1 Factors Involved in Decreasing Crop Productivity
    2.2.1.1 Temperature Variations
    2.2.1.2 Water Deficiency
    2.2.1.3 Rising CO2
    2.2.1.4 Emission Trends
    2.2.2 Most Affected Crops
    2.3 Impact of Climate Change on Livestock
    2.3.1 Direct Impacts of Climate Change on Livestock 2.3.1.1 Feeds Quality and Quantity
    2.3.1.2 Heat Stress
    2.3.1.3 Water Availability
    2.3.1.4 Diseases and Infections
    2.3.1.5 Biodiversity
    2.3.2 Indirect Impacts of Climate Change
    2.4 Impact of Climate Change on Fisheries
    2.5 Economic Loss Due to Climate Change
    2.5.1 Fluctuation in Prices of Staple Foods
    2.5.2 GDP and Economic Growth
    2.6 Effects on Food Security and Nutrition
    2.6.1 Fluctuation in Prices
    2.6.2 Nutrient Quality of Food
    2.7 Future Projections of Climate Change
    2.8 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: Stress Implications and Crop Productivity
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Mirza Hasanuzzaman, editor.
    Summary: This book presents the state-of-the-art in plant ecophysiology. With a particular focus on adaptation to a changing environment, it discusses ecophysiology and adaptive mechanisms of plants under climate change. Over the centuries, the incidence of various abiotic stresses such as salinity, drought, extreme temperatures, atmospheric pollution, metal toxicity due to climate change have regularly affected plants and, and some estimates suggest that environmental stresses may reduce the crop yield by up to 70%. This in turn adversely affects the food security. As sessile organisms, plants are frequently exposed to various environmental adversities. As such, both plant physiology and plant ecophysiology begin with the study of responses to the environment. Provides essential insights, this book can be used for courses such as Plant Physiology, Environmental Science, Crop Production and Agricultural Botany. Volume 2 provides up-to-date information on the impact of climate change on plants, the general consequences and plant responses to various environmental stresses.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Editor and Contributors
    About the Editor
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: Salinity Stress Management in Field Crops: An Overview of the Agronomic Approaches
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Salinity and Its Causes
    1.3 Plants' Responses to Salinity Stress
    1.4 Effect of Salinity on Crop Plants
    1.5 Agronomic Practices for Salinity Stress Management
    1.5.1 Changes in Irrigation Pattern
    1.5.2 Restoration of Vegetation Cover and Reforestation
    1.5.3 Soil Amendments and Appropriate Use of Fertilizers
    1.5.4 Selection of Appropriate Crop Plants 1.6 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 2: Improving Cotton Crop Tolerance to Drought Stress Through Molecular Approaches
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Cotton Breeding Strategies for Drought Stress Management
    2.3 Molecular Approaches to Combat Drought Stress
    2.3.1 Molecular Breeding Methods
    2.3.1.1 DNA Markers and Marker-Assisted Selection for Drought Stress
    2.3.1.2 QTL Mapping for Drought Stress
    2.3.2 Drought-Responsive Genes Studied in Cotton
    2.3.3 Transgenic Approaches to Combat Drought Stress
    2.4 Modern Techniques Used in Cotton to Combat Drought Stress
    2.5 Conclusion 3.5 Conclusion and Perspective
    References
    Chapter 4: Molecular Mechanism of Plant Adaptation and Tolerance to Cold Stress
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Cell Signaling During Cold Acclimatization in Plants
    4.2.1 Calcium Ion Channels
    4.2.2 Reactive Oxygen Species as Signaling Component
    4.2.3 Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase (MAPK) Signaling
    4.2.4 Lipid Molecule Signaling
    4.3 Physiological Changes Adapted in Plants for Defense Against Cold Stress
    4.3.1 Effect on Membrane Rigidity
    4.3.2 Changes in Cytoskeleton
    4.3.3 Effect of Reactive Oxygen Species 4.3.4 Effect on Photosynthesis
    4.3.5 Low Temperature and Phytohormones
    4.3.6 Microbes and Cold Stress
    4.4 Role of Cold-Responsive Gene in Conferring Resistance to Plant
    4.4.1 Role of Hydrophilic Peptide Providing Cold Tolerance in Plants
    4.4.2 Role of Transcription Factors in Augmenting Cold Tolerance in Plants
    4.4.3 Role of Promoters in Regulating Cold Tolerance in Plants
    4.5 Advancement in Molecular Approaches for Cold Stress
    4.5.1 Transgenic Approach
    4.5.2 Genome Editing
    4.5.3 Omics Approach
    4.6 Challenges Faced in Harboring Plants from Cold Stress
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Marisa S. Otegui.
    Contents:
    Use of FM dyes to analyze plant endocytosis / Kateřina Malínská, Adriana Jelínková, and Jan Petrášek
    Sterol dynamics during endocytic trafficking in Arabidopsis / Thomas Stanislas, Markus Grebe, and Yohann Boutté
    Live microscopy analysis of endosomes and vesicles in tip-growing root hairs / Miroslav Ovečka, Irene Lichtscheidl, and Jozef Šamaj
    Analysis of fluid-phase endocytosis in (intact) plant cells / Vera Bandmann, Peter Haub, and Tobias Meckel
    Immunogold labeling and electron tomography of plant endosomes / Alexandra Chanoca and Marisa S. Otegui
    Investigating protein-protein interactions in the plant endomembrane system using multiphoton-induced FRET-FLIM / Jennifer Schoberer and Stanley W. Botchway
    Analysis of Rab GTPase-effector interactions by bimolecular fluorescence complementation / Emi Ito and Takashi Ueda
    In vivo imaging of brassinosteroid endocytosis in Arabidopsis / Niloufer G. Irani, Simone Di Rubbo, and Eugenia Russinova
    Analysis of prevacuolar compartment-mediated vacuolar proteins transport / Caiji Gao, Yi Cai, Xiaohong Zhuang, and Liwen Jiang
    Evaluation of defective endosomal trafficking to the vacuole by monitoring seed storage proteins in Arabidopsis thaliana / Tomoo Shimada, Yasuko Koumoto, and Ikuko Hara-Nishimura
    Trans-species complementation analysis to study function conservation of plant endosomal sorting complex required for transport (ESCRT) proteins / Francisca C. Reyes
    Re-elicitation assay to correlate flg22-signaling competency with ligand-induced endocytic degradation of the FLS2 receptor / Michelle E. Leslie and Antje Heese
    Preparation of enriched plant clathrin-coated vesicles by differential and density gradient centrifugation / Gregory D. Reynolds, Ben August, and Sebastian Y. Bednarek
    Proteomics of endosomal compartments from plants case study : isolation of trans-golgi network vesicles / Eunsook Park and Georgia Drakakaki
    Analysis of global ubiquitylation and ubiquitin-binding domains involved in endosomal trafficking / Kamila Kalinowska and Erika Isono
    Analysis of endocytosis and ubiquitination of the BOR1 transporter / Koji Kasai, Junpei Takano, and Toru Fujiwara
    Ubiquitination of plant immune receptors / Jinggeng Zhou, Ping He, and Libo Shan
    Ubiquitylation-mediated control of polar auxin transport : analysis of Arabidopsis PIN2 auxin transport protein / Johannes Leitner and Christian Luschnig
    Chemical genomics screening for biomodulators of endomembrane system trafficking / Carlos Rubilar-Hernández, Glenn R. Hicks, and Lorena Norambuena
    Integrative chemical proteomics and cell biology methods to study endocytosis and vesicular trafficking in Arabidopsis / Tomáš Takáč, Tibor Pechan, Olga Šamajová, and Jozef Šamaj.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Charles Spillane, Peter C. McKeown.
    Contents:
    1. Landscaping plant epigenetics / Peter C. McKeown and Charles Spillane
    2. The gene balance hypothesis: dosage effects in plants / James A. Birchler and Reiner A. Veitia
    3. High-throughput RNA-seq for allelic or locus-specific expression analysis in Arabidopsis-related species, hybrids, and allotetraploids / Danny W.-K. Ng, Xiaoli Shi, Gyoungju Nah and Z. Jeffrey Chen
    4. Inference of allele-specific expression from RNA-seq data / Paul K. Korir and Cathal Seoighe
    5. Screening for imprinted genes using high-resolution melting analysis of PCR amplicons / Robert Day and Richard Macknight
    6. Analysis of genomic imprinting by quantitative allele-specific expression by pyrosequencing® / Peter C. McKeown, Antoine Fort and Charles Spilane
    7. Endosperm-specific chromatin profiling by fluorence-activated nuclei sorting and chip-on-chip / Isabelle Weinhofer and Claudia Köhler
    8. Imaging sexual reproduction in Arabidopsis using fluorescent markers / Mathieu Ingouff
    9. Genome-wide analysis of DNA methylation in Arabidopsis using MeDIP-chip / Sandra Cortijo, René Wardenaar, Maria Colomé-Tatché, Frank Johannes and Vincent Colot
    10. Methylation-sensitive amplified polymorphism (MSAP) marker to investigate drought-stress response in montepulciano and sangiovese grape cultivars / Emidio Albertini and Gianpiero Marconi
    11. Detecting histone modifications inplants / Jie Song, Bas Rutjens and Caroline Dean
    12. Quantitatively profiling genome-wide patterns of histone modifications in Arabidopsis thaliana using a chIP-seq / Chongyuan Luo and Eric Lam
    13. Analysis of retrotransposon activity in plants / Christopher DeFraia and R. Keith Slotkin
    14. Detecting epigenetic effects of transposable elements in plants / Christian Parisod, Armel Salmon, Malika Ainouche and Marie-Angèle Grandbastieu
    15. Detection and investigation of transitive gene silencing in plants / Leen Vermeersch, Nancy De Winne and And Depicker.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Mirza Hasanuzzaman, Susana Araújo, Sarvajeet Singh Gill, editors.
    Summary: This book comprehensively introduces all aspects of the physiology, stress responses and tolerance to abiotic stresses of the Fabaceae plants. Different plant families have been providing food, fodder, fuel, medicine and other basic needs for the human and animal since the ancient time. Among the plant families Fabaceae have special importance for their agri-horticultural importance and multifarious uses apart from the basic needs. Interest in the response of Fabaceae plants toward abiotic stresses is growing considering the economic importance and the special adaptive mechanisms. Recent advances and developments in molecular and biotechnological tools has contributed to ease and wider this mission. This book provides up-to-date findings that will be of greater use for the students and researchers, particularly Plant Physiologists, Environmental Scientists, Biotechnologists, Botanists, Food Scientists and Agronomists, to get the information on the recent advances on this plant family in regard to physiology and stress tolerance.

    Contents:
    1. The biology of legumes and their agronomic, economic and social impact
    2.Tropical Legumes: Status, Distribution, Biology and Importance
    3.Nitrogen fixation of legumes: Biology and physiology
    4.Nitrogen fixation of legumes under the family Fabaceae: Adverse effect of abiotic stresses and mitigation strategies
    5.Genetic engineering and genome editing for the improvement of Fabaceae for abiotic stress tolerance
    6.GWAS and genomic approaches in Legumes, an expanding toolkit for examining responses to abiotic stresses
    7.Use of Osmolytes for Improving Abiotic Stress Tolerance in Fabaceae Plants
    8.Role of biostimulants for enhancing abiotic stress tolerance in Fabaceae plants
    9.Abiotic and biotic stresses interaction in Fabaceae plants. Contributions from the grain legumes-soilborne vascular diseases-drought stress triangle
    10.Leguminosae (nom. alt. Fabaceae)
    Its Diversity, Use and Role in Environmental Conservation in the Harsh Environs of the Cold Deserts of North West India
    11.Morphological, physiobiochemical and molecular adaptability of legumes of Fabaceae to drought stress, with special reference to Medicago sativa L.
    12.Phaseolus species responses and tolerance to drought
    13.Fabaceae plants responses and tolerance to high temperature stress
    14.Legume responses and adaptations to nutrient deficiencies
    15.Nutrient Management for improving abiotic stress tolerance in legumes of the family Fabaceae
    16.Fabaceous Plants Under Abiotic Stresses and Biochemical Functions of Micronutrients
    17.Response and tolerance of Fabaceae plant to metal/metalloid toxicity
    18.Oxidative stress and antioxidant defense in Fabaceae plants under abiotic stresses
    19.Threat imposed by O3 induced ROS on defence, nitrogen fixation, physiology, biomass allocation and yield of legumes
    20.Salinity Stress Responses in Three Popular Field Crops Belonging to Fabaceae Family: Current Status and Future Prospect.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Víctor Resco de Dios.
    Summary: This book provides a unique exploration of the inter-relationships between the science of plant environmental responses and the understanding and management of forest fires. It bridges the gap between plant ecologists, interested in the functional and evolutionary consequences of fire in ecosystems, with foresters and fire managers, interested in effectively reducing fire hazard and damage. This innovation in this study lies in its focus on the physiological responses of plants that are of relevance for predicting forest fire risk, behaviour and management. It covers the evolutionary trade-offs in the resistance of plants to fire and drought, and its implications for predicting fuel moisture and fire risk; the importance of floristics and plant traits, in interaction with landform and atmospheric conditions, to successfully predict fire behaviour, and provides recommendations for pre- and post- fire management, in relation with the functional composition of the community. The book will be particularly focused on examples from Mediterranean environments, but the underlying principles will be of broader utility.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Introduction
    1. Forest Fires as a Global Phenomenon
    2. Fire as an Earth System Process
    3. Evolution of the Mediterranean Flora in a Flammable Plant
    4. Fire Regimes across Space
    Section 2: Organismal and Ecosystem Responses to Forest Fires
    5. Effects of Forest Fires on Soil Processes and Organisms
    6. Plant Traits and Forest Fires
    7. Forest Succession, Alternative States and Fire-Vegetation Feedbacks
    Section 3: The Physiology of Forest Fuels
    8. Plant Carbon Economies and the Dynamics of Forest Fuels
    9. Environmental Plant Responses and Forest Fire Risk
    10. Plant Survival after Fire
    Section 4: Fire Behaviour and Management
    11. Ecological Impacts of Anthropogenic Fire
    12. Fire Propagation
    13. Forest Planning and Fire Risk Reduction
    14. Post-Fire Management
    Section 5: Forest Fires and Global Change
    15. Forest Fires and Global Change.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Kirankumar S. Mysore, Muthappa Senthil-Kumar.
    Contents:
    Advances in plant gene silencing methods / Prachi Pandey, Muthappa Senthil-Kumar, and Kirankumar S. Mysore
    Strategies for altering plant traits using virus-induced gene silencing technologies / Christophe Lacomme
    Bioinformatics tools for achieving better gene silencing in plants / Firoz Ahmed, Xinbin Dai, and Patrick Xuechun Zhao
    Profiling of small RNAs involved in plant-pathogen interactions / Dongdong Niu ... [et al.]
    RNAi-mediated resistance to viruses in genetically engineered plants / Abdulrazak B. Ibrahim and Francisco J. L. Aragão
    Simplifying transgene locus structure through Cre-lox recombination / Vibha Srivastava and David W. Ow
    Transgene-induced gene silencing in plants / Yun Jin and Hui-Shan Guo
    Gene silencing by DNA interference in fern gametophytes / Masamitsu Wada and Hidenori Tsuboi
    Induction of stable epigenetic gene silencing in plants using a virus vector / Akira Kanazawa and Megumi Kasai
    Method for validating microRNAs in plants by miR-RACE / Jinggui Fang and Xin Sun
    MR VIGS : microRNA-based virus-induced gene silencing in plants / Weiwei Chen ... [et al.]
    High-throughput RNA interference (RNAi)-based approach using hairy roots for the study of plant-rhizobia interactions / Senjuti Sinharoy, Catalina I. Pislariu, and Michael K. Udvardi
    Functional genomics method for assaying gene function in phytopathogenic fungi through host-induced gene silencing mediated by agroinfiltration / Vinay Panwar, Brent McCallum, and Guus Bakkeren
    Effective and convenient method for the delivery of apple latent spherical virus (ALSV)-based vectors into plant cells by agroinoculation / Tatsuya Kon and Nubuyuki Yoshikawa
    Virus-induced gene silencing (VIGS) for functional genomics in rice using Rice tungro bacilliform virus (RTBV) as a vector / Ravi Kant, Shweta Sharma, and Indranil Dasgupta
    Virus-induced gene silencing of fiber-related genes in cotton / John R. Tuttle, Candace H. Haigler, and Dominique (Niki) Robertson
    Establishment of an efficient virus-induced gene silencing (VIGS) assay in Arabidopsis by agrobacterium-mediated rubbing infection / Ana Marcia E. de A. Manhães, Marcos V. V. de Oliveira, and Libo Shan
    Virus-induced gene silencing as a scalable tool to study drought tolerance in plants / Gavin M. George, Michael E. Ruckle, and James R. Lloyd
    VIGS for dissecting mechanisms involved in the symbiotic interaction of microbes with plants / Mette Grønlund
    Construction of a cotton VIGS library for functional Genomics study / Maoying Li, Fangjun Li, and Ping He
    Synthetic gene complementation to determine off-target silencing / Dhirendra Kumar
    Construction of mismatched inverted repeat (IR) silencing vectors for maximizing IR stability and effective gene silencing in plants / M. E. Chrissie Rey ... [et al.].
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Nigel Maxted, Danny Hunter, Rodomiro Ortiz Ríos.
    Summary: "Plant genetic conservation is a current critical issue because of the increasing loss of taxa and genetic diversity associated with climate change and environmental mismanagement on all biodiversity, but particularly plant diversity that forms the foundation of all food chains and human food security. The United Nations Convention on Biological Diversity in 1992 was first to draw attention to the need to conserve the world's natural resources, the need to link biodiversity conservation to sustainable exploitation and human development and the requirement to ensure equitable sharing of the benefits arising from the exploitation of biological diversity. A requirement echoed throughout numerous global environmental reports up the most recent State of the World Report on Biodiversity for Food and Agriculture (FAO, 2019) and Intergovernmental Science-Policy Platform on Biodiversity and Ecosystem Services report (IPBES, 2019). The exploitation of plant genetic diversity is of fundamental importance to the survival of humankind, therefore, the need to safeguard plant genetic conservation and sustainable exploitation is crucial to all our futures. This text provides a practical and theoretical introduction to the strategies and actions we can adopt to conserve plant genetic diversity, as well as explaining how humankind can exploit these resources for sustainable development"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Jacqueline Batley.
    Contents:
    Advances in plant genotyping : where the future will take us / Dhwani A. Patel [and three others]
    Molecular marker applications in plants / Alice C. Hayward [and three others]
    Bioinformatics : identification of markers from next-generation sequence data / Pradeep Ruperao and David Edwards
    Molecular marker databases / Kaitao Lai, Michał Tadeusz Lorenc, and David Edwards
    Plant genotyping using flourescently tagged inter-simple sequence repeats (ISSRs) : basic principles and methodology / Linda M. Prince
    SSR genotyping / Annaliese S. Mason
    Genotyping analysis using an RFLP assay / Shutao Dai and Yan Long
    DNA barcoding for plants / Natasha de Vere [ and three others]
    Multiplexed digital gene expression analysis for gentical genomics in large plant populations / Christian Obermeier [and three others]
    SNP genotyping by heteroduplex analysis / Norma Paniego [and three others]
    Application of the high-resolution melting technique for gene mapping and SNP detection in plants / David Chagné
    Challenges of genotyping polyploid species / Annaliese S. Mason
    Genomic reduction assisted single nucleotide polymorphism discovery using 454-pyrosequencing / Peter J. Maughan, Joshua A. Udall, and Eric N. Jellen
    Inter-SINE amplified polymorphism (ISAP) for rapid and robust plant genotyping / Torsten Wenke [and four others]
    Screening of mutations by TILLING in plants / Nian Wang and Lei Shi
    Gene analysis using mass spectrometric cleaved amplified polymorphic sequence (MS-CAPS) with matrix-assisted laser desorption ionization time-of-flight mass spectrometry (MALDI-TOF) / Hideyuki Kajiwara
    Quantitative SNP genotyping of polyploids with MassARRAY and other platforms / Marcelo Mollinari and Oliver Serang
    SNP genotyping using KASPar assays / Scott M. Smith and Peter J. Maughan
    Skim-based genotyping by sequncing / Agnieszka A. Gilicz, Philipp E. Bayer, and David Edwards
    The restriction enzyme target approach to genotyping by sequencing (GBS) / Elena Hilario
    Methods for the design, implementation, and analysis of Illumina Infinium [trademark] SNP assays in plants / David Chagné [and four others]
    Use of the Illumina GoldenGate assay for single nuccleotide polymorphism (SNP) genotyping in cereal crops / Shiaoman Chao and Cindy Lawley.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, R. Z. Sayyed, M. S. Reddy, Sarjiya Antonius.
    Summary: Sustainable increase in agricultural production while keeping the environmental quality, agro-ecosystem function and biodiversity is a real challenge in current agricultural practices. Application of PGPR can help in meeting the expected demand for increasing agricultural productivity to feed the worlds booming population. Global concern over the demerits of chemicals in agriculture has diverted the attention of researchers towards sustainable agriculture by utilizing the potential of Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria (PGPR). Use of PGPR as biofertilizers, biopesticides, soil, and plant health managers has gained considerable agricultural and commercial significance. The book Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria (PGPR): Prospects for Sustainable Agriculture has contributions in the form of book chapter from 25 eminent global researchers, that discusses about the PGPRs and their role in growth promotion of various crop plants, suppression of wide range of phytopathogens, their formulation, effect of various factors on growth and performance of PGPR, assessment of diversity of PGPR through microsatellites and role of PGPR in mitigating biotic and abiotic stress. This book will be helpful for students, teachers, researchers, and entrepreneurs involved in PGPR and allied fields. The book will be highly useful to researchers, teachers, students, entrepreneurs, and policymakers.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Diversity and Plant Growth Promoting Potential of Bacterial Endophytes in Rice Seeds
    Chapter 2. Plant Growth-Promoting Microbes for Sustainable Agriculture
    Chapter 3. The Biological Method of Increasing Seed Germination and Productivity of Grain Crops
    Chapter 4. Development and Formulation of Beneficial Rhizobacteria Consortia to Improve Soil Health and Agricultural Practice Sustainability in Indonesia
    Chapter 5. Biochemical Characterization of Microbials and their Effects on the Growth and Yield of Multiplier Onion (Allium ascalonicum L.) in the Philippines
    Chapter 6. Evaluation of The Side Effects of Nitrification Inhibiting Agrochemicals In Soils
    Chapter 7. Cyanobacteria from Sorghum bicolor Grown Fields of Ecopark at Cibinong Science Center-Botanic Gardens, Indonesia
    Chapter 8. Stimulation of Seed Germination and Growth Parameters of Rice var. Sahbhagi by Enterobacter cloacae in Presence of Ammonia Sulphate as Substitute of ACC
    Chapter 9. Impact of Biofertilizer on Crop Yield of Isabgol (Plantago ovata) and Senna (Cassia alexandrina)
    Chapter 10. Evaluation of mixtures of beneficial microorganisms on Brassica chinensis, L
    Chapter 11. Characterization of Sugarcane Mosaic Disease and its Management with PGPR
    Chapter 12. Effect of Different Doses of Pendimethalin on Microbial Activities and Nodulation in Chickpea
    Chapter 13. Effect of Herbicide Application on Soil Microflora and Nutrient Status of Soil
    Chapter 14. Yield Maximization in Pigeonpea (cajanuscajan l. Millsp.) Through Application of Plant Growth Promoting Bacteria
    Chapter 15. Financial Analysis of Biofertilizer Application: Case Study of Gliocompost Utilization on Red Chili Farming
    Chapter 16. Viability of Pseudomonas plecoglossicida and Rhizobium sp. as Liquid Bacterial Fertilizers In Various Formulated Carriers
    Chapter 17. Studies on the Performance of Coropulse on Blackgram
    Chapter 18. Microbial Surfactants and Their Significance in Agricult ure
    Chapter 19. Compatibility Potential of Brassica Species and Mustard Seed Meal With Pseudomonas fluorescens for Biological Control of Soil-Borne Plant Diseases
    Chapter 20. Diversity Assessment of Antagonistic Trichoderma Species by Comparative Analysis of Microsatellites
    Chapter 21. Overview of bio-pesticides in Pakistan
    Chapter 22. Evaluation of Indigenous Fluorescent Pseudomonads for the Management of Newly Emerging Wilt of Pomegranate Caused by Ceratocystis fimbriata
    Chapter 23. Comparative Study of Indigenous and Non-indigenous Rhizobacterial Isolates to Induce the Resistance of Bunching Onion Against Spodoptera exigua (Hübner)
    Chapter 24. Use of Bioinoculants in the Modulation of Volatile Organic Compound Emission Under Environmental Stresses for Sustainable Agriculture
    Chapter 25. Salinity Resistance of Azotobacter Isolated from Saline Soil in West Java.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editors, Ashok Kumar and Vijay Singh Meena.
    Summary: To meet the food security needs of the 21st century, this book focuses on ecofriendly and sustainable production technologies based on plant growth promoting rhizobacteria (PGPR). It is estimated that the global population could increase to 9 billion by 2050. Further, the amount of land devoted to farming has decreased. Soil is a living entity, and is not only a valuable natural resource for agricultural and food security, but also for the preservation of all life processes. Agricultural productivity rests on the foundation of microbial diversity in the soil, and in recent years, PGPR have emerged as an important and promising tool for sustainable agriculture. The injudicious use of agrochemicals by farmers has created a range of negative impacts, not only threatening the environment, but also destroying useful microorganisms in the soil. The efficient use of PGPR reduces the need for these chemicals while simultaneously lowering production costs. In turn, increased yields could provide a more favourable environment and encourage sustainability. This book assesses the impacts of PGPR on crops, environmental and socio-economic sustainability, and demonstrates these ecofriendly technologies' three critical advantages, namely (a) enhanced crop productivity, (b) reduced application of agrochemicals, and (c) increased incomes for farmers. Besides offering an economically attractive and ecologically sound means of augmenting the nutrient supply and combatting soil-borne pathogens, PGPR play an important part in boosting soil fertility, bioremediation and stress management for the development of ecofriendly and sustainable agriculture.

    Contents:
    Plant growth promoting bacteria: strategies to improve wheat growth and development under sustainable agriculture.- Rhizospheric microbiomes: biodiversity, mechanisms of plant growth promotion and biotechnological applications for sustainable agriculture.- Advances in the application of plant growth promoting rhizobacteria in horticulture.- Agriculture application of Pseudomonas
    A view on the relative antagonistic potential against pests and diseases.- Plant growth-promoting rhizobacteria as biological tools for nutrient management and soil sustainability.- Rhizobacteria mediated root architectural improvement: A hidden potential for agricultural sustainability.- Role of Rhizobia for sustainable agriculture: Lab to Land.- Plant growth promoting rhizobacteria: harnessing its potential for sustainable plant disease management.- Soil microbial hotspots and hot moments: management vis-a-vis soil biodiversity.- Surfactin: an emerging biocontrol tool for agriculture sustainability.- Molecular approaches to study plant growth-promoting rhizobacteria (PGPRs).- Impact of land uses on microbial biomass C, N, P and microbial population in Indian Himalaya.- Potassium solubilizing bacteria (KSB): a microbial tool for K solubility, cycling and its availability to crop plants.- ACC deaminase producing bacteria: a key player in alleviating abiotic stresses in plants.- The sustainability of crop production by PGPR under abiotic stress conditions.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    R.Z. Sayyed, Naveen Kumar Arora, M.S. Reddy, editors.
    Summary: Increasing agro productivity to feed a growing global population under the present climate scenario requires optimizing the use of resources and adopting sustainable agricultural production. This can be achieved by using plant beneficial bacteria, i.e., those bacteria that enhance plant growth under abiotic stress conditions, and more specifically, microorganisms such as plant growth promoting rhizobacteria (PGPR), which are the most promising candidates in this regard. Attaining sustainable agricultural production while preserving environmental quality, agro-ecosystem functions and biodiversity represents a major challenge for current agricultural practices; further, the traditional use of chemical inputs (fertilizers, pesticides, nutrients etc.) poses serious threats to crop productivity, soil fertility and the nutritional value of farm produce. Given these risks, managing pests and diseases, maintaining agro-ecosystem health, and avoiding health issues for humans and animals have now become key priorities. The use of PGPR as biofertilizers, plant growth promoters, biopesticides, and soil and plant health managers has attracted considerable attention among researchers, agriculturists, farmers, policymakers and consumers alike. Using PGPR can help meet the expected demand for global agricultural productivity to feed the world?s booming population, which is predicted to reach roughly 9 billion by 2050. However, to do so, PGPR strains must be safe for the environment, offer considerable plant growth promotion and biocontrol potential, be compatible with useful soil rhizobacteria, and be able to withstand various biotic and abiotic stresses. Accordingly, the book also highlights the need for better strains of PGPR to complement increasing agro-productivity.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Role of plant growth promoting rhizobacteria to modulate proline biosynthesis in plants for alleviation of salt stress.- Chapter 2. Salinity stress and plant growth-promoting rhizobacteria: A journey into the soil.- Chapter 3. Dark Septate Endophytes and Their Role in Enhancing Plant Resistance to Abiotic Stress.- Chapter 4. Rhizobacteria-abiotic stress management.- Chapter 5. Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria: benign and useful substitute for mitigation of biotic and abiotic stresses.- Chapter 6. Rhizospheric microflora: A natural alleviator of drought stress in agricultural crops.- Chapter 7. Quorum sensing molecules of rhizobacteria: A trigger for developing systemic resistance in plants.- Chapter 8. Zinc solubilizing bacteria: A boon for sustainable agriculture.- Chapter 9. Rhizobacteria as bio-protectants against stress conditions.- Chapter 10. Rhizobacteria for reducing heavy metal stress in plant and soil.- Chapter 11. Pesticide induced cross-resistance in soil bacteria.- Chapter 12. Psychrotrophic microbes: Biodiversity and biotechnological implications for cold stress in plant.- Chapter 13. Phosphate Solubilising Drought Tolerant Microbes: Biodiversity and Biotechnological Application for Alleviation of Drought Stress in Plant.- Chapter 14. Methylotrophic Bacteria Mitigating Abiotic Stress.- Chapter 15. Rhizobacteria and Phytohormones Mediated Salt Induced Abiotic Stress Management in Plant".
    Chapter 16. Role of PGPR for alleviating aluminium toxicity in acidic soil.- Chapter 17. Rhizobacteria in Abiotic Stress Management.- Chapter 18. Rhizobacteria
    plant interaction, alleviation.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    R.Z. Sayyed, editor.
    Summary: Attaining sustainable agricultural production while preserving environmental quality, agro-ecosystem functions and biodiversity represents a major challenge for current agricultural practices; further, the traditional use of chemical inputs (fertilizers, pesticides, nutrients etc.) poses serious threats to crop productivity, soil fertility and the nutritional value of farm produce. Given these risks, managing pests and diseases, maintaining agro-ecosystem health, and avoiding health issues for humans and animals have now become key priorities. The use of PGPR as biofertilizers, plant growth promoters, biopesticides, and soil and plant health managers has attracted considerable attention among researchers, agriculturists, farmers, policymakers and consumers alike. Using PGPR as bioinoculants can help meet the expected demand for global agricultural productivity to feed the worlds booming population, which is predicted to reach roughly 9 billion by 2050. However, to provide effective bioinoculants, PGPR strains must be safe for the environment, offer considerable plant growth promotion and biocontrol potential, be compatible with useful soil rhizobacteria, and be able to withstand various biotic and abiotic stresses. Accordingly, the book also highlights the need for better strains of PGPR to complement increasing agro-productivity.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Biosynthesis of Antibiotics by PGPR and its Role in Biocontrol of Plant Diseases
    Chapter 2. Effect of Substrates on Azotobacter chroococcum Enriched Vermicompost for Growth of Phaseolus
    Chapter 3. PGPR in Biotic Stress Management of Fungal Diseases
    Chapter 4. Management of Plant Diseases by PGPR-Mediated Induction Resistance
    Chapter 5. Amelioration of Biotic Stress by Application of Rhizobacteria for Agriculture Sustainability
    Chapter 6. Role of Serratia spp. as Biocontrol Agents and Plant Growth Stimulator With Respects of Biotic Stress Management In Plant. Chapter 7. Seed Biopriming Through Beneficial Rhizobacteria For Mitigating Soil and Seedborne Diseases
    Chapter 8. Zinc Solubilizing Bacteria: A Boon for Sustainable Agriculture
    Chapter 9. Plant Small RNAs: Big Players in Biotic Stress Responses
    Chapter 10. Interaction of Rhizobacteria with beneficiary Microorganisms : A Agrobeneficiary Aspect
    Chapter 11. Role of Indigenous Technology knowledge in Biological Control of Crop Diseases Under Organic Agriculture In India: An Overview
    Chapter 12. PGPRs
    Effective Managers of Biotic Stress
    Chapter 13. Biotic and Abiotic Stress Management by AM-Mediated PGPR
    Chapter 14. Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria: An Overview In Agricultural Perspectives
    Chapter 15. Impact of Acinobacteria on Agriculture.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Tariq Aftab, Khalid Rehman Hakeem.
    Summary: Agriculture faces many challenges to fulfil the growing demand for sustainable food production and ensure high-quality nutrition for a rapidly growing population. To guarantee adequate food production, it is necessary to increase the yield per area of arable land. A method for achieving this goal has been the application of growth regulators to modulate plant growth. Plant growth regulators (PGRs) are substances in specific formulations which, when applied to plants or seeds, have the capacity to promote, inhibit, or modify physiological traits, development and/or stress responses. They maintain proper balance between source and sink for enhancing crop yield. PGRs are used to maximize productivity and quality, improve consistency in production, and overcome genetic and abiotic limitations to plant productivity. Suitable PGRs include hormones such as cytokinins and auxins, and hormone-like compounds such as mepiquat chloride and paclobutrazol. The use of PGRs in mainstream agriculture has steadily increased within the last 20 years as their benefits have become better understood by growers. Unfortunately, the growth of the PGR market may be constrained by a lack of innovation at a time when an increase in demand for new products will require steady innovation and discovery of novel, cost-competitive, specific, and effective PGRs. A plant bio-stimulant is any substance or microorganism applied to plants with the aim to enhance nutrition efficiency, abiotic stress tolerance and/or crop quality traits, regardless of its nutrients content. Apart from traditional PGRs, which are mostly plant hormones, there are a number of substances/molecules such as nitric oxide, methyl jasmonate, brassinosteroids, seaweed extracts, strigolactones, plant growth promoting rhizobacteria etc. which act as PGRs. These novel PGRs or bio-stimulants have been reported to play important roles in stress responses and adaptation. They can protect plants against various stresses, including water deficit, chilling and high temperatures, salinity and flooding. This book includes chapters ranging from sensing and signalling in plants to translational research. In addition, the cross-talk operative in plants in response to varied signals of biotic and abiotic nature is also presented. Ultimately the objective of this book is to present the current scenario and the future plan of action for the management of stresses through traditional as well as novel PGRs. We believe that this book will initiate and introduce readers to state-of-the-art developments and trends in this field of study.

    Contents:
    Prospective Role of Plant Growth Regulators for Tolerance to Abiotic Stresses
    Accumulation, Partitioning and Bioavailability of Micronutrients in Plants and their Crosstalk with Phytohormones
    An insight into role of plant growth regulators in stimulating abiotic stress tolerance in some medicinally important plants
    Hormonal Regulation in cell culture of Artemisia annua L. plant
    Medicinal and Aromatic Plants under Abiotic Stress: A Crosstalk on Phytohormones' Perspective
    Cytokinin-mediated signaling during environmental stress in plants
    Leaf senescence and ethylene signaling
    Methyl Jasmonate and Brassinosteroids: Emerging Plant growth regulators in Plant abiotic stress tolerance and Environmental Changes
    Brassinosteroids signalling pathways in plant defense and adaptation to stress
    Roles of hydrogen sulfide in regulating temperature stress response in plants
    Physiological, biochemical and molecular mechanism of nitric oxide-mediated abiotic stress tolerance
    Melatonin: Role in abiotic stress resistance and tolerance
    Strigolactones, A Novel Carotenoid-Derived Phytohormone: Biosynthesis, Transporters, Signalling and Mechanisms in Abiotic Stress
    Role of soluble sugars in metabolism and sensing under abiotic stress
    Natural Polysaccharides: Novel Plant Growth Regulators
    Role of AM fungi and PGPR in alleviating stress responses and inducing defense mechanism
    Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Fungi: A Natural Biotechnological Tool for Sustainable Crop Production under Saline Soils in the Modern Era of Climate Change
    PGPR assisted bioremediation and plant growth: A sustainable approach for crop production using polluted soils
    Rhizobia: A Potent Tool for Amelioration of Drought Stress in Legumes
    Understanding the role of bacterial fertilizers in stressed agriculture: actions, mechanisms and future prospects
    Bioreactor upscaling of different tissue of medicinal herbs for extraction of active phytomolecules: a step towards industrialization and enhanced production of phytochemicals.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Rizwan Ali Ansari, Irshad Mahmood, editors.
    Summary: The current scenario of increasing sensitivity towards the sustainable agriculture has given a large space to extensively utilize natural resources that are environmental friendly and are a good replacement of chemicals in agriculture. Application of organic additives in the sustainable disease management can provide new insight in sustenance of plant productivity along with improved host stress tolerance. In the present book we have focussed upon a range of organic strategies to control plant pathogens of wide spectrum in addition to maintaining robust plant health. A detailed account on the application of organic additives has been discussed, irrespective of their origin and nature. In addition, the methods of utilising these organic supplements in the management of plant diseases and promotion of plant yield in more economic way have also been presented with reference to developing, underdeveloped and developed countries. The book has included the works of eminent scholars from across the world thus flashing light on the key literature related to application of organic matters including phytoextracts, chopped leaves, composted organic manures and liquid manures in eco-friendly agriculture. The mechanisms underlying the effectiveness of these organic amendments in promoting plant health has also been presented and discussed in understandable ways.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; About the Editors;
    Chapter 1: Organic Soil Amendments: Potential Tool for Soil and Plant Health Management; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Possible Sources of Organics; 1.3 Types of Organic Amendments Applied to Soils; 1.3.1 Animal Manure; 1.3.2 Municipal Biosolids and Septage; 1.3.3 Green Manures and Crop Residues; 1.3.4 Food Residues and Wastes; 1.3.5 Wastes from Manufacturing Processes; 1.3.6 Compost; 1.4 Role of Organic Amendments in Soil Health Improvement; 1.4.1 Physical Properties; 1.4.2 Chemical Properties; 1.4.3 Biological Properties 1.5 Significance of Organic Amendments in Plant Health Amelioration1.5.1 Plant Biomass Promotion; 1.5.2 Plant Disease Management; 1.6 Mechanisms Implicated in Action of Organic Amendments on Soil and Plant; 1.7 Conclusions and Future Prospects; References;
    Chapter 2: Grafting, Agrochemicals, and Oxidative Enzymes as Factor for Plant Biotic Resistance; 2.1 Grafting; 2.1.1 Grafting and Production; 2.1.2 Agrochemicals; 2.1.3 Agrochemicals and Systemic Acquired Resistance (SAR); 2.1.4 Oxidative Enzymes; 2.1.5 Conclusions; References 4.8 Biochemical Response of Corn Plants Under Hydric Stress and Insect AttackReferences;
    Chapter 5: Integrated Management of Rice Blast Caused by Magnaporthe oryzae; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Biology of Magnaporthe oryzae; 5.3 Rice Blast Management; 5.3.1 Water and Planting Time; 5.3.2 Nutrient Management; 5.3.3 Botanical and Biological Management; 5.3.3.1 Botanicals; 5.3.3.2 Biocontrol Agents; 5.3.3.3 Chemical Management; 5.3.3.4 Antibiotics; 5.4 Forecasting; 5.5 Host Resistance; 5.6 Biotechnological Approaches; 5.6.1 Blast Resistance Genes; 5.7 Future of Rice Blast Management; 5.8 Conclusions
    Chapter 3: Management of Plant Biotic Stress with Botanicals and Antagonistic Fungi in the Tropics3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Meaning of Biotic Stress; 3.2.1 Definition of Plant Stress; 3.3 Biotic Stressor and Host Plant Relationship; 3.3.1 Biotic Stress and Crop Production; 3.3.2 Biotic Stress and Food Security in the Tropics; 3.4 Management of Plant Biotic Stress; 3.4.1 Botanicals as Viable Alternative to Synthetic Chemicals in the Management of Plant Biotic Stress in the Tropic; 3.4.2 Antagonistic Fungi for the Management of Plant Biotic Stress in the Tropics; 3.5 Conclusion and Future Prospects
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Rizwan Ali Ansari, Irshad Mahmood, editors.
    Summary: The book illustrates the use of putative microbial agents which provide good protection to the plant from biotic pathogens attack. An up to date knowledge on plant-microbiome interaction strategies in terms of improved sustainability has been discussed. Information from experts across the globe on the application of microbes for providing amicable solution in sustainable agriculture has been gathered. In addition, information related to microbes mediated resistance levels leading to enhanced plant health has been well presented. The chapters have emphasised the use of Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria (PGPR) and other potential biocontrol agents/antagonists in the management of plant diseases which provide extensive information to the readers. Literature on microbial root colonization, plant growth promotions, and also on the protection of plants from attack of various soil borne pathogens have been presented in a coherent way. Information on the application of potential strain of the bio-control fungi, endophytes, actinomycetes strengthening the plants ability which rescue the plant from pathogens attack leading to improved plant health has also been underpinned.

    Contents:
    Endophytic bacteria: Prospects and applications for the plant disease management
    Helpful linkages of Trichodermas in the Mycoremediation and Mycorestoration
    Biofilmed biofertilizers for sustainable agriculture
    Role of rhizospheric microbes in the management of phytopathogenic problems of medicinal plants
    Microbial mediated plant growth ameliorations and protection from disease
    Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria (PGPR): Modern prospects for sustainable agriculture
    Trichoderma spp.: a potential biocontrol agent: Molecular prospectus and Application
    Changes in plant biomarkers in response to phytonematodes infection
    Potentiality of Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria in plant health ameliorations
    Harnessing endophytes as biocontrol agents
    Bacillus as Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria (PGPR): A Promising Green Agriculture Technology
    Significance of microbial agents in augmentation of plant health
    Plant growth and health promoting plant-microbe interactions.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    P. Vidhyasekaran.
    Summary: Engineering durable nonspecific resistance to phytopathogens is one of the ultimate goals of plant breeding. However, most of the attempts to reach this goal fail as a result of rapid changes in pathogen populations and the sheer diversity of pathogen infection mechanisms. Recently several bioengineering and molecular manipulation technologies have been developed to activate the 'sleeping plant innate immune system, which has potential to detect and suppress the development of a wide range of plant pathogens in economically important crop plants. Enhancing disease resistance through altered regulation of plant immunity signaling systems would be durable and publicly acceptable. Strategies for activation and improvement of plant immunity aim at enhancing hosts capability of recognizing invading pathogens, boosting the executive arsenal of plant immunity, and interfering with virulence strategies employed by microbial pathogens. Major advances in our understanding of the molecular basis of plant immunity and of microbial infection strategies have opened new ways for engineering durable resistance in crop plants. The volume III of the book presents the ways and means to manipulate the signals and signaling system to enhance the expression of plant innate immunity for crop disease management. It also describes bioengineering approaches to develop transgenic plants expressing enhanced disease resistance using plant immunity signaling genes. It also discusses recent commercial development of biotechnological products to manipulate plant innate immunity for crop disease management.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    1 Introduction
    1.1 Signals and Signaling Systems Involved in Activation of Plant Innate Immune System
    1.2 Bioengineering Technologies to Activate Plant Immunity Signaling Systems for Management of Crop Diseases
    1.3 Molecular Manipulation of Plant Immunity Signaling Systems Using Abiotic or Biotic Elicitors for Management of Crop Diseases
    References
    2 Manipulation of Calcium Ion Influx-Mediated Immune Signaling Systems for Crop Disease Management
    2.1 Ca2+ Signaling Components
    2.2 Bioengineering G-Proteins for Plant Disease Management 2.10 Engineering Calcium-Dependent Protein Kinase Genes for Crop Disease Management
    2.11 Manipulation of Ca2+-Dependent Signaling Pathway by Vitamin B1
    References
    3 Manipulation of Reactive Oxygen Species, Redox and Nitric Oxide Signaling Systems to Activate Plant Innate Immunity for Crop Disease Management
    3.1 Complexity of ROS-Redox-NO Signaling System
    3.2 Manipulation of ROS Signaling System Using Benzothiadiazole (BTH) for Crop Disease Management
    3.2.1 BTH Triggers Oxidative Burst and Accumulation of ROS Through Phospholipid Signaling 2.3 Engineering Glutamate-Gated Ca2+ Channel for Plant Disease Management
    2.4 Engineering H+-ATPase for Plant Disease Management
    2.5 Molecular Manipulation of H+-ATPase Proton Pump by Laminarin for Crop Disease Management
    2.6 Manipulation of H+-ATPase Using Chitosan Commercial Formulations
    2.7 Engineering Annexins for Crop Disease Management
    2.8 Bioengineering Calmodulin Genes to Promote Immune Responses for Plant Disease Management
    2.9 Engineering CBP60g Calmodulin-Binding Proteins for Disease Management 3.2.2 BTH Triggers Accumulation of ROS Through Action of Peroxidases and Superoxide Dismutases
    3.2.3 BTH May Trigger Accumulation of ROS Through Suppression of ROS-Degrading Enzymes
    3.2.4 Fine-Tuning of Accumulation of ROS by BTH
    3.2.5 BTH Activates NPR1 by Inducing ROS-Mediated Redox Signaling
    3.2.6 BTH Primes the Plants for Faster and Stronger Production of ROS
    3.2.7 Manipulation of Peroxidases by BTH for Crop Disease Management
    3.2.8 BTH Induces Several Host Plant Defense Responses Downstream of ROS Signaling 3.2.9 Management of Fungal Diseases in Crop Plants by Triggering Immune Responses Using BTH
    3.2.10 Management of Oomycete Diseases of Crop Plants by Triggering Plant Immune Responses Using BTH
    3.2.11 Management of Bacterial Diseases in Crop Plants by Triggering Plant Immune Responses Using BTH
    3.2.12 Management of Virus Diseases in Crop Plants by Triggering Plant Immune Responses Using BTH
    3.2.13 Management of Phytoplasma Diseases of Crop Plants by Triggering Plant Immune Responses Using BTH
    3.2.14 Management of Parasitic Plants by Manipulation of ROS Signaling System Using BTH
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Manuel Rodríguez-Concepción.
    Contents:
    Plant isoprenoids: A General Overview
    Measuring the Activity of 1-Deoxy-D-Xylulose 5-Phosphate Synthase, the First Enzyme in the MEP Pathway, in Plant Extracts
    Determination of 3-Hydroxy-3-methylglutaryl CoA Reductase Activity in Plants
    Farnesyl Diphosphate Synthase Assay
    Metabolite Profiling of Plastidial Deoxyxylulose-5-Phosphate Pathway Intermediates by Liquid Chromatography and Mass Spectrometry
    Analysis of Carotenoids and Tocopherols in Plant Matrices and Assessment of Their In Vitro Antioxidant Capacity
    Simultaneous Analyses of Oxidized and Reduced Forms of Photosynthetic Quinones by High-Performance Liquid Chromatography
    Determination of Sterol Lipids in Plant Tissues by Gas Chromatography and Q-TOF Mass Spectrometry
    Analysis of Plant Polyisoprenoids
    Analysis of Diterpenes and Triterpenes from Plant Foliage and Roots
    Gas Chromatography Mass-Spectrometry Method for Determination of Biogenic Volatile Organic Compounds Emitted by Plants
    Analysis of Steroidal Alkaloids and Saponins in Solanaceae Plant Extracts using UPLC-qTOF Mass Spectrometry
    Isoprenoid and Metabolite Profiling of Plant Trichomes
    Sample Preparation for Single Cell Transcriptomics
    Essential Oil Glands in Citrus Fruit Peel as an Example
    Prenylquinone Profiling in Whole Leaves and Chloroplast Subfractions
    Confocal Laser Scanning Microscopy Detection of Chlorophylls and Carotenoids in Chloroplasts and Chromoplasts of Tomato Fruit
    Heterologous Expression of Triterpene Biosynthetic Genes in Yeast and Subsequent Metabolite Identification Through GC-MS
    High Throughput Testing of Terpenoid Biosynthesis Candidate Genes Using Transient Expression in Nicotiana benthamiana
    Heterologous Stable Expression of Terpenoid Biosynthetic Genes Using the Moss Physcomitrella patens
    Quantification of Plant Resistance to Isoprenoid Biosynthesis Inhibitors
    A Flexible Protocol for Targeted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by George Komis and Jozef Šamaj.
    Summary: "Mitogen-activated protein kinases (MAPKs) are versatile phosphorylating enzymes which regulate multiple proteins involved in gene expression, cell architecture, plant development and reaction to diverse abiotic and biotic factors. The main aim of Plant MAP Kinases: Methods and Protocols is to provide established and new MAPK protocols adapted to the challenges posed by working with plants. The book contains 19 chapters which encompass a wide array of methods progressively scaling from the single gene, protein or cell level to large-scale arrays of proteomic, phosphoproteomic and interactomic data in order to uncover previously unidentified plant MAPK signaling pathways and to tackle with the challenging task of substrate identification. Techniques for MAPK sequence analysis and subcellular localization helping to identify their substrates and subcellular compartmentalization are also provided. Written in the highly successful Methods in Molecular Biology series format, chapters include introductions to their respective topics, lists of the necessary materials and reagents, step-by-step, readily reproducible laboratory protocols and key tips on troubleshooting and avoiding known pitfalls. Authoritative and practical, Plant MAP Kinases: Methods and Protocols represents a collection of useful plant MAPK protocols written by experts in the field for researchers and students."--Back cover.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Beatriz Caiuby Labate, Clancy Cavnar, editors.
    Summary: This is a book about the intersections of three dimensions. The first is the way social scientists and historians treat the history of psychiatry and healing, especially as it intersects with psychedelics. The second encompasses a reflection on the substances themselves and their effects on bodies. The third addresses traditional healing, as it circles back to our understanding of drugs and psychiatry. The chapters explore how these dimensions are distinct, but deeply intertwined, themes that offer important insights into contemporary healing practices. The intended audience of the volume is large and diverse: neuroscientists, biologists, medical doctors, psychiatrists, psychologists; mental health professionals interested in the therapeutic application of psychedelic substances, or who work with substance abuse, depression, anxiety, and PTSD; patients and practitioners of complementary and alternative medicine; ethnobotanists and ethnopharmacologists; lawyers, criminologists, and other specialists in international law working on matters related to drug policy and human rights, as well as scholars of religious studies, anthropologists, sociologists, and historians; social scientists concerned both with the history of science, medicine, and technology, and concepts of health, illness, and healing. It has a potentially large international audience, especially considering the increasing interest in "psychedelic science" and the growing spread of the use of traditional psychoactives in the West.

    Contents:
    Who is keeping tabs? LSD lessons from the past for the future
    Peyote's race problem
    Undiscovering the pueblo magico : lessons from Huautla for the psychedelic renaissance
    The use of salvia divinorum from a Mazatec perspective
    Examining the therapeutic potential of kratom within the American drug regulatory sytem
    Bubbling with controversy : legal challenges for ceremonial ayahuasca circles in the United States
    Integrating psychedelic medicines and psychiatry : theory and methods of a model clinic
    Whole organisms or pure compounds? Entourage effect versus drug specificity
    Placebo problems : boundary work int he psychedelic science renaissance
    Psychedelic naturalism and interspecies alliance : views from the emerging do-it-yourself mycology movement
    Plant knowledges: indigenous approaches and interspecies listening toward decolonizing ayahuasca research
    Gnosis potency : DMT breakthroughs and paragnosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Martine Dieuaide-Noubhani, Ana Paula Alonso.
    Contents:
    Application of Metabolic Flux Analysis to Plants
    Metabolic Network Reconstruction and Their Topological Analysis
    14C pulse Labeling to Estimate External Fluxes and Turnovers in Primary Metabolism
    Optimization of Steady-state 13C-labeling Experiments for Metabolic Flux Analysis
    Quantification of 13C Enrichments and Isotopomer Abundances for Metabolic Flux analysis using 1D NMR Spectroscopy
    Analysis of Proteinogenic Amino Acid and Starch Labeling by 2D NMR
    Analysis of Kinetic Labeling of Amino Acids and Organic Acids by GC-MS
    Quantifying 13C-labeling in Free Sugars and Starch by GC-MS
    Liquid Chromatography Tandem Mass Spectrometry for Measuring 13C-labeling in Intermediates of the Glycolysis and Pentose-phosphate Pathway
    In Vivo NMR for 13C metabolic? Flux Analysis
    Steady State and Instationary Modeling of Proteinogenic and Free Amino Acid Isotopomers for Flux Quantification
    Isotopically Nonstationary MFA (INST-MFA) of Autotrophic Metabolism
    Simulating Labeling to Estimate Kinetic Parameters for Flux Control Analysis
    High-throughput Data Pipelines for Metabolic Flux Analysis in Plants
    Analysis of Enzyme Activities
    Analytical Kinetic Modeling: A Practical Procedure
    Flux Balance Analysis as an Alternative Method to Estimate Fluxes Without Labeling
    Flux Variability Analysis: Application to Developing Oilseed Rape Embryos using Toolboxes for Constraint-Based Modeling
    Plant Genome-Scale Modeling and Implementation
    34S and 15N Labelling to Model S and N Flux in Plants and Determine the Different Components of N and S use Efficiency
    Ecophysiological Process-based Model to Simulate Carbon Fluxes in Plants.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Ganesh Sriram.
    Contents:
    MeRy-B, a metabolomic database and knowledge base for exploring plant primary metabolism / Catherine Deborde and Daniel Jacob
    Targeted deuteration of polyphenolics for their qualitative and quantitative metabolomic analysis in plant-derived extracts / Mikel R. Roe, Jerry D. Cohen, and Adrian D. Hegeman
    Relative quantitation in single-cell metabolomics by laser ablation electrospray mass spectrometry / Bindesh Shrestha and Akos Vertes
    Quantification of plant volatiles / Anthony V. Qualley and Natalia Dudareva
    Quantitative imaging approaches for small-molecule measurements using FRET sensors in plants / Sakiko Okumoto
    Isotopomer measurement techniques in metabolic flux analysis I : nuclear magnetic resonance / Quyen X. Truong, Jong Moon Yoon, and Jacqueline V. Shanks
    Isotopomer measurement techniques in metabolic flux analysis II : mass spectrometry / Jamey D. Young, Douglas K. Allen, and John A. Morgan
    Mathematical modeling of isotope labeling experiments for metabolic flux analysis / Shilpa Nargund and Ganesh Sriram
    Optimal design of isotope labeling experiments / Hong Yang, Dominic E. Mandy, and Igor G.L. Libourel
    Putting the plant metabolic network pathway databases to work : going offline to gain new capabilities / Kate Dreher
    Elucidation of metabolic pathways from enzyme classification data / Andrew G. McDonald and Keith F. Tipton
    Deducing intracellular distributions of metabolic pathways from genomic data / Ansgar Gruber and Peter G. Kroth
    Genome-scale models of plant metabolism / Margaret Simons, Ashish Misra, and Ganesh Sriram
    Elementary flux modes, flux balance analysis, and their application to plant metabolim / Katrin Lotz [and four others]
    Systems approaches to unraveling plant metabolism : identifying biosynthetic genes of secondary metabolic pathways / Martin J. Spiering [and three others]
    Applications of kinetic modeling to plant metabolism / Johann M. Rohwer
    Kinetic modeling of plant metabolism and its predictive power : peppermint essential oil biosynthesis as an example / Bernd Markus Lange and Rigoberto Rios-Estepa.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Sudhakar Srivastava, Ashish K. Srivastava, Penna Suprasanna, editors.
    Summary: Metal toxicity and deficiency are both common abiotic problems faced by plants. While metal contamination around the world is a critical issue, the bioavailability of some essential metals like zinc (Zn) and selenium (Se) can be seriously low in other locations. The list of metals spread in high concentrations in soil, water and air includes several toxic as well as essential elements, such as arsenic (As), cadmium (Cd), chromium (Cr), aluminum (Al), and selenium (Se). The problems for some metals are geographically confined, while for others, they are widespread. For instance, arsenic is an important toxic metalloid whose contamination in Southeast Asia and other parts of world is well documented. Its threats to human health via food consumption have generated immense interest in understanding plants? responses to arsenic stress. Metals constitute crucial components of key enzymes and proteins in plants. They are important for the proper growth and development of plants. In turn, plants serve as sources of essential elements for humans and animals. Studies of their physiological effects on plants metabolism have led to the identification of crucial genes and proteins controlling metal uptake and transport, as well as the sensing and signaling of metal stresses. Plant-Metal Interactions sheds light on the latest development and research in analytical biology with respect to plant physiology. More importantly, it showcases the positive and negative impacts of metals on crop plants growth and productivity.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; An Integrated Transcriptomic, Proteomic, and Metabolomic Approach to Unravel the Molecular Mechanisms of Metal Stress Tolerance in Plants; 1 Introduction; 2 Heavy Metal-Induced Nutritional and Water-Deficit Stresses; 2.1 Nutritional Stress in Metal-Exposed Plants; 2.2 Water Stress in Metal-Exposed Plants; 3 Role of Thiol- and Non-thiol Compounds and Metal(loid) Chelation; 3.1 Phytochelatins and Their Induction; 3.2 Biosynthesis of PCs and Variations (Homo-PCs, Hydroxymethyl-PCs, and Iso-PCs); 3.3 Mode of Action of PCs 3 Heavy Metal-Induced Oxidative Damage in Plants4 Signaling Response Under Heavy Metal Stress; 4.1 Signal Transduction; 4.2 Protein Metabolism; 4.3 Functional Genomics; 4.4 miRNA-Based Regulation; 5 Conclusion and Future Outlook; References; Heavy Metal Toxicity and Plant Productivity: Role of Metal Scavengers; 1 Heavy Metal Toxicity: An Oxidative Challenge; 2 Non-protein Thiols: Key Metabolites in Heavy Metal Scavenging; 3 The Role of Proline and Glycine Betaine in Improving Heavy Metal Stress Tolerance in Plants; 4 Concluding Comments; References 3.4 The Superfamily of Metallothioneins: Classification and Structure of Metallothioneins3.5 Expression of MT Genes; 3.6 Metal(loid) Specificity and Chelation; 3.7 Functions of MTs; 4 Heavy Metal Stress Tolerance at Molecular Level: Omics Approach; 4.1 Transcriptomics; 4.2 Proteomics; 4.3 Metabolomics; 5 Conclusions and the Way Forward; References; Molecular Mechanism and Signaling Response of Heavy Metal Stress Tolerance in Plants; 1 Introduction; 2 Heavy Metal Ion Uptake and Translocation; 2.1 Factors Influencing Metal Uptake; 2.2 Sequestration of Heavy Metals and Compartmentalization 5 ConclusionsLiterature; Heavy Metal Hyperaccumulator Plants: The Resource to Understand the Extreme Adaptations of Plants Towards Heavy Metals; 1 Introduction; 2 Response of Hyperaccumulator to Metals; 2.1 Metal Uptake by Roots of Hyperaccumulator Plants; 2.2 Metal Accumulation in Hyperaccumulator Plants; 2.2.1 Metal-Binding Proteins; 2.2.2 Phytochelatins; 2.2.3 Metal Chelation by Small Molecules; 3 Long-Distance Transport of Metal Ions in Hyperaccumulator Plants; 4 Intracellular Partitioning and Subcellular Transport of Metals in Plants Cadmium (Cd): An Emerging Regulatory Metal with Critical Role in Cell Signalling and Plant Morphogenesis1 Cadmium in Nature; 2 The Uptake and Distribution of Cadmium in Plants; 2.1 Cd in Plant Organs; 2.2 Cd Transporters, Mechanisms of Translocation and Final Distribution; 3 Toxicity to Plants; 3.1 The Impact on Plant Anatomy, Morphogenesis and Development; 3.2 Cd/Zn and Cd/Fe Interactions; 3.3 Can Cd be advantageous to Plants?; 4 Cadmium Signalling; 4.1 ROS, NO and Hormones; 4.2 Ethylene; 4.3 Jasmonic Acid; 4.4 Salicylic Acid; 4.5 Brassinosteroids; 4.6 Abscisic Acid; 4.7 microRNAs
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Gaurav Sablok.
    Summary: Major portion of the planet earth is covered by seas and oceans representing 96.5% of the planets water, playing a detrimental role in sustaining the plant including crop diversity and productivity for human consumption. Water resources contain both soluble and transition metals, which are easily absorbed by plants through roots as a first point of contact and subsequently play important physiological and biological functions in plants. Transition metals such as copper (Cu), iron (Fe), manganese (Mn) and zinc (Zn) contribute to the plant productivity by playing key functional roles in the photosynthesis. In addition, to their major role in regulating the plant productivity, they also play an important role by acting as homeostatic regulators in uni-parentally inherited chloroplasts and maintains the flow of the electron transfer. It is worthwhile to mention that they play a critical role as transporters, which acts as electron balancing units for managing the electrostatic potential across the membranes. In contrast, some metals such as Cd, As play a significant role in inducing the stress mechanism and influencing either directly or in-directly Haber-Weiss reactions either through the production of the reactive oxygen species (ROS) or through the membrane damage thus leading to leakage of membrane transporters. However, besides playing a detrimental role as transporters in plant system, excessive accumulation of these metals due to the increasing contamination in the marginal soil and water are posing important threats to the plant system. Realizing the toxic effects of the metals, several physiological evidences have been laid for the credence of the metal toxicity and their concurrent effect on plant productivity. Increasing effects of the metals as toxicants can have three adverse effects on the populations: population can move, persist via local adaptation or phenotypic plasticity, or die. Next generation sequencing studies have revolutionized our abilities to detect the changes in expression profiles across an array of genes, which can in-turn help to develop early markers of metal induced stress. Plant Metallomics and Functional Omics: A System-Wide Perspective focuses on the applications of the system wide understanding of the biological and functional interplay occurring at the juncture of the metalloid induced stress and toxicity. The main goal of this book is to familiarize the readers with the most up-to-date information on metal-induced physiological changes in plant species.

    Contents:
    Energy crop at heavy metal contaminated arable land as an alternative for food and feed production: biomass quantity and quality
    Systems biology of metal tolerance in plants: a case study on the effects of long-term Cd-exposure on the stem of alfalfa
    One for all and all for one! Increased plant heavy metal tolerance by growth promoting microbes: a metabolomic standpoint
    Genomics and Physiological Evidence of heavy metal tolerance in plants
    Redox mechanism and plant tolerance to heavy metals: Genes and regulatory networks
    System biology of metal tolerance in plants: An integrated view of genomics, transcriptomics, metabolomics and phenomics
    Crosstalk between plant miRNA and heavy metal toxicity
    Recent Advances in imaging of element distribution in plants by focussed beam techniques
    As, Cd, Cr, Cu, Hg:Physiological implications and toxicity in plants
    Heavy Metal Toxicity: Physiological Implications of Metal Toxicity in Plants
    Impact of heavy metals on non-food herbaceous crops and prophylactic role of Si. Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Ajit Varma, Swati Tripathi, Ram Prasad, editor.
    Summary: This book shares the latest insights into the genetic basis of molecular communication between plants and their microbial consortia. Further, the book highlights the capabilities of the rhizosphere and endosphere, which help manage ecosystem responses to climate change, nutrient cycling and sequestration of carbon; and discusses their application to the development and management of renewable energy sources. In their natural environments, plants are surrounded by a tremendous number of microorganisms. Some microbes directly interact with plants in a mutually beneficial fashion, while others colonize plants solely for their own advantage. In addition, microbes can indirectly affect plants by drastically altering their environments. Understanding the complex nature of the plant-microbe interface (PMI) can pave the way for novel strategies to improve plant productivity in an eco-friendly manner. The PMI approach focuses on understanding the physical, molecular, and chemical interactions between organisms in order to determine their functional roles in biological, physical, chemical and environmental systems. Although several metabolites from plants and microbes have now been fully characterized, their roles in chemical interactions between these associates remain poorly understood, and require further investigation.

    Contents:
    Mycorrhizae Resource Allocation in Root Development and Root Morphology
    Plant-Mycorrhizal and Plant-Rhizobial Interfaces: Underlying Mechanisms and Their Roles in Sustainable Agroecosystems
    Truffles and Morels: Two Different Evolutionary Strategies of Fungal-Plant Interactions in the Pezizales
    AM Fungi and Trichoderma Interaction for Biological Control of Soilborne Plant Pathogen Fusarium oxysporum
    Management of Soil-Borne Diseases of Grain Legumes Though Broad-Spectrum Actinomycetes Having Plant Growth-Promoting and Biocontrol Traits
    Soil-Microbes-Plants: Interactions and Ecological Diversity
    Pathogen and Management of Fungal Wilt of Banana Through Biocontrol Agents
    Potential of Plant-Microbe Interactions in Management of Pesticides-Riddled Soil
    Algae and Cyanobacteria as Biocontrol Agents of Fungal Plant Pathogens
    Non-target Effects of Trichoderma on Plants, and Soil Microbial Communities
    Olive Anthracnose and Its Management by Fungal Endophytes: An Overview
    Metagenomics as a Tool to Explore New Insights from Plant Microbe Interface
    A Concise Compilation of the Diverse Detection Methods to Study Plant-Microbe Interfaces at the Cellular and Molecular Level: The Past, Present and Future
    Anthosphere Microbiome and Their Associated Interactions at the Aromatic Interface
    Efficiency of Soil, Plant and Microbes for Healthy Plant Immunity and Sustainable Agricultural System
    Biological Control of Soft-Rot of Ginger: Current Trends and Future Prospects
    Biological Effects of Uranium and Its Decay Products on Soil Microbes, Plants, and Humans
    An Overview of Effective Concentration of Industrial Effluent for Improving Crop Production and its Effect on Micro-Biodiversity Zone of Soil.
    Digital Access Springer 2019

Lane Library Bookmarklet

Lane Library Bookmarklet

To install, drag this button to your browser bookmarks or tools bar.

What is it?

Lane Library Bookmarklet

Bookmark on Other Websites

Bookmark on Lane

  • To Install, Right Click this Button.
  • Select "Add to Favorites" (click “Continue” if you see a security alert)
  • From the "Create in" menu, select “Favorites Bar” (IE8, IE9) to install
  • Once installed it will look like this
  • Click "Bookmark on Lane" to bookmark any webpage
  • Your saved bookmark will appear on this page
To Install, Right Click this Button.

What is it?

Beyond Stanford

Derived from Current Medical Diagnosis & Treatment, AccessMedicine's Quick Medical Diagnosis & Treatment provides topic reviews with key diagnostic and treatment features for more than 500 diseases.

A repository of medical knowledge from internal medicine, cardiology, genetics, pharmacy, diagnosis and management, basic sciences, patient care, and more.

Continuously expanding, all databases in the repository contain the latest editions of selected medical titles.

MicroMedex: Premier pharmaceutical information source containing multiple databases and drug reference tools. Of particular value is DRUGDEX Evaluations, one of the most comprehensive drug sources available. DynaMed is a clinical information resource used to answer questions quickly at the point-of-care. Easy-to-interpret Levels of Evidence help clinicians rapidly determine the quality of the available evidence.

Biomedical and pharmacological abstracting and indexing database of published literature, by Elsevier. Embase® contains over 32 million records from over 8,500 currently published journals (1947-present) and is noteworthy for its extensive coverage of the international pharmaceutical and alternative/complementary medicine literature.

Scopus is the largest abstract and citation database of peer-reviewed literature: scientific journals, books and conference proceedings. A drug information resource containing: American Hospital Formulary System (AHFS), drug formulary for Lucile Packard Children's Hospital (LPCH) and Stanford Hospital & Clinics (SHC), Lexi-Drugs (adverse reactions, dosage and administration, mechanism of action, storage, use, and administration information), Lexi-Calc, Lexi-ID, Lexi-I.V. Compatibility (King Guide), Lexi-Interact, and Lexi-PALS. Cumulative Index to Nursing and Allied Health Literature (CINAHL) contains coverage of nursing and allied health literature. A knowledge database that provides access to topic reviews based on over 6000 clinically relevant articles. The evidence-based content, updated regularly, provides the latest practice guidelines in 59 medical specialties. Provides critical assessments of systematic reviews compiled from a variety of medical journals. Selects from the biomedical literature original studies and systematic reviews that are immediately clinically relevant and then summarizes these articles in an enhanced abstract with expert commentary.

Multidisciplinary coverage of over 10,000 high-impact journals in the sciences, social sciences, and arts and humanities, as well as international proceedings coverage for over 120,000 conferences.

Includes cited reference searching, citation maps, and an analyze tool.

Features systematic reviews that summarize the effects of interventions and makes a determination whether the intervention is efficacious or not.

Cochrane reviews are created through a strict process of compiling and analyzing data from multiple randomized control trials to ensure comprehensiveness and reliability.

Provides systematic coverage of the psychological literature from the 1800s to the present through articles, book chapters and dissertations. PIER (Physicians' Information and Education Resource) is a Web-based decision-support tool designed for rapid point-of-care delivery of up-to-date, evidence-based guidance for primary care physicians. Cochrane Central Register of Controlled Trials (CENTRAL) provides access to 300,000 controlled trials that have been identified the Cochrane Collaboration. Provides drug information targeted for patients. A continually updating drug monograph. ECRI Guidelines Trust: A comprehensive database of evidence-based clinical practice guidelines and related documents. MedlinePlus: A repository of health information from the National Library of Medicine. Links are from trusted sites. No advertising, no endorsement of commercial companies or products LPCH CareNotes via MicroMedex: Patient education handouts customized by LPCH clinical staff Micromedex Lab Advisor: Evidence based laboratory test information Provides patient handouts from the American Academy of Family Physician.

Largest, broadest eBook package; covers all sciences, as well as technology (including software), medicine, and humanities.

In addition to covering Wiley and Springer, MyiLibrary is also the only provider for Oxford and Cambridge University Press titles. No seat restrictions.

A collection of biomedical books that can be searched directly by concept, and linked to terms in PubMed abstracts.

A web-based, decision support system for infectious diseases, epidemiology, microbiology and antimicrobial chemotherapy. The database, updated weekly, currently includes 337 diseases, 224 countries, 1,147 microbial taxa and 306 antibacterial (-fungal, -parasitic, -viral) agents and vaccines.

Over 10,000 notes outline the status of specific infections within each country.

Large number of high quality software and database programming titles from O'Reilly. Other software titles are also available from Sams and Prentice Hall. Limited to 7 concurrent users. Includes peer-reviewed life science and biomedical research protocols compiled from Methods in Molecular Biology, Methods in Molecular Medicine, Methods in Biotechnology, Methods in Pharmacology and Toxicology, Neuromethods, the Biomethods Handbook, the Proteomics Handbook, and Springer Laboratory Manuals. Contains full text access to selected biomedical and nursing books.

Provides online, full-text access to Springer's journal titles as well as journals from other publishers.

Subjects include: life sciences, chemical sciences, environmental sciences, geosciences, computer science, mathematics, medicine, physics and astronomy, engineering and economics. Also includes eBooks.

Collection of over 8 thousand fulltext titles in engineering, math, and basic and applied biomedical research. Coverage is from 1967 to the present. A library of ebooks on a wide array of topics, digitized and made available online in conjunction with the original publishers.